This site uses cookies.
Some of these cookies are essential to the operation of the site,
while others help to improve your experience by providing insights into how the site is being used.
For more information, please see the ProZ.com privacy policy.
This person has a SecurePRO™ card. Because this person is not a ProZ.com Plus subscriber, to view his or her SecurePRO™ card you must be a ProZ.com Business member or Plus subscriber.
所属
This person is not affiliated with any business or Blue Board record at ProZ.com.
Access to Blue Board comments is restricted for non-members. Click the outsourcer name to view the Blue Board record and see options for gaining access to this information.
Chinese yuan (cny), Euro (eur), U. S. dollars (usd)
ポートフォリオ
翻訳サンプル提出済み: 112
朝鮮語 から 英語: Explanations on the Second-Year Agreement on the "2014 Hanmi BT Program for Cultivating Economic Leaders" General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 医療(一般)
原書のテキスト - 朝鮮語
생명공학의 미래는 KRIBB에서 시작됩니다
한국생명공학연구원 광복70 년
위대한 여정
새로운 도약
시행 사업화기술지원팀-9065 (2015-11-20) 접수
우 34141 대전광역시 유성구 과학로 125 / http://www.kribb.re.kr
전화 (042)860-4745 전송 (042)861-1759 / [email protected] / 공개
翻訳 - 英語
KRIBB opens up the future of bioscience.
Korea Research Institute of Bioscience and Biotechnology Recovery for 70 years
Great development
New takeoff
To: Recipient Reference
(CC)
Subject Explanations on the Second-Year Agreement on the "2014 Hanmi BT Program for Cultivating Economic Leaders"
1. Wish you booming business!
2. Related contents: Institutional technical support team – 9001 (November 19, 2015, Korea Research Institute of Bioscience and Biotechnology), year-end assessment results of the "2014 Hanmi BT Program for Cultivating Economic Leaders" for the first year, and implementation of the second-year agreement
3. We plan to implement the aforesaid second-year agreement on the "2014 Hanmi BT Program for Cultivating Economic Leaders". Therefore, we have sent you documents related to the agreement and cordially request your assistance in facilitating personnel dispatch.
A. Deadline for signing the agreement and applying for research fee appropriation: ~ November 30,, 2015
B. Agreement signing contents: See Attachments 1, 2, and 3.
Attachments 1. One list of the agreement signatories
2. One agreement form
3. One explanation on the agreement signing. End.
President of Korea Research Institute of Bioscience and Biotechnology
To: Head of Aju University Industry Collaboration Foundation, Head of Korea Evaluation Institute of Industrial Technology, Head of International Vaccine Institute, Head of Seoul University Industry Collaboration Foundation, Head of Korea University Industry Collaboration Foundation, Kim Eun Young, Kim Kyung Min, Kim Young Hwa, Park Ji Hoon, Bae Chan Hyung, Shin Hoo Chang, Lee Young Rang, Lee Eun Hye, Lee Chul Jin, Lee Ha Na, Choi Young Sim
Examined and approved by:
November 20
Drafter by Yoo Hyung Seok Leader Na Myung Hoon Director Acting Na Myung Hoon
Coordinator
Implemented by the Institutional technical support team – 9065 (November 20, 2015) Received.
Postal code: 34141 No. 125, Gwahak-ro, Yusung-gu, Daejeon. / http://www.kribb.re.kr
Tel.: (042)860-4745 Fax: (042)861-1759/[email protected] / Disclosed
朝鮮語 から 英語: Title of Invention: STEEL PIPE STRUT WITH A CONNECTION ENCLOSURE General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 機械工学
原書のテキスト - 朝鮮語 건체 청구항 수 : 총 7항 심시관: 짐영표
발명의 국문명칭연결몸 앤클로저클 포합하는 강란버덤보
(57) 요 약
본건발명에 따른 띠장-버1보 공사에 사용1 수 있는 연결용 엔클로저가 협성된 강관버팀보는, 강관; 강관의 길 이방향 좌우에 강관의 길이방향 건체에 걸쳐서 연장되어 협성된 제1연결판; 강관의 길이방향 전후에 형성된 제2 연결판을 포합하고; 상기 제1연결판의 폭은 강관의 지름이고; 제2연결판은 4변의 길이가 강관의 지름인 장방병이 고; 상기 좌우의 계1연결판과 제1연결판 사이에는 강관의 원주에 계합찰 수 있고 양단이 제1연결판에 접촉하는 브레이심이 소정의 간격으로 배치되어 강관의 전단성능을 보강하며; 상기 계1연결판과 제2연결판에는 다수의 들 트체결공이 협성되어 있다.
대 표 도 –도1
翻訳 - 英語 Total number of claims: 7
Examiner: Kim Young Pyo
Title of Invention: STEEL PIPE STRUT WITH A CONNECTION ENCLOSURE
(57) Abstract
The present invention relates to a steel pipe strut used for waler-strut construction, comprising steel pipes; 1st connecting plates, which are formed longitudinally on both the left and the right sides of said steel pipe for the whole length of said steel pipe; and 2nd connecting plates, which are formed longitudinally in the front and the rear of said steel pipe. The width of each of said 1st connecting plates is equal to the diameter of said steel pipe, and said 2nd connecting plates are of a rectangle shape with four sides each having a length equal to the diameter of said steel pipe; bracing rods are set at certain intervals between said 1st connecting plates on the left and the right sides; said bracing rods snugly fit the periphery of said steel pipe with both ends connected to said 1st connecting plate to improve the shear strength of said steel pipe; a plurality of bolted connection holes are formed on said 1st connecting plates and said 2nd connecting plates.
Representative Drawing – Figure 1
日本語 から 英語: Service Purchase Contract General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 法: 契約
XXX (hereinafter referred to as Party A) and YYY (hereinafter referred to as Party B) enter into the following contract on the research service outside Japan for the promotion planned and made by Party A.
(Service to be purchased)
Article I. Party A is to purchase from Party B the research service (hereinafter referred to as the “Service) for the following promotion planned and made by Party A and Party B is to provide the Service to Party A.
Tentative service name Research on the promotion of XXX in southeast Asia
(Term of the Service)
Article II.
1. The term of the Service stated above is from July 1, 2016 to March 31, 2017, among which the number of service days are predetermined as 45 days.
2. Among the number of service days stated above, the days to escort the staff of Party A is predetermined as 0 day.
(Content of the Service and the main service regions)
Article III.
1. The content of the Service is marked with ✔ in the following table.
Research service □ Coordination service
Investigation on the matters requested, and collection and organization of data
□ Investigation and collection of photo and video materials
Any services that are incidental to all the work stated above
□ Others ( )
□ Communication with related persons (institutions) and adjustment of schedule
□ Arrangement of program production, and escort and presence for photographing and recording
□ Negotiation for approval or permit
□ Arrangement of local staff, transportation and accommodation
□ Arrangement of equipment and resources
□ All services as needed for smooth local coverage
□ Vehicle driving
□ Others ( )
□ Interpretation service
2. Party A shall specify each Service with Party B and place an order if necessary. When placing an order, Party A shall specify a deadline for Party B. Party B shall obtain the consent of Party A before a change to the (tentative) number of service days as provided under the preceding article can be made.
3. The main service regions are Indonesia, Singapore, Thailand, Philippines, Vietnam and Malaysia.
(Remuneration)
Article IV.
1. The remuneration for the Service to be paid by Party A to Party B (including the compensation for the right obtained by Party A in accordance with the contract) is 255 USD per day (all taxes included), among which the daily payment rate for Party A to accompany the staff of Party A is 0 USD (all taxes included).
2. After fulfilling the Service, Party B shall enter information in the required fields in the attached Overseas Service Implementation Record and sign it before submitting it to Party A. After verifying the Overseas Service Implementation Record, Party A shall pay the remuneration to Party B for the service days based on the daily payment rate stated in the preceding paragraph.
3. If Party A pays the remuneration to Party B in several payments according to the circumstance of the Service, each payment shall be made based on the daily payment rate stated in Paragraph 1 of this article after the Service in the corresponding period is fulfilled and the Overseas Service Implementation Record is verified.
4. If Party A pays part of the remuneration to Party B in advance according to the circumstance of the Service, settlement of payment shall be made based on the daily payment rate stated in Paragraph 1 after the Service is fulfilled and the Overseas Service Implementation Record is verified.
(Expenses)
Article V.
1. Party B shall obtain prior consent of Party A with respect to transportation expense or other expenses for the performance of the Service.
2. Party A shall pay for the expenses stated in the preceding paragraph after receiving the payment receipt from Party B.
(Subcontracting)
Article VI.
Party B may subcontract to a third party all or part of the Service under Party B’s responsibility.
In such case, Party B must obtain prior consent of Party A in writing and in a form determined by Party A.
2. In the case of subcontracting under the preceding paragraph, Party B shall put the subcontractor under the same obligations as borne by Party B under this contract and shall be fully responsible for any default of the subcontractor.
英語 から 朝鮮語: Turning polymers into possibilities General field: マーケティング Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
原書のテキスト - 英語 Turning polymers into possibilities
AS81914 Convoluted Tubing
Drop by OPIE Booth I-33 to discover why AS81914 Convoluted Tubing is the ideal flexible conduit for protecting fibers from abrasion and high temperatures. This product offers low friction for sheathing and is available in multiple extruded resins, coloring options and sizes. Request samples
Zeus Industrial Products, Inc.
3737 Industrial Blvd.
Orangeburg, South Carolina 29118
翻訳 - 朝鮮語 폴리머를 가능성으로 전환하기
AS81914 뒤얽힌 튜브
OPIE 부스 I-33에서 왜 AS81914 뒤얽힌 튜브 이 섬유를 마모와 고열로부터 보호하기 위한 이상적인 유연한 도관인지 알아보세요. 본 제품은 피복 재료에 미치는 마찰이 적으며 여러 가지의 압출 수지, 채색 옵션 및 크기에 이용할 수 있습니다. 견본 요청하기
Zeus Industrial Products, Inc.
3737 Industrial Blvd.
Orangeburg, South Carolina 29118
翻訳 - 英語 • Claim 1
• Cited document 1
• Remarks
A CDMA receiving apparatus is described in cited example 1, comprising a correlation value data generation means which generates correlation value data which multiplies a spread code which corresponds to spread modulation conducted in advance and a predetermined pattern by a reception multiplex signal, a means for calculating the ratio of a desired wave level to an interference wave level which calculates the ratio of the desired wave level to the interference wave level of a demodulation signal of said reception multiplex signal, and a reception timing correcting means (changing the reception timing by changing the working speed of the chip synchronization circuit) which corrects the reception timing of said reception multiplex signal based on said correlation value data and said ratio of the desired wave level to the interference wave level.
(To be continued)
Transmittal No.: 226306
(Continued)
• Claim 1
• Cited document 2
• Remarks
A CDMA receiving apparatus is described in cited example 2, comprising a correlation value data generation means which generates correlation value data which multiplies a spread code which corresponds to spread modulation being conducted in advance and a predetermined pattern by a reception multiplex signal, a means for calculating the ratio of a desired wave level to an interference wave level which calculates the ratio of the desired wave level to the interference wave level of a demodulation signal of said reception multiplex signal and a reception timing correcting means (determining the next measurement time) which corrects the reception timing of said reception multiplex signal based on said correlation value data and said ratio of the desired wave level to the interference wave level, the receiving apparatus being substantially identical to the invention according to claim 1 of the present application.
• Claim 1
• Cited document 3
• Remarks
A CDMA receiving apparatus is described in cited document 3, comprising a correlation value data generation means which generates correlation value data which multiplies a spread code which corresponds to spread modulation being conducted in advance and a predetermined pattern by a reception multiplex signal, a means for calculating the ratio of a desired wave level to an interference wave level which calculates the ratio of the desired wave level to the interference wave level of a demodulation signal of said reception multiplex signal and a reception timing correcting means (by changing the oversampling speed) which corrects the reception timing of said reception multiplex signal based on said correlation value data and said ratio of the desired wave level to the interference wave level, the receiving apparatus being substantially identical to the invention according to claim 1 of the present application.
List of Cited Documents
1. Japanese Patent Publication Gazette No. H9-135193
2. Japanese Patent Application No. H10-79892 (Japanese Patent Publication No. H11-274982)
3. Japanese Patent Application No. H10-252637 (Japanese Patent Publication No. 2000-82975)
Record of the Result of the Prior Art Search
• Searched field: IPC Edition 7, H04B1/69-1/713
H04J13/00-13/06
• Prior art: Japanese Patent Publication No.2000-216706
Japanese Patent Publication No.2000-68981
The record of the result of the prior art search does not constitute a reason for refusal.
翻訳 - 英語 ASO15006050japan
[ORIGINAL]: I used the product every day to keep my skin moisturized. My skin is rough and I wonder why. My skin did not feel moisturized even after I used the product. I haven’t encountered any problems with the product until now. I have been using it, thinking it is a product of good quality. I think it includes a wash-off cleanser, right? The product has been worn on the skin for a whole day. Will it cause any problems? But I have to wear it as I am exposed to ultraviolet rays. (Described sol15849) Is it safe if I keep the ingredient which should be washed off on my face for a whole day? Though it is said that its safety is confirmed, I developed rashes and I think the cause of the symptoms is that I kept the wash-off cleanser on my skin most of the time. I would like to wait and see how my skin condition will be for the next 3 or 4 to 6 months. (Asked the customer to see a doctor since we were concerned about her current symptoms). What about the medical cost if I see a doctor? (Provided guidance on medical costs) I will see a doctor next week. (Asked the customer whether she had contacted the store or not) I received the DM yesterday. I read it 1 hour ago and I asked the staff of the store whether the number was correct or not. I was told to take the product to the store and they would exchange it for me.
(In the 50s).
(Female)
I was busy around end of last year and beginning of this year so I didn’t notice the symptoms. I realized that I developed rash after the New Year. I wanted to keep my skin well moisturized with a good-quality product so I used it every day. But I don't think it worked. I didn’t have insomnia or overeat and my health condition has not changed. I found on the DM that the product includes a cleanser and I think this is the cause of my symptoms.
On the forehead and left cheek around the lips.
One month ago
英語 から 日本語: Turning polymers into possibilities General field: マーケティング Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
原書のテキスト - 英語 Turning polymers into possibilities
AS81914 Convoluted Tubing
Drop by OPIE Booth I-33 to discover why AS81914 Convoluted Tubing is the ideal flexible conduit for protecting fibers from abrasion and high temperatures. This product offers low friction for sheathing and is available in multiple extruded resins, coloring options and sizes. Request samples
Zeus Industrial Products, Inc.
3737 Industrial Blvd.
Orangeburg, South Carolina 29118
The Parties agree on the terms and conditions as follows:
Article 1: Subject Matter of Lease
Party A shall lease its property (hereinafter referred to as the “Premises”) located at Room XXX (as shown in the attached drawing) to Party B for legal use.
Article 2: Lease Term
This lease agreement (the “Agreement”) shall take effect as of the date of execution hereof for a term of eleven months from April 1, 2016 to February 28, 2017. In the event that Party B intends to renew the Agreement after it expires, Party B shall notify Party A of its intention in writing two months prior to expiration of the lease and if Party A agrees to renew the lease, the Parties shall re-negotiate the conditions of lease and enter into a new agreement prior to expiration of the lease before Party B may continue to use the Premises after expiration of the lease. The landlord-tenant relationship between the Parties shall automatically terminate upon expiration of the Agreement. Party B may not claim that the landlord-tenant relationship continues to exist on the ground that Party B continues using the Premises or has already paid the rent, and Party B may not apply Article 451 of the Civil Code.
Article 3: Rent
1. The monthly rent to be paid Party B to Party A is three hundred eighty eight thousand five hundred forty eight New Taiwan Dollars (excluding sales tax), in addition to the part of rent payment from the interest on the security deposit paid by Party B, and for the purpose of rent payment by Party B, each month is one period, and Party B agrees to pay for each period in one lump sum.
3. Party B shall pay to Party A the rent for a period within five days from the beginning day of that period corresponding to the beginning day of the Agreement. If Party B fails to pay the rent in time for a period, a late payment penalty shall be imposed at the rate of one percent of the monthly rent for each day late starting from the beginning day of the period corresponding to the beginning day of the Agreement. If Party B is two months late in payment, Party A shall have the right to terminate the Agreement, and may cut off the supply of water, power, air-conditioning and other utilities and services at any time pursuant to the provisions of Paragraph 1 of Article 7 hereof, and claim liquidated damages under Article 12 hereof and compensation for damages, if any, from Party B.
中国語 から 英語: I’m leading an elite team to explore China market General field: マーケティング Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 I’m leading an elite team to explore China market.
At ContiTech, with the joint efforts from each business unit, I focus on developing new business opportunities in the China market.
My motivation: I am full of confidence because this is a young but tremendous market where I can put my passion to work. I will persevere because I have a group of united and dedicated colleagues who give me strong support along the journey. To me, challenge is fun, because I can realize my worth with every exploration and revolution.
2.1 Lenders' Commitment
Based on the Representations and Warranties, and subject to fulfilment of the Conditions Precedents, the Lenders undertake to make the [COMPANY NAME] Loan for a maximum amount in principal of one hundred forty two million Euros (€142,000,000).
2.2 Drawing
Subject to fulfilment of all the Conditions Precedents set forth under Article 6.2, the [COMPANY NAME] Loan will be made available to the Subsidiary during the relevant Drawing Period, by means of one or more Drawings, it being specified that:
- Each Drawing shall be equal to 75 per cent of the [COMPANY NAME] Loan to be funded at that time;
- No Drawing may be made on a given date for an amount exceeding the Available Amount;
- With the exception of the Drawing made on the Closing Date, the Subsidiary shall send a Drawing Notice to the Agent before 11 a.m. (Paris time), four (4) Business Days before the date contemplated for the advance of funds indicated by the Subsidiary in the Drawing Notice.
The Agent will make available the Drawing amount, no later than the date contemplated for the advance of funds indicated by the Subsidiary in the Drawing Notice, with this date as its value date with transfer to the account(s) as identified by Subsidiary.
For this purpose, each Lender that is party to this Agreement at the Drawing Date shall have made available on the relevant date, to the Agent, on behalf of the Subsidiary, the amount of its Undertaking.
Any [COMPANY NAME] Loan amount that has not been drawn during the Drawing Period will be cancelled. Any cancellation will be final.
英語 から 中国語: Turning polymers into possibilities General field: マーケティング Detailed field: 工学(一般)
原書のテキスト - 英語 Turning polymers into possibilities
AS81914 Convoluted Tubing
Drop by OPIE Booth I-33 to discover why AS81914 Convoluted Tubing is the ideal flexible conduit for protecting fibers from abrasion and high temperatures. This product offers low friction for sheathing and is available in multiple extruded resins, coloring options and sizes. Request samples
Zeus Industrial Products, Inc.
3737 Industrial Blvd.
Orangeburg, South Carolina 29118
Zeus Industrial Products, Inc.（Zeus工业产品公司）
地址：3737 Industrial Blvd.
Orangeburg, South Carolina 29118
英語 から 中国語: The New Horizon Plan General field: ビジネス/金融 Detailed field: 金融(一般)
原書のテキスト - 英語 1. The Provest 10 Principal Protection Plan is not for sale in the United States or the BVI and is not available for purchase by citizens or residents of the United States or BVI.
2. The Provest 10 Principal Protection Plan has a plan term of 10 years. The participant should enter into the plan with the intention of remaining in the plan for the full plan term. Should the participant surrender the plan before the full plan term, the surrender values displayed show what the participant may receive after surrender charges. A surrender charge reduces the plan value in the event of early termination.
3. This illustration is for guidance only and should not be regarded as a legally binding contract. Refer to the trust documents for greater details.
4. The rates of return are not based on past or future performance. They are not guaranteed and actual performance of the investment portion of the plan may be greater or less than the rate used in this illustration.
5. Guarantees are applicable only to regular contributions provided all contributions have been paid by their due date and there have been no loans or partial surrenders. Principal guarantee includes loyalty bonuses. Please refer to the plan documents for all contractual provisions.
6. The values demonstrated in the table above include a {0} plan fee, and an annual administration fee of 1.0% on cumulative premiums paid or due. The projected net annual index return is net of the 2% annual index spread charge. The plan is subject to surrender charges for early termination, which are equal to the difference between the Account Value and the Cash Value. Illustrated values are estimates of end-of-plan-year values and include loyalty bonuses.
英語 から 中国語: Inheritance and gift tax General field: マーケティング Detailed field: 金融(一般)
原書のテキスト - 英語 There is no 'one size fits all' solution. Every family office functions differently, offers different services, and will therefore be able or, oppositely, completely unable to deliver the services you are looking for. As your family's wealth and future well-being strongly depend on the selection of the right provider, the selection process should be very thorough.
Wealth planning is the art of structuring your wealth while building it, preserving it, and in order to transfer it to the next generation tax-optimised. Wealth planning is a mix of tax planning, wealth protection, estate planning and business succession planning and relates to your total worldwide wealth. A good family office in Switzerland will support you with solid wealth planning services.
_____________________________________
Inheritance and gift tax: Contrary to what most believe, Monaco does levy inheritance- and gift tax (transfer tax) from the families living in Monaco, but this is limited to movable and immovable properties located within the Principality (a so-called “situs tax”). The applicable tax rate depends on the relationship between the deceased and the beneficiary. The applicable tax rate for children, spouses, and also parents is 0%. Therefore in effect, in most cases, no inheritance tax is levied.
Hedge funds are alternative investment vehicles whose main benefit lies in their flexibility. Hedge funds can invest in a wide variety of asset classes (fixed income, equities, currencies, and commodities) and can implement their trades through long and short positions, derivatives and/or leverage
原書のテキスト - 英語 Convergence is central to the IP NGN, and it occurs in three fundamental ways: application convergence, service convergence, and network convergence. The Cisco IP NGN Carrier Ethernet Design provides the network layer infrastructure of the Cisco IP NGN architecture that is resilient, intelligent, scalable, and oriented toward new service delivery. In order to meet new business challenges, service providers must have sufficient intelligence in the network infrastructure to scale current services and quickly enable new services. The Cisco IP NGN Carrier Ethernet Design is service optimized to deliver both consumer and business services over a single Carrier Ethernet infrastructure. Service Providers will use Ethernet Operations, Administration, and Maintenance to reach out from the central office (CO) all the way to the customer premise, providing the “eyes, ears, and hands” with which network operations can be performed. Creating a highly reliable and available converged network is a goal that many carriers are already pursuing through their efforts to eliminate multiple service-specific networks or to reduce multiple layers within a network. A “many services, one network” model in which a single network can support all existing and new services will dramatically reduce the total cost of ownership (TCO) for service providers and allow them to quickly provide new services.
英語 から 中国語: Wall Street set to open flat after three-week run General field: マーケティング Detailed field: 金融(一般)
原書のテキスト - 英語 NEW YORK (Reuters) - U.S. stocks were poised for a flat open on Monday, after the Dow and S&P 500 advanced for a third straight week to fresh record highs.
Earnings season begins to wind down this week, with 16 S&P 500 companies expected to report quarterly results, including retailers Wal-Mart and Macy's as well as network equipment maker Cisco Systems.
"We have had a nice run and last week we did see the markets largely go into neutral and take a bit of a pause," said Peter Kenny, chief market strategist at Clearpool Group in New York.
"Earnings season is coming to a close, there are no economic data releases for the next two days, we’ve gotten more or less the framing for the market."
McDonald's Corp said worldwide sales at restaurants open at least 13 months fell 0.5 percent in October, hurt by stiff competition in the United States, economic and political upheaval in Europe and the fallout from a supplier scandal in China.
According to Thomson Reuters data through Friday, of 442 companies in the S&P 500 to report earnings, 74.2 percent beat Wall Street expectations, well above the 63 percent beat rate since 1994 and 67 percent for the past four quarters. Earnings are expected to grow 9.8 percent over the year-ago period.
The Dow has risen 7.3 percent while the S&P 500 is up 7.7 percent over past three weeks, the best three-week performance for both indexes since October 2011.
S&P 500 e-mini futures were up 1.75 points and fair value, a formula that evaluates pricing by taking into account interest rates, dividends and time to expiration on the contract, indicated a flat open. Dow Jones industrial average e-mini futures rose 17 points and Nasdaq 100 e-mini futures added 9.5 points.
英語 から 中国語: Consent to Participate in Research General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
原書のテキスト - 英語 Consent to Participate in Research
You are being asked to participate in a research study.
Before you agree, the investigator must tell you about (i) the purposes, procedures, and duration of the research; (ii) any procedures which are experimental; (iii) any reasonably foreseeable risks, discomforts, and benefits of the research; (iv) any potentially beneficial alternative procedures or treatments; and (v) how confidentiality will be maintained.
Where applicable, the investigator must also tell you about (i) any available compensation or medical treatment if injury occurs; (ii) the possibility of unforeseeable risks; (iii) circumstances when the investigator may halt your participation; (iv) any added costs to you; (v) what happens if you decide to stop participating; (vi) when you will be told about new findings which may affect your willingness to participate; and (vii) how many people will be in the study.
If you agree to participate, you must be given a signed copy of this document and a written summary of the research.
You may contact Dr. Thomas Loughran phone number 434-243- 9926 any time you have questions about the research.
You may contact Dr. Thomas Loughran phone number 434-243-9926 if you have questions about your rights as a research subject or what to do if you are injured.
Your participation in this research is voluntary, and you will not be penalized or lose benefits if you refuse to participate or decide to stop.
Signing this document means that the research study, including the above information, has been described to you orally, and that you voluntarily agree to participate.
Consent From Adult
______________________________
PARTICIPANT
(SIGNATURE) _____________________________
PARTICIPANT
(PRINT) ________
DATE
To be signed by the participant who is 18 years of age or older.
Interpreter
By signing below you confirm that the study has been fully explained to the potential subject in a language they understand and all their questions have been answered.
_______________________________
INTERPRETER
(SIGNATURE) _____________________________
INTERPRETER
(PRINT) ________
DATE
NOTE: Study team member obtaining consent must sign long version of consent form.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Parental/Guardian Permission
By signing below you confirm you have the legal authority to sign for this child.
__________________________
PARENT/GUARDIAN
(SIGNATURE) ________________________
PARENT/GUARDIAN
(PRINT NAME)
______
DATE
NOTE: Study team member obtaining permission must sign long version of consent form.
Assent from Child
__________________________
PARTICIPANT
(SIGNATURE) ________________________
PARTICIPANT
(PRINT)
_______
DATE
原書のテキスト - 英語 FAQ - IMMIGRATION TOPICS
I understand that EB-5 has been the subject of litigation. Will this history affect my green card applications?
It should help our investors. In June 2006, the USCIS removed green card conditions from all pre-1998 American Life, Inc. investors. This sets a precedent for programs such as American Life, Inc., which invests the full invested amount of $500,000 in job producing projects in our regional centers.
The history is outlined as follows: American Life, Inc., formed its regional center in 1996 and raised capital from some 40 investors between 1996 and 1998. Several other companies competed for investment capital during this period, but some of these companies didn’t offer sound investments and were only in business to collect fees rather than to fund an ongoing business. Many of these other investment opportunities didn’t raise the full $500,000 in investment capital or hire the required number of employees. Because some of these companies did not comply with the regulations, INS, the legacy administrator of U.S. immigration services (now USCIS), rightly set out to stop this abuse of the program. In 1998, INS revised the rules retroactively to people who already had approved petitions; however INS also wrongly attempted to revoke all EB-5 visa petitions. This led to the litigation.
In 2002, in a case commonly known as Chang vs.United States the 9th Circuit Court of Appeals ruled that the USCIS could not apply their new rules retroactively. In the same year, the U.S. Congress also passed a new law to protect the pre-1998 investors. In September 2005 and May 2006, the USCIS approved all American Life, Inc. pre-1998 removal-of-condition (I-829) petitions. As a result American Life, Inc. dropped its lawsuit against the U.S. Justice Department. American Life, Inc. was able to settle with the U.S. government because all of our investors invested $500,000 in job creating investments. It took eight years to work through the system and to prove the point that American Life, Inc. provides legitimate EB-5 investments. During the interim period, all of the investors were allowed to live in the U.S. as if they had permanent green cards. We believe that EB-5 immigration petitions based on sound investments for the full $500,000, as prescribed by the rules, with proper supporting documentation, will continue to be approved.
After the I-526 petition approval, can members of the family have their consulate interview in different countries (for example, if children are attending school in the U.S. and the parents are not in the U.S., etc.)?
Family members can interview in different countries. The country of origin or where the family has current ties is the standard interview site. Often one member of the family is located in another country, such as a student attending school in the U.S. The student does not have to return to the country of origin and can adjust his or her status in the U.S. at the district office of the USCIS.
Can I apply if I have been rejected by the USCIS for other type visa?
Rejection in the past does not disqualify an applicant for EB-5, unless the reasons are related to immigration fraud or other major problems. It is most important that the investor disclose all criminal, medical, or U.S. immigration history problems to American Life, Inc. and the immigration attorney in advance of your petition submission.
英語 から 中国語: The 5 Things Singapore Is Doing In 2022 To Attract Family Offices General field: ビジネス/金融 Detailed field: マーケティング/市場調査
原書のテキスト - 英語 The 5 Things Singapore Is Doing In 2022 To Attract Family Offices
During 2020 and much of 2021 when many financial centres were doing everything they could to simply survive, the Singaporean government were in revival mode and concentrated a huge amount of effort to attracting Single Family Offices from around the world.
Though a huge success, with 400 Family Offices joining their ecosystem in 2020 alone, their efforts are far from over as Singapore is continuing to do everything they can to prove their place as the number one hub for Family Offices in the Asia Pacific.
While its attractive taxation, political stability, low crime rate, broad selection of service providers and deep-rooted talent pool is attracting the attention of Family Offices, here is a list of the five things keeping Singapore on their radar:
1) Singapore’s economy has continued to grow through the pandemic. In fact, it grew by 7.2% in 2021, the fastest pace in over a decade and attributable to the some S$100BN that the Singaporean Government spent over two years to alleviate the damage caused by the pandemic. The MAS predict a continued growth of 3% - 5% over the next 12 months and economists suggest this could be conservative.
2) Singapore has an incredibly high vaccination rate with 88% of its some 5.5M people vaccinated against Covid-19 and a further 55% having at least one booster. This is one reason why the country is opening up and welcoming both work and travel tourism. In January, Singapore updated its entry protocols to allow those who have recovered from the coronavirus to enter the country without a vaccination or having to test. Reports suggest it is Singapore’s contrast to Hong Kong’s’ Draconian Covid-19 measures that are seeing many professionals move to the Garden City.
3) Singapore is trying to protect investors from high-risk. In January Singapore published a set of guidelines restricting crypto businesses from marketing their offering to retail investors. From our experience, Family Offices are not investing in crypto. They invest in areas with proven returns and in the case of crypto, no precedent equals no portfolio. This might appeal to Family Offices who have set up with a primary objective of wealth preservation but will it appeal to everyone?
4) Singapore is not afraid to act now. 2022 may be a relatively new year but it has not stopped Singaporean government from changing its stance on everything from covid to crypto and now, monetary policy. Singapore’s Central Bank tightened its monetary policy settings on January 25th, the first out-of-cycle move in seven years. The change it has been said, is to alleviate inflationary pressures across the region and it is likely that Family Offices who are dynamic machines will appreciate this characteristic in a partner and a home.
5) Singapore cares about social impact, as do Family Offices. From January 1st, all listed businesses in Singapore are required to provide climate reporting in a 'comply or explain' way. According to Singapore Exchange (SGX), climate reporting will be made mandatory for listed businesses in the financial, energy, agriculture, food and forest products sectors from 2023. Reporting will be made mandatory for businesses in the materials and buildings and transportation sectors from 2024. Directors are also expected to partake in sustainability training and it is once again this characteristic of longevity that might appeal to Family Offices.
What impresses you the most about Singapore’s Family Office landscape?
翻訳 - 英語 [Technical field]
[0001]
The present invention pertains to a taxi fare payment system which uses electronic money stored in an IC chip mounted in a portable media for payment of taxi fare.
[Background technology]
[0002]
A taxi fare payment system of prior art is described in patent literature 1 below.
In this system, once the taxi driver receives the credit card of a taxi user (company employee) and sets it into a card authorization terminal which is mounted in the taxi, the card authorization terminal will read the card information from the credit card and sends it to a central data processing center. Once card authorization is conducted at the central data processing center and the information is sent to the card authorization terminal, the taxi driver will pull out the credit card from the card authorization terminal and give it back to the customer.
[0003]
When the taxi driver inputs the taxi fare into the card authorization terminal, the information will be sent to the central data processing center, and when the payment settlement is made at the central data processing center and the information is notified to the card authorization terminal, a receipt will be issued at the card authorization terminal, and the taxi driver will give the receipt to the customer, and on the other hand, the central data processing center will send the payment settlement data to the card company of said credit card for settlement.
/3
(Refer to patent literature 1 for example).
[Patent literature 1] Japanese Patent Publication No. 2002-208040
[Disclosure of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
[0004]
However, in accordance with the prior art stated above, the company employee who is the taxi user not only has to present the receipt received from the taxi driver to the company accountant for reimbursement processing but also has to submit a voucher which records the specified taxi usage trip to approvers such as supervisor, etc. for approval in accordance with the company regulation, which costs time and effort, and moreover, the approvers have to judge whether the taxi usage is for business purpose or not merely by the content recorded on the voucher submitted by the employee, so it is difficult to make an objective and correct judgment.
[0005]
The purpose of the present invention is to solve these problems.
[Means to solve the problems]
[0006]
For this purpose, the taxi fare payment system of the present invention comprises a portable media which stores an identifier and electronic money, a position inputting device used to input the starting position and ending position of a taxi ride when a taxi is used by a company employee and an electronic money reader-writer which are equipped in a taxi, a server which can communicate with said electronic money reader-writer wirelessly, and a terminal which is installed in said company and can communicate with said server via communication line, wherein said electronic money reader-writer reads the identifier from said media held by said employee when the taxi fare is paid and said electronic money reader-writer obtains the taxi fare and deducts it from the balance of the electronic money stored in said media, and further obtains the information of the taxi ride starting and ending positions from said position inputting device and sends said identifier, the amount of taxi fare, and the taxi ride starting and ending positions to said terminal as usage information, wherein said server stores said usage information received from said electronic money reader-writer in a database and sends the usage information of the company employee to said terminal at the request of said terminal.
[Effects of the invention]
[0007]
In accordance with the present invention, it is unnecessary for the employee to apply for reimbursement based on a receipt or the like after using a taxi, and the approvers who approve the taxi usage of the employee can make a correct judgment as to whether the taxi usage is for business purpose or not in accordance with the electronic money ID, taxi fare and taxi ride starting and ending positions which are obtained from the
electronic money reader-writer which is mounted in the taxi that is used by the employee.
中国語 から 英語: METHOD TO MANUFACTURE A COUPLER KNUCKLE General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 機械工学
翻訳 - 英語 [0047]
The following is a simulation and analysis of the two die forging steps for producing the forged coupler knuckle product. The boundary conditions setting for analysis, process simulation and stress analysis are as follows:
[0048]
This simulation establishes a parameter model of the forged coupler knuckle with SOLIDWORKS software and simulates the finite elements of the 3D model with DEFORM-3D software to analyze the formation process and stress during die forging of the forged coupler knuckle, thereby revealing the defect generation process and optimizing the die forging process.
[0049]
1. The simulation parameter setting is as follows: the simulation condition setting is substantially identical to the actual production conditions so that the simulation results may accurately reflect the actual production conditions.
/6
[0050]
1) Material modeling for the material of the forgings: the material of the forgings is 25MnCrNiMoA steel, which is not available in the DEFORM-3D material database, so the deformation resistance of this material at different temperatures and different deformation rates is not available. Since the chemical composition and property of the CrNiMo alloy steel is substantially identical to that of 25MnCrNiMoA, a material model is established on the basis of the deformation resistance curve of the CrNiMo alloy steel.
[0051]
2) Setting of other simulation parameters: the two die forging steps are both performed on an 8000 ton friction press, and the settings of simulation parameters for the two die forging steps are same: the die material is set as a rigid body, the heating temperature for the blank material is 1200C, the Coulomb friction coefficient is 0.3, the die temperature is set to 250C, the moving speed of the upper die is set to 200 mm/s, and the number of cells is 185641.
[0052]
2. Data simulation and defect analysis of the blank material deformation process during the first die forging
[0053]
1) Data simulation of the deformation process during the first die forging: the main purpose of this process is to form the S-face of the forged coupler knuckle. Since only a precise blank can satisfy the ultimate forging and formation requirements, so the blank needs to be forged by the open die forging method, and then it is trimmed after the die forging. The well distributed blank material during this forging lays a solid foundation for final forging into form. The blank is completely formed when the space between the upper die and lower die for the first die forging is 0.3 mm, and the deformation resistance at this node is 54500 kN, therefore it can be confirmed that the 8000-ton friction press can satisfy the impact force requirement of the first die forging of the product.
[0054]
2) Analysis of defects generated during the first die forging: folding defects may be generated at transition places during the first die forging because the sectional areas of the head 11 and bottom 12 of the freely forged blank-making part 1 are significantly changed, and the blank material cannot be dispersed to the two sides in time.
[0055]
3) Improvement scheme and actual results: the freely forged blank-making part for the forged coupler knuckle is improved, and the transition between the head 11 and bottom 12 of the freely forged blank-making part is changed into the slope 4 during actual production, so that the blank material can fully flow in the forming cavity for the first die forging. The folding defect during the first die forging can be completely avoided by this improved process.
[0056]
3. Blank deformation simulation and defect analysis of the second die forging
[0057]
1) Data simulation of the deformation process of the second die forging: after the first die forging, trimming and grinding of the product, the blank-making part is turned by 90 degree for a second die forging to make it into the final shape. The blank-making part is completely formed when the space between the upper die and lower die for the second die forging reaches 1 mm. The deformation resistance at this point is 49700 kN, therefore it can be confirmed that the 8000-ton friction press can satisfy the impact force requirement of the second die forging of the product.
[0058]
2) Formation and defects analysis of the second die forging: the flash exceeds the flash chamber when the blank-making part is die forged for the second time and formed, which wastes the material and increases the requirement on forging force. The main reason for this defect is that the local distribution of the blank material for the first die forging is not reasonable. Folding defect is generated at the upper traction set area during the second die forging because the sectional area of the blank-making part from the first die forging changes significantly at the transition area of the upper traction set, the metal blank material at the root of the upper traction set cannot flow in the transverse direction, therefore the folding defect is generated in this area.
[0059]
3) Improved scheme: the following improvements are made for the abovementioned problems: the rounded corner is maximized at the location where the sectional area of the blank-making part from the first die forging changes significantly, so that the blank material can flow in the transverse direction, thus avoiding folding defects. The die for the first die forging is modified to optimize the local shape of the blank-making part from the first die forging to improve the formation process. In addition, the size of the flash chamber of the existing die is increased to fully contain the excessive metal.
[0060]
The temperatures for the first heating, second heating, and third heating are all controlled to between 900C~1200C.
[0061]
In the method to manufacture a coupler knuckle provided by this invention, a manufacture process consisting of a step of freely forging a blank, two die forging steps and two trimming steps is decided according to the structure characteristics of the coupler knuckle to be forged. The analysis method by data simulation is selected to simulate and validate this process, to analyze the deformation and stress of the blank-making part during the two die-forging steps and to simulate the defect generation process. The simulation provides a strong basis for preventing forging defects and optimizing the forging process. The process optimization in practical operation increases the rate of qualified products of forged
/7
coupler knuckle from the original 30.3% to above 90%. Currently, this process is stably used in production. The coupler knuckle manufactured with this forging process can completely avoid the forging defects of gas cavity, slag inclusion, shrinkage, etc., to ensure the interior quality and improve the service life of the coupler knuckle.
[0062]
As a preferred embodiment in the abovementioned embodiments, the following step is also included between the Step 6) and Step 7): 6S) a first grinding, to grind the blank-making part for the first time after the blank-making part has been trimmed from the first trimming and naturally cooled to ambient temperature; the following step is also included between the Step 9) and Step10): 9S1) a second grinding, to grind the blank-making part for a second time, after the blank-making part is trimmed from the second trimming and naturally cooled to ambient temperature. The first grinding and second grinding can further improve the forging quality and facilitate the subsequent index control. The following step is also included between the Step 9S1) and Step 10): 9S2) a first shot blasting, to perform shot blasting for the first time on the surface of the blank-making part that has been ground from the second grinding; the following step is also included between the Step 9S2) and Step 10): 9S3) a second shot blasting, to perform shot blasting for a second time on the surface of the blank-making part that has been heat treated. The purpose of the first shot blasting and second shot blasting is to remove the scale on the surface and expose the base material of the blank-making part to reduce corrosion during use.
[0063]
In conclusion, it should be understood that the abovementioned embodiments are only used to illustrate, but not to restrict, the technical scheme of this invention. Although this invention is described by referring to the abovementioned embodiments, those ordinary skilled in the art shall understand that: they can still modify the technical scheme specified by each of the embodiments described above or perform equivalent substitution of part or all the technical characteristics; however, such modification or substitution is deemed to be substantially within the scope of the technical schemes of the embodiments of this invention.
中国語 から 英語: Study on Car Body Vibration Transmissibility Analysis Approach for Railway Passenger Carriage General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: 工学(一般)
原書のテキスト - 中国語 I.引言
随着铁道客车的高速化和轻量化发展，车辆本身产生了严重的车体弹性振动问题[1]。车辆沿轨道运行时，由于轮轨耦合作用，车辆各部件产生各种工况的位移、速度和加速度变化，这些变化通过不同方式传递到车体，加上车 体本身的弹性振动，不仅恶化了旅客乘坐舒适性而且导致车体结构动应力的增加和疲劳寿命的降低。高速客车车体垂直一阶弯曲振动频率接近或处于人体振动敏感区域，对车辆的垂直运行平稳性也有相当的影响[2]。因此有必要对车体的振动传递特性进行深入分析研究。
车体振动传递分析是为了考察车辆对来自轮轨相互作用和设备振动引起的各种强迫振动的隔振效果，分析轨道激扰和设备振动激扰经一、二系悬挂系统到车体的传递规律，其目的是为了找出影响车体振动的主要来源，以指导车辆的隔振设计，最终为车体的改进设计及车辆安全运行保障提供试验依据。目前，国内外对于汽车振动传递特性试验和分析方法的研究较多。刘东明等人研究了传递路径分析技术在车内噪声与振动研究与分析中的应用，阐述的是该技术在汽车中的应用[3]。Juha Plunt用传递路径分析方法去解决汽车NVH的诸多问题[4]。吴文江等人通过测试汽车悬置两侧的振动加速度，进行振动信号的频谱分析、相干分析和传递特性分析，找出了影响汽车动力总成振动传递特性的主要因素[5]。本文通过对铁道客车主要振动源的分析，研究振动传递路径分析方法，探讨铁道客车车体振动传递特性。
II. 铁道客车的振动源分析
振动源是指激发振动的力源或运动源。机械构件相互间的碰撞、磨擦以及由于旋转系统的静、动态不平衡所引起的交变力的产生与传递将导致机械构件产生振动，气流中存在的非稳定过程、湍流等与物体相互作用也将导致振动。
铁道客车车辆在运行过程中，引起振动的来源有很多，其中主要振源包括轮轨、弓网、气动、吊挂载荷等。轮轨振动一般由钢轨的变形、磨耗引起的轨道不平顺、轨道刚度和几何状态变化等因素激发；高速运行时接触导线与受电弓的接触状态会变差，离线率会增高，将加剧弓网振动；车辆车身外表面湍流流动所产生的气动噪声会对车体形成波动载荷，使其强迫振动；吊挂系统载荷作用力波动将产生结构激励，等等。因此，车辆的振动不仅与线路状态有关，与车体本身的结构和结构之间的参数匹配也有关系。
III. 振动传递路径分析方法
车辆车体内部振动，往往是由多个激励，经由不同的传递路径地道目标位置后叠加而成的，为进一步优化车体，往往要综合考虑各个激励和传递路径的情况，传递路径分析就是一个行之有效的方法。通过传递路径分析，确定各途径流入的激励能量在整个问题中所占的比例，找出传递途径上对车体振动起主导作用的环节，通过控制这些主要环节，加以改善，以使车体各部位振动控制在合理范围内。振动传递路径分析可采用相干函数法和传递函数法。
翻訳 - 英語 I. Introduction
As the railway passenger trains become increasingly light in weight and high in speed, the train itself will produce serious elastic car body vibrations [1]. When the train runs on rails, the components of the train experience changes in position, speed and acceleration under various working conditions because of the effects of the couplings between wheels and rails. These changes, which are transferred to car bodies in different ways, together with elastic vibrations of car bodies, not only worsen the passenger ride comfort, but also increase the dynamic stress in the structures of the car bodies and lower their fatigue lives. The frequency of first-order vertical bending vibrations of the car bodies of a high-speed passenger train is close to or within the range of the vibration frequencies to which human bodies are sensitive, and the first-order vertical bending vibrations of the car bodies also considerably influence the stability of vertical running of the train [2]. Therefore, an in-depth analysis of and study on the vibration transfer characteristics of the car bodies is necessary.
The analysis of vibration transfer of the car bodies is to observe the passenger train' effect of isolating forced vibrations resulted from wheel-rail interactions and equipment vibrations, to analyze the patterns of transfer of rail excitations and equipment vibrations to the car bodies through the primary suspension system and the secondary suspension system, and to find the main sources influencing car body vibrations to guide the vibration isolation design of the car bodies and eventually provide experiment reference for improved designs of the car bodies and safe running of the train. So far, many studies have been made on the methods of testing and analyzing the vibration transfer characteristics of automobiles at home and abroad. Liu, Dongming et al. studied the application of the transfer path analysis technique to the research and analysis of noise and vibrations inside automobiles and elaborated the application of this technique in automobiles [3]. Juha Plunt used the transfer path analysis technique to solve many problems concerning noise, vibration and harshness (NVH) of automobiles [4]. Wu, Wenjiang et al. found out the main factors influencing the vibration transfer characteristics of the power assembly of automobiles by testing the vibration accelerations on the two sides of the automobiles and performing spectral analyses of vibration signals, coherence analyses, and transfer characteristic analyses [5]. In this paper, the main vibration sources of railway passenger carriages were analyzed, the vibration transfer path analysis method was studied, and the vibration transfer characteristics of car bodies of railway passenger carriages were discussed.
II. Analysis of Vibration Sources of Railway Passenger Carriages
A vibration source refers to a power source or motion source which excites vibrations. Collisions and frictions between mechanical components, the generation and transfer of the alternating force resulted from static or dynamic imbalance of the rotating system, and the interactions between an unstable process or turbulence in the air flow and the objects can also cause mechanical components to vibrate.
There are many sources which cause vibrations during the running of railway passenger carriages. Among them, the major vibration sources are wheel-rail, bow net, air dynamics, and load on the suspension systems. Wheel-rail vibrations are usually excited by such factors as rail irregularity, rail rigidity change or geometric change caused by deformations or wear of steel rails; the contact between the contact wire and the pantograph will be worsen and the disconnected rate of the pantograph will increase to intensify the vibrations of the bow net when the train runs at a high speed; the pneumatic noise caused by the flowing turbulence around the external surface of the car bodies of the train will create a fluctuating load on the car bodies to force the latter to vibrate; the fluctuations in the acting force of the load on the suspension systems will cause structural excitations. Therefore, vibrations of the train are related not only to the line state, but also to the structures of the car bodies and the parameter fitting between the structures.
III. Vibration Transfer Path Analysis Method
The vibrations inside the car bodies of a train are usually formed after multiple excitations tunnel [sic! – seems to be a typo for “arrive”] at the target position via different transfer paths and are superimposed. To further optimize the car bodies, it is necessary to comprehensively consider the conditions of all excitations and their transfer paths and the transfer path analysis is an effective way. Through the transfer path analysis, the proportion of the excitation energy coming from each path to the total excitation energy is determined, the areas on the transfer paths which play leading roles in the vibrations of the car bodies are found out, and the vibrations are alleviated by controlling these key areas so that the vibration intensity in each part of the car bodies is controlled within a reasonable range. The coherence function approach and the transfer function approach can be adopted for vibration transfer path analyses.
英語 から 中国語: Great brands are changing customer expectations General field: マーケティング Detailed field: 宣伝/広報
原書のテキスト - 英語 Great brands are changing customer expectations… Things are changing in the market place… the best brands are taking things to a whole new level
The best brands offer a great customer experience… we see it more and more in brands like Apple and Starbucks
Mere satisfaction is no longer enough… it simply is not enough anymore to just meet a customer’s needs… you have to go deeper… you have to connect with them and meet their unexpressed needs
Customer engagement is the new standard of excellence… engagement means connecting with people on an emotional level and building a relationship with them that leads to loyalty and advocacy
Engaged customers mean less discounting… because when we really connect with people… emotionally… they feel good and they value that connection more than they demand a discount
Only engaged employees can create engaged customers… because it’s the employee who creates the connection… and you will never have a customer who is more engaged than the employee is engaged
Creating a great customer experience will be the big differentiator … this is going to be one of the most important initiatives we focus on going forward. We now have the best cars and trucks we’ve ever had as a company…
Now is the time to take our consumer experience to the next level.
And if we get this right… it’ll result in greater customer loyalty and word of mouth advocacy.
朝鮮語 から 英語: AN EASY-TO-CLEAN MASK General field: 医療 Detailed field: 特許
原書のテキスト - 朝鮮語 청구항 1
양측에 이어 밴드(11) 또는 헤드밴드(11)가 연결된 마스크바디(10)와;
상기 마스크바디(10) 중앙상부를 착용자의 코형태에 따라 밀착되도록 변형시켜주는 코밀착부재(20)와;
상기 마스크바디(10) 중앙상부 내측면 또는 외측면에는 코밀착부재(20)를 수용할 수 있는 코밑착부재 수용부(30)가 부착되고, 코밀착부게 수용부(30)에는 코밀착부재(20)의 입출이 가능하도록 개방부(31) 또는 절개부(32)가 형성된 세탁이 용이한 마스크.
청구항 2
양측에 이어밴드(11) 또는 헤드밴드(11)가 연결되고 내피와 외피 등 2장 이상의 천으로 구성된 마스크바디 (10) 와;
상기 마스크바디(10) 중앙상부를 착용자의 코형태에 따라 밀착되도록 변형시켜주는 코밀착부재(20)와;
상기 마스크바디(10) 중앙상부 내피와 외피 사이 공간에 코밀착부재(20)를 수용할 수 있는 코밀착부재 수용부(30)를 재봉수단에 의해 형성시킨 세탁이 용이한 마스크.
청구항 3
제1항에 있어서;
상기 코밀착부재 수용부(30)는 코밀착부재(20)보다 길이와 폭이 같거나 약간 긴 정도의 수용공간을 가지도록 재봉수단에 의해 부착되는 것으로서. 재봉선외 상측 또는 하측 일단에 소정 길이로 재봉이 되지 않은 개방부(31)를 형성시킨 세탁이 용이한 마스크.
청구항 4
제 3항에 있어서;
상기 개방부(31)는 개방부를 통한 코밀착부재(20)의 입출은 가능하지만 완전히 인입된 코밀착부재(20)가 쉽게 코밀착부재 수용부(30)에서 이탈되지 않도록 '?' 형태로 개방된 세탁이 용이한 마스크.
청구항 5
제 1항 내지 제 2항에 있어서;
상기 코밀착부재 수용부(30)는 코밀착부재(20)보다 길이와 폭이 같거나 약간 긴 정도의 수용공간을 가지도록 재봉수단에 외해 형성되는 것으로서. 코밀착부재(20)를 코밀착부재 수용부(30) 끝단까지 길이방향으로 완전히 밑어 넣었을 때 코밀착부재(20) 대부분이 코밀착부재 수용부(30)에 수용될 수 있는 소정의 위치면에 코밀착부 재(20)의 인입과 인출이 가능하도록 ‘|’ 형태의 절개부(32)를 형성시킨 세탁이 용이한 마스크.
청구항 6
제 3항 내지 제 5항에 있어서;
상기 절개부(32)의 좌우 절개선 및 개방부(31)는 마스크바디(10)에 부착됨이 없이 재봉수단에 의해 독립적으로 마감처리 됨으로써 코밀착부게(20)의 잦은 입출 및 마스크의 잦은 세탁에도 쉽게 해지지 않도록 형성시킨 세탁이 용이한 마스크
청구항 7
제 1항 내지 제2에 있어서;
상기 코밀착부재(20)는 코밀착부재 수용부(30)의 훼손과 착용자의 부상을 방지하기 위하여 연성철심(21) 양끝단이 라운드형태로 절곡된 후 폴리에틸렌 등 비닐계로 전체가 코팅되는 것을 특징으로 하는 세탁이 용이한 마스크.
청구항 8
제 1항에 있어서:
상기 부착되는 코밑착부재 수용부(30)의 형태는 유아들이 좋아하는 캐릭터모양이거나 기업을 대표하는 심블모 양으로 형성되는 것을 특징으로 하는 세탁이 용이한 마스크.
翻訳 - 英語 Claim 1
An easy-to-clean mask, comprising a mask body (10) connected with ear straps (11) or a head band (11) on both sides;
a nose fitting component (20) for changing the shape above the center of the mask body (10) according to the shape of the wearer's nose to make it fit snugly;
a nose fitting component accommodating portion (30) located on the inner surface or the outer surface above the center of the mask body (10), capable of accommodating the nose fitting component (20), wherein an opening (31) or a slit (32) is formed in the nose fitting component accommodating portion (30) to allow the nose fitting component (20) to enter and exit.
Claim 2
An easy-to-clean mask, comprising a mask body (10), composed of two or more pieces of cloths with an inner surface and an outer surface, and connected with ear straps (11) or a head band (11) on both sides;
a nose fitting component (20) for changing the shape above the center of the mask body (10) according to the shape of the wearer's nose to make it fit snugly;
a nose fitting component accommodating portion (30) formed by sewing and located in a space between the inner surface and the outer surface above the center of the mask body (10), capable of accommodating the nose fitting component (20).
Claim 3
The easy-to-clean mask as claimed in claim 1, characterized in that,
the nose fitting component accommodating portion (30) has an accommodating space in the same or slightly larger length and width than the nose fitting component (20), and is attached by sewing, an unsewn opening (31) of a certain length being formed on the upper or lower sewing line.
Claim 4
The easy-to-clean mask as claimed in claim 3, characterized in that,
the opening (31) allows the nose fitting component (20) to enter and exit through the opening, and opens in a "?" shape in order to prevent the nose fitting component (20) inside from easily coming out of the nose fitting component accommodating portion (30).
Claim 5
The easy-to-clean mask as claimed in claim 1 or claim 2, characterized in that,
the nose fitting component accommodating portion (30) is provided with an accommodating space having the same length or width as the nose fitting component (20), and is formed by sewing; a slit (32) in a ‘|’ shape is formed at a specific position of the nose fitting component accommodating portion (30) where most of the nose fitting component (20) can be accommodated when the nose fitting component (20) is fully pushed into the end of the nose fitting component accommodating portion (30) along the longitudinal direction, and is used to insert/remove the nose fitting component (20).
Claim 6
The easy-to-clean mask as claimed in claim 3 or claim 5, characterized in that,
the left and right cut lines of the slit (32) and the opening (31) do not fit on the mask body (10), but are separately finished by sewing, so that even if the nose fitting component (20) is frequently put in/taken out or the mask is frequently cleaned, it will not be easily worn.
Claim 7
The easy-to-clean mask as claimed in claim 1 or claim 2, characterized in that,
in order to prevent damage to the nose fitting component accommodating portion (30) or injury to the wearer, the two ends of a soft iron core (21) of the nose fitting component (20) are in a circularly curved state, and vinyl, for example, polyethylene, is used to coat the whole iron core.
Claim 8
The easy-to-clean mask as claimed in claim 1, characterized in that
the fit nose fitting component accommodating portion (30) can be in the form of a cartoon character that children like or a logo that represents an enterprise.
中国語 から 英語: SPLIT APTAMER BASED LIQUID CRYSTAL BIOSENSOR FOR ATP ASSAY General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 1 Introduction
ATP is the provider of the energy required for various vital movements of living things and is an important hub for energy metabolism and conversion in living things. Therefore, ATP is an important index in a bio-reaction detection. Currently, the ATP detection methods include electrophoresis method[1], HPLC method[2], mass spectrometry[3], and luciferase method[4]. However, the above-mentioned methods involve complex operations, expensive precision instruments, and some of them have a low sensitivity. Thus, it is still significant to continue the research on high-sensitivity, label-free, and easy-to-operate ATP detection methods.
Liquid crystal is a special form between the liquid state and the crystalline state of a substance. Liquid crystal has not only the fluidity in the liquid state, but also the anisotropy in the crystalline state. In addition, it has an incomplete long-range orientational order and positional order[5]. The liquid crystal biosensing concept was first proposed by Abbott Research Team[6] in 1998. It utilizes a sensor to detect the changes of the orientation of liquid crystal molecules on the surface of the self-assembled monolayer before and after the binding of a target substance, and then the changes of the brightness and color of the polarized microscopic image of the sensor[7,9], thus realizing the detection of the target substance. The liquid crystal biosensor is a sensor which is easy to miniaturize and array and has a low power consumption. The liquid crystal biosensor can be used to detect a target substance under natural light, without any special label. The optical signals presented by the liquid crystal biosensor can be observed with naked eyes. The liquid crystal biosensor has a high sensitivity and is easy to operate.
However, since the detection sensitivity of liquid crystal sensing greatly depends on the geometric dimensions of target molecules, the liquid crystal biosensors in related documents are mostly used for analytical detection of biomacromolecules[10,13] [sic! - 10-13?], and liquid crystal biosensors used for small-molecule detection are seldom reported[14,17] [sic! - 14-17?].
In this article, a liquid crystal biosensing method which has high specificity and sensitivity and is easy to operate was developed for ATP detection by combining the advantages of the liquid crystal sensor, utilizing the specificity of the combination of ATP with the ATP aptamer, and using a target object to induce the conformational changes of the nucleic acid and amplify the disorder effect of these changes on the orientation arrangement of liquid crystal molecules.
日本語 から 英語: Producing method of a modified unsaturated polyester General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 3. Detailed description of the invention
[Industrial field]
The present invention relates to a producing method of a modified unsaturated polyester. More specifically, the present invention relates to a production method of a modified unsaturated polyester to be blended into a polymerizable liquid composition (curable composition) used in, for example, reaction injection molding (RIM), etc.
[Prior art]
Unsaturated polyesters (hereinafter referred to as UPE) are widely used as BMC (Bulk Molding Resins), as SMC (Sheet Molding Resins), and
/2
especially as glass fiber reinforced resins. In recent years, they are gradually used as resins for RIM, and the most standard UPE which uses (ISO) phthalic acid and maleic acid (fumaric acid) as the acid component and uses propylene glycol as the alcohol component is being modified to improve heat resistance, heat shrinkage, surface properties, toughness, etc., and it is expected that its use is likely to be extended to many more areas.
The introduction of a ring structure into the UPE skeleton is one of the methods to achieve the above purposes, but aromatic rings are generally not preferred because they tend to have high viscosity during curing and molding. On the other hand, if the ring is an alicyclic ring, it is believed that the improvement of the properties of the molded product and the moldability are balanced, and in many cases, a desirable result can be delivered. Therefore, for example, it is considered that UPE having a norbornene ring can be prepared by using a fumaric acid ester residue in a standard UPE skeleton as the parent diene skeleton and reacting it with a diene compound such as cyclopentadiene.
Conventionally, attempts have been made to introduce a dicyclopentyl group as an ester and / or an ether group at the terminal of a UPE polymer using dicyclopentadiene (DCP) for the purpose of modifying the UPE (referring to, for example, Japanese patent publication No. S54-90285).
However, in the method of using DCP in this way, since a high temperature of 120°C or higher is used, undesirable side reactions occur, and there may not be enough improvements of the heat resistance and the thermal shrinking rate of the obtained UPE, and furthermore, there is another problem, which is that it is difficult to composite with an epoxy resin because it is poorly soluble in an UPE epoxy monomer.
[Objective of the invention]
The first objective of the present invention is provide a method for producing modified UPE to solve the problems of the conventional method as described above, to improve the properties of heat resistance, heat shrinkage, etc., after molding, and to easily composite with an epoxy resin, and the second objective of the present invention is to provide a method in which the reaction for modification can be carried out at a low temperature and the control of the reaction rate is easy.
[Composition of the invention]
The present inventors, as a result of diligent researches to achieve the above-mentioned objectives, considered the side reactions that should be suppressed during the introduction of an ester group into UPE in the prior art and made the Diels-Alder reaction by the diene compound dominate and introduced a Diels-Alder adduct structure such as a norbornene ring into the main chain of UPE, and during this time, caused the diene compound to react under a condition where a part of the improved (modified) unsaturated polyester generated by the addition reaction, thereby achieving the above-mentioned objectives and the present invention.
Specifically, the present invention is a production method of a modified unsaturated polyester, characterized in that, the unsaturated polyester containing a parent diene residue is reacted with a diene compound to introduce the Diels-Alder adduct structure (alicyclic structure) in the main chain, and during this time, the reaction is made to carry out under the condition in which at least a part of the modified polyester generated by the addition reaction of the diene compound is dissolved.
Next, the UPE having a parent diene skeleton used in the method of the present invention and the reaction of the UPE with the diene compound by the method of the present invention will be described in detail.
UPE having a parent diene skeleton
The UPE used as a raw material in the present invention is required to have a parent diene structure in its main chain or side chain. A UPE having such a structure can be prepared by using a monomer for preparing UPE which has a parent diene structure in the dibasic acid and / or diol.
Representative monomers for preparing UPEs are as follows:
Dicarboxylic acids for preparing UPEs
[Unsaturated acids]: parent diene monomer (1)
Maleic acid, maleic anhydride, fumaric acid, mesaconic acid, citraconic acid, itaconic acid, chlorination / maleic acid, etc.
[Saturated acids]
Phthalic acid, phthalic anhydride, isophthalic acid, 3,6-endo methylene tetrahydrophthalic acid, adipic acid, sebacic acid, thiodiglycolic acid, tetrachlorophthalic anhydride, etc.
/3
Diols for preparing UPEs
[Unsaturated diols]: parent diene monomer (2)
Butenediol, Butindiol, Hexindiol
[Saturated diols]
Ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, propylene glycol, dipropylene glycol, butylene glycol, bisphenol dioxyethyl ether, neopentyl glycol, butenediol, etc.
For UPE synthesis reaction from these monomers, conventionally known methods can be used.
Reaction of UPE with a diene compound
The diene compound to be reacted with UPE having a parent diene structure prepared by the above method or other method can be selected from conventionally known dienes, e.g., 1,3-dienes such as butadiene, isoprene and chloroprene, and cyclic dienes such as cyclopentadiene and cyclohexadiene.
In the production method of the present invention, it is necessary for the diene compound to react under the condition where a part or all of the improved (modified) UPE generated by the addition reaction is dissolved. The reaction solvent capable of partially or completely dissolving the UPE produced by the method of the present invention includes aromatic hydrocarbons, cyclic ethers, acetonitrile, and various ketones or the like. In addition, when the diene compound which is a reactant is a liquid, the liquid diene itself can also serve as the reaction solvent. In this sense, UPE prepared using a fumaric acid (and / or a maleic acid) can be used as a parent diene UPE, and when cyclopentadiene is used as the diene, the target UPE can be produced even without a solvent. The preferred compounding composition of the diene compound with the parent diene UPE varies depending on the intended use of the UPE, but the degree of introduction of the Diels-Alder adduct structure is preferably 0.2 to 2 equivalents per 1 mole of the repeating unit of the unsaturated polyester. Here, 1 mole of the repeating unit is 1 mole of the repeating unit consisting of 1 equivalent of an acid residue and 1 equivalent of an ester residue. If both the acid residue and the ester residue are unsaturated (e.g., fumaric acid + butenediol), it becomes 2 equivalents.
UPE, into which the Diels-Alder adduct structure is introduced by the method of the present invention, is usually used by mixing with a vinyl monomer called reactive diluent such as styrene. The solubility of the modified UPE in the vinyl monomer or the like differs depending on its skeletal structure and its composition ratio. In addition, since the reaction rate is also a function of temperature and time, these factors are examined and appropriately selected. Most commonly, an excessive amount of diene can be used to adjust the reaction temperature and time and to determine the desired reaction rate. The preferred reaction temperature is 100°C or lower, preferably 90°C or lower from the viewpoint of side reaction suppression. A polymerization inhibitor can coexist in the reaction system as needed so that undesirable side reactions such as gelation due to unsaturated bonding of UPE can be suppressed.
The UPE of the present invention is used mostly in the so-called RIM (reaction injection molding), LIM (liquid injection molding) or RTM (resin transfer molding), and various modifiers and fillers may be added to carry out the reaction to convert to UPE.
Molding, curing
The modified UPE produced by the method of the present invention as described in the above is dissolved in an appropriate reactive diluent, if necessary, heat-cured, or, if necessary, cured by adding a curing catalyst, a curing accelerator, or various modifiers or fillers to produce useful resin molded products.
As the filler, in addition to the conventional inorganic filler, an organic filler having a bulk specific gravity of 1.3 or less, for example, fine particles of porous aromatic polyamide, can also be used.
日本語 から 英語: Multilayer film and vacuum insulating structure General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 Disclosure of the invention
Problems to be solved by the invention
[0007]
However, since aluminum is a good heat conductor, the aluminum foil will reduce the heat insulation performance of the vacuum insulating structure in which the amount of heat passing through the aluminum portion of the film is large. On the other hand, the layered structure having a nylon film as the outermost layer has a drawback because the gas barrier performance under high-humidity conditions is not satisfactory. Such a vacuum insulating structure is used in a heat insulating panel for a refrigerator or in a heat insulating wall of a house and is used in an environment that is susceptible to the influence of outside air, so there has been a demand for a vacuum insulating structure that has satisfactory gas barrier performance even when used under high-humidity conditions.
[0008]
Therefore, in such a background, the present invention is intended to provide a multilayer film and a vacuum insulating structure which have excellent gas barrier properties and excellent heat insulating performance even under high-humidity conditions.
Means for solving the problem
[0009]
Therefore, the inventor of the present invention made an intensive study in this backdrop and found that, using a multilayer film containing a gas barrier film (A), a polyester film (B), and a polyolefin film (C) having a water vapor permeability of 10 g/m2/day or lower to hermetically enclose the heat insulating material can obtain a vacuum insulating structure that has excellent gas barrier performance and excellent insulating performance even under a high-humidity condition, and achieved the present invention.
[0010]
Specifically, the gist of the present invention is described below.
(1) A vacuum insulating structure, characterized by containing a multilayer film containing a gas barrier film (A), a polyester film (B), and a polyolefin film (C) having a water vapor permeability of 10 g/m2/day or lower, and a heat insulating material, wherein the multilayer film hermetically encloses the heat insulating material.
(2) The vacuum insulating structure as described in (1) above, characterized in that, the multilayer film has a layered construction of a gas barrier film (A) / a polyester film (B) / a polyolefin film (C) having a water vapor permeability of 10 g/m2/day or lower, and the
/4
multilayer film hermetically encloses the heat insulating material, with the gas barrier film (A) being on the inner side.
(3) The vacuum insulating structure as described in (1) or (2) above, characterized in that, the gas barrier film (A) is a vinyl alcohol film.
(4) The vacuum insulating structure as described in (3) above, characterized in that, the vinyl alcohol film is a vinyl alcohol film on which aluminum is deposited.
(5) The vacuum insulating structure as described in (3) or (4) above, characterized in that, the vinyl alcohol film is a biaxially stretched polyvinyl alcohol film.
(6) The vacuum insulating structure ad described in any one of (1)~(5) above, characterized in that, the polyester film (B) is a polyethylene terephthalate film on which aluminum is deposited.
(7) A multilayer film characterized by comprising a gas barrier film (A), a polyester film (B), and a polyolefin film (C) having a water vapor permeability of 10 g/m2/day or lower.
(8) The multilayer film as described in (7) above, characterized by having a layered construction of a gas barrier film (A) / a polyester film (B) / a polyolefin film (C) having a water vapor permeability of 10 g/m2/day or lower.
(9) The multilayer film as described in (7) or (8) above, characterized in that, the gas barrier film (A) is a vinyl alcohol film.
(10) The multilayer film as described in (9) above, characterized in that, the vinyl alcohol film is a vinyl alcohol film on which aluminum is deposited.
(11) The multilayer film as described in (9) or (10) above, characterized in that, the vinyl alcohol film is a biaxially stretched polyvinyl alcohol film.
(12) The multilayer film as described in any one of (7)~(11) above, characterized in that, the polyester film (B) is a polyethylene terephthalate film on which aluminum is deposited.
Effects of the invention
[0011]
By using the polyolefin film (C) having a water vapor permeability of 10 g/m2/day or lower when the multilayer film is used to hermetically enclose the heat insulating material, the multilayer film and the vacuum insulating structure of the present invention have excellent gas barrier properties under high-humidity conditions, and further exhibit excellent heat insulation and moisture resistance.
日本語 から 英語: PRODUCTION METHOD OF FLAT FIBER BUNDLE General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 詩&文学
翻訳 - 英語 [Best mode for implementing the invention]
[0014]
Next, a preferred embodiment of the production method of a flat fiber bundle according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
The production method of a flat fiber bundle according to the present invention is a production method of a strap-like flat fiber bundle by spreading flat a multifilament consisting of a plurality of fibers, and Fig. 1 is a flowchart which schematically shows an example of the production method according to the present invention.
[0015]
Typical examples of the multifilament applicable to the production method according to the present invention are 3K (3000 fibers bundle), 6K (6000 fibers bundle), 12K (12000 fibers bundle) of untwisted carbon fibers. The applicable carbon fiber can be either acrylic type or pitch type.
/4
[0016]
However, the production method according to the present invention can also be applied to a multifilament of other type of fiber than carbon fiber (for example, glass fiber, ceramic fiber, aromatic polyamide fiber, etc.).
[0017]
As shown in Fig. 1, in the production method according to the present invention, the multifilament (F) is continuously fed from the filament feeding roller (1) and stays in the water tank (2) to soak in water for a predetermined length of time.
[0018]
In the present invention, the water in the water tank (2) is reducing water having a negative redox potential.
Ordinary water has a positive redox potential (tap water has a potential of: +400~+600 mV), but reducing water has a negative redox potential, small water molecule clusters, and excellent penetration power.
The multifilament (F) is naturally spread by being immersed in the reducing water, without being subjected to an external physical force such as ultrasonic waves.
[0019]
The reducing water used in the present invention preferably has a redox potential of −800 mV or less.
By using such reducing water having a low redox potential, the fibers constituting the multifilament can be surely spread flat in a short time to obtain a strap-like flat fiber bundle. Moreover, it is hard for the obtained flat fiber bundle to return to its original state.
[0020]
The method for producing the reducing water used in the present invention is not specifically limited, and it can be, for example, the following methods.
By bubbling a nitrogen gas or hydrogen gas in water, the oxygen concentration in the water is lowered and the redox potential is lowered.
By adding hydrazine, the oxygen concentration in the water is lowered and the redox potential is lowered.
(a) Electrolysis of water is performed by applying a high-frequency voltage having asymmetrical positive and negative peak values and/or duty ratio, thereby reducing the redox potential.
(b) The electrodes are composed of one ground electrode (cathode electrode) and 2 specially-shaped electrodes (rhombus or hexagonal mesh electrode) made of Pt and Ti wherein the anode and cathode electrodes are alternating, and a high-frequency voltage is applied to electrolyze water to lower its redox potential.
[0021]
In the present invention, among the methods described above, the method “3 (b)” is particularly preferred as the method for obtaining the reducing water.
This is because the method “3 (b)” can more easily and surely reduce water to a low redox potential (−800 mV or less) compared to other methods and can obtain reducing water that will maintain a negative redox potential for a long time.
A device used for the method “3 (b)” is disclosed in the Japanese laid-open patent publication No. 2000-239456 by the applicant of the present invention and the disclose can be used as reference for implementing the method.
[0022]
In the present invention, the multifilament (F) can be naturally spread (opened) without applying an external physical force by immersing the multifilament (F) in the reducing water as described above, and to do this, a configuration as shown in Fig. 2 may be adopted.
/5
[0023]
Fig. 2 (a) shows the fiber opening action of the 2nd roller (31) of the 2 transport rollers (3) that support and transport the multifilament (F) in the water tank (2).
Specifically, the shape of the section (cross section along the rotation axis) of the 2nd roller (31) is bulging from the two ends toward the center as shown by the tip of the arrow drawn in the figure so that the fibers can be easily spread along the surface of the roller (31).
[0024]
As shown in Fig. 2 (b), 3 or more (3 shown in the figure) transport rollers (3) are provided in the water tank (2) so that the multifilament is transported while being bent, and the 2nd roller (32) and subsequent rollers (2nd roller shown in the figure) have the fiber opening function.
Specifically, the roller (32) has the same cross-sectional shape as shown in Fig. 2 (a), so that the fibers can be easily spread along the surface of the roller (32).
[0025]
As shown in Fig. 2 (c), a flat plate (4) is provided between the transport rollers (3) that support and transport the multifilament (F) in the water tank (2), and the multifilament is transported along the surface of the flat plate (4) so that the fibers are easily spread flat.
[0026]
As shown in Fig. 2 (d), a flat belt (5) is wound around the transport rollers (3) that support and transport the multifilament (F) in the water tank (2), and the multifilament is transported along the surface of the flat belt (5) so that the fibers are easily spread flat.
[0027]
The fibers (flat fiber bundle) that have been spread flatly by being immersed in the reducing water and passing through the water tank (2) are taken out of the water tank (2) and are then continuously introduced into the 2nd water thank (6) that follows.
The 2nd water tank (6) contains an adhesive-containing liquid, and the flat fiber bundle obtained by being immersed in the reducing water is immersed in the adhesive-containing liquid in the 2nd water tank (6).
An applicable adhesive is a water-soluble glue such as laundry glue, PVA (polyvinyl alcohol), phenol resin, PTFE dispersion, epoxy resin, graphite nano-dispersion, silicone resin, glycol, water-soluble clay dispersion, other dispersion solution that contains an organic or inorganic material.
[0028]
In this way, the flat fiber bundle is immersed in the liquid containing the adhesive, so that the adhesive penetrates between the spread fibers.
Fig. 3 shows the processes up to this point, wherein the multifilament (F) consisting of a plurality of fibers becomes a flat fiber bundle with the fibers (F1) being spread flat by being immersed in the reducing water, and this flat fiber bundle (H) is immersed in the liquid containing an adhesive so that the adhesive (S) penetrates between the fibers (F1).
[0029]
In the present invention, the above-described reducing water may be used as a solvent for dissolving the adhesive, and in this way, the penetrating power of the adhesive can be increased.
Further, in the present invention, instead of using the 2nd water tank (6), the adhesive-containing liquid may be sprayed onto the fibers (flat fiber bundle) that have been spread flat by being immersed in the reducing water.
[0030]
The flat fiber bundle after being immersed in the adhesive-containing liquid is taken out from the 2nd water tank (6) and is then fed to the drying device (7) for drying treatment.
The type of the drying device (7) is not particularly limited, and it may be a heater heating device, a warm air heating device, or a heating device using far infrared rays. However, in the method according to the
/6
present invention, the drying device (7) is not necessarily provided, and natural drying may be performed.
[0031]
By drying the flat fiber bundle that has been immersed in the liquid containing the adhesive, the adhesive that has penetrated between the spread fibers is solidified.
As described above, the fibers that are spread flat are fixed in that state by the adhesive so that a flat fiber bundle which will not return to the original state over time and has a high mechanical strength can be obtained.
[0032]
The flat fiber bundle, which has passed through the drying device (6) with the adhesive being solidified, is wound around the take-up roller (8), thereby completing the production of the flat fiber bundle.
[0033]
As described above, according to the method of the present invention, it is possible to produce a strap-like flat fiber bundle by spreading the fibers flat without applying an external physical force.
However, the present invention does not completely exclude the method of applying an external physical force, and the method of the present invention and a conventional method of applying an external physical force may be combined.
[0034]
For example, it is also possible to employ a method in which an ultrasonic generator is installed in the water tank (2) and ultrasonic waves are applied to the multifilament immersed in the reducing water.
In this case, because the fiber opening action of the reducing water can sufficiently open the fibers even if the output of the ultrasonic waves is weakened, it has the effects of being able to surely prevent damages to the fibers and efficiently produce a strap-like flat fiber bundle that has the fibers sufficiently spread.
翻訳 - 英語 [Detailed description of the invention]
[0001]
[Technical field of the invention]
The present invention relates to a release agent used for the release layer of a pressure-sensitive adhesive tape or for the release layer in a release sheet of a double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive tape, and particularly relates to a release agent, which has improved heat resistance and can maintain its release performance even after being placed at a high temperature and can hardly migrate to the adhesive layer.
[0002]
[Prior art]
The pressure-sensitive adhesive tape is used in many fields because it can be bonded to an object simply by lightly pressing it. Such a pressure-sensitive adhesive tape is usually wound into a roll, the surface opposite to the tape substrate’s pressure-sensitive adhesive surface is formed by a release layer, and it is easy to wind the tape to the required length and to unwind it from the roll without having to apply an excessive force. Moreover, in a double-sided adhesive tape, etc., a release sheet which has a release layer is used on the tape substrate, so it is easy to protect the adhesive surface and to unwind it for use.
[0003]
Examples of release agents used as the release layer for such an adhesive tape or as release sheet may be silicone based, long-chain alkyl pendant based, wax based, fluorine based, or other based. Of these, the long-chain alkyl pendant-based release agent has a higher release resistance than a silicone-based release agent, it does not have the problem of scattering or migration of the silicone component to the
/3
adhesive layer from heating, and it has excellent property of being printable with an oil-based ink, so it is widely used in various adhesive tapes and sheets, for example, tapes for electronic parts that dislike the silicone component or binding tapes, masking tapes, packaging tapes, etc.
[0004]
Known long-chain alkyl pendant-based release agents include a copolymer of stearyl acrylate and acrylic acid (see, for example, Patent Document 1), a copolymer of stearyl methacrylate and acrylonitrile (see, for example, Patent Document 2), the reaction product from reacting an ethylene-vinyl alcohol copolymer with stearyl isocyanate (see, for example, Patent Document 3), polyvinyl alcohol, ethylene-vinyl alcohol copolymer, the reaction product from reacting an active hydrogen-containing polymer such as polyethyleneimine with an aliphatic isocyanate compound (see, for example, Patent Document 4), etc.
[0005]
However, these conventional long-chain alkyl pendant release agents do not have satisfactory heat resistance, and their release performance greatly declines if they are placed at a high temperature. Further, their resistance to migration to the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (particularly, resistance to migration to the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer after being placed at a high temperature) is not satisfactory, and it is desirable to improve their performance in this aspect.
[0006]
[Patent Document 1]
Japanese patent publication No. S29-3144
[Patent Document 2]
Japanese patent publication No. S44-9599
[Patent Document 3]
Japanese patent publication No. S60-30555
[Patent Document 4]
Japanese laid-open patent publication No. H5-295322
[0007]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a release agent, which has excellent heat resistance and has only a small decrease in the release performance even after being left at a high temperature and will hardly migrate to the adhesive layer.
日本語 から 英語: PROCESSING METHOD OF FERMENTED GYNOSTEMMA TEA General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 食品&乳製品
翻訳 - 英語 Specification
1. Title of the invention
Processing method of fermented gynostemma tea
2. Claims
A method for processing fermented gynostemma tea, characterized by comprising a process of shredding fresh raw gynostemma pentaphyllum into 3 cm length, and
a process of withering the shredded pieces of gynostemma pentaphyllum under the sun or with an artificial withering machine for 30 minutes to 2 hours, and
a process of 1 to 3 hours of fermentation, in which the chopped pieces of gynostemma pentaphyllum after the withering process are kneaded with a kneader and fermented in a fermentation room, and
a subsequent process of heat treatment in a rotary furnace at 150 degrees to 400 degrees C for 10 minutes to 30 minutes, and
further a process of drying in a continuous dryer at 100 degrees to 120 degrees C for 20 minutes to 30 minutes.
3. Detailed description of the invention
(Industrial field)
The present invention relates to a method for processing gynostemma pentaphyllum.
(Prior art)
Gynostemma pentaphyllum, known in Japan as Amachazuru, is a perennial vine and an edible plant of the Cucurbitaceae family that can be found everywhere in the wild mountains across Japan, its leaves are picked and dried and then brewed to become Amachazuru tea for drinking, and it is also used as a sweetener for people with diabetes or other conditions, so it is well known as a so-called healthy tea.
Conventionally, gynostemma pentaphyllum that is naturally grown or cultivated is dried in the sun or in the shade in the same way as for making normal teas and then crushed into a powder for brewing Amachazuru tea as a drink. Further, a conventional technique is described in the Japanese patent publication No. S59-33337. This prior art is an Amachazuru processing method, which is composed of cutting raw leaves and/or stems of gynostemma pentaphyllum into pieces, and
(a) a process of steaming with steam in a steaming container, and
(b) at least one process of frying with adequate stirring in an open magnetic or metal container heated to about 150 degrees~400 degrees C,
/2
and then
(c) a process of fully kneading the treated leaves and/or stems, and
(d) a process of drying at about 40 degrees to 90 degrees C for 1~several hours, and curshing into a powder as desired to obtain a processed product of Amachazuru.
(Problems to be solved by the invention)
In the same way as for making conventional green tea, fresh raw gynostemma pentaphyllum are sun-dried or shade-dried, shredded and crushed into a powder, which is brewed to make tea, the tea leaves processed in this way have a desirable yellow-green color, but the refreshing aroma unique to the tea is mostly lost, and another defect is that the tea has an undesirable raw smell. In addition, the processed product produced by the above-mentioned prior art has the advantages of sweetness, alleviated bitterness and absence of raw smell, but the processed product has a green color tone dotted with green or light brown color, and, for example, it desirable for the Amachazuru tea to have a color tone which may not be oriented to people who like the general taste of black tea but is preferred by people who look for an general product with health promotion benefits.
(Means for solving the problems)
In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, fresh raw gynostemma pentaphyllum was shredded into small pieces of about 3 cm in length, which were withered for 30 minutes to 2 hours with sunlight or a withering machine to have a moisture content of 55 to 65%, and then it was kneaded in a kneader for 1 hour to 3 hours and then fermented in a fermentation room at a relative humidity of 95% and a temperature of 20 degrees to 25 degrees C. Then, heat treatment was performed in a rotary furnace, fermentation was stopped, and drying was performed in a continuous dryer to obtain a product, and these processes were adopted as the means to solve the problems.
(Mechanism)
With such a means, the small pieces of the raw gynostemma pentaphyllum are withered to have a moisture content of 55 to 65% in a withering machine, and the water content is homogenized by kneading with a kneading machine so that it is easier to ferment. Fermentation is the most important process, and care needs to be taken to ensure that the room temperature does not exceed 27 degrees C so that the small pieces are not evaporated by the heat. A suitably fermented product has a copper color, but excessive fermentation will darken the product and makes the product lose the tea aroma.
Fermentation is stopped subsequently in the rotary furnace and the product is dried in a continuous dryer to enable mass production of good products.
翻訳 - 英語 1 Geological Characteristics and Rock Assemblages of the "Ophiolite Suite" in Longsheng Region
The Longsheng Region in northern Guangxi is located at the southeastern edge of Yangtze Block; the Danzhou Group distributed here are mainly composed of three rock units, namely, (1) sedimentary rocks, (2) basic volcanic lavas (spilites), and (3) basic-ultrabasic rock assemblages.
1.1 Sedimentary Rocks
Based on rock characteristics, people have divided the Danzhou Group into Baizhu Formation, Hetong Formation and Gongdong Formation, among which, Baizhu Formation comes into angular unconformable contact with the underlying Sibao Group. As for the sedimentary rocks in the region, they mainly consist of muddy and silty clastic rocks of terrigenous origin followed by carbonatites, and are mixed with few silicolites. However, in contrast to typical deep sea silicolites, the SiO2 content of the silicolites there is less than 88% ①; besides, they have a maximum thickness of more than 4000 m, featuring low greenschist facies in terms of metamorphism.
1.2 Volcanic Rocks
The volcanic rocks in the region, located in the fourth stratum of Gongdong Formation, are widely developed in the areas of Longsheng, Sanmenjie and Dadi (see Figure 1) and characterized by thick lavas or pillow-shaped basalts. Lithologically, they include spilites, intermediate basic rocks, breccia lavas, basic tuffs, with basic volcanic lavas (spilites) accounting for the majority with occasionally seen rhyolites which are the product of underwater volcanic eruption.
1.3 Basic-ultrabasic Intrusions
The mafic-ultramafic rocks in Longsheng Region are distributed in the NNE direction, and concentrated in the areas of Longsheng and Sanmenjie (see Figure 1). These rocks intrude into the metasedimentary or volcanic rocks of Danzhou group in the form of sill or dike, while the edges of some parts are developed with strong tectonic deformation whose tectonic line is in the same direction as the extension direction of mafic rocks.
中国語 から 英語: Riding the Momentum of the Tumor Immunotherapy Age, Genecast Joined Hands with HalioDx, a European Tumor Microenvironment Diagnostic Technology Company, to Launch an Immune Score Product (Immunoscore®) in China General field: マーケティング Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
翻訳 - 英語 Riding the Momentum of the Tumor Immunotherapy Age, Genecast Joined Hands with HalioDx, a European Tumor Microenvironment Diagnostic Technology Company, to Launch an Immune Score Product (Immunoscore®) in China
Recently, Genecast Biotechnology Co., an industrial leader in precision tumor therapy in China, announced an exclusive partnership with HalioDx, a European tumor microenvironment diagnostic technology company, to provide an immunodiagnostic product - Immunoscore® (Immunoscore) for Chinese doctors and patients for the first time. According to the agreement, Genecast has the exclusive right of sale, promotion, and management of Immunoscore® in China.
Immunoscore® is a breakthrough immunodiagnostic platform that has been certified under European Union CE-IVD. By analyzing tumor immune microenvironments based on immunohistochemistry and advanced digital pathology, Immunoscore® provides a better guidance to oncologists to optimize the medical treatment and management of patients. It has been successfully applied in the colon cancer field and many clinical evidences have been accumulated. Immunoscore® outperforms traditional TNM and MSI in predicting the risk of colon cancer recurrence1). In addition, Immunoscore® has been covered by the medical insurance in some countries. Genecast will exclusively use CE-IVD certified HalioDx reagents, test procedures, digital pathology and image analysis procedures to ensure the accuracy and repeatability of immune-scoring results.
Immunoscore® originates from the original achievement of the international academic organization led by Prof. Jérôme Galon from the Cordeliers Research Center in Paris, France. The “Immunoscore” proposed by Prof. Galon can be used to predict the prognosis of patients and assist in clinical decision-making based on quantification of infiltration levels of CD3+ T-cells and CD8+ T-cells both in the core of the tumor and in its infiltrative margins, taking into account clinical indicators.
In an international, multicenter clinical study assessing the prognosis of colon cancer led by the famous Society for Immunotherapy of Cancer (SITC), 3,539 samples were collected from patients with stage I-III colon cancer in 13 countries (including China) and 14 study centers, and 2,681 samples were included in the analysis after quality control screening. The results have demonstrated that Immunoscore can be used as a predictive indicator for predicting the recurrence and survival of colon cancer patients, and its predictive value is superior to other indicators, such as tumor differentiation degree, mucinous colloid carcinoma, MSI, sex, etc. This study supports the inclusion of Immunoscore in tumor staging and TNM-immunoscore. This landmark study was published in May 2018 in The Lancet, a top medical journal, and was endowed with a review article by the journal, which attracted wide attention in the medical industry.
Mr. Vincent Fert, the CEO of HalioDx, indicated that, “HalioDx focuses on developing pioneer immunodiagnostic products, and providing oncologists with cancer-related immunodiagnostic services and guidance in tumor diagnosis and treatment to promote the development of precision medicine in the era of tumor immunotherapy and combined treatment with tumor immunotherapy. So, we have entered into a partnership with Genecast and looked forward to making contributions to precision medicine in China through our joint efforts.”
“We are very pleased to partner with HalioDx. HalioDx’s choice to work with Genecast shows its high recognition of our comprehensive strengths and marketing ability in the Chinese market.” Mr. Bo Du, founder and CEO of Genecast, said, “Immunoscore® is guided by biomarkers and is a paragon of precision medicine in clinical practice. We highly recognize its values, and we are very pleased to be able to promote it in China so that the Chinese patients can receive better healthcare solutions.”
With the development of tumor immunotherapy, we have gradually found that the tumor immune microenvironment not only can affect the structure, function and metabolism of the tissues in which a tumor is located but can also have a significant impact on the immunotherapy. At present, the analysis of the tumor immune microenvironment has become an important field to explore the effect of tumor immunotherapy. As an analytic assay of tumor immune responsiveness, Immunoscore may create a revolution in the thinking of clinical study designs and ultimately contribute to the improvement of cancer prevention and control.
References:
1) Immunoscore® was stronger than clinical parameters to predict survival
Source: F. Pagès et.al. The Lancet May 2018
About HalioDx
HalioDx, a French researcher and developer of tumor immunodiagnostic products, provides oncologists with cancer-related immunodiagnostic services and diagnostic solutions based on immunohistochemistry and pathological imaging and digital analysis technology. The main products of HalioDx include breakthrough immunodiagnosis platform Immunoscore® and HalioSeek®. Please visit www.haliodx.com for more information on HalioDx.
About Genecast
Genecast (Beijing) Biotechnology Co. is a Chinese leader in the field of precision tumor therapy. Based on a number of technology platforms, including NGS, IHC, ddPCR and microarray technology, the company provides patients and doctors with a detection system which has been fully validated in clinic. Genecast is dedicated to providing patients and doctors with personalized cancer diagnosis and treatment regimens to improve patients’ survival rate and quality of life.
In addition, Genecast also uses multidimensional technical methods and actively collaborates with pharmaceutical and biotechnology companies at home and abroad to identify and validate the tumor markers which can be used in clinical trials, treatment and concomitant diagnosis. Please visit www.genecast.com.cn for more information on Genecast.
朝鮮語 から 英語: Notice on Submitting Opinions General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
原書のテキスト - 朝鮮語 [구체적인 거절이유]
1. 이 출원의 특허청구범위의 청구항 제14항에 기재된 발명은 아래와 같이 그 출원 전에 국 내 또는 국외에서 반포된 간행물에 게재된 발명이거나 전기통신회선을 통하여 공중이 이용 가능하게 된 발명이므로 특허법 제29조제1항제2호에 해당되어 특허를 받을 수 없습니다.
- 아래 -
인용발명 1 : 일본 공개특허공보 특개평11-209316호(1999.08.03.) 1부.
이 출원의 청구항 제14항은 “제7항의 방법에 따라서 수득되는, 정제된 트랜스-1,1,1-트리 플루오로-3-클로로-2-프로펜(1233zd(E))”을 청구하고 있습니다.
한편, 인용발명 1 에는 ‘추출 용매의 존재 하에 트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로로-2- 프로펜(트랜스-1-클로로-3,3,3-트리플루오로프로펜과 동일, 1233zd(E))과 1,1,1,3,3-펜타플 루오로프로판을 포함하는 혼합물을 추출 증류에 따라 분리하는 방법에 의해 얻어지는, 트랜 스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로로-2-프로펜’이 개시되어 있습니다(청구항 1, 5, 단락 [0012] 참조).
양 발명을 대비하면, 인용발명 1에서는 청구항 제14항의 트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3- 클로로-2-프로펜(1233zd(E)) 화합물을 개시하고 있다는 점에서는 동일하나, 청구항 제14항 의 제7항의 방법이 구체적으로 개시되어 있지 않다는 점에서 차이가 있습니다.
그러나, 청구항 제14항의 ‘제7항의 방법에 따라서 수득되는, 정제된 트랜스-1,1,1-트리플 루오로-3-클로로-2-프로펜(1233zd(E))’을 ‘트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로로-2-프로펜 (1233zd(E))’에 해당하는 구성으로 판단할 경우, 이는 어떠한 제조(정제)방법으로 수득되었 던지 결국 얻어지는 생성물이 정해지면, 생성물에 해당하는 화합물의 구성을 보고 판단해야 하는 일정한 특성(제조방법)을 갖는 물의 발명으로 해석되므로, 이와 같이 화합물의 정제방 법을 한정한다고 하여도 청구대상인 트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로로-2-프로펜 (1233zd(E)) 화합물의 구성이 변하는 것은 아닙니다.
따라서, 청구항 제14항과 인용발명 1은 발명의 구성이 실질적으로 동일합니다.
청구항 적용 인용문헌
제14항 인용발명 1
2. 이 출원의 특허청구범위의 청구항 제1항 내지 제21항에 기재된 발명은 아래와 같이 그 출원 전에 이 발명이 속하는 기술분야에서 통상의 지식을 가진 자가 용이하게 발명할 수 있 는 것이므로 특허법 제29조제2항에 따라 특허를 받을 수 없습니다.
- 아래 -
인용발명 1 : 일본 공개특허공보 특개평11-209316호(1999.08.03.) 1부.
인용발명 2 : 일본 공개특허공보 특개2010-202640호(2010.09.16.) 1부.
2-1. 이 출원의 청구항 제1항은 “염소화 화합물을 포함하는 추출 용매의 존재 하에서 추출 증류를 사용하여 하이드로클로로플루오로올레핀 및 클로로플루오로카본을 포함하는 혼합물 로부터 클로로플루오로카본을 추출하여, 정제된 하이드로클로로플루오로올레핀을 형성하는 단계를 포함하는, 하이드로클로로플루오로올레핀으로부터 오염 물질을 제거하는 방법”을 청 구하고 있습니다.
한편, 인용발명 1에는 ‘염소에 의해 치환된 화합물을 포함하는 추출 용매의 존재 하에서 추출 증류를 사용하여 트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로로-2-프로펜(1233zd(E), 하이드 로클로로플루오로올레핀의 일종)과 1,1,1,3,3-펜타플루오로프로판을 포함하는 혼합물로부터 트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로로-2-프로펜을 분리하는 방법’이 개시되어 있습니다(청 구항 1, 5, 단락 [0012], [0013] 참조).
양 발명을 대비하면, 추출 용매의 존재 하에서 추출 증류를 사용하여 하이드로클로로플루 오로올레핀(트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로로-2-프로펜)을 얻었다는 점에서 동일하나, 인용발명 1에는 하이드로클로로플루오로올레핀과 함께 클로로플루오로카본을 포함하는 혼합 물로부터 클로로플루오로카본을 추출하여, 오염 물질을 제거한다는 내용을 구체적으로 개시 하고 있지 않다는 점에서 차이가 있습니다.
그러나, 인용발명 1에는 ‘1233zd(E) 및 이와 근접한 비점을 갖는 화합물(245fa)의 혼합물 로부터 1233zd(E)와 245fa 화합물을 분리하기 위해서는 추출 증류법이 효과적이며, 1233zd(E)보다 충분히 높은 비점을 갖는 추출 용매를 이용하는 것이 바람직하다’는 내용을 개시하고 있고(단락 [0004], [0012] 참조), 추출 증류를 이용한 1-클로로-3,3,3-트리플루 오로프로펜(1233zd)의 정제 방법을 개시하고 있는 인용발명 2에는 ‘높은 비점을 갖고, 분리 해야할 성분의 비휘발도를 변화시키는 할로겐화 탄화수소를 포함하는 추출 용매의 존재 하 에서, 추출 증류를 사용하여 하이드로클로로플루오로올레핀(1233zd)과 클로로플루오로카본 (1-클로로-1,3,3,3-테트라플루오로프로판)을 포함하는 혼합물로부터 클로로플루오로카본을 추출하여, 하이드로클로로플루오로올레핀을 정제한다’는 내용을 개시하고 있으며(청구항 1, 5, 단락 [0006] 참조), 이러한 정제 방법에서 추출되는 클로로플루오로카본을 하이드로클로 로플루오로올레핀으로부터 제거되는 오염 물질로 볼 수 있는 바, 이 발명이 속하는 기술 분 야의 통상의 기술자라면 추출 증류법을 개시하고 있는 인용발명 1 및 2를 결합하여, 높은 비점을 갖는 추출 용매를 이용하여 하이드로클로로플루오로올레핀으로부터 오염 물질인 클 로로플루오로카본을 추출하여 제거하는 방법을 용이하게 예측할 수 있으므로, 구성의 곤란 성이 인정되지 않습니다.
따라서, 청구항 제1항은 통상의 기술자가 인용발명 1 및 2로부터 용이하게 발명할 수 있 는 것으로 볼 수 있습니다.
2-2. 이 출원의 청구항 제2항 및 제3항은 제1항의 종속항으로서, ’염소화 화합물은 적어도 3개의 염소 원자로 구성되는 것(제2항) 및 추출 용매는 기준끓는점이 약 60℃ 내지 약 10 0℃인 것(제3항)’으로 한정한 것입니다.
그러나, 인용발명 1에는 ‘추출 용매는 할로겐(염소)에 따라 치환된 화합물일 수 있으며, 비 점이 35℃ 내지 200℃이다’는 내용이 개시되어 있고(단락 [0013] 참조), 인용발명 2에는 ‘추 출 용매는 할로겐화 탄화수소(CFnCl3-nCHXCClFmH2-m, X = Cl, n = 0~3, m = 0~2의 정수) 일 수 있으며, 표준 비점이 60℃ 내지 120℃의 범위에 있다’는 내용을 개시하고 있으며(청 구항 1, 5, 단락 [0042], [0049] 참조), 하이드로클로로플루오로올레핀의 분리가 용이하도 록 높은 비점을 갖는 추출 용매를 이용하는 것은 통상적인 사항으로서, 공정상 편이성이나 효율성을 고려하여 임의로 선택할 수 있는 사항에 불과하기 때문에 통상의 기술자가 별다른 어려움 없이 도출해 낼 수 있습니다.
따라서, 청구항 제2항 및 제3항은 통상의 기술자가 인용발명 1 및 2로부터 용이하게 발명 할 수 있는 것으로 볼 수 있습니다.
2-3. 이 출원의 청구항 제4항 및 제5항은 제1항의 종속항으로서, ‘하이드로클로로플루오로 올레핀은 트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로로-2-프로펜(1233zd(E))을 포함하는 것(제2항) 및 정제된 하이드로클로로플루오로올레핀은 약 500 ppm 이하의 클로로플루오로카본을 포 함하는 정제된 트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로로-2-프로펜(1233zd(E))인 것(제3항)’으 로 한정한 것입니다.
그러나, 인용발명 1에는 ‘추출 증류에 의해 트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로로-2-프로 펜(1233zd(E))을 분리한다’는 내용이 개시되어 있고(청구항 1 참조), 인용발명 2에는 ‘불순 물인 클로로플루오로카본(244fa)을 추출하여, 표준 비점이 39.0℃인 시스-1,1,1-트리플루오 로-3-클로로-2-프로펜(1233zd(Z))을 정제한다’는 내용을 개시하고 있어(청구항 1, 단락 [0009], [0011], [0029] 참조), 표준 비점이 21.0℃인 트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로 로-2-프로펜(1233zd(E))은 불순물인 클로로플루오로카본과 비점의 차이가 크기 때문에 추 출 증류에 의해 정제하기 더 용이할 것이라는 것을 알 수 있으며, 불순물인 클로로플루오로 카본을 제거하여 미량(500ppm 이하)을 포함하도록 정제하는 것은 통상적인 사항으로서, 공 정상 편이성이나 효율성을 고려하여 임의로 선택할 수 있는 사항에 불과하기 때문에 통상의 기술자가 별다른 어려움 없이 도출해 낼 수 있습니다.
따라서, 청구항 제4항 및 제5항은 통상의 기술자가 인용발명 1 및 2로부터 용이하게 발명 할 수 있는 것으로 볼 수 있습니다.
2-4. 이 출원의 청구항 제6항은 제1항의 종속항으로서, ‘오염 물질은 사염화탄소 및 트리클 로로플루오로메탄(R11) 중 적어도 하나를 포함하는 것’으로 한정한 것입니다.
그러나, 인용발명 1에는 ‘트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로로-2-프로펜(1233zd(E))을 1,1,1,3,3-펜타플루오로프로판과 분리한다’는 내용이 개시되어 있고(청구항 1 참조), 인용발 명 2에는 ‘1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로로-2-프로펜(1233zd)을 1-클로로-1,3,3,3-테트라플 루오로프로판(244fa)과 분리하여 정제한다’는 내용을 개시하고 있으며(청구항 1, 단락 [0009], [0011], [0029] 참조), 오염 물질로 사염화탄소 및 트리클로로플루오로메탄을 포 함하고 있지 않다는 점에서 차이가 있으나, 통상의 기술자라면 인용발명 1 및 2를 결합하여 비점이 지극히 가까운 오염 물질을 포함하는 트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로로-2-프로 펜(1233zd(E)) 혼합물로부터 높은 비점을 갖는 추출 용매를 이용하여 오염 물질의 비휘발도 를 변화시켜 분리시키는 것을 용이하게 예측할 수 있는 바, 1233zd(E)와 비점이 가까운 다 양한 종류의 오염 물질을 포함하는 혼합물을 정제하는 것 역시 통상의 기술자가 별다른 어 려움 없이 도출해 낼 수 있습니다.
따라서, 청구항 제6항은 통상의 기술자가 인용발명 1 및 2로부터 용이하게 발명할 수 있 는 것으로 볼 수 있습니다.
2-5. 이 출원의 청구항 제7항은 “염소화 화합물을 포함하는 추출 용매의 존재 하에서 추출 증류를 사용하여 트리클로로플루오로메탄(R11) 및 트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로로
-2-프로펜(1233zd(E))을 포함하는 혼합물로부터 트리클로로플루오로메탄(R11)을 추출하여, 정제된 트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로로-2-프로펜(1233zd(E))을 형성하는 단계를 포 함하는, 하이드로클로로플루오로올레핀으로부터 오염 물질을 제거하는 방법”을 청구하고 있 습니다.
한편, 인용발명 1에는 ‘염소에 의해 치환된 화합물을 포함하는 추출 용매의 존재 하에서 추출 증류를 사용하여 트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로로-2-프로펜 (1233zd (E)) 과 1,1,1,3,3-펜타플루오로프로판을 포함하는 혼합물로부터 트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클 로로-2-프로펜을 분리하는 방법’이 개시되어 있습니다(청구항 1, 5, 단락 [0012], [0013] 참조).
양 발명을 대비하면, 추출 용매의 존재 하에서 추출 증류를 사용하여 트랜스-1,1,1-트리 플루오로-3-클로로-2-프로펜을 얻었다는 점에서 동일하나, 인용발명 1에는 1233zd(E)와 함께 트리클로로플루오로메탄을 포함하는 혼합물로부터 트리클로로플루오로메탄을 추출하 여, 오염 물질을 제거한다는 내용을 구체적으로 개시하고 있지 않다는 점에서 차이가 있습 니다.
그러나, 인용발명 1에는 ‘1233zd(E) 및 이와 근접한 비점을 갖는 화합물의 혼합물로부터 1233zd(E)와 화합물을 분리하기 위해서는 추출 증류법이 효과적이며, 1233zd(E)보다 충분 히 높은 비점을 갖는 추출 용매를 이용하는 것이 바람직하다’는 내용을 개시하고 있고(단락 [0004], [0012] 참조), 추출 증류를 이용한 1-클로로-3,3,3-트리플루오로프로펜(1233zd)의 정제 방법을 개시하고 있는 인용발명 2에는 ‘높은 비점을 갖고, 분리해야할 성분의 비휘발도 를 변화시키는 할로겐화 탄화수소를 포함하는 추출 용매의 존재 하에서, 추출 증류를 사용 하여 1233zd와 클로로플루오로카본(1-클로로-1,3,3,3-테트라플루오로프로판)을 포함하는 혼합물로부터 클로로플루오로카본을 추출하여, 1233zd를 정제한다’는 내용을 개시하고 있으 며(청구항 1, 5, 단락 [0006] 참조), 오염 물질로 트리클로로플루오로메탄을 구체적으로 개 시하고 있지는 않지만, 이 발명이 속하는 기술 분야의 통상의 기술자라면 비점이 지극히 가 까운 오염 물질을 포함하는 트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로로-2-프로펜(1233zd(E)) 혼 합물로부터 높은 비점을 갖는 추출 용매를 이용하여 오염 물질의 비휘발도를 변화시켜 분리 시킬 수 있으므로, 1233zd(E)와 비점이 가까운 트리클로로플루오로메탄과 같은 오염 물질을 추출하여 제거하는 방법을 용이하게 예측할 수 있는 바, 구성의 곤란성이 인정되지 않습니 다.
따라서, 청구항 제7항은 통상의 기술자가 인용발명 1 및 2로부터 용이하게 발명할 수 있 는 것으로 볼 수 있습니다.
2-6. 이 출원의 청구항 제8항 내지 제11항은 제7항의 종속항으로서, ’염소화 화합물은 3개 또는 4개의 염소 원자로 구성되는 것(제8항), 염소화 화합물은 1개 또는 2개의 탄소 원자로 구성되는 것(제9항), 추출 용매는 트리클로로에틸렌, 사염화탄소, 클로로포름, 메틸 클로로포 름, 및 이들의 혼합물로 이루어진 군으로부터 선택되는 유기염소제를 포함하는 것(제10항) 및 추출 용매는 기준끓는점이 약 60℃ 이상인 것(제11항)’으로 한정한 것입니다.
그러나, 인용발명 1에는 ‘추출 용매는 할로겐(염소)에 따라 치환된 화합물일 수 있으며, 비 점이 35℃ 내지 200℃이다’는 내용이 개시되어 있고(단락 [0013] 참조), 인용발명 2에는 ‘추 출 용매는 할로겐화 탄화수소(CFnCl3-nCHXCClFmH2-m, X = Cl, n = 0~3, m = 0~2의 정수) 일 수 있으며, 표준 비점이 60℃ 내지 120℃의 범위에 있다’는 내용을 개시하고 있으며(청 구항 1, 5, 단락 [0042], [0049] 참조), 1234zd(E)의 분리가 용이하도록 높은 비점을 갖는 다양한 종류의 추출 용매를 이용하는 것은 통상적인 사항으로서, 공정상 편이성이나 효율성 을 고려하여 임의로 선택할 수 있는 사항에 불과하기 때문에 통상의 기술자가 별다른 어려 움 없이 도출해 낼 수 있습니다.
따라서, 청구항 제8항 내지 제11항은 통상의 기술자가 인용발명 1 및 2로부터 용이하게 발명할 수 있는 것으로 볼 수 있습니다.
2-7. 이 출원의 청구항 제12항 및 제13항은 제7항의 종속항으로서, ‘1233zd(E)에 대한 추 출 용매의 중량비는 약 0.1 내지 10인 것(제12항) 및 1233zd(E)에 대한 추출 용매의 중량 비는 약 1 내지 3인 것(제13항)’으로 한정한 것입니다.
그러나, 인용발명 2에는 ‘원료 100 질량부에 대해서 추출 용매 10~10000 질량부를 이용 할 수 있고, 100~2000 질량부가 바람직하다’는 내용을 개시하고 있으며(단락 [0051] 참 조), 적절한 양의 추출 용매를 이용하는 것은 통상적인 사항으로서, 공정상 편이성이나 효율 성을 고려하여 임의로 선택할 수 있는 사항에 불과하기 때문에 통상의 기술자가 별다른 어 려움 없이 도출해 낼 수 있습니다.
따라서, 청구항 제12항 및 제13항은 통상의 기술자가 인용발명 1 및 2로부터 용이하게 발명할 수 있는 것으로 볼 수 있습니다.
2-8. 이 출원의 청구항 제14항은 ‘제7항의 방법에 따라서 수득되는, 정제된 트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로로-2-프로펜(1233zd(E))’을 청구하고 있습니다.
그러나, 이는 앞선 거절이유 1-1.에서 살핀 바와 같이, 인용발명 1에는 ‘추출 용매의 존재 하에 트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로로-2-프로펜(트랜스-1-클로로-3,3,3-트리플루오로 프로펜과 동일, 1233zd(E))과 1,1,1,3,3-펜타플루오로프로판을 포함하는 혼합물을 추출 증 류에 따라 분리하는 방법에 의해 얻어지는, 트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로로-2-프로 펜’이 개시되어 있으며(청구항 1, 5, 단락 [0012] 참조), 이는 어떠한 제조(정제)방법으로 수득되었던지 결국 얻어지는 생성물이 정해지면, 생성물에 해당하는 화합물의 구성을 보고 판단해야하는 일정한 특성(제조방법)을 갖는 물의 발명으로 해석되므로, 이와 같이 화합물의 정제방법을 한정한다고 하여도 청구대상인 트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로로-2-프로펜 (1233zd(E)) 화합물의 구성이 변하는 것은 아닙니다.
또한, 제7항의 정제방법을 고려하더라도, 앞선 거절이유 2-5.에서 살핀 바와 같이, 인용발 명 2에는 ‘높은 비점을 갖고, 분리해야할 성분의 비휘발도를 변화시키는 할로겐화 탄화수소 를 포함하는 추출 용매의 존재 하에서, 추출 증류를 사용하여 1233zd와 클로로플루오로카본 (1-클로로-1,3,3,3-테트라플루오로프로판)을 포함하는 혼합물로부터 클로로플루오로카본을 추출하여, 1233zd를 정제한다’는 내용을 개시하고 있으며(청구항 1, 5, 단락 [0006] 참조), 1233zd(E)와 비점이 가까운 트리클로로플루오로메탄과 같은 오염 물질을 추출하여 제거하 는 정제 방법에 의해 수득되는 정제된 트랜스-1,1,1-트리플루오로-3-클로로-2-프로펜 (1233zd(E))을 용이하게 예측할 수 있습니다.
따라서, 청구항 제14항은 통상의 기술자가 인용발명 1 또는 인용발명 1 및 2로부터 용이 하게 발명할 수 있는 것으로 볼 수 있습니다
2-9. 이 출원의 청구항 제15항은 “오염 물질을 포함하는 하이드로클로로플루오로올레핀을 포함하는 공급 혼합물을 제1 증류탑으로 공급하는 단계 및 염소화 화합물을 포함하는 추출 용매를 사용하여 제1 증류탑에서 공급 혼합물로부터 오염 물질을 추출하여, 정제된 하이드 로클로로플루오로올레핀을 포함하는 오버헤드 스트림 및 오염 물질 및 추출 용매를 포함하 는 하부 스트림을 형성하는 단계를 포함하는 증류 방법”을 청구하고 있습니다.
한편, 앞선 거절이유 2-1.에서 살핀 바와 같이, 인용발명 1 및 2에는 ‘불순물을 포함하는 하이드로클로로플루오로올레핀(1233zd)를 포함하는 혼합물을 염소 화합물을 포함하는 추출 용매를 사용하여 추출 증류하여, 정제하는 방법’이 개시되어 있으며, 인용발명 1에는 ‘분리 방법은 증류탑을 이용하여 실시할 수 있으며, 추출 용매를 공급 원료의 공급단보다 상단으 로 도입하고, 추출 용매와 1233zd(E)를 회수하는 추출 증류를 실시한다’는 내용을(단락 [0014] 참조), 인용발명 2에는 ‘증류탑을 이용하며, 추출 용매를 공급 원료의 공급단보다 상 단으로 도입하고, 탑 상단으로부터 1233zd를 추출하고, 탑 하단으로부터 추출 용매와 불순 물을 회수하는 추출 증류를 실시한다’는 내용을 개시하고 있으므로(단락 [0052], [0053] 참 조), 제1 증류탑을 이용하여 추출 증류를 실시하는 증류 방법을 용이하게 예측할 수 있으므 로, 구성의 곤란성이 인정되지 않습니다.
따라서, 청구항 제15항은 통상의 기술자가 인용발명 1 및 2로부터 용이하게 발명할 수 있 는 것으로 볼 수 있습니다
2-10. 이 출원의 청구항 제16항은 제15항의 종속항으로서, ‘하부 스트림을 제2 증류탑으로 공급하는 단계 및 오염 물질을 제2 증류탑에서 추출 용매로부터 분리하여 오염 물질을 포함 하는 제2 오버헤드 스트림 및 추출 용매를 포함하는 제2 하부 스트림을 형성하는 단계를 추 가로 포함하는 것’으로 한정하고 있습니다.
그러나, 인용발명 1에는 ‘추출된 피처리물의 일부와 추출 용매의 혼합물은 스트리핑 등의 조작에 따라 추출 용매를 분리 제거하거나, 한층 더 정제 처리를 가해 회수할 수 있다’는 내 용을 개시하고 있고(단락 [0015] 참조), 인용발명 2에는 ‘추출된 원료의 일부와 추출 용매 의 혼합물은 스트리핑, 증류 등의 조작에 따라 분리하고, 추출 용매는 순환시켜 추출증류에 재사용할 수 있다’는 내용을 개시하고 있으며(단락 [0054] 참조), 공정상 편이성이나 효율성 을 고려하여 오염 물질과 추출 용매를 증류에 의해 분리하는 것은 통상적인 사항으로서, 통 상의 기술자가 별다른 어려움 없이 도출해 낼 수 있습니다.
따라서, 청구항 제16항은 통상의 기술자가 인용발명 1 및 2로부터 용이하게 발명할 수 있 는 것으로 볼 수 있습니다.
翻訳 - 英語 [Specific reasons for refusal]
1. As mentioned below, the invention specified in claim 14 of Claims of the present application is an invention that has been published in domestic or international official gazettes or an invention that has been made available to the public through electronic communication means, so it is unpatentable according to No. 2, Item 1, Article 29, Patent Law.
- As shown below -
Cited invention 1: Japanese Patent Publication No. 11-209316 (3 August 1999).
Claim 14 of the present application requests for the protection of “a purified trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (1233zd(E)) obtained in accordance with the method of claim 7”.
In one aspect, the cited invention 1 discloses “a trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene obtained by the following method: separating a mixture containing trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (the same as trans-1-chloro-3,3,3-trifluoropropene, 1233zd(E)) and 1,1,1,3,3-pentafluoropropane using extractive distillation in the presence of an extractive solvent" (refer to claims 1 and 5; Paragraph [0012]).
A comparison of two inventions shows that their similarity lies in that the cited invention 1 discloses the trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (1233zd(E)) compound of claim 14, and their difference lies in that it does not disclose the method of claim 7 of claim 14.
However, since “a purified trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (1233zd(E)) obtained in accordance with the method of claim 7" of claim 14 is identified to have a composition corresponding to “trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (1233zd(E))”, no matter which preparation (purification) method is used to obtain the compound, as long as the final product generated is determined, the invention is construed as an invention for a substance having certain features (preparation method) as determined by the composition of the compound corresponding to the product generated. Therefore, even if the purification method for a compound is defined, the composition of the claimed compound, i.e. trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (1233zd(E)), does not change.
Therefore, the invention of claim 14 and the cited invention 1 are essentially identical in terms of composition.
Claims
Applicable reference document
14 Cited invention 1
2. As mentioned below, the invention specified in claims 1 to 21 of Claims of the present application can be readily envisaged by persons familiar with all the ordinary technical knowledge in the technical filed of the invention (those skilled in the art) prior to the application, so the invention is unpatentable according to Item 2, Article 29, Patent Law.
- Continued on the next page -
Cited invention 1: Japanese Patent Publication No. 11-209316 (3 August 1999).
Cited invention 2: Japanese Patent Publication No. 2010-202640 (16 September 2010).
2-1. Claim 1 of the present application requests for the protection of “a method for removing a contaminant from a hydrochlorofluoroolefin comprising: extracting a chlorofluorocarbon from a mixture comprising a hydrochlorofluoroolefin and the chlorofluorocarbon using extractive distillation in the presence of an extractive solvent comprising a chlorinated compound to form a purified hydrochlorofluoroolefin”.
In one aspect, the cited invention 1 discloses “a method for separating trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (1233zd(E)) from a mixture containing trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (1233zd(E); a hydrochlorofluoroolefin) and 1,1,1,3,3-pentafluoropropane using extractive distillation in the presence of an extractive solvent containing a chlorine-substituted compound” (refer to claims 1 and 5; Paragraphs [0012] and [0013]).
A comparison of two inventions shows that their similarity lies in that a hydrochlorofluoroolefin (trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene) is obtained by using extractive distillation in the presence of an extractive solvent, and their difference lies in that the cited invention 1 does not disclose the extraction of a hydrochlorofluoroolefin from a mixture containing the hydrochlorofluoroolefin and a chlorofluorocarbon to remove a contaminant.
However, the cited invention 1 discloses that “the extractive distillation method is effective in separating 1233zd (E) and a compound with a similar boiling point (245fa) from a mixture containing 1233zd (E) and 245fa, and an extractive solvent having a boiling point higher than that of 1233zd (E) is preferably used” (refer to Paragraphs [0004] and [0012]). The cited invention 2 that discloses a method for purifying 1-chloro-3,3,3-trifluoropropene (1233zd) using extractive distillation discloses “extracting a chlorofluorocarbon from a mixture containing a hydrochlorofluoroolefin (1233zd) and the chlorofluorocarbon (1-chloro-1,3,3,3-tetrafluoropropane) using extractive distillation in the presence of a halogenated hydrocarbon-containing extractive solvent that has a high boiling point and changes the relative volatility of the components to be separated to purify the hydrochlorofluoroolefin” (refer to claims 1 and 5; Paragraph [0006]), wherein the chlorofluorocarbon extracted using the purification method can be deemed as a contaminant removed from the hydrochlorofluoroolefin. It’s easy for those skilled in the technical field of the invention (those skilled in the art) to envisage the method for extracting and removing a contaminant, i.e.chlorofluorocarbon, from a hydrochlorofluoroolefin using an extractive solvent having a high boiling point based on the cited inventions 1 and 2 that disclose the extractive distillation method, so there is no difficulty in envisaging the composition of the invention.
Therefore, it’s easy for those skilled in the art to obtain claim 1 based on the cited inventions 1 and 2.
2-2. As dependent claims of claim 1, claims 2 and 3 of the present application define that “the chlorinated compound is comprised of at least three chlorine atoms (claim 2) and the extractive solvent has a normal boiling point between about 60°C and about 100°C (claim 3)”.
However, the cited invention 1 discloses that “the extractive solvent may be a halogen-substituted (chlorine-substituted) compound having a boiling point between 35°C and 200°C” (refer to Paragraph [0013]), and the cited invention 2 discloses that “the extractive solvent may be a halogenated hydrocarbon (CFnCl3-nCHXCClFmH2-m, X= Cl, n= an integer between 0 and 3, m= an integer between 0 and 2) having a normal boiling point ranging from 60°C to 120°C” (refer to claims 1 and 5; Paragraphs [0042] and [0049]). Using an extractive solvent having a high boiling point to separate a hydrochlorofluoroolefin is a customary means that can be optionally selected in consideration of the convenience and/or effectiveness of operation, so those skilled in the art can obtain the extractive solvent without any difficulty.
Therefore, it’s easy for those skilled in the art to obtain claims 2 and 3 based on the cited inventions 2 and 2.
2-3. As dependent claims of claim 1, claims 4 and 5 of the present application define that “the hydrochlorofluoroolefin comprises trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (1233zd(E)) (claim 2) and the purified hydrochlorofluoroolefin is purified trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (1233zd(E)) comprising about 500 ppm or less of the chlorofluorocarbon”.
However, the cited invention 1 discloses “separating trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (1233zd(E)) using extractive distillation” (refer to claim 1), and the cited invention 2 discloses “extracting a chlorofluorocarbon (244fa) as the impurity to purify cis-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene having a normal boiling point of 39.0°C” (refer to claim 1; Paragraphs [0009], [0011] and [0029]). Trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (1233zd(E)) having a normal boiling point of 21°C differ greatly from the chlorofluorocarbon as the impurity in terms of boiling point, so it can be purified more easily by using extractive distillation. In addition, removing a chlorofluorocarbon as the impurity to obtain a purified product containing a trace amount (less than 500 ppm) of impurity is a customary means that can be optionally selected in consideration of the convenience and/or effectiveness of operation, so those skilled in the art can obtain the method without any difficulty.
Therefore, it’s easy for those skilled in the art to obtain claims 4 and 5 based on the cited inventions 1 and 2.
2-4. As dependent claims of claim 1, claim 6 of the present invention defines that “ the contaminant comprises at least one of carbon tetrachloride and trichlorofluoromethane (R11)”.
However, the cited invention 1 discloses “separating trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (1233zd(E)) and 1,1,1,3,3-pentafluoropropane” (refer to claim 1), and the cited invention 2 discloses “separating and purifying 1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (1233zd) and 1-chloro-1,3,3,3-tetrafluoropropane (244fa)” (refer to claim 1; Paragraphs [0009], [0011] and [0029]). Their difference from the present application lies in that the contaminant does not include tetrachloromethane or trichlorofluoromethane. However, it’s easy for those skilled in the art to envisage the method for separating a mixture containing trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (1233zd(E)) and a contaminant having a similar boiling point by using an extractive solvent having a high boiling point to change the relative volatility of the contaminant based on the cited inventions 1 and 2. Those skilled in the art can obtain the method for purifying a mixture containing 1233zd(E) and various contaminants having similar boiling points without any difficulty.
Therefore, it’s easy for those skilled in the art to obtain claim 6 based on the cited inventions 1 and 2.
2-5. Claim 7 of the present application requests for the protection of “a method for removing a contaminant from a hydrochlorofluoroolefin comprising: extracting trichlorofluoromethane (R11) from a mixture comprising the trichlorofluoromethane (R11) and trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (1233zd(E)) using extractive distillation in the presence of an extractive solvent comprising a chlorinated compound to form a purified trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (1233zd(E))”.
In one aspect, the cited invention 1 discloses “a method for separating trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene from a mixture containing trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (1233zd(E)) and 1,1,1,3,3-pentafluoropropane using extractive distillation in the presence of an extractive solvent containing a chlorine-substituted compound” (refer to claims 1 and 5; Paragraphs [0012] and [0013]).
A comparison of two inventions shows that their similarity lies in that trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene is obtained by using extractive distillation in the presence of an extractive solvent, and their difference lies in that the cited invention 1 does not disclose the extraction of trichlorofluoromethane from a mixture containing 1233zd(E) and trichlorofluoromethane to remove a contaminant.
However, the cited invention 1 discloses that “the extractive distillation method is effective in separating 1233zd (E) and a compound having a similar boiling point from a mixture containing 1233zd (E) and the compound, and an extractive solvent having a melting point higher than that of 1233zd (E) is preferably used” (refer to Paragraphs [0004] and [0012]). The cited invention 2 that discloses a method for purifying 1-chloro-3,3,3-trifluoropropene (1233zd) by using extractive distillation discloses “extracting a chlorofluorocarbon from a mixture containing 1233zd and the chlorofluorocarbon (1-chloro-1,3,3,3-tetrafluoropropane) using extractive distillation in the presence of a halogenated hydrocarbon-containing extractive solvent that has a high boiling point and changes the relative volatility of the components to be separated to purify 1233zd” (refer to claims 1 and 5; Paragraph [0006]). Although trichlorofluoromethane is not disclosed as a contaminant, it’s easy for those skilled in the art of the invention to obtain the method for separating a mixture containing trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (1233zd(E)) and a contaminant having a similar boiling point by using an extractive solvent having a high boiling point to change the relative volatility of the contaminant, and in turn envisage the method for extracting and removing a contaminant having a boiling point similar to that of 1233zd(E), such as trichlorofluoromethane. Consequently, there is no difficulty in envisaging the composition of the invention.
Therefore, it’s easy for those skilled in the art to obtain claim 7 based on the cited inventions 1 and 2.
2-6. As dependent claims of claim 7, claims 8 to 11 of the present application define that “the chlorinated compound is comprised of three or four chlorine atoms (claim 8); the chlorinated compound is comprised of 1 or 2 carbon atoms (claim 9); the extractive solvent comprises an organochloride selected from the group consisting of trichloroethylene, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, methyl chloroform, and mixtures thereof (claim 10) and the extractive solvent has a normal boiling point of about 60°C or greater (claim 11)”.
However, the cited invention 1 discloses that “the extractive solvent may be a halogen-substituted (chlorine-substituted) compound having a boiling point between 35°C and 200°C” (refer to Paragraph [0013]), and the cited invention 2 discloses that “the extractive solvent may be a halogenated hydrocarbon (CFnCl3-nCHXCClFmH2-m, X= Cl, n= an integer between 0 and 3, m= an integer between 0 and 2) having a normal boiling point ranging from 60°C to 120°C” (refer to claims 1 and 5; Paragraphs [0042] and [0049]). Using various extractive solvent having high boiling points to separate 1234zd(E) is a customary means that can be optionally selected in consideration of the convenience and/or effectiveness of operation, so those skilled in the art can obtain the extractive solvent without any difficulty.
Therefore, it’s easy for those skilled in the art to obtain claims 8 to 11 based on the cited inventions 1 and 2.
2-7. As dependent claims of claim 7, claims 12 and 13 of the present application define that “the weight ratio of the extractive solvent to 1233zd(E) is about 0.1 to 10 (claim 12) and the extractive solvent to 1233zd(E) weight ratio is about 1 to 3 (claim 13)”.
However, the cited invention 2 discloses “the extractive solvent is used in an amount of 10-10000 parts by weight, preferably 100-200 parts by weight relative to 100 parts by weight of raw material” (refer to Paragraph [0051]). Using a suitable amount of solvent is a customary means that can be optionally selected in consideration of the convenience and/or effectiveness of operation, so those skilled in the art can obtain the amount of extractive solvent without any difficulty.
Therefore, it’s easy for those skilled in the art to obtain claims 12 and 13 based on the cited inventions 1 and 2.
2-8. Claim 14 of the present application requests for the protection of “a purified trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (1233zd(E)) obtained in accordance with the method of claim 7”.
However, as mentioned in the aforesaid reason for refusal 1-1, the cited invention 1 discloses “a trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene obtained by the following method: separating a mixture containing trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (the same as trans-1-chloro-3,3,3-trifluoropropene; 1233zd(E)) and 1,1,1,3,3-pentafluoropropane using extractive distillation in the presence of an extractive solvent" (refer to claims 1 and 5; Paragraph [0012]). No matter which preparation (purification) method is used to obtain the compound, as long as the final product generated is determined, the invention can be construed as an invention for a substance having certain features (preparation method) as determined by the composition of the compound corresponding to the product generated. Therefore, even if the purification method for a compound is defined, the composition of the claimed compound, i.e. trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (1233zd(E)), does not change.
In addition, even if the purification method of claim 7 is considered, as mentioned in the aforesaid reason for refusal 2-5, the cited invention 2 discloses “extracting a chlorofluorocarbon from a mixture containing 1233zd and the chlorofluorocarbon (1-chloro-1,3,3,3-tetrafluoropropane) using extractive distillation in the presence of a halogenated hydrocarbon-containing extractive solvent that has a high boiling point and changes the relative volatility of the components to be separated to purify 1233zd(E)” (refer to claims 1 and 5; Paragraph [0006]). It’s easy to envisage that the purified trans-1,1,1-trifluoro-3-chloro-2-propene (1233zd(E)) can be obtained by using the purification method of extracting and removing a contaminant having a boiling point similar to that of 1233zd(E), such as trichlorofluoromethane.
Therefore, it’s easy for those skilled in the art to obtain claim 14 based on the cited inventions 1 and 2.
2-9. Claim 15 of the present application request for the protection of “a distillation method comprising: feeding a feed mixture comprising a hydrochlorofluoroolefin comprising a contaminant to a first distillation column; and extracting the contaminant from the feed mixture in the first distillation column using an extractive solvent comprising a chlorinated compound to form an overhead stream comprising a purified hydrochlorofluoroolefin and a bottoms stream comprising the contaminant and the extractive solvent”.
In one aspect, as mentioned in the aforesaid reason for refusal 2-1, the cited inventions 1 and 2 disclose “the following method: subjecting a mixture comprising hydrochlorofluoroolefin (1233zd) comprising an impurity to extractive distillation using an extractive solvent containing a chlorinated compound to purify the hydrochlorofluoroolefin”. The cited invention 1 discloses that “the separation method may be carried out by using a distillation column to perform the following extractive distillation: introducing the extractive solvent at a position higher than the feedstock feed stage, and recovering the extractive solvent and 1233zd(E)” (refer to Paragraph [0014]). The cited invention 2 discloses “a distillation column is used to perform the following extractive distillation: introducing the extractive solvent at a position higher than the feedstock feed stage, extracting 1233zd from the upper portion of the column, and extracting the extractive solvent and impurity from the bottom portion of the column” (refer to Paragraphs [0052] and [0053]). Hence, it’s easy to envisage the method of extractive distillation using a first distillation column and there is no difficulty in envisaging the composition of the invention.
Therefore, it’s easy for those skilled in the art to obtain claim 15 based on the cited inventions 1 and 2.
2-10. As dependent claims of claim 15, claim 16 of the present application defines “further comprising: feeding the bottoms stream to a second distillation column; and separating the contaminant from the extractive solvent in the second distillation column to form a second overhead stream comprising the contaminant and a second bottoms stream comprising the extractive solvent”.
However, the cited invention 1 discloses that “the mixture containing a part of the feedstock extracted and the extractive solvent may be subjected to stripping to remove the extractive solvent, or further purified to recover the extractive solvent” (refer to Paragraph [0015]). The cited invention 2 discloses that “the mixture containing a part of the feedstock extracted and the extractive solvent is separated by means of stripping and distillation, and the extractive solvent may be recycled for reuse in extractive distillation” (refer to Paragraph [0054]). The method of separating a contaminant and an extractive solvent by means of distillation is a customary means in consideration of the convenience and/or effectiveness of operation. Those skilled in the art can obtain the method without any difficulty.
Therefore, it’s easy for those skilled in the art to obtain claim 16 based on the cited inventions 1 and 2.
日本語 から 英語: Clinical Study reports General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療(一般)
翻訳 - 英語 Based on the above results from the 13-week repeated dose toxicity study in rats, the reliably toxic dose of MET-88 was 1600 mg/kg in both males and females and the no observed effect dose was 25 mg/kg in males and below 25 mg/kg in females. Apart from mild fatty deposits in tissue (liver), which were considered to be attributable to pharmacological action, no substrate changes and no toxic changes were observed at 100 mg/kg in males or at 25 mg/kg in females, thus these were the estimated doses without toxic effect.
ABSTRACT
The following results were obtained from investigating the repeated dose toxicity of oral administration of MET-88 in rats, at 25, 100, 400, and 1600 mg/kg for 13 weeks, and recovery with 5 weeks of drug withdrawal.
1. Observations of general condition showed diarrhea or loose stools and soiling around the anus in both males and females in the 1600 mg/kg group, with one female being urgently euthanized.
2. There were no significant changes in body weight, food consumption, urinalysis, occult blood test or ophthalmological test results.
3. Hematological tests showed shortened activated partial thromboplastin time in males and decreased white blood cells in females in the groups receiving doses of 400 mg/kg or more. In the 1600 mg/kg group, both males and females showed a decrease in hemoglobin level, hematocrit level, lymphocyte percentage and count, and an increase or a tendency toward increase in segmented neutrophil count and monocyte percentage. In addition, males showed decreases in red blood cell and white blood cell counts and shortened prothrombin time and females showed an increase in segmented neutrophil count.
4. In the groups receiving doses of 100 mg/kg or more, blood biochemistry tests showed a decrease in calcium in females; however, in the groups receiving doses of 400 mg/kg or more, both males and females showed an increase in free fatty acids, and males showed an elevation or a tendency toward elevation in γ-GTP and alkaline phosphatase activity as well as a decrease in glucose, while females showed a decrease in phospholipids and in total and free cholesterols. In the 1600 mg/kg group, both males and females also showed an elevation or a tendency toward elevation in GOT, GPT, and LDH activity, an increase or a tendency toward increase in neutral fat, total bilirubin, blood urea nitrogen and inorganic phosphorus, and a decrease or a tendency toward decrease in cholesterol/ester ratio, Na and Cl, with males showing an increase in cholinesterase activity and females an increase in creatinine, γ-GTP and alkaline phosphatase activity and a decrease in glucose, total protein and albumin.
5. Pathological examination showed an increase in the weight and weight ratio of the liver in males in the groups receiving doses of 400 mg/kg or more and in females in the 1600 mg/kg group, and an increase in the weight or weight ratio of the heart in both males and females in the 1600 mg/kg group. Histopathological findings showed fatty degeneration (or deposit) in the hepatic portal region, renal proximal tubule, heart and skeletal muscles or tongue muscle fibers, an increase in necrotizing lymphocytes in the thymus, a decrease in lymphocytes in the mesenteric lymph nodes, a decrease in pancreatic zymogen granules, and degeneration of structures such as glomerular capillaries. Electron microscopy revealed no significant changes other than fatty deposits in the liver and renal proximal tubule cells.
6. All of the above findings showed recovery or a tendency toward recovery after the drug was withdrawn, so they are reversible changes.
英語 から 中国語: UNANIMOUS WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS IN LIEU OF A SPECIAL MEETING General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 金融(一般)
原書のテキスト - 英語 In lieu of a Special Meeting of the Board of Directors of ABC USA, Incorporated, a
Maryland corporation (the "Corporation"), the Board of Directors of the Corporation (the "Board"), in
accordance with the provisions of Section 2-408(c) of the Corporations and Associations Article of the
Annotated Code of Maryland, as amended, unanimously adopt the following resolutions:
WHEREAS, in connection with the OPIC Loan, OPIC is requiring XYC, Inc., a
Maryland corporation ("XYC"), the sole member of LMN Solutions LLC, a Maryland
limited liability company (“LMN"), to guarantee up to $3,500,000 of the OPIC Loan (the "XYC
Guaranty") pursuant to the terms and conditions set forth in that certain Project Completion Agreement
(the "PCA") which shall be deemed hereby reproduced for all legal purposes, by and among ABC
Global, the Corporation, Al Pacino, Charlize Theron, LMN,
XYC and OPIC; and
WHEREAS, XYC has agreed to enter into the PCA and provide the XYC Guaranty on the
condition that the Corporation, among others, enter into an Indemnification Agreement (the
"Indemnification Agreement") which shall be deemed hereby reproduced for all legal purposes, whereby
the Corporation shall agree to indemnify XYC against losses suffered by XYC under the XYC
Guaranty, and as security for such indemnification XYC is requiring the Corporation to enter into (i) the
previously approved Stock Issuance Agreement and (ii) a Promissory Quota Assignment Agreement by
and between the Corporation and Al Pacino (the "Quota Assignment") which shall be
deemed hereby reproduced for all legal purposes, whereby Al Pacino, upon the
occurrence of certain trigger events under the Indemnification Agreement, agrees and promises to assign
and transfer a 53.75% quota of ABC Global to the Corporation.
NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT
FURTHER RESOLVED, that Al Pacino, as president of the
Corporation (the "President"), Judith Ivey, as secretary of the Corporation (the
"Secretary"), and/or Keanu Reeves, as treasurer of the Corporation (the "Treasurer";
the President, the Secretary and the Treasurer shall be known collectively as the
"Officers" and individually as an "Officer"), be and hereby are duly authorized and
directed on behalf of the Corporation to take any action and execute and deliver any and
all documents, including but not limited to the Security Agreement, as Officers of the
Corporation, which would allow the Corporation and ABC Global to consummate
the Security Transactions and perform under the Security Agreement and any other
documents executed in connection with the Security Transactions on such terms and
conditions and with such revisions and supplements thereto as each such Officer may
deem necessary or advisable, and with the signature of any such Officer appearing
thereon as establishing conclusively the Board's approval and confirmation of any such
modifications or supplements so effected, and that all past transactions of a nature set
forth above are hereby ratified and confirmed; and it is
原書のテキスト - 英語 Upon the Church’s request, Contractor shall furnish to the Church executed copies of any such subcontractor agreements. Contractor shall require all persons and entities performing Services in connection with the Musical Products and Deliverable Items to execute a release in the form set forth in Exhibit D attached hereto, and Contractor shall deliver the original of the same to the Church. Contractor represents and warrants that all people that perform Services in connection with the Musical Products and Deliverable Items have granted releases for use of their names, likenesses, voices and performances in the Musical Products and the Deliverable Items. Contractor agrees to indemnify the Church and hold the Church harmless from any and all claims by the Members and Contractor shall pay for any damages resulting from such claims and shall pay all of the Church’s reasonable and necessary legal fees and costs associated with such claims. This Section shall survive the termination or expiration of this Agreement or the conclusion of any Project Assignment Contract.
1.4 Registration. Contractor hereby irrevocably assigns, transfers and delivers to the Church the right to seek copyright registration of the Musical Products and the Deliverable Items in the Church’s name, and Contractor agrees to execute all papers and to perform such other proper acts as Church may deem necessary to secure for the Church or its designee the rights herein. At the Church’s request, during and after the production of the Musical Products and Deliverable Items, Contractor agrees to execute documents, and will give testimony and take further acts requested by the Church to acquire, perfect, transfer, maintain and enforce patent, copyright, trademark, trade secret and other legal protection in connection with the Musical Products and the Deliverable Items, including without limitation filing of a copy of this Agreement with the appropriate government agency. Contractor hereby appoints the Secretary of the Church as Contractor’s attorneys-in-fact to execute documents on Contractor’s behalf for this purpose.
翻訳 - 中国語 如经教会要求，承包商应向教会提供任何该等分包商协议的已签署副本。承包商应要求履行与音乐产品和可交付项相关之服务的所有人员和实体均签署本协议附录 D 中规定形式的免责声明，承包商应将该免责声明的原件送交教会。承包商表示并保证，履行与音乐产品和可交付项相关之服务的所有人员均已给予免责声明，授权在音乐产品和可交付项中使用其姓名、肖像、语音和表演。承包商同意，对于成员提出的任何和所有索赔，其将给予教会赔偿，并使教会免受其害，承包商应支付因该等索赔引起的任何损害赔偿金，并应支付教会与该等索赔相关的所有合理且必需的法律费用和开支。本条规定应在本协议终止或到期或任何项目转让合同结束之后继续有效。
朝鮮語 から 英語: IRB Test General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 医療: 健康管理
原書のテキスト - 朝鮮語 본 통보서에 기재된 사항은 서울대학교의과대학/서울대학교병원 의학연구윤리심의위원회의 기록된 내용과 일치 함을 증명합니다.
본의학연구윤리심의위원회는 KGCP 및 ICH-GCP를 준수하며 생명윤리 및 안전에 관한 법률 등 관련 법규를 준수합니다. 본 연구와 이해관계(Conflict of Interest)가 있는 위원이 있을 경우 연구의 심의에서 배제하였습니다.
翻訳 - 英語 We certify that information contained in this Notice is consistent with the records at IRB of Seoul National University College of Medicine/Seoul National University Hospital.
This IRB complies with the applicable laws and regulations including KGCP, ICH-GCP, and Bioethics and Safety Act.
Any member who has a conflict of interest with this study has been excluded from this study review.
日本語 から 英語: BUTYL RUBBER-BASED ADHESIVE COMPOSITION, AN ADHESIVE TAPE USING THE BUTYL RUBBER-BASED ADHESIVE COMPOSITION, A WATERPROOF SHEET, AND A JOINED BODY FOR A ROOF USING THE BUTYL RUBBER-BASED ADHESIVE COMPOSITION OR THE ADHESIVE TAPE General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: 特許
翻訳 - 英語 [Claims]
[Claim 1]
An adhesive composition for use in the fixation of tile roofs, which is a butyl rubber-based adhesive composition for tile roofs, containing
(1) 100 parts by mass of butyl rubber, and
(2) Silane coupling agent 0.2 to 5 parts by mass, and
(3) 2 to 35 parts by mass of polyethylene.
[Claim 2]
The butyl rubber-based adhesive composition described in claim 1, wherein the roof tile is a ceramic roof tile.
[Claim 3]
(2) The butyl rubber-based adhesive composition described in either of claims 1 and 2, wherein the Vicat softening point of the polyethylene is 90C or lower.
[Claim 4]
The butyl rubber-based adhesive composition described in any of claims 1 to 3, wherein the 180 adhesive force after exposure at 90C for 14 weeks is 30N/25mm or more.
[Claim 5]
An adhesive tape obtained by processing the butyl rubber-based adhesive composition described in claims 1 to 4 into a tape form.
[Claim 6]
A waterproof sheet for roofs which comprises an adhesive layer made of the butyl rubber-based adhesive composition described in any of claims 1 to 4, and
a waterproof sheet laminated onto the adhesive layer.
[Claim 7]
A waterproof sheet for roofs which comprises the adhesive tape according to claim 5, and
a waterproof sheet laminated onto the adhesive, etc.
[Claim 8]
A joined body of roof tiles and a waterproof sheet joined by using the adhesive tape described in claim 5.
日本語 から 英語: PROPOSAL FOR ON-THE-FLY - AUTOMATED STORAGE TIERING (OTF-AST) General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: コンピュータ(一般)
翻訳 - 英語 Abstract:
To improve the cost performance of a storage system, a tiered storage system combining SSDs and HDDs is proposed, which is a mechanism for increasing the speed by storing data of high access frequency in a certain period in SSD. However, with the file-sharing storage access pattern, IO is concentrated in a narrow range of memory areas for several to tens of minutes, and due to the characteristics of its movement to different areas as time elapses, a conventional tired storage system, which moves data at a frequency of a long period of time, is ineffective.
In this paper, the On-The-Fly Automated Storage Tiering
(OTF-AST), which captures areas where IO concentration occurs each time in a short time, and moves them to SSD, is proposed. With the proposed method, IOs are successfully concentrated on SSD by using the statistics information in the unit of minute and filtering the areas whose performance improvement are expected each time based on the IO concentration level and the duration of the concentration.
In this paper, the evaluation is made on the MSR Cambridge workload which is the publicly available storage access history data, and it is evident that compared to the conventional tired storage system, the SSD access rate is improved by up to 45% and the average user IO response is improved by up to 11%.
英語 から 中国語: Regulating Software Usage Rights in Detail General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: IT(情報テクノロジー)
原書のテキスト - 英語 Regulating Software Usage Rights in Detail
________________________________________
By GRP Rainer LLP
Computers have become indispensable in private households and even more so in companies. When using software, licensing agreements, in particular, must be observed.
Anyone who regularly works with a computer also uses appropriate software. This applies both to private use and the commercial sector. Several programmes are already pre-installed; others can be downloaded, purchased or developed specifically for the needs of a business. In order to be able to use the software legally, corresponding usage rights need to be agreed to. This frequently happens without any great effort by clicking on a confirmation button.
However, particularly in the case of companies that require special software, there is considerably more variation in this regard. First of all, one must distinguish between non-exclusive and exclusive licences. While a non-exclusive licence grants the licensee a right of use, the licensor – generally the business which develops the software – can also grant the same rights to other users and continue to market the software.
An exclusive licence, on the other hand, grants the customer an exclusive right of use. In this case, the licensor is normally not allowed to issue further licences. For the business that has acquired an exclusive licence, the software can provide a competitive advantage vis-à-vis the other market participants or more effectively structure workflows. It is therefore enormously important for both sides to precisely define the usage rights so that there are no subsequent misunderstandings or legal disputes. Points such as the scope of the usage rights, duration of exclusive use, issuing of sub-licences to third parties and, of course, the licensing fees need to be clearly regulated in the licensing agreement.
In order for the drafting of the agreement to be as detailed and clear as possible, a lawyer versed in software law ought to be consulted. He will also know which other fields of law need to be taken into account accordingly. Copyrights, trademark rights or patent rights, for example, need to be taken into consideration. Should legal disputes nevertheless emerge at a later stage, the lawyer will assume the role of representing your interests and enforce claims and rights against third parties.
翻訳 - 英語 Claims
1. A method for recovering fused salt chlorination slag, characterized by comprising the steps of:
a. mixing the fused salt chlorination slag with water, stirring and filtering the mixture, thereby obtaining a filtrate and filter residues; wherein the solid-to-liquid ratio of the fused salt chlorination slag to water is 1:(3-5) g/ml;
b. recrystallizing the filtrate thereby obtaining regenerated fused salt slag.
2. The method for recovering fused salt chlorination slag according to claim 1, characterized in that the fused salt chlorination slag is the slag generated in the salt chlorination process for the production of titanium sponge or titanium dioxide.
3. The method for recovering fused salt chlorination slag according to claim 2, characterized in that the fused salt chlorination slag has the following mass percent composition: NaCl 30-42% , MgCl2 < 30%,
KCl < 5%, FeCl2 10-15%, CaCl2 < 10%, MnCl2 < 5%, FeCl3 1-5%, Al2O3 0-3%, TiO2 2-5%, SiO2
英語 から 中国語: RESPONSE TO CRIMINAL DEFENSE BRIEF III General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 法: 特許、商標、著作権
原書のテキスト - 英語 RESPONSE TO CRIMINAL DEFENSE BRIEF III
1. The specific characteristics of each particular design parameter set forth in Micron’s DR25nmS Design Rules document are carefully selected to integrate with all the other design parameters in this Design Rules document as well as other Design Rules documents and together are selected to ensure particular manufacturing tolerances of a complete product. It is misleading to isolate individual parameters from different products or processes, as was done in Defense Brief III, and use this as evidence that the DR25nmS design rules as a whole were available in a public forum. Defense Brief III cites select information from three entirely different technologies and arbitrarily selected three process parameters, out of hundreds of process parameters, at issue in those technologies. Then, they point out the fact that the value for one of these parameters happens to be the same value as used in Micron’s DR25nmS design rules. This approach is obviously incorrect. For each of the manufacturers, the parameter values identified in Defense Brief III are part of much larger processes, and those processes are very different from the process for developing Micron’s DRAM technology. The fact that Micron’s DR25nmS design rule happens to have one parameter in common with one of these other processes is completely irrelevant and does not mean that Micron’s process technology is publicly available. There are many process technologies available from various custom semiconductor manufacturers and the mere fact that, as a matter of pure coincidence, one parameter may happen to have the same value as a parameter in the DR25nmS Design rule does not indicate that Micron’s process technology was widely available or publicly known.
翻訳 - 中国語 刑事辨護狀 III 答辨
1. Micron 的 DR25nmS 設計規則檔案中所述每項特定設計參數的具體特性均經過仔細甄選，使其與本設計規則檔案以及其他設計規則檔案中的所有其他設計參數相結合，一起進行選擇，確保成品的製造公差達到特定要求。將各參數從不同的產品或工藝中隔離出來，正如辨護狀 III 中所述的做法，並以此作為證據證明 DR25nmS 設計規則已整體上可在公共論壇上獲得具有誤導性。辨護狀 III 從三種完全不同的技術中引用精心選擇的資訊，從這三種技術的幾百個工藝參數中主觀臆斷地選出三項有爭議的工藝參數。然後，他們指出一個事實，即這些參數中有一個參數的值剛好與 Micron DR25nmS 設計規則中所用的值相同。此方法顯然不正確。對於每個製造商，辨護狀 III 中認定的參數值相對於那些工藝而言，是很小的一部分，並且這些工藝與用於開發 Micron 的 DRAM 技術的工藝有極大不同。Micron 的 DR25nmS 設計規則碰巧有一個參數與這些其他工藝中的一個參數相同這一事實完全無關緊要，也並不意味著 Micron 的工藝技術已可公開獲得。有許多工藝技術可從各種定制半導體製造商處獲得，僅僅因為純屬巧合，有一個參數碰巧與 DR25nmS 設計規則中的一個參數有相同的值這一事實，是不能表明 Micron 的工藝技術可廣泛獲得或為公眾所知。
日本語 から 英語: EFFECTS OF ADDING SN IN N-BUTANE DEHYDROGENATION ON AN ALUMINA-SUPPORTED PT CATALYST PREPARED BY CO-IMPREGNATION METHOD AND SOL-GEL METHOD General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 3.4 Oxidation state and crystal phase of Sn in catalysts
The results of XPS analysis of Pt/SnO2-Al2O3 and Pt-Sn/Al2O3 after the reduction process are shown in Figs. 5-1, 5-2, 5-3 and Table 3. Their binding energies are respectively 486.2~486.7 eV and 484.5 eV, which are respectively attributable to Sn(II, IV) and Sn(0)[21, 30 , 32, 33]. Table 3 shows that Sn existed as an oxide on the catalyst surface of both catalysts.
Similarly, the results of XRD analysis of Pt/SnO2-Al2O3 and Pt-Sn/Al2O3 after the reduction processing are shown in Fig. 6. Fig. 6(a) shows only a diffraction pattern of Pt/SnO2-Al2O3 that is attributable to γ-Al2O3. It is believed that the SnO2 found in the SnO2-Al2O3 support (Fig. 2(b)) became amorphous in form by the reduction processing. On the other hand, Fig. 6(b), (c) show the formation and particle growth of PtSn and PtSn2, which are the bi-metallic phases of Pt-Sn, in the Pt-Sn/Al2O3 as the Sn content increases. Moreover, for a high Sn content, because it could be verified that the metal Sn phase was also formed, it was believed that Pt easily reduced Sn oxide as compared to Pt/SnO2-Al2O3. In the event of Pt coexistence, many reports state that the spillover hydrogen tends to reduce Sn oxide[24-26]. The PtSn2 is possibly formed by the complex [PtCl2(SnCl3)2]2- that is produced when the stannous chloride is co-impregnated with the Pt precursor. Because the complex has an atom ratio Pt:Sn = 1:2, it also can be said to be a state where the PtSn2 phase tends to form. It was reported that PtSn2 with excessive Sn was a non-active phase[21, 32, 34]. In this reaction, one of the reasons that Pt/SnO2-Al2O3 showed a higher activity than Pt-Sn/Al2O3 was that the Sn oxides were evenly distributed on the support and no Pt-Sn bi-metallic phase with excessive Sn was formed and the Pt3Sn as the active phase [34, 35] was possibly formed on the surface of the support in a highly distributed state.
Fig.7 shows the results of the XRD analysis of the catalysts after the reaction. It can be seen from Fig.7(a) that no Sn phase and bi-metallic phase caused by Pt is found in Pt/SnO2-Al2O3 although the Sn content is 13.2 wt%. On the other hand, it can be known from Fig.7(b) that the same phases of PtSn and PtSn2 are found in Pt-Sn/Al2O3 before and after the reaction although the intensity of PtSn phase increase as the PtSn2 phase relatively decreases. Through these comparisons, in Pt/SnO2-Al2O3 and Pt3Sn particles, the Sn oxides maintain the status of highly dispersive existence on the support surface even 5 hours have passed after the reaction, thus it can be said that the stability of catalyst is excellent. The results are consistent with the results of the n-butane dehydrogenation. No activity deterioration of Pt/SnO2-Al2O3 was found although the Sn content was 13.2 wt%, and the conversion rate was very stable.
日本語 から 英語: Real Property Purchase and Sale Agreement General field: ビジネス/金融 Detailed field: 法: 契約
翻訳 - 英語 Article 4 (Conditions for Payment of Sale Price)
The payment of the Sale Price made by the Buyer under the preceding article shall take the following as conditions (excluding the conditions waived by the Buyer where appropriate). In addition, the Seller shall, before payment of the Sale Price, deliver to the Buyer written materials proving that all conditions set out in the following have been satisfied. If some conditions will be met forthwith after payment of the Sale Price, the Seller shall state such conditions in writing to serve as evidence.
(1) The Buyer reasonably and objectively determines that the Removal of Encumbrances specified in Article 5 has been achieved or will be achieved immediately after payment of the Sale Price.
(2) The Seller’s representations and warranties set out in Article 13 are all true and accurate in all material respects.
(3) The Buyer reasonably and objectively determines that the Seller has not contravened this Agreement and that the Seller’s obligations to be fulfilled prior to transfer of the title to the Property and delivery of the Property (defined respectively in Article 7) have been fulfilled or will be fulfilled immediately after payment of the Sale Price.
(4) The registration-related documents that are handed over to the Buyer according to Article 8 shall be fully valid at the time of applying for registration of the transfer of title to the Property.
(5) As of the Closing Date, the Seller’s obligations stated in Exhibit 2-2 “SELLER’S OBLIGATIONS AS OF THE CLOSING DATE” have been fulfilled.
Article 5 (Removal of Encumbrances)
1. As of the date of transfer of title to the Property by the Seller, all rights to mortgage (including pre-set rights to mortgage), pledges, liens, collaterals (including transferable collaterals), superficies, easements, lease rights (save and except the lease rights listed in Exhibit 4 “LIST OF TENANTS” (the tenants herein at the time of delivery of the Property), other usufruct rights, mortgages, temporary mortgages, mortgage of obligations, unpaid taxes & dues and other levies and charges, and all other encumbrances (except for the matters stated in Exhibit 2 “OUTLINE OF PROPERTY”) on the exercise by the Buyer of full ownership of the Property, regardless of the name and form thereof, must be removed and eliminated. As the consideration for the payment by the Buyer of the Sale Price as set forth in Article 3, the Seller shall deliver all the registration documents (if any) and other relevant documents required for eliminating said rights and encumbrances to the judicial scrivener designated by the Buyer. In addition, all expenses (including registration fee and judicial scrivener fee) incurred in completing the procedures for the removal and elimination of the above-mentioned encumbrances shall be borne by the Seller.
2. The Seller must, before the transfer of title to the Property, complete all the procedures required for the transaction contemplated in this Agreement (including any approval, consent, registration or report issued by government agencies and other third parties) at its own responsibility and expense.
3. The Seller must, in addition to those listed in the preceding paragraphs, fulfill its obligations as stated in Exhibit 2-2 “SELLER’S OBLIGATIONS AS OF THE CLOSING DATE” (save and except those, the performance of which is exempted by the Buyer) as of the Closing Date.
4. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Seller shall complete the obligations described in Exhibit 2-3 “SELLER’S OBLIGATIONS AFTER THE CLOSING DATE” on the conditions set out in the same Exhibit and shall obtain acknowledgement from the Buyer with respect to completion such obligations, unless the obligations have been waived by the Buyer or have been otherwise agreed upon between the Seller and the Buyer.
Article 11 (Transfer of Security Deposits)
1. When delivering the Property, the Seller shall cause the Buyer to succeed to the liability for refund of deposits or security money received from the tenants herein as of the date of delivery of the Property (hereinafter referred to as “Liability for Refund of Deposits or Security Money”)
2. The Seller shall pay to the Buyer an amount equal to the amount of Liability for Refund of Deposits or Security Money. Such payment shall be settled by the Seller and the Buyer prior to payment of the Sale Price specified in paragraph 2 of Article 3.
3. The amount that is equal to the amount of the refund liability including deposits, security and cleaning fee shall be paid by the Seller to the Buyer according to the preceding paragraph shall be (9,175,600 Yen on April 27, 2018, provided however that if, before the delivery of the Property, there is any change in the amount of Liability for Refund of Deposits or Security Money, the amount shall be the changed amount. The Seller shall notify the Buyer in writing of such change and reasons for such change as soon as possible) settle the account by deduction from the Sale Price to be collected by the Seller from the Buyer.
4. With respect to the refund of the renovation fee and the deposit or security money for building restoration received from the tenants herein before the delivery of the Property, when the tenants make any claims to the Seller or the Buyer (including claims for a refund on the ground that the renovation fee collected by the Seller before the delivery of the Property is exorbitant) after the delivery of the Property, the Seller shall properly respond to such claims at its own expense and liability to the extent permitted by applicable laws and regulations and, if such response causes any losses to the Buyer, shall make compensation for such losses.
Article 13 (Seller’s Representations and Warranties)
1. The Seller represents and warrants to the Buyer that: the following are true and accurate as of the date of signing of this Agreement and the Closing Date. Any contravention by the Seller, whether intentionally or unintentionally, regardless of negligence or not, of the representations and warranties made to the Buyer under this Article shall be deemed as a default of the Seller under this Agreement. When the Seller contravenes the representations and warranties set forth in this Article, it shall compensate, as soon as possible, for any losses and expenses caused to the Buyer due to or in connection with such contravention.
(1) The Seller is a juridical person validly existing and organized under the laws of Japan and owns its properties, has the capacity for rights and actions necessary to execute this Agreement and perform the obligations herein, and has taken all actions (including but not limited to internal authorization) required for such execution and performance of this Agreement.
(2) The execution of this Agreement and the performance of obligations herein do not violate laws, government decrees, provincial degrees, notices or other rules of Japan, the Seller’s Articles of Association, board rules and other internal corporate rules, or agreements on loans for expenses, agreements or pledges on setting of collaterals, or other agreements that bind on the Seller or the Seller’s properties or have influences on the properties of the Seller.
(3) The Seller does not file for bankruptcy, or civil rehabilitation procedure or similar legal proceedings and is not a subject of any similar legal proceedings filed by a third person. The Seller is not in a state of insolvency, payment suspension or excessive indebtedness, and is not in a state that causes a major concern about the Seller’s credit status. In addition, the sale under this Agreement will not put the Seller in a state of insolvency, payment suspension or excessive indebtedness.
(4) The execution and performance of this Agreement by the Seller shall be for legitimate purposes and not for fraudulent purposes or intentions or illegal purposes. The Seller does not have the intention to, by sale of the Property herein, exchange the Property for money for concealing of asset, offer it for free or otherwise dispose of it that harms the Seller’s creditors. Furthermore, the sale of the Property under this Agreement is by no means a disposal that will harm the rights and interests of the Seller’s creditors.
(5) With respect to the sale of the Property, the Seller intends to conduct a true and valid sale and does not have the intention to use the Property as security.
(6) The Property is as set forth in Exhibit 3 “SELLER’S REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES”. However, the Seller’s representations and warranties do not cover those in Exhibit 2 “OUTLINE OF PROPERTY” that may be contrary to any of the provisions set out Exhibit 3 “SELLER’S REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES”, so the undertakings made by the Seller in the OUTLINE OF PROPERTY shall constitute the Seller’s obligations under this Agreement.
2. If the representations set forth in the preceding paragraphs are determined to be false or incorrect or have had any change as of the Closing Date, the Seller shall immediately notify the Buyer of such falseness, incorrectness or change in writing.
Article 14 (Buyer’s Representations and Warranties)
1. The Buyer represents and warrants to the Seller that: the following are true and accurate as of the date of this Agreement and the Closing Date. Any contravention by the Buyer, whether intentionally or unintendedly, regardless of negligence or not, of the representations and warranties made to the Seller under this Article shall be deemed as a default of the Buyer under this Agreement. When the Buyer contravenes the representations and warranties set forth in this Article, it shall, as soon as possible, compensate for any losses and expenses caused to the Seller due to or in connection with such contravention.
(1) The Buyer is a juridical person validly existing and organized under the laws of Japan. It owns its properties, has the capacity for rights and actions necessary to execute this Agreement and perform the obligations herein, and has taken all actions (including but not limited to internal authorization) required for such execution and performance of this Agreement.
(2) The execution of this Agreement and the performance of obligations herein do not violate laws, government decrees, provincial degrees, notices or other rules of Japan, the Buyer’s Articles of Association, board rules and other internal corporate rules (if any), or any agreements on loans for expenses, agreements or pledges on setting of collaterals, or other agreements that bind on the Buyer or the Buyer’s properties or have influences on the properties of the Buyer.
(3) The Buyer does not file for bankruptcy, or civil rehabilitation procedure or similar legal proceedings and is not a subject of any similar legal proceedings filed by a third person. The Buyer is not in a state of insolvency, payment suspension or excessive indebtedness, and is not in a state that causes a major concern about the Buyer’s credit status. In addition, the sale made under this Agreement will not put the Buyer in a state of insolvency, payment suspension or excessive indebtedness.
2. If the representations set forth in the preceding paragraphs are determined to be false or incorrect or have had any change as of the Closing Date, the Buyer shall immediately notify in writing the Seller of such falseness, incorrectness or change.
Article 15 (Liability for Warranty Against Defects)
1. With respect to any defects of the Property (including but not limited to hidden defects), the Seller shall be liable for any damages, losses and expenses (including any payment claims of a third party) caused to the Buyer due to such defects after the delivery of the Property provided that the Buyer submit a written request with respect to such liability within two years from the date of delivery of the Property under this Agreement. Furthermore, for the matters described in Exhibit 2-2 “SELLER’S OBLIGATIONS AS OF THE CLOSING DATE” (except for those expressly waived by the Buyer), the Buyer shall be deemed to have submitted said written request by the signing of this Agreement.
2. Article 526 of the Commercial Code (Act No. 48 of 1899, including subsequent revisions thereof) shall not apply to this Agreement.
3. The provisions of the preceding two paragraphs shall not prejudice the rights of the Buyer against the Seller under the other provisions hereof (including but not limited to Article 13).
Article 19 (Exclusion of Anti-Social Forces)
1. Either Party undertakes the following.
(1) It is not a Yakuza, or a Yakuza-related enterprise, or a Sōkaiya (professional trouble‐maker at shareholders meetings; fixers of stockholders’ meetings), or a far-left or far-right group, or heresy or other similar organizations or a member thereof (hereinafter collectively referred to as “Anti-social Forces”).
(2) Its cadres (i.e. executive employees, directors, executive directors or equivalent) are not Anti-social Forces.
(3) It will not allow Anti-social Forces to sign this Agreement in its name.
(4) During the period before the closing of the sale of the Property, it will not do any of the following by itself or via a third person.
A. Coercive behaviors or words or violence against the other Party.
B. Fraud or deterrence to obstruct the other Party’s business or damage the other Party’s reputation.
2. If either Party has any of the following, the other Party may rescind the Agreement without giving a notice:
(1) When it is found that a declaration in breach of the undertakings provided in subparagraph (1) or (2) of the preceding paragraph has been made;
(2) When it is found that an agreement in violation of subparagraph (3) of the preceding paragraph has been signed; or
(3) When an act in violation of the undertakings provided in subparagraph (4) of the preceding paragraph has been committed.
3. The Buyer undertakes to the Seller that it or a third person will not provide this Property to Anti-social Forces as an office or base.
4. Should the Buyer has an act in violation of the preceding paragraph, the Seller may rescind the Agreement without giving a notice.
5. If the other Party rescinds the Agreement pursuant to the provisions of paragraph 2 of this Article, the breaching Party shall pay liquidated damages in an amount equal to 20% of the Sale Price and the other Party may also require payment for any damages and expenses (including but not limited to payments required by third parties and the attorney’s fees, etc.) caused by the rescission of the Agreement.
6. If the other Party rescinds the Agreement pursuant to the provisions of paragraph 2 of this Article, the breaching Party may not request the rescinding Party to compensate for any damage caused by such rescission.
7. The rescission of this Agreement and liquidated damages pursuant to paragraph 2 or 4 shall be governed by this Article, and not by Article 18.
Article 21 (Burden of Expense)
Unless otherwise provided in this Agreement, all expenses (including but not limited to attorney’s fee, agreement preparation fee and other stamp taxes and dues) incurred in the preparation, negotiation or signing of this Agreement and the documents prepared or signed in connection herewith and for the performance of obligations hereunder shall be borne by the Buyer and the Seller respectively.
中国語 から 英語: Inhibitory Effects of Estradiol on Benzo(a)pyrene-Induced Lung Cancer in Male Mice General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療(一般)
翻訳 - 英語 Smoking is recognized as the most important cause of lung cancer. Benzo(a)pyrene [B(a)P] is the main carcinogen contained in cigarette smoke. Epidemiological surveys show that women are more susceptible to lung cancer caused by smoking than men. With the same amount of smoking, women are more prone to lung cancer [1], which may be related to higher levels of estrogen in women. However, some scholars hold the opposite view that women's high susceptibility to lung cancer is related to women's long-term exposure to cooking fumes [2] which contain carcinogens such as B(a)P. Under the action of exogenous estrogen (such as oral contraceptives, estrogen replacement therapy), the risk of lung cancer has not increased, but decreased in women [3, 4]. There is no definite conclusion on the role of estrogen in the development of lung cancer. In this study, an animal model of lung cancer induced by gastric gavage of B(a)P in male Kunming mice was established to observe the effects of subcutaneous injection of
17 β-estradiol (E2) on the incidence of lung cancers and the number of lung tumors in mice. Also, the levels of superoxide dismutase (SOD) and malondialdehyde (MDA) in the serum of mice were measured to investigate the effects of E2 on B(a)P-induced lung cancer to provide a theoretic basis for further studies on the mechanism of action of B(a)P induction of lung cancer.
1. Materials and methodsMethods
1.1 Animals:
100 Kunming mice, aged 5 weeks, weighing 18-20 g (Animal Center of Academy of Military Medical Sciences), which were all clean-grade animals.
1.2 Main reagents:
B(a)P, E2 (the Sigma company, based in USA); SOD and MDA test kits (Nanjing Jiancheng Bioengineering Institute).
1.3 Animal groups:
The mice were randomly divided into 4 groups, 25 in each group, namely, control group, B(a)P group, E2 group and B(a)P + E2 group. Mice in B(a)P group were given B(a)P by gavage, 3 μmol / mouse, once a week. Mice in E2 group were given subcutaneous injection of E2, 36 μg / mouse, once a week. Mice in B(a)P + E2 group were given both B(a)P by gavage and E2 by subcutaneous injection. The solvent control group was given olive oil by the corresponding route. After 8 weeks of treatment, they were allowed an 8-week recovery, making it a total of 16 weeks. All mice were examined daily and body weight was measured weekly.
1.4 Morphological and pathological diagnosis:
See literature [5].
1.5 Calculation of tumor incidence and number of tumors:
Tumor incidence (%) = number of mice with tumor in each group / total number of surviving mice in this group 100%; number of tumors = total number of tumor nodules per group / total number of surviving mice in this group. The test showed that the mouse lung cancer model was successfully established.
1.6 Determination of oxidation and antioxidant index:
Serum SOD was determined by the xanthine oxidase method, and
serum MDA was determined by the thiobarbituric acid method.
1.7 Statistical analysis:
Statistical analysis was performed using SPSS 10.0 software. The number of tumors, serum SOD and MDA values were examined by variance analysis, and the incidence of tumors was examined by x2 test
中国語 から 英語: HYPERSPECTRAL STEALTH CAMOUFLAGE COATING AND PREPARATION METHOD THEREOF General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 Claims
1. A hyperspectral stealth camouflage coating, characterized in that the composition comprises the following ingredients in percentage by weight:
20% indium tin oxide
30% waste quartz powder
4% talcum powder
3% titanium dioxide powder
15% 2-ethoxyethyl acetate
1.0% sodium silicate
0.3% polyether antifoaming agent
20% epoxy resin
20% amine curing agent
the remaining ingredient is a mixture of n-butanol and xylene, wherein the mass ratio n-butanol : xylene = 1:1.5.
2. The hyperspectral stealth camouflage coating according to
claim 1, characterized in that the amine curing agent is triethylenetetramine, tetraethylenepentamine, polyamides prepared by polycondensation of polyethylene polyamine and dimer soyate, or mixtures thereof.
3. A method for preparing the hyperspectral stealth camouflage coating according to claim 1, characterized in that the method comprises the steps of:
1) weighing 20 wt% indium tin oxide powder, 30 wt% waste quartz powder, 4 wt% talcum powder, 3 wt% titanium dioxide powder, 15 wt% 2-ethoxyethyl acetate, 1.0 wt% sodium silicate, and 0.3 wt% polyether antifoaming agent;
2) mixing the aforesaid ingredients evenly, adding 20 wt% epoxy resin solution dissolved in a mixed solvent containing n-butanol and xylene at a mass ratio of 1:1.5, grinding the mixture at high speed for 3 h;
3) adding 20 wt% amine curing agent solution dissolved in the mixed solvent containing n-butanol and xylene at a mass ratio of 1:1.5, and further grinding the mixture for 1.5 h;
4) adjusting the viscosity of the coating to 70 s (TU-4 cup viscometer; 28°C) with the mixed solvent containing n-butanol and xylene at a mass ratio of 1:1.5, and stirring the mixture evenly thereby obtaining the hyperspectral stealth camouflage coating.
4. The method for preparing the hyperspectral stealth camouflage coating according to claim 3, characterized in that the indium tin oxide powder is obtained from the steps of:
1) preparing SnCl4 and InCl3 aqueous solutions with SnCl4 • 5H2O and indium powder respectively, and mixing the two solutions;
2) adding SnCl4 - InCl3 mixed solution and ammonia solution into deionized water by means of double dropping, controlling the pH value of the solution to 8.8 and the temperature of the solution at 50°C, further stirring the solution with an agitator blade upon completion of the dropwise addition, and maintaining the temperature at 50°C for 3 h;
3) performing cooling and suction filtration, washing the filter cake with deionized water, drying the filter cake at 125°C, and grinding the resultant with mortar thereby obtaining the indium tin oxide.
中国語 から 英語: METHOD FOR SYNTHESIZING BIOPLASTIC PRECURSOR POLYHYDROXYALKANOATE BY USING A LIGNIN-DEGRADING BACTERIUM General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 Claims
1. A method for synthesizing a bioplastic precursor polyhydroxyalkanoate using a lignin-degrading bacterium, characterized in that the lignin-degrading bacterium (Cupriavidus basilensis B-8) has a deposit number of CGMCC No. 4240, for production of the polyhydroxyalkanoate.
2. The method as claimed in claim 1, characterized in that the culture medium used for production adopts alkali lignin as the sole carbon source.
3. The method as claimed in claim 2, characterized in that the alkali lignin carbon source does not need to be pre-treated.
4. The method as claimed in claim 2, characterized in that the alkali lignin has a concentration of 1~6 g/L.
5. The method as claimed in claim 1, characterized in that the culture medium used for production has a nitrogen source concentration lower than 60 mg/L.
6. The method as claimed in any one of claims 1-5, characterized in that the culture medium used for production comprises alkali lignin
1~6 g, (NH4)2SO4 0.28 g, K2HPO4 1 g, MgSO4 0.2 g, CaCl2 0.1 g, FeSO4
0.05 g, MnSO4 0.02 g, KH2PO4 1 g, agar 15 g, and distilled water 1000 mL and has a pH value of 7.0~7.4.
7. The method as claimed in claim 6, characterized in that the method comprises adding 5 mL of LB medium to a test tube, inoculating a single colony of the Cupriavidus basilensis B-8 strain, and culturing and growing it under the condition of 30°C and 150 rpm until the optical density of the bacteria at 600 nm reaches 1.0; centrifuging and washing the culture content, and then inoculating it into a flask containing 100 mL of the culture medium used for production, and then culturing it at 30°C with 150 rpm agitation for 48 h.
8. The method as claimed in claim 1, characterized in that the polyhydroxyalkanoate formed is a homopolymer of polyhydroxybutyrate.
中国語 から 英語: Time Stamping Based on Delay Measurement in Sensor Networks General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: IT(情報テクノロジー)
翻訳 - 英語 3 Time Stamping Based on Delay Measurement
3.1 Delay analysis
The delay on a packet transmission path is subdivided into five parts:
(1) Transmit processing delay: The time from transmission of an instruction to the preparation for transmission, determined by kernel processing, context switching, and system call, and related to system load.
(2) Media access delay: The time required from the time of preparation for transmission to the actual transmission, that is, the time when the
packet is in the buffer of the wireless device, i.e., the time of waiting for a channel.
(3) Transmission time: The time taken by the wireless device to send a packet. Since the packet length and transmission speed are known, this delay can be estimated, but the error of the estimate is not smaller than the transmit-receive synchronization error. On the Mica platform, the maximum transmit-receive synchronization error is 2 μs.
(4) Wireless signal propagation time: A signal reaches a recipient through the air. Since the propagation speed of a wireless signal is
300 meters / μs and the distance of between wireless sensor devices is usually shorter than 100 meters, the delay can be ignored.
(5) Receive processing time: The time of receipt from an RF device buffer to an upper interface.
3.2 Time stamp of delay measurement
The method of transmission delay measurement was used to provide the data time stamping service. The time stamp field does not record the moment of data generation, but records the time it takes for the data to be generated and reach the current node. Each node adds a communication delay to the time stamp when receiving a packet and, when sending the packet, modifies the time stamp by adding the time of stay at the node. After receiving the packet, the destination node obtains the time of generation of the packet by subtracting the time in the time stamp from the local time.
中国語 から 英語: ESTABLISHMENT OF AGROBACTERIUM-MEDIATED TRANSFORMATION SYSTEM FOR EMBRYOGENIC CALLUS AND ACQUIREMENT OF TRANSGENIC PLANTS WITH DREB1C GENE IN GLANDLESS COTTON General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: 生物学(バイオテク、生化学、微生物学)
翻訳 - 英語 3 Conclusions and discussion
In genetic transformation of cotton, the nptll gene is mostly used as a marker gene. Another selective marker gene – hygromycin phosphotransferase gene, i.e., hpt, has also been widely used recently. The hpt gene, small in size, easily binds to other target genes without a selective marker and is introduced into the plant genome. In addition, it is suitable for a wide variety of plants and causes little harm to plants. Different genotypes and different explants of cotton have different sensitivity to hygromycin [26, 27]. Therefore, in the process of genetic transformation of cotton, it is necessary to carry out hygromycin sensitivity tests on the transformed receptor material, thereby determining the appropriate amount of hygromycin to be used in the screening medium.
During plant genetic transformation, selection of a receptor material has a major impact on whether the transformation will succeed. A good acceptor material should be characterized by easy accessibility, easy transformation, and easy regeneration. In Agrobacterium-mediated genetic transformation of cotton, cotton hypocotyls are mostly used as transforming receptors; however, since cotton hypocotylar mitosis
/4
activity is not high, the frequency of obtaining transformants is low. Moreover, hypocotyls that can grow on a screening medium need to be subcultured several times to obtain a large amount of calli, and positive calli enter the differentiation stage relatively slowly.
/4
This transformation system generally takes 1 a, or even longer, from the beginning to the acquisition of regenerated seedlings. In Agrobacterium-mediated transformation of embryogenic calli, embryogenic calli which have been subcultured for 7~14 d and are in vigorous division can bewere selected as the transformation receptor, and the transformation efficiency was can reach 56.3%, which was is much higher than the transformation efficiency achieved with hypocotyl as a transformation receptor. In addition, they can enter the differentiation culture stage can be entered after only 2 screenings, and it takes only 5~6 months to obtain regenerated plants, which greatly shortens the cotton transgenic cycle.
The embryogenic callus of glandless cotton was used as a transforming receptor for Agrobacterium, and the transcription factor DREB1C gene was successfully introduced into the cotton genome to obtain transgenic plants. It was confirmed by PCR that the transcription factor DREB1C gene was inserted into the genome of glandless land cotton Jisheng 1. This indicates that transfer of the gene into embryogenic callus of glandless cotton through Agrobacterium-mediated transformation is feasible.
中国語 から 英語: EXPRESSION OF ISOLEUCINE ZIPPER MODIFIED SOLUBLE CD40L IN PICHIA PASTORIS General field: 科学 Detailed field: 生物学(バイオテク、生化学、微生物学)
2.5 SDS-PAGE 和 Western 印迹分析
将发酵液离心去除菌体，上清液用终浓度为20 %（WPV）的三氯乙酸/丙酮沉淀蛋白质。沉淀的蛋白质用1X蛋白质上样缓冲液溶解，在12%聚丙烯酰胺凝胶上进行还原性的SDS-PAGE电泳分析，Western印迹按《分子克隆实验指南》中的方法进行操作，一抗为山羊抗人CD40L的多克隆抗体，二抗为辣根素过氧化酶标记兔抗山羊IgG。
翻訳 - 英語 2 Materials and methods
2.1 Plasmid, bacterial strain and main reagents
Host Pichia pastoris strain GS115, shutter plasmid pPICZαA, antibiotic Zeocin, YNB, and biotin were purchased from the company Invitrogen; pORF-CD40L plasmid was purchased from the company Invitrogen; E. coli XL-1-blue was stored in our laboratory; Pfu enzyme was purchased from the company TaKaRa [sic! – Takara Bio Inc.?]; restriction endonuclease, dNTPs, T4 polynucleotide kinase and T4DNA
ligase were purchased from the company Fermenta [sic! - Fermenta Biotech Limited?]; goat anti-human CD40L polyclonal antibody was purchased from the company Santa; rabbit anti-goat secondary antibody was purchased from the company Zhongsen; isoleucine zipper and all primers were synthesized by Shanghai-based Boya Company Shanghai Boya company.
2.2 Construction of pPICZαA-IZ-sCD40L plasmid
2.2.1 Cloning of the sCD40L gene
Based on the CD40L cDNA sequences reported in the literature, two primers of sCD40L were designed and synthesized: 5’-CGG TGA GAG ATT GTT GAT GCA AAA AGG TGA TCA-3’, and 5’-GC TCT AGA GAG TTT GAG TAA GCC AAA GG-3’. With pORF-CD40L plasmid as template (TCT AGA as the enzymatic cleavage site for Xba I), PCR amplification was carried out under the conditions of 94°C for 30 s, 50°C for 30 s, and 72°C for 60 s; after 25 cycles of amplification, elongation was conducted at 72°C for 7 min; the product was stored at 4°C. The amplification obtained an sCD40L gene (113-261 aa), which had a 3’ end that incorporated the cleavage site Xba I and a 5’ end that incorporated two leucines.
2.2.2 Synthesis of the isoleucine zipper
According to Pichia pastoris codon preference, the nucleotide sequence of AGA ATG AAG CAA ATC GAG GAC AAG ATC GAG GAG ATC TTG TCC AAG ATC TAC CAC ATC GAG AAC GAG ATC GCT AGA ATC AAG AAG TTG ATC GGT GAG AGA was deduced from the known isoleucine zipper (IZ) sequence. The IZ gene with a full length of 99 bp was manually synthesized. With IZ as template and using the two primers, 5’-ATA CTC GAG AAA AGA GAG AGA ATG AAG CAA ATC GAG GAC-3’ and 5’-CCT TTT TGC ATC AAC AAT CTC TCA CCG ATC AAC-3’ (CTC GAG as the enzymatic cleavage site of Xho I), PCR amplification was carried out under the conditions of 94°C for 30 s, 54°C for 30 s, and 72°C for 30 s; after 25 cycles of amplification, elongation was conducted at 72°C for 7 min. and the product was stored at 40°C. The amplification obtained the IZ gene which had the cleavage site Xho I incorporated in the 5’ end and two leucines incorporated in the 3’ end, respectively.
2.2.3 Cloning of IZ-sCD40L gene
With the DNA fragment of sCD40L and the DNA fragment of IZ as templates and using the forward primer of IZ, 5’-ATA CTC GAG AAA AGA GAG AGA ATG AAG CAA ATC GAG GAC-3’, and the reverse primer of CD40L of 5’-GC TCT AGA GAG TTT GAG TAA GCC AAA AGA TG-3’, PCR overlapping was carried out under the conditions of 94°C for 30 s, 52°C for 30s, and 72°C for 90 s; after 25 cycles of the overlapping, elongation was conducted at 72°C for 7 min.
and the product was stored at 40°C. The IZ-sCD40L gene, which had IZ and sCD40L that were connected through two leucines, was obtained.
2.2.4 Construction of the pPICZαA-IZ-sCD40L plasmid
The DNA fragment of pPICZαA plasmid IZ-sCD40L was double digested by Xho I and Xba I, respectively. The digested product was ligated, and the ligated product was transformed into E. coli XL-1-blue competent cells. The cells were applied onto LLB plates containing Zeocin (1% tryptone, 0.5% yeast extract, 1% NaCl, pH 7, 2% agar powder, Zeocin
25 μg/ml). Positive clone was selected to extract the plasmid for analysis.
2.2.5 Identification of the pPICZαA-IZ-sCD40L plasmid
The plasmid extracted from the positive clone was double digested with Xho I and Xba I, and the positive plasmid was sent to Shanghai-based Boya Company [sic! – Shanghai-based Bio Asia Co.?] Boya for DNA sequencing.
2.3 Transformation of Pichia pastoris and phenotype identification
The pPICZαA-IZ-sCD40L plasmid, which was correctly sequenced, was linearized with Sac I, and the linearized plasmid was electroporated (with an electroporator made by Eppendrof [sic! – Appears to be a source typo for “Eppendorf”]) into Pichia pastoris strain GS115 under the conditions of 1.51 kV and 5 ms by following the standard operating procedure of the manufacturer (Invitrogen). The electroporated GS115 was applied onto YPDS plates containing Zeocin (2% tryptone, 1% yeast extract, 2% glucose,
2% sorbitol, 2% agar powder, Zeocin 100 μg/ml). Positive clone was selected to conduct PCR analysis using 5’AOX1 and 3’AOX1 primers (5’-GAC TGG TTC CAA TTG ACA AGC-3’ ; 5’-GCA AAT GGC AT2 TCT GAC ATC C-3’ ) (Invitrogen). If the IZ-sCD40L gene had been incorporated into the Pichia pastoris genome and was of a Mut+ phenotype (methanol utilization plus phenotype), the PCR product would have a DNA band at around 1072 bp (564 + 508 bp) and a DNA band at around 2.2 kb, while the PCR product of Muts phenotype (methanol utilization slow phenotype) would only have a DNA band at around 1072 bp (564 + 508 bp).
2.4 Inductive expression of IZ-sCD40L in Pichia pastoris
Positive clone identified by PCR (GS115/ pPICZαA-IZ-sCD40L/Mut+) was inoculated into 25 ml BMGY medium (1% yeast extract, 2% peptone, 1.34% YNB, 4 × 10-5 biotin, 1% glycerol) contained in a 250 ml shake flask, incubated at 28°C~30°C / 250~300 rpm until OD600 = 2~6 (16-18 h). The cells were harvested by centrifuging 1500~3000 g for 5 min. at room temperature and resuspended until OD600 = 1.0 in BMMY medium (1% yeast extract, 2% peptone, 1.34% YNB, 4 × 10-5% biotin, 0.5% methanol). Then the culture was placed in a 1 L shake flask with the mouth covered with two layers of sterile gauze, and the flask was placed in a shaking incubator of 28~30°C / 250~300 rpm to continue the growth of cells. 100% methanol was added to the culture every 24 hours until the final concentration reached 0.5%~1.0% to induce protein expression; the culture supernatant was collected at 0, 24, 48, 72 h.
/3
2.5 SDS-PAGE and Western blot analyses
The fermented culture was centrifuged to remove the cells, and the supernatant was treated with trichloroacetic acid/acetone which had a final concentration of 20% (WPV) to precipitate the protein. The precipitated protein was dissolved in a 1 × protein sample loading buffer to conduct the reducing SDS-PAGE electrolysis analysis on 12% polyacrylamide gel. Western blot was carried out according to the procedure described in Laboratory Guide to Molecular Cloning, wherein the goat anti-human CD40L polyclonal antibody was used as the primary antibody, and horseradish peroxidase -labeled rabbit anti-goat IgG was used as the secondary antibody.
中国語 から 英語: A safety type LED ceiling lamp General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: エレクトロニクス/電子工学
翻訳 - 英語 1. A safety type LED ceiling lamp, which mainly comprises a baseplate, an LED lamp board, an LED lamp cover, a power supply and a lamp covershield, wherein the lamp cover shield is screwed to the baseplate to form a cavity, the LED lamp board and the power supply are arranged in the cavity, and the LED lamp cover is disposed above the LED lamp board and covers the LED lamp board, characterized in that the LED ceiling lamp further includes a power supply cover, and the power supply cover is disposed above the power supply and covers the power supply.
2. The safety type LED ceiling lamp of claim 1, characterized in that the power supply cover is designed into a bowl-shaped structure made of an insulating material, its upper end outlet is designed to extend outwardly and in parallel to the edge to form a skirt, and the skirt is provided with a number of screw holes.
3. The safety type LED ceiling lamp of claim 1, characterized in that an opening is designed on the bottom of the power supply cover, and the opening is provided with a light-permeable upper cover and a snap clamping ring.
Technical Field
[0001] The utility model relates to the application field of LED lighting technology, in particular to a safety type LED ceiling lamp.
Background of the Invention
[0002] Compared with the a traditional ceiling lamp, the LED ceiling lamp has the advantages of high luminous efficiency, long life, environmental protection, adjustable brightness and color temperature, etc. Therefore, with the continuous development of LED technology, it is inevitable that the LED ceiling lamp replaces the traditional ceiling lamp.
[0003] At present, the existing LED ceiling lamp generally comprises a baseplate, an LED lamp board, an LED lamp cover, a power supply and a lamp covershield, and the lamp board is screwed to the lamp shieldcover. The LED lamp board, the LED lamp cover and the power supply are disposed between the baseplate and the lamp covershield. The LED lamp cover is used to cover the LED lamp board to prevent dust from falling directly on the LED lamp. However, the disadvantage of such an LED ceiling lamp is that no safety measures are provided above the power supply to protect the power supply such , causing that the dust directly falls on the power supply, and during the installation process, other components easily and directly fall upon the power supply during the installation process, causing the damages to the power supply, to be damaged until resulting in inadequate brightness of the LED ceiling lamp is not bright. In addition, when the LED ceiling lamp is working, it is easy to makefor the metal parts to come in contact with the components of the power supply, and thus the metal parts are electrically conducts electricityive, thereby making causing the LED ceiling lamp to conduct electricityive. They are also easily touched by lamp assembly workers employees, resulting in the loosening or damage of the components of the power supply, which in turn affects the service life of the LED ceiling lamp.
Contents of the Invention
[0004] In order to solve the above-mentioned prior art problems, the utility model provides a safety type LED ceiling lamp, which makes enables the power supply to have the functions ofbe dustproof and anti-protected from damages, and can also improve the safety factor ratinglevel of the LED ceiling lamp.
[0005] The technical solution adopted by the utility model to solve the technical problems thereof is:
[0006] A safety type LED ceiling lamp, mainly comprises a baseplate, an LED lamp board, an LED lamp cover, a power supply and a lamp covershield, wherein the lamp shield cover is screwed to the baseplate to form a cavity, the LED lamp board and the power supply are disposed in the cavity, and the LED lamp cover is disposed above the LED lamp board and covers the LED lamp board; the LED ceiling lamp further includes a power supply cover, and the power supply cover is disposed above the power supply and covers the power supply.
[0007] As a further improvement of the utility model, the power supply cover is made of an insulating material and designed into a bowl-like structure, and itsthe upper end outlet is designed to extend outwardly and in parallel to the edge to form a skirt, and the skirt is provided with a number of screw holes.
[0008] As a further improvement of the present invention, an opening is designed on the bottom of the power supply cover, and the opening is provided with a light-permeable upper cover and a clampingsnap ring.
[0009] The utility model relates to a safety LED ceiling lamp of the , utility model which is provided with a power supply cover to cover the power supply to . It has the functions of preventing dust from falling on the components of the power supply, preventing avoid the damage toof the components, protecting the power supply, and improveing the service life of the components; it prevents that when the LED ceiling lamp is working, other metal parts are prevented from coming into contact with the components of the power supply to make, and thus the metal parts conduct are electricitycally conductive and , thereby finally makeing the LED ceiling lamp conduct electricityive; in addition, it also prevents the employees workers on the production line from touching the components of the power supply during the assembly process and causing damages. The LED ceiling lamp has a simple structure, is convenient to install, and is easy to replace.
日本語 から 英語: Patient Medical Record (Hospitalization) General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 健康管理
翻訳 - 英語 PH) # Newborn melena/milk allergy suspected: Bloody mucous in stool found at age of 3 days and admitted to NICU of our hospital. At age of 18 days, blood in stool occurred again; at age of 26 days: Elental P + breast milk; at age of 54 days: ALST: positive casein, lactoferrin and α-lactalbumin. At age of 68 days: breastfeeding resumed.
Vomiting
Bed sheet was changed before bathing and milk vomiting.
At 1 PM, we were called and informed that the child vomited about 50 CC. The vomiting was in an ejection manner caused by coughing, and the child looked better after vomiting.
Inhalation and suction were performed before breastfeeding, and yellow sputum was changed to white sputum gradually with improved viscosity. The child cried when hungry and the anterior fontanel was flat with no fever.
The child urinated without symptoms of dehydration or nausea.
The risk of dehydration has been explained if the vomiting continues, and the guidance is given on observation and reporting.
Vomiting not persistent.
英語 から 中国語: family office in Switzerland General field: ビジネス/金融 Detailed field: 宣伝/広報
原書のテキスト - 英語 There is no 'one size fits all' solution. Every family office functions differently, offers different services, and will therefore be able or, oppositely, completely unable to deliver the services you are looking for. As your family's wealth and future well-being strongly depend on the selection of the right provider, the selection process should be very thorough.
Wealth planning is the art of structuring your wealth while building it, preserving it, and in order to transfer it to the next generation tax-optimised. Wealth planning is a mix of tax planning, wealth protection, estate planning and business succession planning and relates to your total worldwide wealth. A good family office in Switzerland will support you with solid wealth planning services.
Inheritance and gift tax: Contrary to what most believe, Monaco does levy inheritance- and gift tax (transfer tax) from the families living in Monaco, but this is limited to movable and immovable properties located within the Principality (a so-called “situs tax”). The applicable tax rate depends on the relationship between the deceased and the beneficiary. The applicable tax rate for children, spouses, and also parents is 0%. Therefore in effect, in most cases, no inheritance tax is levied.
Hedge funds are alternative investment vehicles whose main benefit lies in their flexibility. Hedge funds can invest in a wide variety of asset classes (fixed income, equities, currencies, and commodities) and can implement their trades through long and short positions, derivatives and/or leverage.
翻訳 - 英語 Article 11 (Transfer of Deposits or Other Security Money)
1. When delivering the Property, the Seller shall cause the Buyer to succeed to the liability for refund of deposits or security money received from the existing tenants as of the date of delivery of the Property (hereinafter referred to as “Liability for Refund of Deposits or Other Security Money”).
2. The Seller shall pay to the Buyer an amount equal to the amount of Liability for Refund of Deposits or Other Security Money. Such payment shall be settled by the Seller and the Buyer prior to payment of the Sale Price specified in paragraph 2 of Article 3.
3. The amount that is equal to the amount of Liability for Refund of Deposits or Other Security Money and shall be paid by the Seller to the Buyer according to the preceding paragraph shall be (9,807,000 Yen on July 25, 2018, provided however that if, before the delivery of the Property, there is any change in the amount of Liability for Refund of Deposits or Other Security Money, the amount shall be the changed amount. The Seller shall notify the Buyer in writing of such change and reasons for such change as soon as possible) and settle the account by deduction from the Sale Price to be collected by the Seller from the Buyer.
4. With respect to the refund of the renovation fee and the deposit or security money for building restoration received from the existing tenants before the delivery of the Property, when the existing tenants make any claims to the Seller or the Buyer (including claims for a refund on the ground that the renovation fee collected by the Seller before the delivery of the Property is exorbitant) after the delivery of the Property, the Seller shall properly respond to such claims at its own expense and liability to the extent permitted by applicable laws and regulations and, if such response causes any losses to the Buyer, shall make compensation for such losses.
Article 13 (Seller’s Representations and Warranties)
1. The Seller represents and warrants to the Buyer that: the following are true and accurate as of the date of signing of this Agreement and the Closing Date. Any contravention by the Seller, whether intentionally or unintentionally, regardless of negligence or not, of the representations and warranties made to the Buyer under this Article shall be deemed as a default of the Seller under this Agreement. When the Seller contravenes the representations and warranties set forth in this Article, it shall compensate, as soon as possible, for any losses and expenses caused to the Buyer due to or in connection with such contravention.
(1) The Seller is a juridical person validly existing and organized under the laws of Japan and owns its properties, has the capacity for rights and actions necessary to execute this Agreement and perform the obligations herein, and has taken all actions (including but not limited to internal authorization) required for such execution and performance of this Agreement.
(2) The execution of this Agreement and the performance of obligations herein do not violate laws, government decrees, provincial degrees, notices or other rules of Japan, the Seller’s Articles of Association, board rules and other internal corporate rules, or agreements on loans for expenses, agreements or pledges on setting of collaterals, or other agreements that bind on the Seller or the Seller’s properties or have influences on the properties of the Seller.
(3) The Seller does not file for bankruptcy, or civil rehabilitation procedure or similar legal proceedings and is not a subject of any similar legal proceedings filed by a third person. The Seller is not in a state of insolvency, payment suspension or excessive indebtedness, and is not in a state that causes a major concern about the Seller’s credit status. In addition, the sale made under this Agreement will not put the Seller in a state of insolvency, payment suspension or excessive indebtedness.
(4) The execution and performance of this Agreement by the Seller shall be for legitimate purposes and not for fraudulent purposes or intentions or illegal purposes. The Seller does not have the intention to, by sale of the Property herein, exchange the Property for money for concealing of asset, offer it for free or otherwise dispose of it that harms the Seller’s creditors. Furthermore, the sale of the Property made under this Agreement is by no means a disposal that will harm the rights and interests of the Seller’s creditors.
(5) With respect to the sale of the Property, the Seller intends to conduct a true and valid sale and does not have the intention to use the Property as security.
(6) The Property is as set forth in Exhibit 3 “SELLER’S REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES”. However, the Seller’s representations and warranties do not cover those stated in Exhibit 2 “OUTLINE OF PROPERTY” that may be contrary to any of the provisions set out in Exhibit 3 “SELLER’S REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES”, so the undertakings made by the Seller in the OUTLINE OF PROPERTY shall constitute the Seller’s obligations under this Agreement.
2. If the representations set forth in the preceding paragraphs are determined to be false or incorrect or have had any change as of the Closing Date, the Seller shall immediately notify the Buyer in writing of such falseness, incorrectness or change.
Article 14 (Buyer’s Representations and Warranties）
1. The Buyer represents and warrants to the Seller that: the following are true and accurate as of the date of signing of this Agreement. Any contravention by the Buyer, whether intentionally or unintendedly, regardless of negligence or not, of the representations and warranties made to the Seller under this Article shall be deemed as a default of the Buyer under this Agreement. When the Buyer contravenes the representations and warranties set forth in this Article, it shall, as soon as possible, compensate for any losses and expenses caused to the Seller due to or in connection with such contravention.
(1) The Buyer is a juridical person validly existing and organized under the laws of Japan, owns its properties, has the capacity for rights and actions necessary to execute this Agreement and perform the obligations herein, and has taken all actions (including but not limited to internal authorization) required for such execution and performance of this Agreement.
(2) The execution of this Agreement and the performance of obligations herein do not violate laws, government decrees, provincial degrees, notices or other rules of Japan, the Buyer’s Articles of Association, board rules and other internal corporate rules (if any), or any agreements on loans for expenses, agreements or pledges on setting of collaterals, or other agreements that bind on the Buyer or the Buyer’s properties or have influences on the properties of the Buyer.
(3) The Buyer does not file for bankruptcy, or civil rehabilitation procedure or similar legal proceedings and is not a subject of any similar legal proceedings filed by a third person. The Buyer is not in a state of insolvency, payment suspension or excessive indebtedness, and is not in a state that causes a major concern about the Buyer’s credit status.In addition, the sale made under this Agreement will not put the Buyer in the state of insolvency, payment suspension or excessive indebtedness.
2. If the representations set forth in the preceding paragraphs are determined to be false or incorrect or have had any change as of the Closing Date, the Buyer shall immediately notify in writing the Seller of such falseness, incorrectness or change.
Article 15 (Liability for Warranty Against Defects）
1. With respect to any defects of the Property (including but not limited to hidden defects), the Seller shall be liable for any damages, losses and expenses (including any payment claims of a third party) caused to the Buyer due to such defects after the delivery of the Property provided that the Buyer submit a written request with respect to such liability within two years from the date of delivery of the Property under this Agreement. Furthermore, for the matters described in Exhibit 2-2 “SELLER’S OBLIGATIONS AS OF THE CLOSING DATE” (except for those expressly waived by the Buyer), the Buyer shall be deemed to have submitted said written request by the signing of this Agreement.
2. Article 526 of the Commercial Code (Act No. 48 of 1899, including subsequent revisions thereof) shall not apply to this Agreement.
3. The provisions of the preceding two paragraphs shall not prejudice the rights of the Buyer against the Seller under the other clauses hereof (including but not limited to Article 13).
朝鮮語 から 英語: Written Opinion of the International Searching Authority General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 機械工学
原書のテキスト - 朝鮮語 1. 신규성 및 진보성
1.1 독립항: 청구항 제1항
청구항 제1항에 기재된 발명과 근접한 인용문헌 이에는 유입유로(834)，배출유로(814)， 밸브몸체(810)，및 밸브스풀(830)을 포함하는 공기배출장치 (800)가 제시되어 있습니다(단 락 [0040]-[0067] 및 도면 1-7 참조).
다만 청구항 제1항은 공기배출용 체크밸브가 유입유로를 포함하는 구체의 밸브스풀을 갖는 점에서 인용문헌 D1과 차이가 있지만，상기 밸브스풀에 형성된 유입유로는 통상의 기술자가 설계 변경할 수 있는 것이고，또한 상기 구체의 밸브스풀은 인용문헌 D2의 강구 (45) 를 포함하는 공기빼기 기능을 갖춘 유압 실린더로부터 통상의 기술자가 용이하게 도 출할 수 있는 것입니다 (단락 [0016]-[0018] 및 도면 2 참조). 인용문헌 D1과 D2의 기술분 야가 동일한 점과 구성을 고려해볼 때 인용문헌 D1에 인용문헌 D2의 특징을 결합하는데 기술적으로 어려움은 없으며, 효과면에서도 예측되는 당연한 효과 이외 현저히 향상된 효 과가 있다고 인정되지 아니합니다. 따라서 청구항 제1항에 기재된 발명은 인용문헌 D1과 인용문헌 D2에 의해 자명하므로 진보성이 없습니다 (PCT 제33조(3)).
1.2 종속항: 청구항 제2항 내지 제11항
1.2.1 청구항 제2항
청구항 제2항에 기재된 부가적인 특징은 인용문헌 D1에 기재된 제1 배출유로(814a)와 제2 배출유로(814b)와 실질적으로 동일합니다(단락 [0060] 및 4, 5 참조). 따라서 청구항 제2항에 기재된 발명은 인용문헌 D1과 인용문헌 D2에 의해 자명하므로 진보성이 없습니다 (PCT 제33조(3)).
1.2.2 청구항 제3항
청구항 제3항에 기재된 부가적인 특징은 밸브몸체가 인출입유로가 형성되는 제1 밸브몸 체와 수용부가 형성되는 제2 밸브몸체를 포함 것으로，이는 인용문헌 D2의 밸브본체 홀더 (41)와 시트링 (42)을 포함하는 공기빼기 기능을 갖춘 유압 실린더로부터 통상의 기술자가 용이하게 도출할 수 있는 것입니다 (단락 [0016]-[0018] 및 도면 2 참조). 따라서 청구항 제3항에 기재된 발명은 인용문헌 D1과 인용문헌 D2에 의해 자명하므로 진보성이 없습니다 (PCT 제33조(3)).
1.2.3 청구항 제4항
청구항 제4항에 기재된 부가적인 특징은 인용문헌 D2에 기재된 단차부(41a)와 실질적으 로 동일합니다 (도면 2 참조). 따라서 청구항 제4항에 기재된 발명은 인용문헌 D1과 인용 문헌 D2에 의해 자명하므로 진보성이 없습니다 (PCT 제33조(3)).
1.2.4 청구항 제5항
청구항 제5항에 기재된 부가적인 특징은 제2 배출유로가 구체의 밸브스풀의 배출위치와 차단위치 사이에서의 왕복 이동 방향을 따라 제2 밸브몸체에 함몰 형성되는 것으로，이는 인용문헌 D1의 제1 배출유로(814a)가 밸브스풀(830)의 제1 위치와 제2 위치 사이에서 왕 복 이동 방향을 따라 밸브몸체에 함몰 형성되는 것으로부터 통상의 기술자가 용이하게 도 출할 수 있는 것입니다 (단락 [0064]，[0065] 참조). 따라서 청구항 제5항에 기재된 발명 은 인용문헌 D1과 인용문헌 D2에 의해 자명하므로 진보성이 없습니다(PCT 제33조(3)).
1.2.5 청구항 제6항
청구항 제6항에 기재된 부가적인 특징은 인용문헌 이에 기재된 밸브 탄성부재(850)와 실질적으로 동일합니다(단락 [0064] 및 도면 4，5 참조). 따라서 청구항 제6항에 기재된 발명은 인용문헌 D1과 인용문헌 D2에 의해 자명하므로 진보성이 없습니다(PCT 제33조 (3)).
1.2.6 청구항 제7항
청구항 제7항에 기재된 부가적인 특징은 탄성부재가 구체의 밸브스풀이 차단위치에서 배출위치로 이동되도록 탄성 바이어스 되는 것으로, 이는 인용문헌 D1의 밸브 탄성부재 (850)가 밸브 스풀을 탄성 바이어스 하는 구성으로부터 통상의 기술자가 용이하게 도출할 수 있는 것입니다(단락 [0064] 및 도면 4, 5 참조). 따라서 청구항 제7항에 기재된 발명 은 인용문헌 D1과 인용문헌 D2에 의해 자명하므로 진보성이 없습니다(PCT 제33조(3)).
1.2.7 청구항 제8항
청구항 제8항에 기재된 발명은 인출입유로가 제1 밸브몸체에 형성되며，유압유가 인입 될 때 구체의 밸브스풀에 유압력을 제공하는 제1 인출입유로와 제1 인출입유로의 원주 방 향으로 제1 밸브몸체에 함몰 형성되고 구체의 밸브스풀과의 접촉 영 역은 노치 (notch) 가 공되어，유압유가 인입될 때 수용부로 유압유를 안내하는 제2 인출입유로를 포함하는 점 에서 상기 인용문헌 D1의 기재된 발명과 차이가 있으며, 상기 차이는 다른 인용문헌에도 기재가 되어 있지 않으며, 통상의 지식을 가진 자에게 자명하지도 않습니다. 따라서 청구 항 제8항은 신규성과 진보성이 있습니다 (PCT 제33조(2) 및 (3)).
1.2.8 청구항 제9항
인용문헌 D1 및 D2에는 청구항 제9항의 특징인 탄성부재의 탄성력을 구체의 밸브스풀에 제공하는 매개부재가 제시되어 있지 않으나, 이는 인용문헌 D3의 밸브스풀(30)의 상단에 구비된 고정체(32)로부터 통상의 기술자가 용이하게 도출할 수 있는 것입니다 (단락 [0032], [0033] 및 도면 7-9 참조). 인용문헌 D1 내지 D3의 기술분야가 동일한 점과 구성 을 고려해볼 때 인용문헌 D1 및 D2에 인용문헌 D3의 특징을 결합하는데 기술적으로 어려 움은 없으며, 효과면에서도 예측되는 당연한 효과 이외 현저히 향상된 효과가 있다고 인 정되지 아니합니다. 따라서 청구항 제9항에 기재된 발명은 인용문헌 D1 내지 인용문헌 D3
에 의해 자명하므로 진보성이 없습니다 (PCT 제33조(3)).
1.2.9 청구항 제10항
청구항 제10항에 기재된 부가적인 특징은 공기배출용 체크밸브가 밸브몸체의 접촉면과 의 사이에서 윤활력을 제공하는 윤활력 제공부를 포함하는 것으로, 이는 인용문헌 D1의 교축 작용부 (870) 로부터 통상의 기술자가 용이하게 도출할 수 있는 것입니다 (단락 [0066], [0067] 및 도면 4-7 참조) . 따라서 청구항 제 10항에 기 재된 발명은 인용문헌 D1 내지 인용문헌 D3에 의해 자명하므로 진보성이 없습니다 (PCT 제33조(3)).
1.2.10 청구항 제11항
청구항 제11항에 기재된 부가적인 특징은 매개부재가 구체의 밸브스풀과 탄성부재 대비 낮은 경도를 갖는 것으로, 이는 통상의 기술자가 상황에 따라 적절히 선택하여 실시할 수 있는 주지의 기술입니다. 따라서 청구항 제11항에 기재된 발명은 인용문헌 D1 내지 인용 문헌 D3에 의해 자명하므로 진보성이 없습니다 (PCT 제33조(3)).
1.3 독립항: 청구항 제12항
청구항 제12항에 기재된 공기배출용 체크밸브는 청구항 제1항과 기술적 특징이 공통되 므로, 동일한 논리가 적용됩니다. 또한 인용문헌 이에는 피스톤(200) 및 실린더 (100)를 포함하는 발전소용 유압 액추에이터가 제시되어 있습니다(단락 [0040]-[0067] 및 도면 1-7 참조). 따라서 청구항 제12항에 기재된 발명은 인용문헌 이과 인용문헌 D2에 의해 자 명하므로 진보성이 없습니다(PCT 제33조(3)).
(참고: 청구항 제12항은 청구항 제1항의 공기배출용 체크밸브를 포함하고 있는 것으로 가 정하였습니다.)
2. 산업상 이용가능성
청구항 제1항 내지 제12항에 기재된 발명은 산업상 이용 가능합니다(PCT 제33조(4)).
翻訳 - 英語 1. Novelty and Inventive Step
1.1 Independent Claim: Claim 1
Document D1, which closely relates to the invention according to claim 1, discloses an air discharge device (800) comprising an inflow path (834), a discharge path (814), a valve body (810) and a valve spool (830) (see Paragraphs [0040] to [0067] and Figures 1 to 7).
Claim 1 is different from document D1 in that the exhaust check valve has a ball valve spool comprising an inflow path. The inflow path formed on said valve spool is a structure which those skilled in the art can change by design, and in addition, said ball valve spool can easily be realized by those skilled in the art according to the hydraulic cylinder comprising a steel ball (45) and having the exhaust function disclosed in document D2 (see Paragraphs [0016] to [0018] and Figure 2). Viewed from the same technical field which Document D1 and Document D2 belong to and the structures described in these two documents, there is no technical difficulty in combining the characteristics of Document D1 and Document D2, and in terms of effects, there is no significantly improved effect, except the predictable effects. Consequently, the invention as set forth in claim 1 can be easily implemented according to Document D1 and Document D2 and thus lacks an inventive step (PCT Article 33(3)).
1.2 Dependent Claims: Claim 2 through Claim 11
1.2.1 Claim 2
The additional characteristic described in claim 2 is essentially the same as the first discharge path (814a) and the second discharge path (814b) as described in Document D1 (see Paragraph [0060] and Figures 4 and 5). Consequently, the invention described in claim 2 can be easily implemented according to Document D1 and Document D2 and thus lacks an inventive step (PCT Article 33(3)).
1.2.2 Claim 3
According to the additional characteristic described in claim 3, the valve body comprises a first valve body where inflow/outflow paths are formed and a second valve body where an accommodation portion is formed. However, those skilled in the art can easily realize the structure according to the hydraulic cylinder comprising a valve body holder (41) and a seat ring (42) and having the exhaust function as disclosed in Document D2 (see Paragraphs [0016] to [0018] and Figure 2). Consequently, the invention described in claim 3 can be easily implemented according to Document D1 and Document D2 and thus lacks an inventive step (PCT Article 33(3)).
1.2.3 Claim 4
The additional characteristic described in claim 4 is essentially the same as the blocking portion (41a) as described in Document 2 (see Figure 2). Consequently, the invention described in claim 4 can be easily implemented according to Document D1 and Document D2 and thus lacks an inventive step (PCT Article 33(3)).
1.2.4 Claim 5
According to the additional characteristic described in claim 5, the second discharge path is formed by denting the second valve body in the back-and-forth movement direction between the discharge position and the blocking position of the ball valve spool, and those skilled in the art can easily realize the second discharge path according to the structure formed by denting the valve body in the back-and-forth movement direction of the first discharge path (814a) between the first position and the second position of the valve spool (830) as disclosed in Document D1 (see Paragraphs [0064] and [0065]). Consequently, the invention described in claim 5 can be easily implemented according to Document D1 and Document D2 and thus lacks an inventive step (PCT Article 33(3)).
1.2.5 Claim 6
The additional characteristic described in claim 6 is essentially the same as the valve's elastic component (850) as described in Document 1 (see Paragraph [0064] and Figures 4 and 5). Consequently, the invention described in claim 6 can be easily implemented according to Document D1 and Document D2 and thus lacks an inventive step (PCT Article 33(3)).
1.2.6 Claim 7
According to the additional characteristic described in claim 7, the elastic component is elastically biased to move the ball valve spool from the blocking position to the discharge position, and those skilled in the art can easily realize the structure according to the valve's elastic component (850) which elastically biases the valve spool disclosed in Document D1 (see Paragraph [0064] and Figures 4 and 5). Consequently, the invention described in claim 7 can be easily implemented according to Document D1 and Document D2 and thus lacks an inventive step (PCT Article 33(3)).
1.2.7 Claim 8
According to the invention described in claim 8, the inflow/outflow paths are formed on the first valve body and comprise a first inflow/outflow path (a hydraulic pressure is supplied to the ball valve spool when a hydraulic oil flows into the path) and a second inflow/outflow path (the second inflow/outflow path is formed by denting the first valve body in the circumferential direction of the first inflow/outflow path, the contact area between the second inflow/outflow path and the ball valve spool is notched, and the hydraulic oil is guided to the accommodation portion when the hydraulic oil flows into the second inflow/outflow path). The above-mentioned structure is different from the invention as set forth in Document D1, and said difference is not mentioned in other reference documents and is not obvious to those skilled in the art. Consequently, claim 8 has novelty and an inventive step (PCT Article 33 (2) and (3)).
1.2.8 Claim 9
Although the characteristic set forth in claim 9, namely, the medium component which supplies the elastic force of the elastic component to the ball valve spool, is not described in Document D1 and Document D2, those skilled in the art can easily realize this structure according to the fixing body arranged at the top of the valve spool (30) disclosed in Document D3 (see Paragraphs [0032] and [0033] and Figures 7 to 9). In view of the same technical field which Document D1 and Document D3 belong to and the structures described in these two documents, there is no technical difficulty in combining the characteristics of document D1 and document D2 with the characteristic of document D3, and in terms of effects, there is no significantly improved effect, except the predictable effects. Consequently, the invention described in claim 9 can be easily implemented according to document D1 to document D3 and thus lacks an inventive step (PCT Article 33(3)).
1.2.9 Claim 10
According to the additional characteristic described in claim 10, the exhaust check valve comprises a lubrication force supply portion which can supply a lubrication force between the contact surfaces of the valve body, and those skilled in the art can easily realize this structure according to the throttling portion (870) disclosed in document D1 (see Paragraphs [0066] and [0067] and Figures 4 to 7). Consequently, the invention described in claim 10 can be easily implemented according to document D1 to document D3 and thus lacks an inventive step (PCT Article 33(3)).
1.2.10 Claim 11
According to the additional characteristic described in claim 11, the hardness of the medium component is much lower than the hardness of the ball valve spool or the elastic component, and this characteristic is the prior art which those skilled in the art can properly select and implement according to the situation. Consequently, the invention described in claim 11 can be easily implemented according to document D1 to document D3 and thus lacks an inventive step (PCT Article 33(3)).
1.3 Independent Claim: Claim 12
The technical characteristic of the exhaust check valve described in claim 12 is the same as that described in claim 1, and therefore the same logic applies. In addition, there is reference document describing a hydraulic actuator for a power plant which comprises a piston (200) and a cylinder (100) (see Paragraphs [0040] to [0067] and Figures 1 to 7). Consequently, the invention described in claim 12 can be easily implemented according to document D2 and thus lacks an inventive step (PCT Article 33(3)).
(For your reference: By inference, claim 12 includes the exhaust check valve described in claim 1.)
2. Industrial Applicability
The invention described in claims 1 to 12 is industrially applicable (PCT Article 33 (4)).
朝鮮語 から 英語: FOB KEY FOR VEHICLE General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: エレクトロニクス/電子工学
原書のテキスト - 朝鮮語 【발명의 설명】
【발명의 명칭】
차량용 포브키{FOB KEY FOR VEHICLE}
【기술분야】
본 발명은 차량용 포브키에 관한 것으로서, 보다 상세하게는 버튼과 택트 스위치 사이에 버튼을 지지하는 버튼 지지 구조체를 설치함으로써, 택트 스위치를 누르기 위한 버튼의 작동력을 증대시킬 수 있고, 버튼의 유동에 의한 소음을 방지할 수 있는 차량용 포브키에 관한 것이다.
【발명의 배경이 되는 기술】
차량의 문 열림 기능이나 잠금 기능의 수행, 차량 엔진의 시동 기능 등을 수행하기 위한 포브(FOB)키가 널리 사용되고 있다.
도 1 및 도 2를 참조하면, 종래의 포브키(1)는 하우징(10)의 내부에 택트 스위치(30)와 전장 부품(40)이 설치된 인쇄회로기판(50)이 설치되고, 하우징(10)에는 택트 스위치(30)를 작동시키기 위한 버튼(20)이 설치되며, 택트 스위치(30)와 버튼(20) 사이에는 버튼(20)의 유동에 의한 소음을 방지하기 위해서 버튼(20)의 내측을 고정해주는 고무 재질의 키 패드(60)가 설치된다.
택트 스위치(30)를 누르기 위한 버튼(20)의 작동력은 택트 스위치(30)의 작동력(3N ~ 5N)과 키 패드(60)의 경도로 조절된다.
하지만 택트 스위치(30)의 작동력 조절과 키 패드(60)의 경도 조절만으로는 버튼(20)의 작동력을 증대시키는데 한계가 있었고, 이러한 구조적인 한계로 인해 버튼(20)의 유동에 의한 소음을 방지할 수 없게 되는 문제점이 있었다.
또한, 종래의 구조로는 새롭게 요구되는 버튼(20)의 작동력(13N)을 만족시킬 수 없는 문제점이 있었다.
본 발명의 배경기술은 대한민국 공개실용신안공보 제2016-0004173호(2016.12.07.
공개, 고안의 명칭 : 차량의 포브키 어셈블리)에 게시되어 있다.
【발명의 내용】
【해결하고자 하는 과제】
본 발명은 상기와 같은 문제점들을 개선하기 위해 안출된 것으로서, 버튼과 택트 스위치 사이에 버튼을 지지하는 버튼 지지 구조체를 설치함으로써, 택트 스위치를 누르기 위한 버튼의 작동력을 증대시킬 수 있고, 버튼의 유동에 의한 소음을 방지할 수 있는 차량용 포브키를 제공하는데 그 목적이 있다.
【과제의 해결 수단】
본 발명에 따른 차량용 포브키는:
내부 공간에 택트 스위치와 전장 부품이 설치된 인쇄회로기판을 수용하는 하우징과, 택트 스위치를 향해 이동 가능하도록 하우징에 설치되는 버튼과, 버튼을 택트 스위치로부터 이격시키는 방향으로 탄성 지지하는 버튼 지지 구조체를 포함하는 것을 특징으로 한다.
또한, 버튼은 작동력이 가해지는 몸체부와, 몸체부로부터 택트 스위치를 향하는 방향으로 돌출 형성되어, 작동력을 택트 스위치로 전달하는 로드부를 포함하는 것을 특징으로 한다.
또한, 버튼 지지 구조체는 버튼의 몸체부를 탄성 지지하고, 하우징에 형성되는 지지 블록에 지지되도록 설치되는 것을 특징으로 한다.
또한, 지지 블록에는 버튼의 로드부가 관통할 수 있도록 관통홀이 형성되는 것을 특징으로 한다.
또한, 버튼 지지 구조체는 버튼의 로드부가 관통할 수 있는 크기의 코일 스프링인 것을 특징으로 한다.
또한, 버튼 지지 구조체는 지지 블록에 지지되는 박판 형상의 베이스 플레이트와, 베이스 플레이트로부터 경사진 형태로 돌출 형성되어 버튼의 몸체부를 탄성 지지하는 탄성 지지편을 포함하는 것을 특징으로 한다.
또한, 베이스 플레이트에는 버튼의 로드부가 이동할 수 있도록 통로를 마련하는 가이드 홈이 형성되는 것을 특징으로 한다.
또한, 탄성 지지편은 하나의 버튼의 몸체부에 대해 한 쌍이 탄성 지지하도록 형성되고, 한 쌍으로 형성되는 탄성 지지편은 몸체부에 가까워질수록 서로 가까워지도록 경사진 것을 특징으로 한다.
또한, 한 쌍으로 형성되는 탄성 지지편의 단부에는 버튼의 몸체부에 대한 접촉 면적을 증가시키는 접촉 플레이트가 더 형성되는 것을 특징으로 한다.
【발명의 효과】
본 발명에 따른 차량용 포브키는 버튼과 택트 스위치 사이에 버튼을 지지하는 버튼 지지 구조체를 설치함으로써, 택트 스위치를 누르기 위한 버튼의 작동력을 증대시킬 수 있고, 버튼의 유동에 의한 소음을 방지할 수 있다.
【도면의 간단한 설명】
도 1은 종래의 차량용 포브키를 개략적으로 나타낸 도면이다.
도 2는 도 1의 A-A 단면도이다.
도 3은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 차량용 포브키를 나타낸 분해 사시도로서, 버튼 지지 구조체의 제1 실시예가 적용된 도면이다.
도 4는 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 차량용 포브키를 나타낸 단면도로서, 버튼 지지 구조체의 제1 실시예가 적용된 도면이다.
도 5는 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 차량용 포브키를 나타낸 분해 사시도로서, 버튼 지지 구조체의 제2 실시예가 적용된 도면이다.
도 6은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 차량용 포브키를 나타낸 단면도로서, 버튼 지지 구조체의 제2실시예가 적용된 도면이다.
翻訳 - 英語
[Description of the Invention]
[Title of the Invention]
FOB KEY FOR VEHICLE
[Technical field]
The present invention relates to a fob key for a vehicle. In particular, a button-supporting structure supporting buttons is arranged between the buttons and the touch switches to increase the operating force on a button when the corresponding touch switch is pressed down and avoid noise when the button moves.
[Background art]
Currently, a fob key is widely used to unlock or lock vehicle doors and start a vehicle engine.
As shown in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2, for a traditional fob key 1, a printed circuit board 50 mounted with touch switches 30 and electrical parts 40 is arranged in the housing 10, buttons 20 used to start touch switches 30 are arranged on the housing 10, and a rubber keypad 60 fixing the inner side of the buttons 20 is arranged between the touch switches 30 and the buttons 20 to avoid noise from being produced when a button 20 moves.
When a touch switch 30 is pressed down, the operating force on a button 30 can be adjusted through the operating force (3 N to 5 N) on the touch switch 30 and the hardness of the keypad 60.
However, the increase of the operating force on a button 20 through the adjustment of the operating force on the corresponding touch switch 30 and the adjustment of the hardness of the keypad 60 is limited. Owning to the structural limitation, it is impossible to avoid noise from being produced when the button 20 moves.
In addition, the traditional structure cannot satisfy the requirement for the recently desired operating force (13 N) on a button 20.
The background art of the present invention is described in Korean Laid-Open Utility Model Gazette No. 2016-0004173 (published in December 7, 2016,
title of the utility model: fob key assembly for a vehicle).
[Disclosure of the invention]
[Technical problem]
The present invention is presented to solve the above-mentioned problem. The object of the present invention is to provide a fob key for a vehicle. Through the arrangement of a button-supporting structure supporting buttons between the buttons and the touch switches, the operating force on a button is increased when the corresponding touch switch is pressed down and noise can be avoided when the button moves.
[Technical solution]
A smart fob key for a vehicle according to the present invention includes:
a housing accommodating a printed circuit board mounted with touch switches and electrical parts, buttons arranged on the housing and able to move towards touch switches, and a button-supporting structure elastically supporting buttons in a direction far away from touch switches.
Further, the present invention is characterized in that a button comprises the following structures: a body portion an operating force is exerted on and a rod portion protruding from the body portion towards a touch switch to transfer the operating force to the touch switch.
Further, the present invention is characterized in that the button-supporting structure elastically supports the body portion of the button and is supported by the support block formed on the housing.
Further, the present invention is characterized in that through-holes are formed in the support block and the rod portions of buttons pass through the through-holes.
Further, the present invention is characterized in that said button-supporting structure is a coil spring whose size is so large that it allows the rod portion of a button to pass through.
Further, the present invention is characterized in that said button-supporting structure includes a base plate, which is sheet plate supported by said support block, and elastic support pieces aslant protruding from said base plate to elastically support said body portions of said buttons.
Further, the present invention is characterized in that guide slots are formed in said base plate to constitute channels allowing said rod portions of said buttons to move in.
Further, the present invention is characterized in that said body portion of said button is supported by a pair of said slant elastic support pieces, and said elastic support pieces approach each other as they approach said body portion.
Further, the present invention is characterized in that a contact plate is formed at the end of said pair of elastic support pieces to increase the area of contact with said body portion of said button.
[Advantageous effects]
For the fob key for a vehicle in the present invention, a button-supporting structure supporting buttons is arranged between the buttons and the touch switches to increase the operating force on a button when the corresponding touch switch is pressed down and avoid noise when the button moves.
[Brief description of the drawings]
Fig. 1 is a schematic diagram for a traditional fob key for a vehicle.
FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of A-A of FIG. 1.
Fig. 3 is an exploded oblique view of the fob key for a vehicle in one embodiment of the present invention and is applicable to the first embodiment of the button-supporting structure.
Fig. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the fob key for a vehicle in one embodiment of the present invention and is applicable to the first embodiment of the button-supporting structure.
Fig. 5 is an exploded oblique view of the fob key for a vehicle in another embodiment of the present invention and is applicable to the second embodiment of the button-supporting structure.
Fig. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the fob key for a vehicle in another embodiment of the present invention and is applicable to the second embodiment of the button-supporting structure.
中国語 から 英語: TIMING PARAMETER ANALYSIS OF CRITICAL LOOP TO RECONFIGURABLE ARRAY MAPPING General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: コンピュータ: ハードウェア
翻訳 - 英語 Abstract:
By defining core timing parameters such as setup time and hold time of mapping from critical loops of an algorithm to a reconfigurable array, analyzing practical problems such as limited memory bandwidth and irregular data flow graph topology, giving an optimization algorithm for configuring the timing model, and presenting a descriptive form of parameters such as path feature, a new processing method is provided for reconfigurable auto-compiling. The verification result shows that the optimized mapping algorithm improves the original performance by 43% in the mapping of the critical loop – deblocking - in the H.264 video algorithm.
Keywords: Critical loop; reconfigurable array; algorithm mapping;
timing model; array setup time; array hold time
1. Overview
Reconfigurable computing is a form of computing which combines the flexibility of software and the high efficiency of hardware. Early in 1960, a design method for reconfigurable hardware was put forward in Reference [1]. Restricted by manufacturing processes at the time, the research field did not boom until late 1990s. A computer system comprises a controller and a set of reconfigurable hardware. The controller is responsible for the behaviors of reconfigurable hardware, while the reconfigurable hardware can be tailored and recombined to execute a specific task, for example, media processing, and the efficiency is close to that of an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC). After executing the task, the reconfigurable hardware can be reallocated to execute other tasks. Therefore, the reconfigurable hardware has the flexibility comparable to that of a general processor. This form of computing has a high energy efficiency and has a broad application prospect for ever-changing algorithms in data intensive field. In this document, key issues in the mapping of algorithms to reconfigurable hardware will be discussed.
2. Algorithm and Critical Loop
From the perspective of algorithm analysis, some critical algorithms in applications use a large amount of computing time. From the perspective of program analysis, some loops in programs use a large amount of computing time [2]. Critical algorithms and loops are equivalent in a sense because critical algorithms are functions in programs and these functions in programs are often invoked in loops. Therefore, critical loops are generally the reflections of critical algorithms in programs [3]. For example, the IDCT algorithm in H.264 decoding is a critical algorithm which uses a large amount of computing time, and its processing object is 4 4 pixel blocks. A frame of CIF image (352 / 288) requires IDCT being performed 6336 times. In the program, it is a critical loop.
日本語 から 英語: GPS SURVEY METHOD AND DEVICE THEREOF General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: コンピュータ: ソフトウェア
翻訳 - 英語 [Claims]
[Claim 1]
A GPS survey method which uses GPS for surveying, characterized in that a 1st reference station whose absolute position is specified and is outside a target surveyed area is provided, a 2nd reference station which is mobile inside said target surveyed area is provided, a 1st GPS relative position between said 1st reference station and 2nd reference station is surveyed, a 2nd GPS relative position between said 2nd reference station and athe mobile station, which is positioned at a surveyed location, is surveyed, said 1st GPS relative position and said 2nd GPS relative position are added to the absolute position of said 1st reference station to survey the absolute position of the mobile station .
[Claim 2]
A GPS survey device, wherein a 1st reference station whose absolute position is specified and is outside a target surveyed area is provided, a 2nd reference station which is mobile inside said target surveyed area is provided, and a mobile station is provided at a surveyed location, characterized in that,
said 1st reference station is equipped with a GPS receiver, which calculates the arrival time lag of specific codes of GPS radio waves received from a plurality of GPS satellites or the phase shift of a carrier wave to form 1st correction information, and a 1st transmission means which
transmits said 1st correction information and said absolute position information to said 2nd reference station,
said 2nd reference station is equipped with a GPS receiver, which surveys a 1st GPS relative position between the 1st reference station and the 2nd reference station through said 1st correction information that is input and the GPS radio waves received from a plurality of GSP satellites and calculates the arrival time lag of specific codes of said GPS radio waves or the phase shift of a carrier wave to form 2nd correction information, and a 2nd transmission means which transmits the 2nd correction information of said GPS receiver, said 1st GPS relative position information and said input absolute position information to said mobile station,
said mobile station is equipped with a GPS receiver which surveys a 2nd GPS relative position between the 2nd reference station and the mobile station through said 2nd correction information that is input and the GPS radio waves received from a plurality of GPS satellites and adds the absolute position of said 1st reference station that is input and the
1st GPS’s relative position to said 2nd GPS relative position to survey the absolute position of the mobile station.
[Detailed description of the invention]
[0001]
[Technical field of the invention]
The present invention relates to a GPS survey method used in terrestrial or marine civil engineering.
[0002]
Conventionally, a GPS survey method has been used in terrestrial or marine civil engineering. In such a conventional GPS survey method, a GPS receiver on land receives radio waves from a plurality of GPS satellites to determine its absolute position (hereinafter referred to as single point positioning). However, the accuracy of the absolute position by single point positioning usually has an error of 10 to 50 m . In order to achieve highly accurate positioning, another method is conceived where 2 sets of GPS receivers are used, wherein one set serves as a reference station and the other set serves as a mobile station. The reference station is kept fixed and only the mobile station is moved, their relative positions is measured with a high accuracy, and the position of the mobile station is calculated with a high accuracy (hereinafter referred to as relative positioning). This method has the DGPS mode, RTK mode, and static mode, which can conduct positioning at an order of error of 1 m, 1 cm, and 5 mm, respectively. Further, it is possible that the two stations are separated from each other at a distance of 100 km, 10 km, and 10 km, [sic! possible source error] respectively.
[0003]
Therefore, if it is necessary to survey with a high accuracy, any of these modes can be used. Because it is relative position measurement, the relative position between the reference station which serves as the survey reference and the mobile station which is positioned at the surveyed location will be determined with a high accuracy. Here, if it is necessary to obtain the absolute position of a surveyed location, the traditional practice is to obtain, by the triangulation method, etc., the absolute position (latitude and longitude) of the reference station from the triangulation points, which have been provided at each location in advance, thereby calculating the absolute value of the mobile station by using the determined relative position.
[0004]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in accordance with this method, if the relative position between a plurality of surveyed locations within a limited scope is desired or if the absolute position in a large scope is desired although there is no problem specifically if the absolute measurement is within a relatively limited scope, it is usually necessary to move the reference station within a proper surveyed scope due to the restriction of the data communication means between the reference station and the mobile station. Therefore, (1) it is necessary to conduct a survey to determine the absolute position of the reference station every time the reference station is moved and, (2) an error of the reference station position occurs due to the relative position error of the triangulation points which serve as the cornerstones at the time.
[0005]
As stated above, the absolute position can also be determined in the single-point positioning mode in GPS and accordingly it is possible to determine the position of the reference station by single point positioning at the reference station, without triangulation. However, because an error of 10 to 50 m is anticipated in view of the GPS specifications, it is not suitable for highly accurate measurements.
[0006]
Moreover, although it is possible to determine the absolute position of the mobile station by providing a permanent reference station at a location, surveying the absolute position with a high accuracy in advance and then measuring the relative position between the two stations. However, this method needs to have 4 to 5 stations capture the same GPS satellite between two separated locations. Therefore, it is possibly restricted by the time band of simultaneously capturing the satellite by these stations due to the surrounding geographic conditions and limited by the operation time band as well.
[0007]
Therefore, the purpose of the present invention is to determine the absolute position of the mobile station with a very high accuracy compared with the method of determining the absolute position of the reference station through single point positioning, without having to repeatedly measuring the absolute position of the reference station through triangulation, and to provide a GPS survey method and a device thereof which are not restricted by the operation time band.
[0008]
[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the purpose stated above, the GPS survey method according to claim 1 of the present invention uses GPS for survey, wherein
/3
a 1st reference station whose absolute position is specified and is outside a target surveyed area is provided, a 2nd reference station which is mobile inside said target surveyed area is provided, a 1st GPS’s relative position is surveyed between said 1st reference station and 2nd reference station, a 2nd GPS’s relative position is surveyed between said 2nd reference station and the mobile station which is positioned at a surveyed location, said 1st GPS relative position and said 2nd GPS relative position are added to the absolute position of said 1st reference station to survey the absolute position of the mobile station.
[0009]
With said method, by moving the 2nd reference station within a proper target surveyed area, obtaining the 1st GPS relative position between the 1st reference station whose absolute position has been specified and the 2nd reference station and obtaining the 2nd GPS relative position between the 2nd reference station and the mobile station which has been provided at the surveyed location, the absolute position of the mobile station in a large target surveyed area can be obtained without having to repeatedly measuring the absolute position of the reference station by means of triangulation as in the past. This method has a very high accuracy compared with the method of obtaining the absolute position of the reference station by means of single point positioning and furthermore, and it is not restricted by the operation time band.
[0010]
In order to implement this method, in the GPS survey device according to claim 2, a 1st reference station whose absolute position is specified and is outside the target surveyed area is provided, a 2nd reference station which is mobile inside said target surveyed area is provided, and a mobile station is provided at the surveyed location, wherein said 1st reference station is equipped with a GPS receiver which calculates the arrival time lag of specific codes of GPS radio waves received from a plurality of GPS satellites or the phase shift of a carrier wave to form 1st correction information and a 1st transmission means which transmits said 1st correction information and said absolute position information to said 2nd reference station, said 2nd reference station is equipped with a GPS receiver which surveys a 1st GPS’s relative position between the 1st reference station and the 2nd reference station through said 1st correction information that is input and the GPS radio waves received from a plurality of GPS satellites and calculates the arrival time lag of specific codes of said GPS radio waves or the phase shift of the carrier wave to form 2nd correction information , and a 2nd transmission means which transmits the 2nd correction information of said GPS receiver, said 1st GPS’s relative position information and said input absolute position information to said mobile station, and said mobile station is equipped with a GPS receiver which surveys a 2nd GPS’s relative position between the 2nd reference station and the mobile station through said 2nd correction information that is input and the GPS radio waves received from a plurality of GPS satellites and adds the absolute position of said 1st reference station that is input and the 1st GPS’s relative position to said 2nd GPS’s relative position to survey the absolute position of the mobile station.
[0011]
[Embodiment of the invention]
The embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings below. Fig. 1 is a GPS station layout plan which shows an embodiment of the present invention that implements the GPS survey method. As shown in the drawing, in principle, the base reference
station 1 is provided outside the surveyed scope (target surveyed
area) A, the mobile reference station 2 is provided inside the surveyed scope A, i.e., 2 reference stations are provided, and the mobile
station 3 is provided at the surveyed location inside the surveyed
scope A. The position of the mobile reference station 2 can be moved as appropriate when the surveyed scope A is large.
[0012]
The composition of the base reference station 1 will be described next. The GPS antenna 11 is firmly fixed to the absolute position (to be determined with the method to be stated below if not determined) by using the GPS antenna fixing and supporting structure 15. The GPS antenna fixing and supporting structure 15 is a fixed and robust structure, such as a steel frame or reinforced concrete, and the position of the GPS
antenna 1 shall not be changed by wind or rain or earthquake, which is predicted at its installation location.
[0013]
The radio wave from the GPS satellite received by the GPS
antenna 11 is sent to the GPS receiver 12 for signal processing and the correction information (to be stated below) dedicated for the mobile reference station 2 is formed from the signal processing result. The correction information and the absolute position information are output to the correction information transmitter 13. The correction information transmitter 13 carries the input correction information and absolute position information on the radio wave (modulating said information with a proper modulation method) and transmits them from the correction information transmission antenna 14 into the sky towards the mobile reference station 2.
[0014]
Said correction information will be described next. GPS positioning errors occur because the GPS radio waves sent from the GPS satellite may be subject to various disturbances in the process of its transmission to the ground, for example, its transmission direction might be slightly bent when it goes through the ionosphere or the atmosphere, which results in the variation in the arrival time of the radio wave. Accordingly, when positioning is conducted at the same time at both the fixed reference station whose absolute position has been specified and the mobile station whose position is to be determined, it is thought that the error occurring in the transmission process is at the same extent because the transmission routes of the GPS radio waves are almost the same. The same error occurs in the receiver of the reference station and in the receiver of the mobile station, so the error is offset for the measurement of the relative position (relative positioning) between the reference station and the mobile station. Then, the reference station correctly calculates the arrival time lag of the C/A code (DGPS mode), which modulates (is sent by being carried on) the GPS radio waves of a plurality of GPS satellites or the phase shift of the carrier wave (RTK mode) and calculates correction information from said arrival time lag or the phase shift of the carrier wave and outputs the calculated correction information.
[0015]
Next, the composition of the mobile reference station 2 will be described. The GPS antenna 21 is fixed by using the GPS antenna semi-fixing and supporting structure 26 so that it would not move during measurement. The GPS antenna semi-fixing and supporting structure 26 is made of a steel frame, aluminum material, etc., so that the position of the GPS
antenna 21 would not be changed by any wind or vibration.
[0016]
The radio wave from the GPS satellite received by the GPS
antenna 21 is sent to the GPS receiver 22 for signal processing. The mobile reference station 2 works as the so-called mobile station and, in case that its position is determined by relative positioning with the base reference station 1, it will receive a radio wave which carries the correction information and the absolute position information which are sent from the base reference station 1 by the correction information transceiving antenna 25. Said radio wave is sent to the correction information receiver 24 and is demodulated here, and the correction information and the absolute position information are taken. The correction information is sent to the GPS receiver 22. In the GPS receiver 22, the GPS radio wave from the GPS antenna 21 and the correction information are used to measure its position relative to the fixed
/4
reference station 1, and the position of the mobile reference station 2 is determined (this value is taken as the relative position r1). Then, the value becomes the reference data when the mobile reference station 2 works as the reference station and outputs the correction information. Moreover, the absolute position of the mobile reference station 2 can also be calculated by adding the relative position r1 to the absolute position of the fixed reference station 1.
[0017]
When the mobile reference station 2 works as the reference station, signal processing is performed on the basis of the radio wave received by the GPS antenna 21, and correction information dedicated for the mobile station 3 is formed. Said correction information, the relative position r1 information and the absolute position information of the base reference station 1 are sent to the correction information transmitter 23, which carries the received information on the radio wave (modulating said information in a proper modulation mode) and transmits it from the correction information transceiving antenna 25 to the sky towards the mobile station 3.
[0018]
Next, the composition of the mobile reference station 3 will be described. The GPS antenna 31 is fixed by using the GPS antenna movably supporting structure 35. The GPS antenna movably supporting structure 35 is made of a steel frame or aluminum material, etc., so that the position of the GPS antenna 31 would not be changed by any wind or vibration.
[0019]
The radio wave from the GPS satellite received by the GPS
antenna 31 is sent to the GPS receiver 32 for signal processing. At this time, the radio wave, which carries the correction information, the relative position r1 information and the absolute position information of the base reference station 1 which is sent from the mobile reference station 2 by the correction information receiving antenna 34, is received. The radio wave is sent to the correction information receiver 33 and demodulated here, and the correction information, the relative position r1 information and the absolute position information of the base reference station 1 are taken out and sent to the GPS receiver 32. In the GPS
receiver 32, the GPS radio wave from the GPS antenna 31 and the correction information are used to measure its position relative to the mobile reference station, the relative position of the mobile station 3 is determined (said value is taken as the relative position r2) and the relative position r1 information and the absolute position information of the base reference station 1 are added to said relative position r2 information to calculate the absolute position of the mobile station 3.
[0020]
The GPS positioning using the composition stated above is implemented in the following steps.
(1) The absolute position of the base reference station 1 is measured with a high accuracy only once by means of triangulation. This value is taken as the absolute position of the fixed reference station (Xa, Ya).
[0021]
(2) The mobile reference station 2 is provided at any position inside the surveyed scope A.
(3) The relative position relation is calculated (in accordance with the DGPS mode) by measuring the relative position between the base reference station 1 and the mobile reference station 2. This value is taken as the relative position r1 (xr1, yr1).
[0022]
(4) The relative position relation is calculated by measuring the relative position between the mobile reference station 2 and the mobile station 3, which is the surveyed location (through the DGPS mode or the RTK mode). This value is taken as the relative position r2 (xr2, yr2).
[0023]
(5) The absolute position (Xma, Yma) of the mobile station 3 is calculated through the formula shown below.
Xma = Xa + xr1 + xr2 [sic! Here in source, “xr1” and “xr2” are presumed typos for “xr1” and “xr2,” respectively.]
Yma = Ya + yr1 + yr2 [sic! Here in source, “yr1” and “yr2” are presumed typos for “yr1” and “yr2,” respectively.]
(Mobile station absolute position = base reference station
position + relative position r1 + relative position r2)
If the mobile reference station 2 is not moved, above steps (4) and (5) are repeated to proceed with the position survey.
[0024]
If the mobile reference station 2 is moved, the process returns to said step (3) to measure the relative position r1 again and proceed with the position survey. In this way, the mobile reference station 2 can be moved inside a proper surveyed scope A. By calculating the relative position r1 between the base reference station 1 whose absolute position has been specified and the mobile reference station 2 and calculating the relative position r2 between the mobile reference station 2 and the mobile station 3 which has been provided at the surveyed location, the absolute position of the surveyed location (mobile station 3) within a large surveyed scope A can be calculated without having to repeatedly measuring the absolute position of the base station by means of triangulation as in the past. This method has a very high accuracy compared with the method of calculating the absolute position of the reference station by means of single point positioning and it is not restricted by the operation time band.
[0025]
[Effects of the invention]
As stated above, in accordance with the present invention, the 2nd reference station can be moved inside a proper target surveyed area. Moreover, by calculating the 1st GPS’s relative position between the
1st reference station whose absolute position has been specified and the 2nd reference station and calculating the 2nd GPS’s relative position between the 2nd reference station and the mobile station which has been provided set at the surveyed location, the absolute position of thea surveyed location (mobile station) in a large target surveyed area can be calculated without having to repeatedly measure the absolute position of the reference station as found in the convention methods such as the triangulation methodpast . Further, this method has a very high accuracy compared with the method of calculating the absolute position of the reference station by means of single point positioning and it is not restricted by the operation time band.
朝鮮語 から 英語: Agreement on Introducing APCN2 Submarine Cablesinto Korea between KT Corporation (KT) and AT&T Korea Transport Service General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 法: 契約
原書のテキスト - 朝鮮語 제6조(유지보수 및 장애복구) ①유지보수의 분계점은 케이티 부산 육양국의 AT&T Korea Transport Service가 KT로부터 임차한 해저 케이블 연동 국내 접속구간을 기준으로 하되, 케이티가 제공하는 회선의 유지보수는 케이티의 운용보전표준에 따라 케이티가 담당한다.
②APCN2 국제구간의 장애복구는 APCN2 해저케이블 복구계획에 따라 수행한다.
제7조(비용산정) ① 본 합의서에 의한 케이티의 비용산정은 AT&T의 APCN2 용량의 국내연결에 소요되는 설비구축비용과 그에 따른 유지보수비용으로 한다.
② 제3조에 의거 AT&T 용량의 국내인입에 소요되는 설비구축비용 (1회성)은 회선 (2코아)당 USD (United States Dollar) 500으로 한다.
③ 회선당 연간유지보수비용은 USD 12,000/년 (USD 1,000/월)으로 한다.
④ 국내 희망하는 장소까지 연결을 위한 해저 케이블 연동 국내 접속구간은 양사 합의하여 별도로 정한다.
⑤ 본 합의서의 산정요금에 대한 부가가치세는 별도로 한다.
제8조(청구 및 납입) ① 케이티는 제7조 제2항의 설비구축비용을 제5조의 설비제공일로부터 1개월 이내에 AT&T Korea Transport Service에게 청구서(Invoice)로 청구하며, AT&T Korea Transport Service는 청구일로부터 1개월 이내에 납부한다.
②케이티는 제7조 제3항의 연간유지보수비용을 매년 11월 10일까지 AT&T Korea Transport Service에 청구하며, AT&T Korea Transport Service는 청구일로부터 1개월 이내에 납부한다.
제9조(합의서의 해지) ① 당사자 중 일방에게 다음 각 호의 어느 하나에 해당하는 사유가 발생한 경우 상대방은 즉시 본 협정을 해지할 수 있다.
1. 본 합의서 상의 권리의무를 상대방의 동의 없이 양도회사의 계열회사가 아닌 제3자에게 양도하는 등 처분한 경우; 본 합의서상 계열회사는 (i) 설립 여부를 불문하고, 직접 또는 간접적으로 당사자의 지분과반을 보유하고 있는 회사(“모회사”) 및 (ii) 설립 여부를 불문하고, 당사자 또는 그 모회사가 직접 또는 간접적으로 50% 이상의 지분을 보유하고 있는 회사를 의미한다.
2. 주요재산에 대한 압류·가압류·가처분·강제집행 및 기타 이에 준하는 사유 등으로 본 합의서 상의 의무를 정상적으로 이행하기가 어려운 경우
3. 본 합의서상의 의무위반에 대하여 30일 이상의 기간을 정하여 그 시정을 요구하였음에도 불구하고 시정하지 않은 경우
4. 기타 상대방의 본 합의서 이행이 불가능하거나 현저히 곤란한 경우
② 전항의 해지는 손해배상의 청구에 영향을 미치지 아니한다.
제10조(시행일) 본 합의서는 양사가 기명 날인함으로써 효력이 발생하며, 양사는 본 합의서의 내용을 신의와 성실의 원칙에 의거 이행하여야 한다.
제11조(유효기간) ① 본 합의서의 유효기간은 2020.xx.xx까지로 하며, 유효기간 만료 2월전까지 양사간 이의가 없는 경우 1년씩 동일한 조건으로 자동 연장한다.
② 합의서 일부내용을 개정 또는 보완할 필요가 있을 경우 양사가 합의하여 개정한다.
제12조(책임제한) ① 제12조 제3항의 경우는 제외하고, 계약당사자 중 어느 누구도 다음 각호의 손해를 이유로 하여,본 합의서에 따른 채무불이행에 기한 손해배상책임을 부담하지 않는다.
1. 매출액, 이윤, 영업 또는 예상 절감액의 손실
2. 여하한 평판의 손상
3. 여하한 특별손해,간접손해
② 제12조 제3항의 경우는 제외하고, 일방당사자가 본 합의서에 따라 또는 본 합의서에 관련하여 부담할 손해액은 건 당 USD 25,000을 초과할 수 없고, 총 USD 100,000을 초과할 수 없다. 단,제7조 제2항 및 제7조 제3항에 따른 비용 지급 의무 불이행시 미지급 비용 및 지연이자를 전액 지급하여야 한다.
③ 제12조 제1항 및 제2항에 따른 책임제한은 사망, 개인상해, 기망, 지적재산권의 침해에 따른 책임에는 적용되지 않고, 법령 위반에 따른 과태료, 과징금 및 벌금에도 적용되지 않는다.
제13조(합의서보관) 본 합의서는 2부를 작성하여 양사가 각각 1부씩 보관한다.
翻訳 - 英語 Article VI (maintenance, warranty and repairs of faults) ①Thedividing point for maintenance and warranty is the national access area linking submarine cables that isleased by AT&T Korea Transport ServiceofKT Pusan Terminal Station from KT, and KT shallbe responsible for providing maintenance and warranty of linesto KT’s maintenance standards.
②Repairs of faults for the APCN2 international areashallfollow the repair plan of APCN2 submarine cables.
Article VII (cost calculation) ①Under this Agreement, cost calculation of KT includes the construction costs of equipment necessary for national connection of AT&T’sAPCN2 capacity and the costs of maintenance and warranty of the equipment.
②Under Article III, the construction costs of equipment necessary for nationalaccess of AT&T’sAPCN2 capacity (line 1) shall be 500 United States Dollar (USD) per line (2-core).
③Annual maintenance and warranty costs of each line shall be 12,000USD/year (1,000 USD/month).
④Thenational access arealinking submarine cablesfor connecting toa desired place in Korea shall be separately agreed upon by the two companies through consultations.
⑤The VAT of the costs calculated herein shall be handled separately.
Article VIII (invoicing and payment) ①KT shall, within one month after the date of equipment delivery as set out in Article V, submit an invoice to AT&T Korea Transport Service for the equipment construction costs as specified in Subparagraph 2, Article VII, and AT&T Korea Transport Service shall, within one month from the invoice, pay for the invoice.
②By November 10 each year, KT shallinvoice AT&T Korea Transport Service for the annual maintenance and warranty costs as specified in Subparagraph 3, Article VII, and AT&T Korea Transport Service shall, within one month from the invoice, pay for the invoice.
Article IX (rescission of the Agreement) ① If either party has any of the following circumstances, the other party may immediately rescind this Agreement.
1. (ii)Without consent of the other party, the party transfers the rights, obligations or otherwise hereunder to any third party other than its affiliated companies. The affiliated companies hereunder refer to: (i)a company (“parent company”), whether established or not,which holds over 50% of the party’s shares directly or indirectly; (ii) a company, whether established or not, in which either party or its parent company holds over 50% of shares, directly or indirectly;
2. The party has its main assets seized, temporarily seized, temporarily disposed of, enforced or otherwise, which makes it hard for the party to normally perform its obligations hereunder.
3. The party violates the obligations hereunder and refuses to mendthe violationfor over 30 days.
4. Other circumstances where the party is unable to perform or is prevented from performing this Agreement.
②The aforementioned rescission will not affect claim for any damages.
Article X (effective date) This Agreement shall enter into force as of the date of signing and affixing of the seals by both parties, and both parties shall abide by this Agreement honestly and in good faith.
Article XI (valid period) ① This Agreement shall remain valid throughxx month xx date, 2020. If either party does not have any objection within two months prior to the expiry date, this Agreement will automatically extend for another year.
②Any modification or supplement to part of the Agreement shall be agreed upon by both parties.
Article XII (responsibility restriction) ① Unless otherwise specified in Subparagraph 3, Article 12, either Party thereto shall not be liable for any losses caused by failure to perform the obligations hereunder under the grounds of the following losses.
1. Losses of sales, profits, turnover or expected reduction
2. Damages from a court judgement
3. Any special damages and indirect damages
②Unless otherwise specified in Subparagraph 3, Article XII, any loss borne by either party shall, in accordance with this Agreement or herein, not exceed 25,000 USD per case or 100,000 USD in total. However, in the event that the obligation of paying the costs under Subparagraphs 2 and 3, Article VIIis not fulfilled, the outstanding amount and the overdue interest must be paid in full.
③The responsibility restriction in Subparagraphs 1 and 2, Article XII does not apply to the responsibilities resulting from death, personal injuries, and infringement of reputation and intellectual property or any fine resulting from any violations of laws and regulations.
Article XIII (retention of the Agreement) This Agreement is made in duplicate copies, each party retaining one copy thereof.
朝鮮語 から 英語: Agreement Matters of the Japan-ROK Negotiations General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 国際団体
原書のテキスト - 朝鮮語 绪 言
1951年 9月 8 美國의 桑港에서 二次大戰의 終幕을 告하는 聯合國의『對日本平和條約』이 署名調印되었 다. 이로서 日本은 1945年8月 15 日 無條件降服의 條約署名에서 부터 6年의 긴 歲月올 두고 聯合國의 占領下에 統治를 받아 내려 오다가 드디어 独立하게 되었다. 우리나라는 그 보다 3年前인 1948年에 自由選舉로서 合法的인 民主政府를 樹立하고 日本이 獨立을 獲得하자 마자 1951年 10月 20日에 韓日間에 엉크러져 있는 諸問題를 解決하기 위하여 韓日會談을 提起하였다. 그 뒤로 於焉13年5個月의 긴 時日을 두고 自由黨政權에서 9年，民主黨政權에서 1年，軍事政權에서 2年餘의 끈기있는 協商의 뒤를 이 어 이제 第三共和國은 이에 매듭올 지으려 한다.
1965年 2月 20 日에 韓日의 두나라 사이에서는 가장 어려 운 問題로 指目되고 있었던 基本關係의 條約이 合意에 이르러 假調印되었으니, 桑港 平和條約의 二條에서「日本은 韓國의 獨立을 承認한다」의 條文을 韓日間에서 再確認하고 必然的으로 1910年에 맺어진 韓日間의 合邦條約 其他의 모든 恥辱的인 舊條約이 抹殺되게 되는 것이며, 따라서 日本은 大韓民國을 承認하고 또 大韓民國은 日本國올 承認하는 段階에 이르는 것이다. 뒤이어서 1965年 4月 30 東京에서 ①韓日間의 請求權 解決 및 經濟協力에 關한 合意事項 ②在日韓國人의 法的地位 問題에 關한 合意事項 ③韓日間의 漁業問題에 關한 合意事項의 三個 懸案問題가 合意에 到達하여 두 나라의 代表가 이에 假調印하였으니 이로서 韓日間의 어려운 懸案問題는 일단， 解決의 端諸를 찾게 되었다.
앞으로 正式 調印까지 또한 허다한 우여곡절이 있을 것이 豫想되며，비록 政府間에서 正式調印이 필한다 하더라도 다 같이 國會의 비준을 받아서 効力을 발생하게 되는 것이니 相當한 時日이 所要될 것이다.
世間에 서 는 韓日회 담을 단순한 國文의 正常化또는 相互 利害關係의 해결에 중점을 두고 있는 것으로 알려지고 있으나 實은 聯合國의 對日平和條約等의 諸條約을 韓日間에서 실천 俱現하는 準平和條約을 締結하는 것이기 때 문에 더 욱 그 重要性을 높이 評價하고 있는 것이 다.
政府는 일찌기 韓日會談의 本格的인 절충에 들어갈 무 렵「韓日會談白書」를 刊行하여 政府가 韓日會談에 臨하는 基本方針과 그 姿勢를 밝힌바 있거니와，이제 基本關係•法的地位•財産請求權 및 漁業問題의 四大 懸案의 合意事項에 假調印을 필한 오늘에 이에 對한 各條文이 內包하고 있는 意圖와 그 精神을 소상하게 解說하여서 滿天下國民에게 밝혀 두고자 하는 바이다.
앞으로 兩國間의 正式調印이 되는 대로 다시 이를 修正補完하여 널리 國民 앞에 阐明하고자 하는 바이 다.
1965年15日
翻訳 - 英語 Introduction
On September 8, 1951, at the San Francisco peace conference held in San Francisco, USA, World War II was announced to terminate and the Treaty of Peace between the United Nations and Japan was signed. From then on, Japan terminated the 6-year occupation and ruling by the United Nations army since its signing of the Instrument of Surrender on August 15, 1945, and regained independence and sovereignty. In 1948, our country or the Republic of Korea (ROK) established the lawful democratic government through free election. After Japan regained its sovereignty, the country immediately proposed to hold the Japan-ROK negotiations to resolve many complicated issues between the two countries on October 20, 1951. Then, both sides began a negotiation process with a span of 13 years and another five months, during which the ROK was ruled by the Liberal Party for nine years, by the Democratic Party for one year, and by the military for over two years. Finally, such a long yet indomitable negotiation was closed by the Third Republic of Korea (translator’s note: refer to Park Jeonghee’s military regime).
On February 20, 1965, Japan and the ROK reached the treaty on the trickiest basic relations between the two countries, and initialed the treaty. Article II of the Treaty of Peace signed in San Francisco, “Japan recognizes the independence of the Republic of Korea”, is reconfirmed in the Treaty on Basic Relations. An inevitable result from the two treaties is that the Japan-Korea Annexation Treaty concluded in 1910 and other humiliating old treaties were cleared away. From then on, Japan began to recognize the Government of the ROK, and the latter did the same to the former. On April 30, 1965, Japan and the ROK reached the agreements on three unsettled issues after the representatives of the two countries initiated such agreements. Such three issues were: (1) the agreement concerning the settlement of the right to claim compensation and to prosecute and the economic cooperation between Japan and the ROK; (2) the agreement concerning the legal status of the ROK’s nationals residing in Japan; and (3) the agreement concerning fisheries. By then, both sides found solutions to the tricky unsettled issues between the two countries. We predict that to finally achieve the purpose of officially sign the agreements concerned, both sides will have a long winding way to go. Inevitably, various disputes and objections will arise from this process. Even if the two governments finally enter into the official agreements, each agreement will not enter into force unless it is ratified by both the Diet of Japan and the National Assembly of the ROK. Therefore, this process will take quite long time.
It is widely believed that the Japan-ROK negotiations are to simply normalize diplomatic relations or resolve mutual, actual issues concerning the interests of both sides. In fact, the negotiations aim to implement the United Nations’ Treaty of Peace with Japan and other treaties in the specific Japan-ROK relations, and are of significance to conclude the quasi-Treaty of Peace. Therefore, the importance of these negotiations will certainly be assessed more highly.
At the key stage of the Japan-ROK negotiations, the Government of the ROK published the White Paper for the Japan-ROK Negotiations, which stated the basic policy and attitude of the government toward the Japan-ROK negotiations. Now, both sides have reached and initialed the agreements on four unsettled issues – basic relations, legal status, the right to claim compensation for property and to prosecute, and fisheries. Now it is time for us to interpret the implications behind each clause, so that all our nationals can understand the intention of signing these agreements and the inherent spirit of each clause.
After the two governments officially sign these agreements in the future, they will further interpret the agreement contents, complement and revise them, and expound them to the whole nation.
May 15, 1965
朝鮮語 から 英語: Boil-off Gas Re-liquefaction Apparatus and Method for Ship General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 機械工学
原書のテキスト - 朝鮮語 (54) 발명의 명칭 선박용 증발가스 재액화 장치 및 방법
(57) 요 약
선박에 설치된 액화천연가스 저장탱크에서 발생하는 증발가스를 재액화하기 위하여 증발가스를 냉각 유체로 사용 하는 재액화 장치가 개시된다.
상기 선박용 증발가스 재액화 장치는, 상기 저장탱크로부터 배출되는 증발가스를 압축시키는 압축부; 상기 저장 (뒷면에 계속) 탱크로부터 배출되는 증발가스와 상기 압축부에서 압축된 증발가스를 열교환시키는 제 1 자가열교환기; 상기 압 축부 및 상기 제 1 자가열교환기를 거친 증발가스를 다시 한 번 냉각시키는 냉각부; 및 상기 냉각부에 의해 냉 각된 증발가스를 감압시키는 제 1 감압장치;를 포함하고, 상기 압축부는, 상기 저장탱크로부터 배출된 후 상기 제 1 자가열교환기에서 열교환된 증발가스를 압축시키는 압축기; 및 상기 압축기를 통과한 증발가스의 온도를 낮춰주는 열교환기;를 포함하고, 상기 냉각부는, 상기 제 1 자가열교환기로부터 상기 냉각부로 보내진 증발가스 를 압축시키는 여분압축기; 및 상기 여분압축기를 통과한 증발가스의 온도를 낮춰주는 여분열교환기;를 포함하 며, 상기 여분압축기는 상기 압축기가 고장난 경우에 압축기의 역할을 하고, 상기 여분열교환기는 상기 열교환 기가 고장난 경우에 열교환기의 역할을 한다.
翻訳 - 英語 (54) Title of invention: Boil-off Gas Re-liquefaction Apparatus and Method for Ship
(57) Abstract
The present invention discloses a re-liquefaction apparatus that uses boil-off gas as a cooling fluid to re-liquefy boil-off gas generated in a liquefied natural gas storage tank disposed in a ship.
The boil-off gas re-liquefaction apparatus for a ship comprises: a compressing portion for compressing boil-off gas discharged from the storage tank; a first self-heat exchanger for causing heat exchange between boil-off gas discharged from the storage tank and boil-off gas compressed in the compressing portion; a cooling portion for cooling again boil-off gas that has passed through the compressing portion and the first self-heat exchanger; and a first decompressor for decompressing the boil-off gas cooled by the cooling portion, the compressing portion comprising: a compressor for compressing boil-off gas subjected to heat exchange in the first self-heat exchanger after being discharged from the storage tank; and a heat exchanger for lowering a temperature of boil-off gas that has passed through the compressor, the cooling portion comprising: an additional compressor for compressing boil-off gas conveyed from the first self-heat exchanger to the cooling portion; and an additional heat exchanger for lowering a temperature of boil-off gas that has passed through the additional compressor, the additional compressor functioning as a compressor when the compressor becomes faulty, the additional heat exchanger functioning as a heat exchanger when the heat exchanger becomes faulty.
翻訳 - 英語 [Problems that present invention tries to solve]
The objective of the present invention is to provide a masking tape adhesive which has excellent heat resistance without compromising the initial properties such as initial adhesion and solvent resistance.
[Method used to solve problems]
Specifically, to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention provides a masking tape adhesive which comprises a natural rubber or its modified product as the main component, and a thermoreactive resin, a crosslinking agent thereof and a reactive phenolic resin which are compounded to form a mesh structure on the main component.
In the present invention, a mesh structure is formed by a thermoreactive resin and a crosslinking agent so that the reaction proceeds sufficiently even at a masking tape manufacturing temperature of 100C or lower. Then, the necessary cohesion and solvent resistance can be obtained initially by creating an IPN structure with natural rubber entanglement. On the other hand, the reactive phenolic resin which hardly reacts under masking tape manufacturing conditions and reacts at high temperature such as in paint baking process in which the temperature greatly exceeds 100C compensates the decrease of cohesive force due to cutting of the main chain of the natural rubber, thus improving heat resistance.
Specific examples of the natural rubber used in the present invention are the commonly used ribbed smoked sheet, air dry sheet, pearl clave, etc. Furthermore, their modified products such as bare brass MG and SP rubber obtained by grafting methyl methacrylate onto the natural rubber can be used as the alternatives to the natural rubber or used together with the natural rubber. In particular, when the methyl methacrylate is grafted, it is preferable to improve the compatibility between the heat reactive resin described later and its crosslinker and reactive phenol resin. In this case, the relative weight ratio of the grafted methyl methacrylate to the natural rubber is preferably within the range of 10 wt%~100 wt%. If the ratio is lower than 10 wt%, the compatibility with reactive polyurethane resin etc. is not enough, and if it exceeds 100 wt%, the Tg of the rubber will rise too much to lose its tackiness. Commercially available Bare Brass MG — 30, 49 are applicable.
The thermoreactive resin for forming the mesh structure used in the present invention can be a compound having 2 or more of highly reactive hydroxyl group, carboxyl group, amino group, epoxy group, etc. Specific examples are isoprene rubber, butadiene rubber, styrene-butadiene rubber, acrylonitrile-butadiene (liquid) rubber which have a hydroxyl group, carpoxyl group, amino group, epoxy group, etc., introduced into both ends, polyester, polyurethane resin, and a (liquid) acrylic rubber copolymerized with a monomer having a hydroxyl group, a carpoxyl group, an amino group, or an epoxy group.
In addition, specific examples of the cross-linking agent are thermoreactive crosslinking agents commonly used such as polyfunctional isocyanates, amino resins, amines and epoxy resins. The polyfunctional isocyanates, amino resins, etc. Of which, those which can react rapidly at relatively low temperatures are particularly preferable. The polyfunctional isocyanate mentioned here can be toluene diisocyanate, diphenylmethane diisocyanate, 1,5 naphthalene diisocyanate, hexamethylene diisocyanate, trimethylhexamethylenediamine diisocyanate, triphenylmethane triisocyanate, polyphenyl methane polyisocyanate, etc. or trimethylol propane adduct of toluene diisocyanate or various derivatives such as biuret of hexamethylene diisocyanate, which are commonly used for crosslinking.
Amino resins are obtained by adding and condensing melamine, benzoguanamine, urea, etc., to formaldehyde or alcohol, and examples
/3
are methylolmelamine, methylated methylolmelamine, butylated petitol melamine, methylol benzoguanamine, methylol urea, etc.
Liquid polybutadiene rubber and polyfunctional isocyanate having an OH group are particularly preferable as the thermoreactive resin and its crosslinking agent.
In addition, the thermoreactive resin is compounded in an amount of 5~100 parts by weight, preferably 10~50 parts by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the natural rubber or its modified product, and the crosslinking agent is compounded in an equivalent amount to the functional group of the thermoreactive resin.
Specific examples of the reactive phenol resin used in the present invention can be resol type phenol resins such as P-alkylphenol, P-allylphenol, P-terpene phenol, etc., or xylene/phenol resins and their modified products in which the methylol group is substituted by halogen. They can be used alone or as a mixture. Their compounded amount is 0.5~100 parts by weight, preferably 1~50 parts by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the natural rubber or its modified product. If the amount is less than 0.5 part by weight, the heat resistance is insufficient, and if the amount is more than 100 parts by weight, some may be deposited on the surface of the adhesive, causing adherend contamination.
Natural products such as various rosin resins, terpene resins, terpene phenol resins and their derivatives, aliphatic, alicyclic or aromatic petroleum resins, and synthetic resins such as chroman-indene resin, styrene resin, phenolic resin or xylene resins as well as other publicly known tackifiers can be used alone or as mixture with the adhesive of the present invention.
Furthermore, petroleum-based softeners such as process oil and extender oil, liquid rubber such as polyisobutylene and liquid polyisoprene, softeners such as synthetic plasticizers, or various filling agents such as calcium carbonate, magnesium carbonate, magnesium oxide, zinc oxide, silicates and silicic acid can be added as needed.
Various antioxidants such as phenol type, phosphite type, phenol phosphite type and thioether type, and anti-aging agents such as light stabilizers and heavy metal deactivators can also be added.
Then, a substrate that can sufficiently withstand the operating temperature is selected for use as the adhesive substrate for the masking tape, and it is treated as appropriate with a back-treatment agent or primer. Synthetic films such as polypropylene, vinyl chloride, polyester and crepe paper are usually used as the substrate for the masking tape.
[Examples]
Next, the present invention will be explained with examples, but this invention is not limited these examples.
Coat the adhesive shown in Table 1 on an 80 m-thick polypropylene film (made by Toray Synthetic Film Co., Ltd., model: Trefan NO 3701T) to have a solid content of 15 m. Then, heat and dry it at 90C for 1 minute according to Examples 1, 2 and at 120C for 30 minutes according to Comparative Example 4 to make masking tapes as well as evaluating their performance, with the evaluation results shown in Table 1. The evaluation method is shown below.
(1) Initial adhesive strength: measured according to JIS-C-2107 standard with a SUS-430 plate as the adherend.
(2) Solvent resistance: Immersed a tape of 10 mm in width and 50 mm in length in toluene at 25C, took it out after 3 minutes, and observed the properties of the adhesive. The adhesives which dissolved and hardly had any left on the substrate were marked with (), and the adhesives which remained on the substrate were marked with (O).
(3) Heat resistance: Heated the SUS-430BA plate which had been coated with the adhesive at 140C for 100 minutes, and then cooled the plate to room temperature and separated the plate from the coating. The adhesives which were not transferred onto the SUS-430BA plate were marked with (O), those which had a little bit transferred were marked with (), and those which were obviously transferred were marked with ().
(4) Change in adhesion over time: the change in adhesion when the SUS-430BA plate bonded with the adhesive was heated at 140C for 100 minutes was indicated by %.
日本語 から 英語: MANUFACTURING METHOD OF A MOVABLE CONTACT COMPONENT OF A PUSH-BUTTON SWITCH General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: エレクトロニクス/電子工学
翻訳 - 英語 (57) Claims
1. A manufacturing method of a movable contact component of a push-button switch, which comprises a step of bonding a conductive fiber sheet and a conductive rubber sheet to form a contact plate, a step of cutting the contact plate into a strip shape to form narrow strips, a step of forming a cover component by injection molding of an insulation rubber onto the narrow strip, and a step of forming a movable contact component by press processing of said molded body, characterized in that a contact is formed on a lower surface of the umbrella-shaped cover component.
Detail description of the invention
The present invention relates to a push-button switch using a rubber contact, and particularly to a manufacturing method of a movable contact component having a small contact resistance suitable for mass production.
Fig. 1 shows a conventional manufacturing method of producing a rubber contact, wherein 1 is a contact piece punched out of a conductive rubber sheet, and the movable contact component 4 for a push-button switch as shown in Fig. 2 is manufactured by inserting the contact piece 1 into a mold 2a and molding it together with an insulation rubber 3 by molds 2b and 2c and then punching the molded product out. However, it takes time to insert the contact piece 1 into the mold 2 and the integration process takes considerable time (about 10 minutes). Further, since the conductive rubber is highly stretchable, so, in the sheet state, it is not suitable for automatic insert molding. As described above, it is necessary to punch out each contact piece 1 one by one in advance and insert it into one mold 2a respectively; therefore, it has the disadvantages of being difficult to automate and being unsuitable for mass production.
The present invention seeks to eliminate the disadvantages of the prior art, and the embodiments of the present invention will now be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Fig. 3(a) shows a conductive fiber sheet 10 in a thin cloth shape formed by finely weaved carbon fibers. First, in the 1st step shown in Figs. 3(b) and 3(c), for example, a so-called conductive rubber sheet 11, in which a fine powder of carbon is mixed and dispersed in a silicone rubber, is superposed on the conductive fiber sheet 10 to form a contact plate 12 like a hoop having a cross section as shown in Fig. 3(c). In the 2nd step as shown in Fig. 3(d), the contact plate 12 is cut into a predetermined width of a, ... to form narrow strips 13, .... Next, in the 3rd step, the narrow strip 13 is set into a mold (not shown). Umbrella-shaped cavities corresponding to the cover components described later are provided in the mold at regular intervals. When an insulation material such as silicone rubber is injected into the cavities and integrally molded, the narrow strip 13 and the umbrella-shaped cover component 14 ... are combined. The time required for the molding of the 3rd step is only about 30 seconds. Figs. 4(a) and 4(b) show the state when the product is taken out of the mold, a is a bottom view of it, and b is a top view. Fig. 5 is a sectional view taken along the line A-A of Fig. 4(b), and Fig. 6 is a sectional view taken along the line B-B of Fig. 4(b). Finally, in the 4th step, the individual movable contact components 16 (Fig. 7) having the contact portion 15 are formed by press processing from the state shown in Fig. 4. Fig. 8 shows a push-button switch utilizing the movable contact component 16 according to the present invention, in which fixed contacts 17, 17 are formed on an insulation substrate facing the contact portion 15.
As described above, according to the present invention, at the stage of the integral formation of the contact plate 12 by combining the conductive fiber sheet and the conductive rubber sheet, the contact plate 12 turns out in the form like a continuous hoop. Utilizing the features of the contact plate 12, that is, almost no elasticity and moderate strength, it is possible to form a large number of movable contact components at one time by automatic insert molding. Therefore, by applying
/2
the present invention, it is possible to achieve remarkable effects such as easy automatic production of rubber contacts, strong mass production capability, and reduced costs to provide push-button switches at low prices.
日本語 から 英語: Food for microwaving General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 家具/家電
翻訳 - 英語 1. Tile of the invention
Food for microwaving
2. Claims
Food for microwaving, which is characterized by sealing a whole potato or a block of potato having a size of at least 50 cm3 and seasoning in a container that can be used for microwave heating and has a fixed shape.
3. Detailed description of the invention
[Field of industrial use]
The present invention relates to food for microwaving which can be heated in a microwave oven and directly provided to the table.
[Prior Art]
Conventionally, retort foods which can be eaten simply by heating up with boiling water are known as a kind of instant food. Retort foods are stuffed in retort pouches, and the mainstream retort foods are curry, stew, and the like. However, retort foods have a problem, which is that it takes time and effort to boil hot water in a pot.
For this reason, microwavable foods which can be eaten only by heating in a microwave oven are gaining popularity as they are more convenient. Such microwavable foods are mainly packed in resin trays and can be heated by a microwave oven directly after opening.
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Although microwavable foods are more convenient to eat than retort foods as they only need heating in a microwave oven, they are generally more expensive than retort foods. Meanwhile, conventional microwavable foods are generally such foods as curry rice, spaghetti and gratin, and there is no successful substitution for retort foods; therefore, a new food for microwaving which is not seen in retort foods is desired.
/2
In view of such a situation, the objective of the present invention is to provide a new food for microwaving which could not be found in the past.
[Means to solved the problem]
For the above purpose, the food for microwaving according to the present invention is characterized by sealing a whole potato or a block of potato having a size of at least 50 cm3 and seasoning in a container that can be used for microwave heating and has a fixed shape.
In the present invention, the container that can be used for microwave heating and has a fixed shape is heat resistant to microwave heating and at least a part of it is microwave penetrable. Also, it has a fixed shape and an internal volume to put a potato of a certain size inside and certain strength for protection from external forces to some extent.
An example of the container satisfying such conditions is a CSC can (manufactured by Central States Can Co. (US)). A CSC can is a container whose main body is made of a sheet of multiple laminated layers of ethylene vinyl alcohol copolymer resin or polypropylene resin and whose opening is sealed by winding on an aluminum lid.
In addition, a whole potato or a block of potato of 50 cm3 or larger in size can be just a whole potato, or a part of a potato cut for loading into a container by shaving or cutting. It may be fresh with skin on or peeled and can be used according to the cuisine. Furthermore, the potato needs to be cooked to be ready for eating as is cooked, and it may be loaded into a container after being cooked or loaded into a container in a raw state and then cooked.
In the present invention, seasoning refers to the material used to give taste to a potato and may be in any form of liquid, solid, powder, or a mixture thereof. Examples include various sauces, gravies, as well as simmered ingredients such as ground meats or vegetables, etc.
The food for microwaving according to the present invention is a whole potato or a block of potato of 50 cm3 or larger in size with seasoning sealed in the above-mentioned container, preferably being sterilized by heat after sealing for long-term storage.
[Usage]
Since the food for microwaving of the present invention uses a container which can be used for microwave heating, it can be heated in a microwave oven and then directly provided to the table, and since the container has a fixed shape, it can protect the whole potato from external force and the cooked potato can be eaten directly from it without being transferred to another container. In addition, as described above, since we can taste a whole potato or a block of potato of 50 cm3 or larger in size directly after microwaving, the deliciousness of the potato material can be fully revived; it becomes a food not found in the past. Furthermore, since the container having a fixed shape is used, the loading of the whole potato can be mechanized at the time of manufacture.
Incidentally, it is difficult to mechanically load a whole potato or a block of potato of at least 50 cm3 or larger in size into a pouch, and moreover, a whole potato tends to collapse during transportation of the product, so the deliciousness of the potato material cannot be fully revived.
[Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the present invention will be described based on embodiments. Fig. 1 shows a cross section of an embodiment of food for microwaving. As shown in the drawing, a whole potato 2 and seasoning 3 such as butter sauce, fish powder or the like are sealed in the container 1.
In the present embodiment, the above-described CSC can is used as a container. The container 1 has a main body 1a which is made of a multilayer sheet with an opening sealed by winding on an aluminum lid 1b, and it has a cup shape with a diameter of 89 mm, a height of 63 mm, and a volume of
/3
230 cm3. A shrink film 4 made of a foaming resin having an anti-static electricity function is wrapped on the outer periphery of the main body 1a, and an outer lid 5 made of polyethylene is provided on the top of the main body 1a to cover the lid 1b. The outer lid 5 is formed with a hole for air ventilation.
In order to eat this food for microwaving, as shown in Fig. 2 (a), first, after removing the outer lid 5, remove the lid 1b made of aluminum. Next, as shown in Figs. 2 (b) and 2 (c), cover the outer lid 5 again, heat it for, e.g. about 90 seconds in a 500 W microwave oven. Then, as shown in Fig. 2 (d), eat it with a spoon 6 or the like directly. Of course, it may be transferred to another container for eating.
Next, a manufacturing example of the food for microwaving of the present embodiment mentioned above will be briefly described.
First, adjust the seasoning 3 and boil the peeled potato 2. The size of the potato 3 [sic! “3” is likely a source typo for “2”] is preferably 100~150 cm3 in view of the size of the container 1 described above. Next, after loading the seasoning 3 and the potato 2 into the container main body 1a, attach the lid 1b by winding it around the opening and seal the content. Then, carry out sterilization at 120oC for 30 minutes, and attach the shrink film 4 and the outer lid 5 thereafter to finish making the food for microwaving.
Herein, the potato 2 may be loaded and sealed in raw state and then be cooked by heating at the time of heat-sterilization, in addition to being cooked first and then loaded and sealed. If so, the pre-cooking of the potato can be omitted, and the collapse at the time of loading can be prevented.
Generally, if other foods are loaded into a CSC can, it is necessary to heat and sterilize at 120oC for about 60 minutes.
However, with the food for microwaving of the present invention, the time of heat-sterilization at 120C can be shortened to about 30 minutes as described above. This is because high heat resistant bacteria do not inhabit at least in the central part of the whole potato. The general heat-sterilization conditions are to heat all the portions up to the center of the container to 120C for sterilization. But with the food for microwaving of the present invention, the center of the container is just the central part of the whole potato, for this reason, the central part of the potato does not necessarily have to be heated to 120C for sterilization, and it is sufficient to heat the central part to about 100C only, and the heat-sterilization time can be significantly shortened as described above. Therefore, there is no degradation of flavor by long-time heat-sterilization, and the deliciousness of the material can be fully revived.
Furthermore, when heat-sterilization is performed using a CSC can as described in the above embodiment, storage for 1 year or more at normal temperature is possible, so it has excellent long-term storage capability compared to 6 months of storage for a retort pouch.
[Effects of the invention]
As described above, since the food for microwaving according to the present invention can be heated by a microwave oven and is loaded in a container having a fixed shape, it can be easily provided to the table and be eaten directly from the container with a spoon. In addition, since the potato is loaded uncut or as a large block and prevented by the container having a fixed shape from being collapsed, and the heat-sterilization time can be shortened, it is possible to fully revive the deliciousness of the potato material and create a high commercial value. Moreover, since the container having a fixed shape is used, the machine loading of the whole potato also becomes technically feasible, and reduced manufacture cost and long-term storage become possible compared with pouch packaging.
日本語 から 英語: METHOD OF PRODUCING URANIUM MONONITRIDE General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 核工学/原子科学
翻訳 - 英語 1. [Title of the invention]
A method of producing uranium mononitride
2. [Claims]
(1) A method of [sic! the handwritten correction is adding this word “of”] producing uranium mononitride, which is characterized by mixing 3~4 moles of carbon with 1 mole of uranium dioxide, heating the mixture at 1350C or higher in a vacuum or in an inert atmosphere until emission of carbon monoxide is complete, then heating the mixture at 1400~1750C in an ammonia gas flow or in a mixed gas flow of 75% hydrogen and 92~25% nitrogen, until emission of hydrocarbon is complete; finally replacing the hydrogen and nitrogen mixed gas with an inert gas or vacuuming and cooling.
(2) A method of producing uranium mononitride, which is characterized by heating the uranium carbide in an ammonia gas flow or a mixed gas flow of 8~75% hydrogen and 92~25% nitrogen until emission of hydrocarbon is complete and replacing the reaction gas with an inert gas or vacuuming and cooling.
3. [Detailed description of the invention]
The present invention relates to a method of producing uranium mononitride using uranium dioxide as a raw material. More particularly, the present invention relates to a method of producing uranium mononitride by converting uranium dioxide to uranium carbide and reacting the uranium carbide with ammonia or a mixed hydrogen-nitrogen gas.
Uranium oxide is desirable as a raw material for producing a nuclear fuel material of uranium mononitride because of its low production cost. In particular, uranium dioxide is generally used because of easy reaction control. In the manufacturing method using uranium dioxide as a raw material, the uranium dioxide is reduced by carbon and nitridized .
/2
Therefore, the main impurities in uranium mononitride produced from uranium dioxide are oxygen and carbon. Up to now, much effort has been made to reduce the amount of these impurities. A conventional method for producing uranium mononitride from uranium dioxide is described below.
In a 1st method, uranium dioxide and carbon are mixed exactly in a molar ratio of 1:2, and this mixture reacts in a nitrogen gas flow by heating at 1500~1700C to produce uranium mononitride. The advantage of this method is that the production reaction is completed in a single reaction step. However, (1) a high temperature is required to accelerate the reaction; (2) it is difficult to mix uranium dioxide and carbon precisely in a molar ratio of 1:2; (3) therefore, even if it is produced with high levels of skills and technology, there is the disadvantage of having relatively high concentrations of impurities contained in the uranium nitride, for example, 0.3 wt% oxygen, 0.15 wt% carbon, etc. Therefore, in order to reduce the amount of oxygen impurity, a 2nd method has been conceived in which the reductant carbon is a little excessive, and this excessive carbon is removed by hydrogen.
Such a method is a process in which uranium dioxide and carbon are mixed in a molar ratio of 1:2.14~2.16, and the mixture reacts in nitrogen at 1600~1700C, and after the reaction, the excessive carbon is removed by hydrogen. In this method, uranium mononitride is produced through 5 steps including reduction nitridizing, removal of free carbon, liberation of solid solution carbon, a second removal of free carbon, and decomposition of higher nitride. This method has the advantages of (1) easy mixing of uranium dioxide and carbon, (2) oxygen impurity in uranium mononitride being 0.1 wt% or less, but it has the disadvantage of a complicated manufacturing method that involves 5 steps.
The objective of the present invention is to provide a new manufacturing method for a novel production of uranium mononitride with low oxygen impurity concentration to overcome the drawbacks and disadvantages of the conventional production methods.
The present invention is intended to produce uranium mononitride by 2 steps including converting uranium dioxide to an oxygen-free compound and converting this compound to uranium mononitride. Specifically, uranium dioxide and carbon are mixed in a molar ratio of 1:3~4. The mixture is heated at a temperature of 1350C or higher in a vacuum or in an inert atmosphere until emission of carbon monoxide is completed to produce uranium carbides (UC uranium monocarbide, U2C3 diuranium tricarbide, and UC2 uranium dicarbide). This step is called carbonization reaction. The uranium carbides are further heated at 1400~1750C in an ammonia gas flow or a mixed hydrogen/nitrogen gas flow until the emission of hydrocarbon is completed to form uranium mononitride. This is called nitridizing reaction. After completion of the nitridizing reaction, helium is replaced with ammonia or a mixed hydrogen-nitrogen gas or the reactor is vacuumed and cooled. Thus, uranium mononitride is obtained.
The invention will now be described with embodiments.
Embodiment 1
Uranium dioxide and carbon (graphite) were mixed in a molar ratio of 1:3 and 1:4. Each mixture was formed into pellets with a diameter of 7 mm, a height of 2~3 mm, and a weight of about 0.5 g. The pellets were heated in a helium gas flow at 1600C for 2 hours in an induction furnace until emission of carbon monoxide was completed, then the atmosphere in the furnace was replaced with an ammonia gas flow at a flow rate of 0.5 l/min., or a mixed gas flow of 8% hydrogen + 92% nitrogen at a flow rate of 1.0 l/min., or 75% hydrogen + 25% nitrogen at a flow rate of 1.0 l/min.,
/3
and then heating at 1400~1750C was given until emission of hydrocarbon was completed. After completion of the reaction, helium was introduced to replace the gas in the reactor, then vacuumed and cooled. Thus, uranium mononitride having a lattice constant of 4.8892~4.8896 Å was produced. Table 1 shows analytical values of impurities in uranium mononitride produced under various conditions.
日本語 から 英語: POLYETHYLENE OXIDE COMPOSITION HAVING EXCELLENT HEAT RESISTANCE General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 Claims
[Claim 1] A polyethylene oxide composition having excellent heat resistance, characterized in that the composition is obtained by blending 100 parts by weight of polyethylene oxide with at least 2 parts by weight of an imidazole-containing peroxide decomposer and melt-kneading the blend.
[Claim 2] The polyethylene oxide composition according to claim 1, characterized in that the imidazole-containing peroxide decomposer is selected from the group consisting of 2-mercaptobenzoimidazole, 2-mercaptomethylbenzoimidazole, 2-mercaptobenzoimidazole zinc salt and 2-mercaptomethylbenzoimidazole zinc salt.
[Claim 3] The polyethylene oxide composition according to claim 1 or claim 2, characterized in that the composition further comprised at least 1 part by weight of phenolic antioxidant and subjected to melt-kneading.
[Claim 4] The polyethylene oxide composition according to any one of claims 1~3, characterized in that the phenolic antioxidant is selected from the group consisting of N,N’-hexamethylene bis(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxy-hydrocinnamamide), 1,3,5-trimethyl-2,4,6-tri(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl)benzene, and 2-t-butyl-6-(3-t-butyl-2-hydroxy-5-methyl-benzyl)-4-methylphenylacrylate.
[Detailed description of the invention]
[0001]
[Technical field of the invention]
The present invention relates to a polyethylene oxide composition having excellent heat resistance, and more particularly to a polyethylene oxide composition having excellent heat resistance obtained by blending polyethylene oxide with an imidazole-containing peroxide decomposer and melt-kneading the blend, and a polyethylene oxide composition having very excellent heat resistance obtained by further blending a phenolic antioxidant in the composition.
[0002]
[Prior art]
Polyethylene oxide as a water-soluble thermoplastic resin has been widely used as a modifier for various resins in recent years, and its properties, such as hydrophilicity, antistatic properties and mechanical strength, have gained widespread attention. However, polyethylene oxide displays low heat resistance and begins to degrade at around 150°C in air. Therefore, there are restrictions on the kneading conditions or processing conditions, and problems may arise when it is used in the field of heat-resistant engineering plastics, etc.
[0003]
Thus, phenolic primary antioxidants and phosphorus-containing secondary antioxidants or sulfur-containing secondary antioxidants have always been used as an approach to achieve excellent heat resistance, but the polyethylene oxide whose heat resistance is improved by this approach could not have adequate heat resistance.
[0004]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
To solve the aforesaid problem, the present invention is intended to provide a polyethylene oxide composition with greatly improved heat resistance.
[0005]
[Solution to the problem]
To solve the aforesaid problem, the inventors conducted an intensive study and found that the heat resistance of polyethylene oxide can be remarkably improved by blending polyethylene oxide with a certain amount of an imidazole-containing peroxide decomposer and melt-kneading the blend. In addition, the inventors also found that the combined use of a phenolic antioxidant the aforesaid compound further improved the heat resistance of polyethylene oxide.
[0006]
The polyethylene oxide composition having excellent heat resistance of the present invention is obtained by blending 100 parts by weight of polyethylene oxide with at least 2 parts by weight of an imidazole-containing peroxide decomposer, and melt-kneading the blend. In addition, the composition of the present invention is also obtained by further blending the aforesaid polyethylene oxide composition with at least 1 part by weight of a phenolic antioxidant and melt-kneading the blend.
[0007]
[Mode of implementing the invention]
The polyethylene oxide in the composition of the present invention is a commercially available product in the form of high-molecular weight polyethylene oxide having an average molecular weight of 70,000 or above, and various commercially available products may be used directly. An example of such a polyethylene oxide is Alkox (registered trademark; manufactured by Meisei Chemical Works, Ltd.).
[0008]
In another aspect, a particularly preferable imidazole-containing peroxide decomposer for mixing with the polyethylene oxide is at least 1 selected from the group consisting of 2-mercaptobenzoimidazol, 2-mercaptomethylbenzoimidazole, 2-mercaptobenzoimidazole zinc salt and 2-mercaptomethylbenzoimidazole zinc salt. According to the present invention, significantly improved heat resistance can be obtained by blending 100 parts by weight of polyethylene oxide with 2 or more parts by weight, preferably 2~20 parts by weight from a practical perspective, and particularly preferably 5 or more parts by weight of the imidazole-containing peroxide decomposer. If the amount of the imidazole-containing peroxide decomposer used is less than 2 parts by weight (e.g. 1 part by weight), adequate heat resistance could not be obtained. On the contrary, if the amount used is far more than 20 parts by weight (e.g. 30 parts by weight), it is difficult to melt-knead the polyethylene oxide and the imidazole-containing peroxide decomposer, so such an amount is not preferred.
/3
[0009]
Moreover, as an ingredient used in the composition of the present invention to improve the heat resistance of polyethylene oxide, in addition to the aforesaid imidazole-containing peroxide decomposer blended, a phenolic antioxidant may be further included in the blend to better improve the heat resistance through the combined use of such compounds. Such a phenolic antioxidant is preferably at least 1 selected from the group consisting of N,N’-hexamethylene bis(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxy-hydrocinnamamide), 1,3,5-trimethyl-2,4,6-tri(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl)benzene, and 2-t-butyl-6-(3-t-butyl-2-hydroxy-5-methyl-benzyl)-4-methylphenylacrylate. In the present invention, 100 parts by weight of polyethylene oxide are blended with at least 1 part by weight, preferably 1~10 pars by weight from the practical perspective, and particularly preferably 2 or more parts by weight of the phenolic antioxidant to achieve remarkably improved heat resistance. In the composition of the present invention, if the amount of the phenolic antioxidant used is far more than 10 parts by weight, it will be difficult to melt-knead it with polyethylene oxide.
[0010]
The polyethylene oxide composition having excellent heat resistance of the present invention may be manufactured by kneading the aforesaid polyethylene oxide with the aforesaid imidazole-containing peroxide decomposer at a certain blending ratio. The kneading method and the adding time for the blended ingredients are not particularly limited. In addition, it is not necessary to use a special kneader for kneading, so a regular kneader used in plastic kneading may be used. Same for blending of the phenolic antioxidant, a regular kneader can be used, and the imidazole-containing peroxide decomposer and the phenolic antioxidant may be blended simultaneously. In this way, the polyethylene oxide composition of the present invention blended with predetermined amounts of specified compounds capable of improving heat resistance can be processed into various forms and can be used as various molded products or films as well as a master batch for the modification of other thermoplastic resins.
[0011]
[Examples]
Examples of the present invention are given below to describe the present invention in detail. However, the present invention is not limited to these examples. The blended ingredients used in various examples, the heat resistant test method for the polyethylene oxide composition obtained, and the method for preparing the specimens are shown below.
[0012]
A. Ingredients of the polyethylene oxide compositions used in experiments
(1) Polyethylene oxide (PEO): all PEOs used in the experiments were polyethylene oxide (product name: Alkox R-1000; viscosity-average molecular weight 250,000- 300,000) manufactured by Meisei Chemical Works, Ltd.
(2) Imidazole-containing peroxide decomposer: the 4 compounds, 2-mercaptobenzoimidazole (SUMILIZER MB; manufactured by Sumitomo Chemical Industry Company Limited), 2-mercaptomethylbenzoimidazole (NOCRAC MMB, made by Ouchi Shinko Chemical Industrial Co., Ltd.), 2-mercaptobenzoimidazole zinc salt (NOCRAC MBZ; made by Ouchi Shinko Chemical Industrial Co., Ltd.), 2-mercaptomethylbenzoimidazole zinc salt (NOCRAC MMBZ; manufactured by Ouchi Shinko Chemical Industrial Co., Ltd.), were used.
(3) Phenolic antioxidant: the 3 compounds, N,N’-hexamethylene bis(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxy-hydrocinnamamide) (Irganox 1098; manufactured by Ciba-Geigy Co., Ltd.), 1,3,5-trimethyl-2,4,6-tri(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl)benzene (Irganox 1098 1330; made by Ciba-Geigy Co., Ltd.), 2-t-butyl-6-(3-t-butyl-2-hydroxy-5-methyl-benzyl)-4-methylphenylacrylate (Sumilizer GM, made by Sumitomo Chemical Industry Company Limited), were used.
[0013]
B. Method for manufacturing the specimens for testing (PEO composition manufacturing example)
The PEO, the imidazole-containing peroxide decomposer, and the phenolic antioxidant in powdery state were blended according to the ratios shown in the tables below until attainment of an even blend. Then, the obtained blend was kneaded at 90~100°C for 10 min. using a double roller kneader with electric heating (manufactured by Eto Manufacturing Co., Ltd.), thereby obtaining various PEO compositions. It should be noted that the amounts of blended ingredients shown in various tables are expressed in parts by weight.
[0014]
C. Method for measuring heat resistance of the PEO compositions
10 mg specimen was used for each PEO composition to determine its weight loss after heating under the following heating conditions using a thermal analysis device manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation (TG-30; atmospheric air).
Heating conditions (I) ∙∙∙ the specimen was heated from room temperature to 300°C at a rate of 10 °C/min.
Heating condition (II) ∙∙∙ the specimen was heated from room temperature to 250°C at a rate of 10 °C/min. and then maintained at 250°C for 30 min.
[0015]
Example 1: heat resistance improvement experiment by adding the imidazole-containing peroxide decomposer
100 parts by weight of the aforesaid PEO were blended with 0 part by weight, 1 part by weight, 2 parts by weight and 5 parts by weight of 2-mercaptobenzoimidazole (SUMILIZER MB) used as the imidazole-containing peroxide decomposer, respectively, and the weight losses of the specimens obtained were measured under the heating conditions (I) and (II). In addition, other 3 imidazole-containing peroxide decomposers (NOCRAC MMB, NOCRAC MBZ, NOCRAC MMBZ) were used to determine the weight losses of various specimens obtained under the heating conditions (I) and (II). The test results are shown below in Table 1.
中国語 から 英語: EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE ON HYDROGEN ENVIRONMENT EMBRITTLEMENT OF TYPE 316 SERIES AUSTENITIC STAINLESS SEELS AT LOW TEMPERATURES General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: `冶金/鋳造
翻訳 - 英語 1. Introduction
While the research and development using hydrogen as clean energy are making progress, we are examining the storage by means of liquified hydrogen as a mass storage method. Austenitic stainless steel is an ideal structural material for liquid hydrogen storage because of its excellent low temperature toughness. However, type 304 and type 316 stainless steels are known to be embrittled by hydrogen, so studies of hydrogen embrittlement at low temperatures using test pieces charged electrochemically or with high-temperature hydrogen had been conducted 1-5). It was found in these studies that hydrogen embrittlement was obviously dependent on test temperatures 1-5). For example, Caskey 2) examined the temperature dependence of type 316 stainless steel charged with high-temperature hydrogen and reported that the hydrogen embrittlement increased as the temperature decreased and reached its maximum level at around 200 K and, then, in the range below this temperature, the embrittlement decreased as the temperature was lowered. Further, austenitic stainless steels are also known to be embrittled in hydrogen gas (hydrogen environment embrittlement) 6-16). After investigating the embrittlement behaviors in the hydrogen environment at low temperatures, we found that the strain-induced martensite is the main cause for Type 304 or 316 stainless steels’ hydrogen environment embrittlement 13, 14). Although many studies have been conducted on hydrogen embrittlement of austenitic stainless steels, and factors affecting the embrittlement have been clarified, the relationship between the temperature causing hydrogen environment embrittlement of type 316 stainless steel and the amount of strain-induced martensite generated is still not very clear.
In this study, a tensile test was conducted on three types of 316 austenitic stainless steels (SUS316, SUS316L and SUS316LN) with different austenite phase stability in the temperature range from 80 K to 300 K under 1.1 MPa hydrogen and helium environment to investigate the relationship between the temperature causing hydrogen environment embrittlement and the amount of strain-induced martensite generated.
2. Experimental method
The evaluation of hydrogen environment embrittlement was conducted by a tensile test using SUS316, SUS316L and SUS316LN as commercially available type 316 stainless steel. The chemical composition of the test material is shown in Table 1. After the test material was made into a small-sized smooth round bar test piece (having 20 mm of a parallel part, and a diameter of 4 mm), it was polished to emery paper No. 0/4 and buffed with γ alumina to avoid the influence of surface roughness on hydrogen environment embrittlement. In addition, the heat treatment shown in Table 2 was applied to the materials. A tensile test was conducted as an evaluation test method. The tensile test was conducted at a strain rate
of 4.2×10-5 S-1 in the temperature range of 80~300 K using a low-temperature hydrogen environment material test device 15) developed by our institute. Hydrogen gas of 1.1 MPa (99.9999% purity) and helium gas of 1.1 MPa (99.999% purity) were used as the tensile testing environment. After the test, we measured the amount of ′ martensite produced by strain-induced transformation as ferrite equivalent amount by observation of fractured surface with an electronic scanning microscope and magnetic measurement using a ferrite meter.
日本語 から 英語: A method for producing instant noodles contained in a frustoconical container General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 林業/木材
翻訳 - 英語 1. Name of the Invention
A method for producing instant noodles contained in a frustoconical container
2. Claims
A method for producing instant noodles contained [sic! the word “contained” is the translation of the two handwritten Japanese characters added to source by means of a correction] in a frustoconical container, which is characterized in that a noodle body is placed in a mold, which has a same shape as the frustoconical container but an inner circumference slightly smaller than the inner circumference of the container, a bottom and a removable lid with many small holes, and the lid is closed for oil heating treatment to obtain a noodle block held in the middle of the container.
3. Detailed Description of the Invention
The present invention relates to a method for producing instant noodles contained in a frustoconical container, which can prevent the noodle block from being broken when being carried by the container and ensure that the instant noodles can be completely restored into noodle strings at the time of eating.
Conventionally, instant noodles are stored in a heat insulation container such as Styrofoam, and the container opening or the whole
container is sealed with a heat-shrinkable synthetic resin film. To eat it, the film is peeled off, and hot water is poured into the container to restore the noodle block into noodle strings.
This container is used as a packaging container for carrying, as a cooking container at the time of noodle restoration, and as a dish for eating. However, in view of the noodle body expansion during noodle restoration, the container cannot be fully filled by the noodle block.
Therefore, there is a considerable space in the container, causing the noodle block in the container to move, collapse or break due to shaking or inversing during handling or transportation of the instant noodles in the container.
Furthermore, a violent movement of the noodle block may damage the foam container.
In addition, dried materials like dried vegetables and dried meat are stored together with the noodle block in the container. However, during the movement as described above, those dried materials are dispersed and scattered to the lower part of the noodle block and some of them suffers damages to the shape.
Therefore, when you restore the noodle block, the appearance of the noodles will be bad, so the commodity value is decreased.
/3
The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned drawbacks by providing a method for producing a noodle block, which will be described in detail with reference to the attached drawings. The mold (1) made of iron or stainless steel has a frustoconical shape with an inner circumference slightly smaller than the inner circumference of the container (9) of the same shape, a bottom (2), and a removable lid (3) with many small holes (4).
The noodle body (8) for one meal consisting of noodle strings with a thickness of about 1 mm produced by a conventional method is placed into the mold (1), the lid (3) is closed, and then it is immersed into oil (6) and fried.
The moisture contained in the noodle strings is evaporated after they are fried in the oil at a temperature of about 130~150C for 2~3 minutes. Furthermore, under the action of the oil which enters through the small holes (4) in the bottom surface (2), the noodle body (5) is pushed up to be in close contact with the lower part of the lid (3) and is subjected to oil heating treatment over the mold.
This oil heating treatment process can be carried out continuously by engaging the hanger (7) attached to the mold (1) to the endless chain (8) and then moving many molds in the oil tank.
Since the upper surface of the oil heating treated noodle block (5’) [sic! the single quote sign is added by a handwritten correction in the source] is horizontal, and its outer periphery is smaller than the inner surface of the frustoconical container (9), if it is contained in the container, by its own weight, some space (10) is maintained in the upper part and the lower part to keep it in the middle of the container.
Then, the upper space (10) is filled with dried materials (11), the lid (12) is closed, and then, they, as a whole, are covered with the heat-shrinkable synthetic resin film (13).
Since the noodle block (5’) [sic! the apostrophe is added by a handwritten correction in the source] obtained by the production method of the present invention is securely held in the middle of the container, there is no movement for the noodle block (5’) [sic! the apostrophe is added by a handwritten correction in the source] in the container, avoiding the possibility of damaging it.
In addition, dried materials like dried vegetables, meat, shiitake mushrooms will not move to the lower part of the noodle block, avoiding potential damages.
Furthermore, since the noodle body (5) is pushed up to move closer to the lower part of the lid (3) at the time of oil heating treatment, the upper part is dense noodles and the lower part is looser noodles.
Therefore, when the noodle block is being restored into noodle strings, while the hot water poured from the mouth of the container is making the upper part of the noodle block restore the noodle shape, it will flow to the lower space (10) and accumulate there, so the noodle block is restored from the bottom.
At this time, as the noodle block is held in the middle area of the container, which prevent the heat radiation of the hot water in the lower space (10), the noodle strings are restored evenly.
Besides, the container (9) has a frustoconical shape, which facilitates eating with one hand only, so the instant noodles can be used as portable foods that can be carried outdoors, which contributes greatly to the eating habits.
中国語 から 英語: Effects of magnesium sulfate combined with sodium chloride concentrated diluted solution nasal irrigation for endoscopic sinus operation of intraoperative bleeding and pain General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療(一般)
翻訳 - 英語 Perioperative treatment is a key to the success of endoscopic sinus surgery. In order to achieve ideal effects, other than standardized and thorough surgery process, a reasonable and effective perioperative management plays a decisive role in ensuring a good surgical result [1]. From January 2010 to December 2011, we had conducted perioperative nasal irrigation with magnesium sulfate and concentrated sodium chloride diluted solution in patients with chronic rhinosinusitis and nasal polyps, and achieved good effects, which are now reported as follows.
1 Data and Methods
1.1 Clinical Data
This study included 151 patients with chronic rhinosinusitis and nasal polyps who had no previous history of nasal surgery, and had systemic diseases such as diabetes, hypertension and abnormal coagulation function excluded by preoperative examinations. The patients were randomized into three groups and classified according to the Criteria of the 2008 Nanchang Conference [2]. In group A, there were 50 cases, including 23 males and 27 females who were aged 18-75 years with an average age of (38.04±14.71) years, and had a disease course of 0.5-40 years with an average duration of (7.53±6.44) years. Among them, there were 23 cases of chronic rhinosinusitis, 7 cases of chronic rhinosinusitis with nasal polyps, 14 cases of chronic rhinosinusitis with nasal septum deviation, and 6 cases of chronic rhinosinusitis with nasal polyps and nasal septum deviation. In group B, there were 51 cases, including 24 males and 27 females who were aged 18-75 years with an average age of (38.02±14.02) years, and had a disease course of 0.5-40 years with an average duration of (7.55±6.16) years. Among them, there were 22 cases of chronic rhinosinusitis, 16 cases of chronic rhinosinusitis with nasal septum deviation, and 5 cases of chronic rhinosinusitis with nasal polyps and nasal septum deviation. In group C, there were 50 cases, including 24 males and 26 females who were aged 18-73 years with an average age of (37.12±14.22) years, and had a disease course of 0.5-30 years with an average duration of (7.44±6.26) years. Among them, there were 24 cases of chronic rhinosinusitis, 6 cases of chronic rhinosinusitis with nasal polyps, 15 cases of chronic rhinosinusitis with nasal septum deviation, and 5 cases of chronic rhinosinusitis with nasal polyps and nasal septum deviation. The data in the three groups were comparable (P > 0.05).
1.2 Methods
Preoperative treatment: (1) Antibiotics: Patients in all the three patients orally took roxithromycin capsules 2 times a day for 5 d; (2) Mucous expectorant: Patients in all the three patients orally took ambroxol hydrochloride tablets 2 times a day for 5 d; (3) Topical glucocorticoids: Patients in all the three patients were given fluticasone propionate nasal spray 2 times a day for 5 d; (4) Nasal irrigation: Patients in Group A received nasal irrigation with 25% magnesium sulfate 20 ml + 10% sodium chloride 10 ml + 0.9% sodium chloride 100 ml, 2 times a day for 5 d; patients in Group B received nasal irrigation with 10% sodium chloride 10 ml + 0.9% sodium chloride 100 ml, 2 times a day for 5 d; and patients in Group C received nasal irrigation with 0.9% sodium chloride 100 ml, 2 times a day for 5 d.
Surgical methods: Endoscopic sinus surgery was performed by the same experienced surgeon for all patients in the three groups. The surgery was performed under local anesthesia, and patients were taken in a supine position with the head raised by 30. Nasal surface anesthesia was performed with cotton flakes soaked in the mixture of 1% tetracaine 20 ml + 0.1% adrenaline 1 time every 10 min. After 3 times of surface anesthesia, 2% lidocaine 5 ml was used for infiltration of agger nasi and anterior tip of middle turbinate and for sphenopalatine nerve block anesthesia. The surgery was performed with the Messerklinger approach. The polyps and uncinate process were removed with a suction cutter, and the maxillary sinus was opened. Also, depending on the condition, the ethmoid sinus, sphenoid sinus and frontal sinus were opened, pathological tissues were cleared, and the normal mucosa was preserved. Nasal septum correction was performed during this time in patients with nasal septum deviation. Some of turbinate mucosa/bones were removed for patients with turbinate hypertrophy or polypoid changes. After completion of the surgery, the nasal cavity was filled with gelatin sponge and hemostatic gauze, and for patients receiving nasal septum surgery, compressed filling with Vaseline gauze strips was performed.
1.3 Outcome Observation
(1) Intraoperative pain severity: The intraoperative pain severity was evaluated using visual analogue scale (VAS) after surgery: no pain (VAS = 0), mild pain (0 < VAS ≤3), moderate pain (3 < VAS 7), and severe pain (7 < VAS 10). (2) Intraoperative bleeding: It was evaluated using the scoring system for Boezaart nasal endoscopic surgery field bleeding [3].
1.4 Statistical Analysis
The Ridit analysis was employed. P < 0.05 was considered statistically significant.
中国語 から 英語: Computer Vision Scheme Used for the Automatic Landing of Unmanned Helicopter on Ship Deck General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: IT(情報テクノロジー)
翻訳 - 英語 Abstract
A binocular stereo vision computer system and its related computer vision technology for the automatic landing of an unmanned helicopter on a ship were studied by a theoretical analysis and semi-physical computer simulation. The application of the computer vision technology based on HSV uniform chromaticity scale to the control of landing of unmanned helicopters on a ship was studied. The Hough transform algorithm was used to examine linear parameters and gradient information was used in the Hough transform, which broke through the computing bottleneck of the Hough transform algorithm. The whole algorithm showed very strong resistance to noises and met the requirements for timeliness and practicability by the autonomous landing of unmanned helicopters on a ship deck.
Key words: unmanned helicopter; computer vision; image segmentation;
edge detection; Hough transform
Chinese Library Classification Number: TP391; V249.1
Document identification code: A
To allow a helicopter to autonomously land on a ship deck, an automatic landing system capable of measuring relevant information and directing the landing of an unmanned helicopter is required. The computer vision technology can be used to measure relative attitudes and positions between the camera and a target. A computer vision system can be mounted in an unmanned helicopter to control automatic landing of the unmanned helicopter. This paper proposes a complete computer vision algorithm by analyzing the operating characteristics of the process of landing an unmanned helicopter on a ship deck. Computer simulation results showed that the computer vision algorithm studied in this paper can provide relatively accurate relative positions and relative movement parameters, meeting the requirements for real-time landing of an unmanned helicopter on a ship deck. Reference [1] gave an engineering example in which the computer vision technology was applied to the control of the landing of coaxial helicopters. The results also demonstrated the feasibility of applying computer vision technology to the landing control of a helicopter on a ship deck or on the ground.
1 Structural model of the landing system
The system structure is shown in Fig. 1. When an unmanned helicopter returns and comes close to the depot ship and is about to land, the on-board computer vision system starts searching for the characteristic pattern representing the landing area. The computer vision system, based on image information retrieved from the characteristic pattern, obtains relative position, attitude and movement parameters of the helicopter and the depot ship, mainly the cycles and amplitudes of the yaws and the up and down movements of the depot ship. The helicopter is controlled to come into contact with the ship when the ship deck is level and is going down. The device in the helicopter cooperates with a harpoon deck lock on the deck to complete the process of automatic positioning and landing on the deck through the computer vision scheme.
中国語 から 英語: Preparation and Optical Properties of Nitro Polytrifluorostyrene General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: エレクトロニクス/電子工学
翻訳 - 英語 Abstract: Polytrifluorostyrene (PTFS) was prepared by emulsion polymerization, and then a series of nitro polytrifluorostyrenes (PTFS-NO2) with different nitrification rates were prepared using mixtures of concentrated nitric acid and concentrated sulfuric acid as nitrating agents. The chemical structure and composition of the resultant polymers were characterized by FT-IR and NMR, and their thermal properties were explored by DSC and TG. In addition, the optical properties of the thin PTFS-NO2 film were characterized. The results showed that the nitrification rates of the polymers could be adjusted by changing the ratio of the mixed acids and reaction temperature. Comparing with PTFS, PTFS-NO2 exhibited significant increase in both light transmission and optical birefringence. The birefringence of PTFS-NO2 could reach 0.0187.
Key words: polytrifluorostyrene; nitration; birefringence; characterization
Chinese Library Classification Number: TB34 Document Code: B
Article ID: 1005-8478(2009)20-1583-03
DOI: 10.14133/j.cnki.1008-9357.2015.02.004
Liquid crystal display (LCD) equipment possesses many advantages, including low working voltage, low power consumption, light weight and small thickness, no radiation, no flicker, etc. It is widely used in mobile phones, notebook computers, projectors and other fields. However, the LCD has the problem of narrow viewing angle which is caused by the optical anisotropy of the liquid crystal layer. To improve the viewing angle characteristics of an LCD, a variety of wide viewing angle technologies and new display modes have been developed, for example, in-plane switching (IPS-LCD) mode, multi-domain vertical alignment (MVA) mode and axially symmetric aligned micro-cell (ASM) mode, etc. [1-2] At present, IPS-LCD mode is becoming the mainstream LCD mode, which has been widely used in various LCD equipment. Recently, researchers have observed that polytrifluorostyrene (PTFS) has special optical birefringence after simple tap casting and the birefringence could reach 0.014. PTFS can be used in optical devices including LCD screens, optical switches and optically controlled wave-guide tubes. Comparing with the traditional compensation films prepared by locking liquid crystal molecules into vertical arrangement through photopolymerization, the optical compensation film using a thin PTFS film as IPS-LCD possesses superior performance and considerable cost efficiency [3], so it has been applied in Iphone6 [sic! “Iphone6” is likely a typo for “iPhone 6”] series products recently.
LCD compensation film (retardation film) is to allow the liquid crystal molecules to obtain symmetrical compensation in their birefringence properties, so that they can have a certain amount of in-plane and out-of-plane retardation in the thin film [1] (R is the product of birefringence (n) and thickness of the thin film). So, to achieve the required retardation, the compensation film must possess a certain thickness. Although the current PTFS compensation film can basically meet the optical compensation requirements of IPS-LCD, to get a thinner LCD, the only way to achieve the goal is to constantly improve the birefringence
of the compensation film. Shin-Tson Wu [4] pointed out that the transition of -* electrons in polymer molecules is the main factor for the occurrence of birefringence. The synthesis of a new polymer with a larger -* conjugated structure is a complex and lengthy process, while the modification of existing materials is a simple and economical method. In this study, the method of PTFS modification by nitrification was used for the first time to increase the polarizability of the benzene ring by introducing the nitro group into the benzene ring, to obtain a compensation film material with higher birefringence.
In this study, the optical birefringence of PTFS was further improved by the modification method using the mixed acid nitrification. A series of PTFS-NO2 with different nitrification rates were prepared using mixtures of concentrated nitric acid and concentrated sulfuric acid as nitrating agents [5], and then their chemical compositions, thermal properties and optical properties were studied.
1 Experiment
1.1 Materials and Reagents
Trifluorostyrene (TFS): chemically pure. It was prepared according to the method reported in reference [6] and treated with reduced-pressure distillation before use. Potassium persulfate (KPS): analytically pure. It was obtained from Shanghai Lingfeng Chemical Reagent Limited Company and refined before use. Sodium bisulfite (NaHSO3): analytically pure, obtained from Shanghai Lingfeng Chemical Reagent Limited Company. Sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS): chemically pure, obtained from Shanghai Lingfeng Chemical Reagent Limited Company. P-nitrotoluene (PNT), methanol (CH3OH) and chloroform (CHCl3): analytically pure, obtained from China National Pharmaceutical Group Co., Ltd. Concentrated sulphuric acid (wH2SO4 = 98%) and concentrated nitric acid (wHNO3 = 68%): purchased from Shanghai Lingfeng Chemical Reagent Limited Company.
1.2 Synthesis of PTFS
Due to the low activity of TFS monomer and the easy occurrence of dimerization, it is difficult to obtain reaction products of polymers with high molecular weights by bulk polymerization, solution polymerization, etc. Therefore, referring to literature [7-8], emulsion polymerization was used to prepare PTFS in the study. However, a large amount of the emulsifier was still needed during the polymerization and the reaction time was relatively long.
SDS (1.5 g) and distilled water (40 mL) were added to a 250 mL four-mouth flask containing magneton. Then, 10 g TFS was put into the flask under intense agitation, and the initiator composed of 0.01 g KPS and 0.005 g NaHSO3 was added. The temperature of polymerization was 50C. After 72 h, the reaction system was precipitated with methanol, filtered and dried. After that, the system was dissolved and precipitated 2 times with chloroform-methanol. Finally, it was treated by vacuum drying for 24 h to obtain a white solid product in the quantity of 8.7 g.
1.3 Synthesis of PTFS-NO2
1 g of PTFS prepared by emulsion polymerization was added into a three-month flask and dissolved in 25 mL chloroform. The mixed acid was prepared by mixing 8 mL concentrated sulphuric acid with 3 mL concentrated nitric acid at a temperature below 20C. The mixed acid was dripped into the three-month flask at room temperature and stirred intensely. After the addition of the mixed acid, the reaction temperature was raised to 40C for 14 h. After the reaction, the reaction system was washed repeatedly with a saturated NaHCO3 solution and distilled water until it was neutralized, and then the organic phase was slowly dripped into 100 mL methanol to obtain a yellowish precipitate. Finally, the precipitate was treated by suction filtration and washed with methanol, and the filter cake was dried for 4 h at 50C. Then it underwent dissolution and precipitation with chloroform-methanol for 2 times, the product was dried by vacuuming for 24 h to obtain a yellow solid product in a quantity of 0.9 g.
1.4 Preparation of polymer thin film
0.1 g of the polymer was dissolved in 1 mL cyclopentanone and coated onto a flat glass substrate, and then the solvent was volatilized at room temperature to form a film. After drying, the film was carefully peeled off, and the thickness of the film was controlled to about 10 m.
1.5 Test and characterization
The polymer was dissolved with CDC13. Then 1H-NMR and 19F-NMR were tested using an AVANCE500 nuclear magnetic resonance spectrometer made by the Germany-based BRUKER company, under the test temperature of 25C.
The sample was dissolved in dichloromethane and coated onto a Kbr sheet. The test was performed with a Nicolet Magna-IR 550 Fourier transform infrared spectrometer made by the US-based Thermo Electron company, with a scanning range of 400~4000 cm-1.
The molecular weight and its distribution were determined by a high-performance gel permeation chromatography made by the US-based Water company using THF as the mobile phase. The column temperature was 25C. Then, a standard curve was plotted using a series of polystyrene as the standard samples and the results were obtained by universal calibration.
The Pyris 6 thermal gravimetric analyzer made by Perkin-Elmer, US was used under the atmosphere of N2. The temperature ranged was 25~800C and the temperature rise rate was 10 C/min.
The DSC8500 differential scanning calorimeter made by PE, US was used under the atmosphere of N2. The temperature ranged was 25~300C and the temperature rise rate was 10 C/min. The transmittance (T) of the thin film was determined by a Cary500 UV-vis spectrometer made by Varian, US with a detection range of 300~700 nm.
The birefringence of the thin film was measured by a 2010/M Model prism coupler made by Metrieon US using the single-layer film mode at a wavelength of 633 nm.
On the premise of obtaining the refringence and the transmittance at a wavelength of 633 nm, the thickness of the thin film was calculated according to reference [9].
/3
2 Results and discussion
2.1 Structural characterization of PTFS
The 1H-NMR spectrum of PTFS is shown in Fig. 1(a), in which the peaks with a chemical displacement of 5~8 belong to the absorption peaks of hydrogen in the benzene ring. The 19F-NMR spectrum of PTFS is shown in Fig. 1(b), in which the peaks with a chemical displacement of -120~-90 belong to the absorption peaks of fluorine of -CF2- in PTFS, and the peaks with a chemical displacement of -190~-160 belong to the absorption peaks of fluorine of -CF- in PTFS, and the integral area ratio of the two is 2:1. The 1H-NMR spectrum and the 19F-NMR spectrum showed that PTFS was successfully synthesized. Its number-average molecular weight (Mn) was 1.5105 measured with GPC, and its polymer dispersity index (PDI) was 2.2.
中国語 から 英語: Structural Modification and Biological Evaluation of Monomeric Compound from Pandanus Tectorius General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
翻訳 - 英語 2.3 Synthetic method
2.3.1 Synthesis of 4′,5′-O-propylidene-3′-O-caffeoylquinic acid (B1)
Referring to the synthetic method in the reference [11], 7.0 g (19.8 mmol) 3′-O-caffeoylquinic acid was accurately weighed and added into a 250 mL round-bottom flask. Then, 60 mL anhydrous acetone and 40 mL 2,2-dimethoxypropane (DMP) were added. The reaction solution was stirred to form a suspension. Next, to the reaction solution was added TsOH (50 mg) to the catalytic amount, and the mixture was stirred to become clear and transparent and reacted at room temperature. The reaction process was monitored by TLC. After the reaction completed, the solution was neutralized with anhydrous Na2CO3 to have a pH value of 5~6. Finally, the solution was treated with suction filtration and reduced pressure distillation to remove the solvent. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography and the caffeoylquinic acid derivative B1 was obtained.
2.3.2 Synthesis of 3,4-benzyloxy-4′,5′-O-propylidene 3′-O-caffeoylquinic acid (B2)
0.1 g of the compound B1 (0.25 mmol) and 0. 17 g of anhydrous K2CO3 (1.23 mmol) were accurately weighed and added into a 100 mL round-bottom flask. 40 mL of anhydrous acetonitrile was added and mixed well by stirring, and then 0.01 mL of benzyl bromide was added slowly. The reflux reaction was performed under the protection of argon until completion of the reaction as detected by TLC. Next, the reaction solution was treated with reduced pressure distillation to remove the solvent, and then diluted with 50 mL of acetic ether and washed with 5% NaHCO3 until it was neutral. Finally, the organic layer was dried with anhydrous Na2SO4 and treated with reduced pressure distillation to remove the solvent. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography and the caffeoylquinic acid derivative B2 was obtained.
2.3.3 Synthesis of 4′,5′-O-propylidene-3′-O- caffeoylquinic acid-1′-O-ring lactone
Referring to the synthetic method in the reference [12], 0.7 g (2 mmol) 3′-O-caffeoylquinic acid and 0.35 g (6 mmol) anhydrous acetone were accurately weighed and added into a 25 mL round-bottom flask. 10 mL of anhydrous tetrahydrofuran was added with stirring to mix well, and then 0.33 mL (2 mmol) TMSOTf was dripped in slowly. The reaction was performed overnight at room temperature, and then 1 mol/L iced NaOH solution was added into the reaction solution for quenching reaction. The extraction was carried out with ethyl acetate. Finally, the organic layer was dried with anhydrous Na2SO4 and treated with reduced pressure distillation to remove the solvent. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography and the caffeoylquinic acid derivative B3 was obtained.
2.3.4 Synthesis of 4′,5′-O-propylidene-3′-O-caffeoylquinic acid amide compounds (B4~B8)
Referring to the synthetic method in the reference [11], 1.2 g (3 mmol) derivative B1 and 1.5 g (3 mmol) BOP were accurately weighed and added into a 250 mL round-bottom flask. Under the protection of argon, 70 mL of anhydrous mixed solvent THF-CH3CN (3:2) was added with stirring until dissolved. After the addition of 0.8 g (6 mmol) DIEA, various amine (3 mmol) was dripped into the reaction solution until completion of the reaction as detected by TLC. Finally, the reaction solution was treated with reduced pressure distillation to remove the solvent. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography and the caffeoylquinic acid derivatives B4~B8 were obtained.
2.3.5 Synthesis of 3′-O-caffeoylquinic acid amide compounds (B9~B13)
Referring to the synthetic method in the reference [13], 2 mmol derivatives B4~B8 were accurately weighed and added into a 50 mL round-bottom flask. 20 mL of mixed solution TFA-DCM-H2O (9:1:1) was added, and the reaction solution was stirred for 0.5 h until completion of the reaction as detected by TLC. Finally, the solvent was removed by reduced pressure distillation. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography and the caffeoylquinic acid derivatives B9~B13 were obtained.
2.4 Detection of MDCK cytotoxicity by MTT assay
The derivatives were dissolved to prepare the storage solutions with a concentration of 50 mg/mL by DMSO, respectively. The single cell suspension was prepared with a medium solution and inoculated into 96-well plate. The cells were cultured at 37C in the environment of 5% CO2 for 24 h. The derivatives were diluted with the medium solution, respectively, and an equal volume of DMSO was used as the solvent control. After the cell medium solution was removed by suction, the medium solution containing the derivatives or DMSO was added for cell culture for 48 h at 37C in the environment of 5% CO2. Then 20 μL MTT solution (5 mg/mL) was added into each well to culture again for 4 h. Finally, the supernatant in each well was carefully sucked and removed, and 150 μL DMSO was added to each well to incubate at 37C for 10 min. to fully dissolve the crystal. The absorbance (A) value was measured at the wavelength of 550 nm with a microplate reader to calculate the cell survival rate.
Cell survival rate = A test group / A control group
GraphPad Prism software (GraphPad Software, San Diego, CA) was used to calculate and analyze the 50% cytotoxic concentration (CC50) values of the derivatives for MDCK cells. Therapeutic index (TI) = CC50 / EC50. Each experiment was repeated 3 times.
2.5 Inhibitory effect of the derivatives on the replication of influenza virus [10]
3.2 Results of cytological experiments
Firstly, the toxicity of these derivatives to MDCK cells was detected by MTT assay, and then the inhibitory effect of the derivatives B1~B13 in the range of non-toxic concentrations on in vitro infection of MDCK cells by influenza virus was investigated by cytological experiments. The specific results are shown in Table 1. The EC50 value of the derivatives B4, B6 and B10 for virus replication inhibition was 2.34, 1.06 and 19.88 g/mL, respectively, while the derivative B4 exhibited lower cytotoxicity (CC50 = 63.77 g/mL) and higher therapeutic index (TI = 27.25). Therefore, the derivative B4 possesses better anti-influenza virus activity and is worth a further study.
日本語 から 英語: Sentence Segmentation for Simultaneous Speech Translation by Maximizing Translation Accuracy General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: 言語学
翻訳 - 英語 1. Introduction
Speech translation systems have been improved in accuracy by many years of research, and they have been applied to various fields in recent years. Simultaneous speech translation, which simultaneously translates into the target language, is one of its application fields. However, in conventional speech translation [1] with a sentence as a translation unit, because the translation is not started until the end of the sentence, the concurrency is largely lost. For this reason, a sentence segmentation method has been studied in which input sentences are divided into short units while maintaining the accuracy of machine translation as much as possible [2, 3, 4, 5]. However, in the conventional method, the segmentation positions are mainly based on heuristics, and their influence on translation accuracy are not directly considered. The conventional method also does not allow explicit control over the average number of words in a segmentation unit that affects simultaneousness.
Therefore, in this research, we propose an algorithm that automatically determines the segmentation positions according to the change of translation accuracy at the time of sentence segmentation, which has not been considered in the conventional method. Specifically, we define 3 methods for selecting segmentation positions based on the Greedy algorithm to maximize the translation accuracy after the segmentation. Moreover, the average number of words of segmentation units is introduced as a parameter of the algorithm, and an explicit control of the average number of words which has been difficult in the conventional algorithm is enabled.
In order to verify the effectiveness of this algorithm, we made an experimental evaluation on English-Japanese translation tasks. As a result, compared to the conventional algorithm, this algorithm delivered comparable accuracy in the evaluation on the BLEU scale and higher accuracy in the evaluation on the RIBES scale. The control of the number of words had an error of 1 word or less from the specified number of words.
2 Sentence segmentation in simultaneous speech translation
In speech translation, the speech utterance of the speaker is recognized and translated. In the translation of relatively short speech utterance such as dialogues, the translation could be started after the speech utterance is finished. However, it is often that there are no clear speech breaks in lectures or the like, and it is necessary to automatically determine when to start translating. Although it is natural to use sentences as translation units in speech translation, same as in text translation [1], sometimes a sentence is long, and it may take a long time to finish it, so the simultaneousness of translation is lost. For this reason, as shown in Fig. 1, it is necessary to translate sentences by dividing them at appropriate positions other than at the end of the sentences, and a sentence segmentation method for doing this has been studied.
Several sentence segmentation methods for simultaneous speech translation have been proposed in recent years. Bangalore et al. have proposed a method using silence intervals for speech recognition [2]. Fujita et al. have proposed a method to perform segmentation using the probability (right probability) of whether word alignment intersects at that position or not, and the translation speed can be improved while maintaining accuracy compared to the silence segmentation method [3]. In the report of Rangarajan et al., several methods have been evaluated for English-to-Spanish translation tasks, and it is said that the algorithm of predicting the positions of commas and periods by SVM and the method of dividing by conjunction are the most accurate [4]. In a study by Shimizu et al. the translation timing of simultaneous English-to-Japanese interpreters had been analyzed, a method was proposed for dividing positions when English part-of-speech appears in specific combinations, and a degree of accuracy equivalent to that of the method of predicting the positions of commas and periods was realized [5].
In any of the methods mentioned above, segmentation positions are determined using only phonological and linguistic features, and the influence of segmentation positions on the accuracy of machine translation is not considered directly. Also, although the average number of words in the word sequence generated by sentence segmentation affects the translation time, none of the methods mentioned here can directly control the average number of words 1. In the following sections, we will propose a sentence segmentation method that uses the changes in translation accuracy by the segmentation positions and the average number of words in a segmentation unit as indexes.
3 Sentence segmentations by maximizing translation accuracy
In our proposed method, the sentence segmentation model learning is implemented using the output of a machine translation system that has already completed learning. Hereinafter, sentences at the source language side of bilingual translated data used for learning is represented as F = {fj|1 ≤ j ≤ N}, and reference sentences at the target language side as ε = {ej|1 ≤ j ≤ N}. N is the number of source-target bilingual sentences. Although in the original speech translation it is necessary to estimate the end of a sentence which is not clearly shown, here the end of sentence estimation has been performed in advance. In addition, the machine translation system is represented as the function MT(f) of the source language sentences f.
日本語 から 英語: Stabilization of Electroless Ni Plating Bath by Isocyanide Additives with Acidity General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
翻訳 - 英語 1. Introduction
In recent years, as the environmental consciousness rises globally, environmental laws and regulations such as ELV and RoHS come into effect successively. It is getting difficult to use substances that conflict with these legal regulations any more 1), 2). Pb, Cd widely used as the electroless Ni plating stabilizers are also the substances conflicting with these regulations. Moreover, Bi proposed as a substitute has many hazardous properties about which there is unclear information and it could possibly be restricted for use as the future trends change. Thus, the industry is looking into organic stabilizers.
So far, it was pointed out that chemical adsorption plays an important role in the work mechanism of the organic stabilizers for the electroless Ni plating bath. In other words, these organic stabilizers will be rapidly and chemically adsorbed to the Ni micronuclei produced in the bath and poison their surfaces to suppress the self-decomposition of the bath. It was also proposed that the lone pairs of electrons take part in the chemical adsorption of such organic stabilizers 3)~6). According to these reports, the lone pairs of electrons in the organic stabilizers are donated to the metal surface and are shared to realize the chemical adsorption. So to speak, they are captured via surface coordination.
Generally, during the electroless plating reaction, the mixed potential is biased obviously toward the base side. Moreover, as described above, the coordinate bond is to bond by donating and sharing its own lone pairs of electrons to the partner metal. Thus, if the metal ion has a lower oxidation number, it will be difficult to form a classic coordination bond. It can be imagined that, during the electroless plating reaction when the mixed potential becomes the base, chemical adsorption via the classic surface coordination will be difficult, as described above.
In recent years, it was also proposed that chemical adsorption is possible via the reverse donation of electrons 7)~10). For example, it was reported that the reverse donation of electrons was related to the nitrobenzene adsorption to the steel surface in sulfuric acid 7), the potential dependency of the adsorbed state of i-marononitriledithiolate [sic! the word “marononitriledithiolate” is possibly a source typo for “marononitrile dithiolate”] on the copper electrode 8) and the adsorption of CO molecules to the Pd surface even not in liquid 9). The carbonyl compounds are the typical substances having -electron reverse donation property, i.e., acidity. The classic coordination bond is with a metal ion formed via the orbit and the electron is reversely donated to the * orbit of the metal ion to form a supplementary bond. (Fig. 1). Through such bonding, regardless of the lower oxidation number of the partner metal ion and the presence of negative charges, a stable bond can be formed.
Therefore, in this study, whether the electroless Ni plating stabilizers are providing chemical adsorption via such -electron reverse donation was examined. It was reported that the substances having the ability of -electron reverse donation were, for example, the phosphorus compounds such as PF3 and PCl3, arsenic and antimony compounds such as AsR3 and SbR3, divalent sulfur compounds such as SR2, carbonyl and isocyanide compounds 11). Of these compounds having acidity, the isocyanide compounds that were not identified as a stabilizer were investigated in this study to check whether they had the stabilization effect on the electroless Ni plating bath as well as their stabilizing characteristics.
2. Experiment methods
Table 1 shows the basic bath composition used in this experiment. The basic bath used had the industrial plating composition that had been used conventionally. In this study, isocyanide compounds were added to this basic bath to evaluate the stability and reactivity of the obtained plating bath. In addition, the polarization curves were plotted to perform the electrochemical evaluation on the characteristics of the stabilization effect.
Table 2 shows the isocyanide compounds used in the study. In terms of the molecular structure and molecular weight, the compounds used included 1-isocyanobutane having a linear structure, tert-butyl isocyanide having the same molecular weight as 1-isocyanobutane but a branched structure, 2-isocyano-2,4,4-trimethyl pentane having an isopropyl group added to tert-butyl isocyanide, isocyanocyclohexane having a six‐membered ring, and isocyanomethyl benzene having a benzene ring. These isocyanide compounds are difficult to dissolve directly in water. Thus, 1 mmol each of them was respectively added into 5 mL of isopropyl alcohol and then water was added to form a 1 mmol/L solution for each sample.
The bath stabilization effect was evaluated by the following 2 methods. One was the decomposition suppression test, where PdCl2 was added into the basic bath containing no stabilizers to forcibly induce the bath self-decomposition, and then the isocyanide compound was added to verify whether the decomposition reaction was suppressed. In this way, whether the additive had a suppressive effect on the growth of the Ni micronuclei produced from the decomposition could be evaluated. Specifically, 10 mL basic bath solution was added to a test tube and heated to 90C, then 20 μL of 100 ppm PdCl2 solution was added to forcibly induce the plating bath to decompose by itself. The PdCl2 solution used was prepared through dissolving 0.5 g PdCl2 in 10 ml of 3.6 wt% HCl and then diluting with water to a volume of 5 L. In addition, the bath decomposition was verified through visually observing the occurrence of the reaction gas and precipitation. 10 seconds after the decomposition was verified, 1 mL of isocyanide
diluted to 1 mmol/L was added into the plating bath and visual observation was performed to check whether the self-decomposition stopped, whether there was a reaction gas and whether the precipitation amount changed. After the additive was added, the bath was allowed to stand for up to 20 min. at 90C. Then visual judgement of whether the decomposition reoccurred was made. If the decomposition reoccurred, then the duration after adding the additive was defined as the re-decomposition time.
Moreover, another method of evaluating the stabilization effect was the stability test used industrially 12)~15). In that test, the plating bath having the additive added was kept at a low temperature of about 60C while a catalytic material was added continuously to estimate the additive amount when the decomposition reaction started. It was used industrially to investigate the tolerance limit of the catalytic material to the bath. Specifically, 300 ml basic bath solutions having isocyanide compounds added were kept at 60C while 1 mL of 100 ppm PdCl2 solution each was added as described previously over a period of 1 min. and the volume of the PdCl2 solution added till decomposition started was defined as the degree of stability. The occurrence of decomposition was judged through visually observing the generation of a gas and black precipitation. In this study, 11 mL was adopted as the upper limit.
The plating rate when an isocyanide compound was added was determined as follows. Used the basic bath having the additive added to form a film at 90C in 1 hour on a rolled steel sheet having a surface area of 18.9 cm2 in the plating bath having a capacity of 500 mL. The plating rate was calculating through dividing the change in weight before and after film formation by the specific gravity of 7.8 g/cm3 measured in advance to get
the film thickness. Moreover, the pre-treatment was performed with the general iron pre-treatment methods including alkaline degreasing (5 min.), acid cleaning (with 18 wt% hydrochloric acid for 1 min.), electrolytic cleaning (for 5 min.) and activation (with 18 wt% hydrochloric acid for 30 sec.).
The electrochemical characteristics of the bath stabilization effect by the additive were investigated through evaluating the cathode and anode polarization curves. Performed the pre-treatment as described above on a 10 10mm rolled steel sheet and then carried out 1 m Ni-P plating. Used it as the working electrode to scan at a speed of 10 mV/s under the conditions of 50C, pH 5.75 and -0.8~-0.4V (vs SCE) to measure the anode polarization curve and cathode polarization curve when the isocyanide compound was added. The three-electrode method was employed for the measurement with HZ-3000 by Hokuto Denko, using a 10 20 mm Pt electrode as the counter electrode and a saturated calomel electrode as the reference electrode. Moreover, the working electrode and the counter electrode were spaced at 5 cm. Luggin capillary was not used in the reference electrode because there was no difference whether it was used or not. Furthermore, the anode polarization curve was measured using the solution with Ni removed from the basic bath solution to polarize from -0.8V (vs SCE) to the direction of anodic polarization, and the cathode polarization curve was measured using the solution with the hypophosphorous acid removed to polarize from -0.4V (vs SCE) to the direction of cathodic polarization.
中国語 から 英語: Adjuvant Effect of Total Polysaccharides from Poria cocos on H1N1 Influenza and HBsAg Antigens General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
翻訳 - 英語 Poria is the dry sclerotia of Poria cocos (Schw.) Wolf., which belongs to Aphylophorales, Polyporaceae, Physisporinus (WolfPoria, Poria). Poria has the functions of removing dampness and promoting dieresis, invigorating the spleen, and calming and nourishing the heart [1]. In recent years, it has been reported in several literatures that Poria cocos polysaccharide has a vaccine adjuvant effect on many antigens. The lymphocyte transformation rate and the activity of NK cells and macrophages of the chicken that was immunized with Poria cocos polysaccharide plus highly virulent strain of Marek's disease virus were significantly improved [2]. The levels of serum IgG, IgG1 and IgG2a antibodies of the immunized mice were increased after the 1-time immunization with Poria cocos polysaccharide (200 and 1000 g) plus inactivated influenza virus (A/PR/8) vaccine 0.015 or 1.5 g, in addition to improving their ability against the lethal dose of influenza virus [3]. Moreover, the secretion of slgA in the intestinal tract was promoted in the mice which were given by ig of Poria cocos polysaccharide 200 mg∙kg-1 and immunized with ig administration of ovalbumin (OVA) at 1 week thereafter [4]. When the mice were pre-injected with Angelica sinensis polysaccharide and Poria cocos polysaccharide 0.2~1.0 mg and then inoculated with pneumococcal polysaccharide-protein binding antigen, the production of IgG and IgM was enhanced by Angelica sinensis polysaccharide and Poria cocos polysaccharide, and moreover, after the mice in the combined polysaccharides group were attacked with 19F streptococcus pneumoniae, the bacteria in the blood could be removed quickly [5]. Although it has been reported in existing literatures that Poria cocos polysaccharide has an ideal adjuvant effect on OVA, live strains of Marek's disease virus and inactivated influenza virus vaccine and can improve the humoral immunity function of the immunized animals, the definite preparation methods and physicochemical properties of the Poria cocos polysaccharide used were not mentioned. The reason may be that the properties of the polysaccharides prepared by different preparation methods are obviously different and they are closely related to the adjuvant effect. In this study, the total polysaccharides from Poria cocos (P. cocos polysaccharide, PCP) was prepared by extraction with water at 50°C, ethanol precipitation and dialysis to study its physicochemical properties and adjuvant effect on the antigens in H1N1 influenza vaccine and hepatitis B vaccine for human use, thus laying an experimental foundation for further research and application of the Poria cocos polysaccharide adjuvant.
1 Materials and Methods
1.1 Animals, medicines, reagents and instruments
The experimental animals were female BALB/c mice with a body weight ranging from 18~20 g, which were purchased from the Laboratory Animal Center of the Academy of Military Medical Sciences. The animal certification number is 2012 (Military)-004. Decoction pills of herbal
Fund project: National Science and Technology Major Project (2012ZX09301-001-003); National Science and Technology Major Project (2013ZX09402103); National Science and Technology Support Plan Project (2011BAD26B02-3)
About the author: LI S. (1989- ), male, MSc, the author is mainly engaged in the study of chemical and biological activities of polysaccharide.
Poria cocos with the origin of Anhui province, were purchased from Beijing Jing Qian Cao Traditional Chinese Medicine Decoction Pill Limited Company. Glucose, galacturonic acid, trifluoroacetic acid, m-hydroxybiphenyl and glucan with A relative molecular mass of 6 103, 1 104, 4 104, 6.6 104 and 2.7 105, respectively, were purchased from Sigma, a USA company; sodium borohydride was purchased from ICN Biomedicals, a USA company; horseradish peroxidase labeled goat anti-mouse IgG antibody and N-tetramethylbenzidine were purchased from Beijing Zhongshan GoldenBridge Biotechnology Co. Ltd. The H1N1 influenza virus lysate was produced by Sinovac Biotech Ltd.; recombined hepatitis B surface antigen (HBSAg) was produced by Dalian Hissen Bio-Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.; and Al (OH)3 was produced by Thermo, a USA company. Fetal bovine serum was purchased from Gibco, a USA company; 1640 medium was purchased from Hyclone, a USA company; and MTT was purchased from Amresco, a USA company. UV-2000 ultraviolet spectrophotometer was made by Unico (Shanghai) Instrument Co., Ltd.; high performance liquid chromatograph (Delta 600, 2414 refractive index detector) was produced by Waters, a USA company; HP5890 II gas chromatograph was produced by Hewlett-Packard, a USA company; rotary evaporator was purchased from Shanghai Yarong Biochemical Instrument Factory; analytical balance was made by Ohaus, a USA company; LGJ25C freeze dryer was purchased from Beijing Sihuan Freeze Dryer Factory; DZF6020 vacuum drying oven was the product of Shanghai Yiheng Technical Co., Ltd.; Varioskau Flash version 2.4.3 microplate reader and F1-01620 microplate washer were the products of Thermo, a USA company.
1.2 Preparation of PCP and determination of its physicochemical properties
The Poria cocos powder with the amount of 1 kg was added into 15 L distilled water and soaked at 50~55°C for 5 h. The leaching liquor was filtered, and the filtrate was centrifuged at a rotation speed of 2533g for 20 min. Then, the residue was extracted for a 2nd time under the same conditions. The aqueous extracts from the 2 extractions were combined and concentrated under vacuum to 1 L, and then 3 L of 95% ethanol was added for ethanol precipitation for 48 h. Next, the centrifugation was performed to separate the precipitate, and 0.5 L water was added to the precipitate part to dissolve it by stirring, and the solution was centrifuged. The same operations were repeated 2 times on the precipitate. Finally, the supernatant was combined and loaded into a dialysis bag (with a molecular mass cutoff > 1000) to dialyze with running water for 48 h and then with distilled water for 24 h. The dialysate was concentrated under vacuum and then freeze-dried to obtain PCP. The polysaccharide content in the PCP was determined by the phenol-sulfuric acid method [6], the distribution of the polysaccharides with different relative molecular masses in the total polysaccharides was determined by gel filtration chromatography [7], and the monosaccharide composition of the total polysaccharides was analyzed by capillary zone electrophoresis [8].
1.3 H1N1 influenza vaccine immunization regime
25 BALB/c mice were randomly divided into 5 groups, including normal saline group (unimmunized control), H1N1 antigen alone group (3 g per mouse), H1N1 plus PCP (0.2 mg per mouse) group, H1N1 plus PCP (1.0 mg per mouse) group, and H1N1 plus Al (OH)3 (0.2 mg per mouse) group. The mice were immunized with 1 intramuscular injection, and the blood samples were collected from a tail vein at 14 d after the immunization to determine the titers of H1N1 antigen-specific antibody IgG.
1.4 Hepatitis B vaccine immunization regime
24 BALB/c mice were randomly divided into 4 groups, including normal saline group, HBsAg group 2 g (2 g per mouse), HBsAg +plus PCP 1.0 mg (1.0 mg per mouse) group and HBsAg plus + aluminum hydroxide Al (OH)3 (0.2 mg per mouse) group, with 6 mice in each group. The mice were immunized by 2 intramuscular injections, 28 d apart between the two immunization injections. The blood samples were collected from a tail vein at 14 d after the first immunization, and the serum was separated to determine the titers of hepatitis B specific antibody. Moreover, the blood samples were collected from a tail vein at 14, 21, 28 and 35 d after the second immunization to determine the titers of hepatitis B specific antibody IgG.
1.5 Detection of the titers of serum antibody IgG by ELISA assay
The mouse serum was diluted with a phosphate buffered solution (PBST, pH = 7.4) containing 0.1% Ttween -20 at a ratio of 1: 400. The H1N1 influenza antigen or hepatitis B antigen coating solution (0.05 mol∙L -1 phosphate buffer solution, pH=9.6) which was diluted to the final concentration of 3 mg·L-1 was used to coat a 96-well plate with a volume of 100 L in each well and let stand at 4°C overnight. Then, the 96-wellcoated plate was washed 3 times with PBST, followed by the addition of 200 L of 1% bovine serum albumin (prepared with PBST) into each well. The plate was blocked at 37°C for 1 h. Then it was washed 3 times with PBST, and the mouse serum was diluted with PBST to 6 serial dilution gradients (1: 400~1: 12 800 ), which were respectively added to the wells of the 96-well ELISA plate, with 100 L in each well, to incubate at 37°C for 1 h. After the serum was removed, the plate was washed 3 times. Horseradish peroxidase labeled goat anti-mouse IgG antibody in the volume of 100 L was added to each well to incubate for 1 h. Then, the plate was washed 5 times with PBST, and then 100 L of N-tetramethylbenzidine substrate chromogenic solution was added to each well to develop color in dark for 15 min. Finally, 50 L of 0.2 mol∙L-1 sulfuric acid solution was added to each well to end the chromogenic reaction. The absorbance at 450 nm (A 450 nm) was measured using a microplate reader.
1.6 Statistical analysis
All the experimental result data were expressed as "x" ̅ "± s" . The one-way ANOVA analysis was performed using SPSS13.0 statistical software, and the differences were considered statistically significant when the P < 0.05.
2 Results
2.1 Yield of PCP and its physicochemical properties
The Poria powder was soaked and extracted twice in the warm water at 50°C. PCP was obtained from the leaching liquor by concentration, ethanol precipitation, dialysis and lyophilization, with the yield of 0.25%. The polysaccharide content in PCP was 40.8%. The analysis result of gel filtration chromatography showed that there were two absorption peaks of polysaccharide, and the relative molecular mass based on the peak height was 2.7 104 and 64.7 104, respectively. Moreover, PCP was composed of fucose, mannose, glucose, and galactose, the molar ratio of which was 1.00: 1.36: 0.48: 2.67.
2.2 Adjuvant effect of PCP on H1N1 influenza antigen
As shown in Fig. 1, at 14 d after PCP (0.2 or 1.0 mg per mouse) plus H1N1 influenza antigen (3 g per mouse) was used to immunize the BALB/c mice by 1 intramuscular injection, the titers of serum H1N1 specific antibody IgG of the mice in the H1N1 antigen alone group [sic! “H1N1 antigen alone group” is possibly a source mistake for “H1N1 plus PCP group”] were significantly increased, when compared with those in normal saline group (P < 0.01); compared with the H1N1 antigen alone group, there was no obviously difference in the serum antibody titers of the mice between the H1N1 plus PCP (0.2 mg) group and the alum adjuvant group, while the serum IgG antibody titers of the mice in the H1N1 plus PCP (1.0 mg) group were significantly increased (P < 0.05).
日本語 から 英語: SALES SUPPORT SYSTEM General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: 自動車/車&トラック
翻訳 - 英語 [Claims]
[Claim 1]
A sales support system, which is characterized by comprising: a recommended vehicle specification calculation means for calculating vehicle specifications recommended for purchase (hereinafter referred to as recommended vehicle specifications) based on customer attribute data;
a quoted price calculation means for calculating quoted prices of the recommended vehicle specifications;
an output means for outputting the quoted prices together with the recommended vehicle specifications as a proposal document in a list format.
[Claim 2]
The sales support system according to claim 1, which is characterized in that:
the recommended vehicle specifications include standard specifications and optional specifications;
the quoted price calculation means calculating the quoted prices of the standard specifications by referring to a standard specification price table and the quoted prices of the optional specifications by referring to an optional specification price table.
[Claim 3]
The sales support system according to claim 1 or 2, which is characterized in that:
the list format outputted from the output means includes a quotation document;
the system further includes a selection means for selecting either the proposal document or the quotation document;
the output means outputs, in a proposal document format, data of the recommended vehicle specifications together with the quoted prices if the proposal document is selected, and outputs, in a quotation document format, data of the recommended vehicle specifications together with the quoted prices if the quotation document is selected.
[Claim 4]
The sales support system according to any one of claims 1~3, which is characterized by further comprising:
an assessment means which enters an assessment condition for a trade-in vehicle and calculates a trade-in price based on the entered assessment condition, and
an assessment judging means which judges whether there is an assessed trade-in price, wherein
the quoted price calculation means is configured to calculate a quoted price by reflecting the trade-in price when it is judged that there is a trade-in price.
[Claim 5]
The sales support system according to any one of claims 1~4, which is characterized by further comprising:
a specifying means which specifies a credit as a payment condition of a vehicle, and
a credit determination means which determines whether the credit is specified, and
a credit calculation means for calculating the payment condition based on the quoted price and the credit condition when the credit determination means determines that the credit is specified.
[Claim 6]
The sales support system according to any one of claims 1~5, which is characterized by further comprising:
a message database for storing messages, and
a message obtaining means for obtaining a message from the message database, and
a message determination means for determining whether an output of the message is specified, wherein
the output means outputs data of the proposal document in a format such that the obtained message is printed in a message field of the proposal document when the message determination means determines that the output of the message is specified.
[Claim 7]
The sales support system according to any one of claims 1~6, which is characterized in that:
various functions are executed by a server computer and a client computer, and
the server computer executes the various functions in accordance with an instruction transmitted to the server computer from the client computer through operations from a button provided on a screen of a monitor
/3
connected to the client computer, and
a printer connecting to the client computer prints the proposal document or the quotation document based on data transmitted from an output unit of the server computer.
[Claim 8]
The method for creating a vehicle purchase plan proposal document, which is characterized in that:
by a computer, vehicle specifications recommended for purchase (hereinafter referred to as recommended vehicle specifications) are determined based on customer attribute data, and
quoted prices of the recommended vehicle specifications are calculated based on a price table, and
a proposal document in a list format containing the quoted prices together with the recommended vehicle specifications is output to an external output means.
[Detailed Description of the Invention]
[0001]
[Technical Field to Which the Invention Belongs ]
The present invention relates to a sales support system that proposes a vehicle meeting customer attributes.
[0002]
[Background of the Invention]
In sales of vehicles, a salesperson meets with customers and holds business negotiations while presenting printed pamphlets and the like. However, a new salesperson cannot immediately propose a vehicle that matches a customer’s needs. In other words, the sales performance is greatly influenced by the experience and ability of the salesperson.
[0003]
An objective of the present invention is to provide a sales support system and a method for preparing a vehicle purchase plan proposal document, whereby a salesperson can immediately propose a vehicle that meets a customer’s needs.
[0004]
[Means for Solving the Problems]
(1) A sales support system according to the present invention, which is characterized by a recommended vehicle specification calculation means for calculating vehicle specifications recommended for purchase (hereinafter referred to as recommended vehicle specifications) based on customer attribute data, a quoted price calculation means for calculating quoted prices of the recommended vehicle specifications, and an output means for outputting the proposal document in a list format containing the quoted prices together with the recommended vehicle specifications.
(2) A method for creating a vehicle purchase plan proposal document, which is characterized in that a computer determines vehicle specifications recommended for (hereinafter referred to as recommended vehicle specifications) based on customer attribute data, calculates quoted prices of the recommended vehicle specifications based on a price table, and outputs a proposal document in a list format containing the quoted prices together with the recommended vehicle specifications to an external output means.
[0005]
[Effect of the Invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to propose an optimal vehicle for a customer only by inputting the customer attribute data. As a result, even inexperienced salesperson can propose a vehicle purchase plan that encourages a customer to purchase vehicles and can lead to business negotiations thereafter.
[0006]
[Embodiment of the Invention]
An embodiment of the present invention applicable to a sales support system for vehicle sales will be described below with reference to Fig. 1~ Fig. 9. This system is intended to standardize various business
processes associated with sales at the time of selling a new vehicle, and a process at the time of creating a proposal document will be described mainly here.
[0007]
Fig. 1 is a figure showing a system configuration of a sales support system in the present embodiment. 10 is a host computer installed in the management center, and 20~40 are servers installed at dealers in various locations. The host computer 10 and the servers 20~40 are connected to one another via a communication network IT1. The portable information terminals 21~43 such as mobile personal computers of salespersons are connected to the servers 20~40. Here, the portable information terminals
/4
21~43 are client computers.
[0008]
Various servers 11 and databases 15 are connected to the host computer 10. The database 15 has, as shown in Fig. 2, a customer database 15A for storing customer attribute data, a standard specification database 15B for storing standard vehicle specifications for purchase and their prices, and an optional database 15C for storing vehicle options (accessories) and their prices, an assessment database 15D for assessing the trade-in price, a list database 15E for storing list formats to be outputted, and a message database 15F for storing various messages templates.
[0009]
In this embodiment, a vehicle according to customer attributes is proposed as support for sales activities at the time of new vehicle sales. As shown in Fig. 3, the server 11 of the host computer 10 functionally includes a recommended vehicle specification calculation unit 11A, a quoted price calculation unit 11B, and an output unit 11C. The recommended vehicle specification calculation unit 11A calculates vehicle specifications recommended for purchase (hereinafter referred to as recommended vehicle specifications) based on the customer attribute data. The quoted price calculation unit 11B calculates the quoted prices of the recommended vehicle specifications. The output unit 11C outputs data as a proposal document or as a quotation document in a list format containing the quoted prices together with the recommended vehicle specifications.
[0010]
Fig. 4 shows an example of a proposal document. The proposal document includes a print field 51 for printing the customer name, a print field 52 for printing the proposed vehicle model, a print field 53 for printing the optional specifications, a print field 54 for printing the suggested price, and print fields 55a, 55b for printing the payment examples, and a print field 56 for printing messages.
[0011]
Fig. 5 shows an example of a quotation document. The quotation document includes a print field 61 for printing the customer name, a print field 62 for printing the proposed vehicle model, a print field 63 for printing the optional specifications, a print field 64 for printing the vehicle price, a print field 65 for printing such as sales expenses, taxes, insurance, etc., and print fields 66a, 66b for printing the credit payment examples, a print field 67 for printing expenses breakdown, and a print field 68 for printing messages. That is, the proposal document is formed by taking a part of the contents printed on the quotation document.
[0012]
The output unit 11C creates and outputs data in a list format for printing a proposal document or a quotation document. Therefore, on the screens of the mobile information terminals 21~43 of the salespersons, selection buttons (buttons 71, 72 in Fig. 6) are provided for selecting a proposal document or a quotation document. When the proposal document button 72 is operated to select the proposal document, the output unit 11C outputs the recommended vehicle specifications together with the quoted prices in the format of a proposal document. When the quotation document button 71 is operated to select the quotation document, the recommended vehicle specifications are output together with quoted prices in the format of a quotation document.
[0013]
The recommended vehicle specifications include standard specifications and optional specifications. Each vehicle has standard specification settings. For example, vehicle shape, engine, drive system, transmission unit, specifications for standard / cold climate regions,
and grade are set respectively, and a vehicle having such a combination is sold as standard. These are set together with the prices in the standard specification database 15B.
[0014]
The optional specifications include a manufacturer's option incorporated at time of factory assembly and a dealer's option incorporated at the dealer’s location, and each vehicle also has optional specification settings. For example, privacy glass, 15-inch aluminum wheel, sunroof, etc. are set respectively, and these can be combined. These are set together with the prices in the optional database 15C.
[0015]
When a salesperson instructs creation of a proposal document, the recommended vehicle specification calculation unit 11A reads the attribute data of the customer, for whom a proposal document is to be created, from the customer database 15A. The attribute data includes,
/5
created, from the customer database 15A. The attribute data includes, for example, gender, age, married/unmarried, family structure, annual income, interest, etc. The read attribute data is analyzed by a predetermined analysis algorithm and categorized. For example, there can be the following categories.
▲ 1 ▼ For a male, 25~30~25 [sic! “30~25” is used in the source Japanese. It may be a typo] years old, unmarried outdoor person, he will select "ABC" car which is a four-wheel drive RV vehicle.
▲ 2 ▼ For a male, 50~55 years old, married, with a wife but without children and with an interest of trips to the outskirts, he will select "XYZ" which is a sedan vehicle with an engine displacement of 2500 cc or more.
▲ 3 ▼ For a male, 35~40 years old, married, with a family of 7 people, he will select "Iroha" which is an 8-seat wagon.
[0016]
The above analysis algorithm can also be designed as follows. Vehicle sales data is sent from dealers across the country to a vehicle manufacturer management center. The vehicle sales data includes customer attribute data, purchased vehicle specifications, purchased prices, payment conditions, and the like. Based on these sales data, the management center analyzes the purchased vehicle specifications with respect to the customer attributes and designs a categorization algorithm like the above ▲ 1 ▼~▲ 3 ▼. If the vehicle sales data is sent to the control center as electronic data, all the above analysis and algorithm design can be performed in the host computer 10.
[0017]
The quotation document price calculation unit 11B quotes the vehicle price with the specifications determined from the customer attributes. The prices of the standard specifications are calculated by referring to the price table of the standard specification database 15B, and the prices of the optional specifications are calculated by referring to the price table of the optional specification price database 15C.
[0018]
The server 11 of the host computer 10 functionally includes an assessment calculation unit 11D that assesses the price of a trade-in vehicle, and an assessment determination unit 11E that determines whether there is an assessed trade-in price. The assessment calculation unit 11D calculates the trade-in price based on the input assessment conditions after assessment conditions such as vehicle model, year, model, accessories type, travel mileage, own [sic! This word in the source does not make sense. Later in the document, the author uses the word "repair" before the word "history", so perhaps "own" is a source typo for "repair".] history, and scratches of the trade-in vehicle are inputted. When the assessment determination unit 11E determines there is the assessed trade-in price, the quotation document price calculation unit 11B calculates the vehicle quotation price reflecting the trade-in price.
[0019]
The server 11 of the host computer 10 further functionally includes a credit determination unit 11F and a credit calculation unit 11G. The credit determination unit 11F determines whether a credit is specified as a vehicle payment condition. After the credit determination unit 11F determines a credit is specified, the credit calculation unit 11G calculates payment terms based on the quoted price and the credit terms.
[0020]
The server 11 of the host computer 10 functionally further includes a message obtaining unit 11H and a message determination unit 11I. The message obtaining unit 11H obtains a message printed on a proposal document or a quotation document from the message database 15F. The message determination unit 11I determines whether an output of the message is specified. When the message determination unit 11I determines that an output of the message is specified, the output unit 11C outputs the proposal document data or the quotation document data in the format of printing the obtained message in the message entry field of the proposal document.
[0021]
Next, a specific procedure for creating a proposal document by the sales support system mentioned above will be described. Fig. 6 is a figure showing a basic screen of proposal document creation. A salesperson selects the option of "proposal document creation" from the basic menu screen (not shown). When "proposal document creation" is selected, a customer list for planning a business negotiation is displayed on the monitor screen. This customer list includes customers who have made a purchase offered by the salesperson previously, or customers with whom a sales agreement has not been reach but contact had been made in the past. It can also include newly developed customers whom were just entered into the system.
[0022]
/6
The salesperson selects any one 1 person from the customer list displayed on the screen and instructs the host computer 10 to create a proposal document. The host computer 10 selects a vehicle and options that match the customer attributes by the function of the recommended vehicle calculation unit 11 and makes a quotation of the selected vehicle and the options by the function of the quoted price calculation unit 11B. The host computer 10 transmits the information of the selected vehicle and options, and the quoted price to the client server 20.
[0023]
The client server 20 creates a proposal document creation screen based on the received information and transmits the data to the portable information terminals 21~43 requesting creation of a proposal document. Thereby, the proposal document creation screen as shown in Fig. 6 is displayed on the portable information terminal 21. On this screen, a recommended vehicle model and manufacturer's options are displayed together with the prices calculated by the recommended vehicle calculation unit 11 of the host computer 10.
[0024]
The "quoted vehicle" button 73 of Fig. 6 is operated to change the vehicle proposed in the proposal document in Fig. 6. A screen for selecting a vehicle model as shown in Fig. 7 is displayed by the operation. Fig. 7 is a display example at time of selecting, e.g. the vehicle model "ABC" from the pull-down type of vehicle model option screen. The vehicle shape, engine, drive system, transmission unit, suitable for standard/cold climate regions, and grade are displayed respectively. The salesperson selects these items in a combination. When the salesperson operates the "quotation breakdown" button 74, the screen is switched to the screen display of Fig. 6, and the changed car type is displayed.
[0025]
When the "select" button 75 provided in manufacturer's option field of the screen in Fig. 7 is operated, the screen is switched to the manufacturer's option selection screen of Fig. 8. A list of manufacturer's options for the selected car type is displayed. For example, when the sunroof is selected and the OK button is operated, the screen is switched to the proposal document screen of Fig. 6, and the display contents of the manufacturer's option field are changed.
[0026]
When the radio button 76 of "trade-in vehicle specification" on the proposal document display screen of Fig. 6 is operated, as shown in Fig. 9, an assessment conditions input screen of the trade-in car is displayed. On the screen in Fig. 9, when a salesperson inputs the number of days until vehicle inspection, driving mileage, repair history, etc., the assessment calculation unit 11D of the server 11 of the host computer 10 calculates the trade-in price based on the input trade-in conditions. The host computer 10 sends the trade-in price to the quoted price calculation unit 11A and recalculates the quoted price.
[0027]
For example, when a credit terms are specified from the credit pull-down menu 77 of the proposal document display screen in Fig. 6, for example, the number of months for payment, the calculation unit 11G of the server 11 of the host computer 10 sends the input credit terms to the quoted price calculation unit 11A and calculates the payment amount under the credit terms.
[0028]
When the salesperson operates the "Message" button 78 in Fig. 6, the message obtaining unit 11H of the server 11 of the host computer 10 obtains messages to be printed on a proposal document or a quotation document from the message database 15F. For example, messages used by veteran salespersons are stored in advance in the database 15F of the management center, such as "This proposed wagon series vehicle 'Iroha' is large, so it is suitable for a large family of Mr. Taro Tokyo".
[0029]
In this case, since the effect is limited depending on the message used, it is preferable to adopt a system that even supports about which message to use. It is possible to design an algorithm by statistically processing what kind of messages are used at what point of time and under what circumstances by veteran salespersons. For example, it is possible to categorize conditions into sales of large vehicles to large families, sales of RV vehicles to outdoor youth, seasonal sales or the like, and store messages used under such conditions.
/7
[0030]
When it is determined by the message determination unit 11I that the output of the message is specified, the output unit 11C outputs the proposal document data or the quotation document data in a format in which the acquired message is printed in the message entry field of the proposal document to the client server 20.
[0031]
In this manner, the entry contents of the proposal document are calculated by the server 11 of the host computer 10, and the host computer 10 supplies proposal document print data to the client server 20 as shown in Fig. 6. The client server 20 displays the proposal breakdown screen as shown in Fig. 6 on the monitor of the information terminal requesting the proposal document. When the salesperson operates the "print" button 79 of Fig. 6, a proposal document as shown in Fig. 4 is printed by a printer.
[0032]
As described above, according to the sales support system of the present embodiments, the following effects can be obtained.
(1) It is possible to propose an optimal vehicle for the customer only by inputting the customer attribute data. As a result, even inexperienced salesperson can propose a vehicle purchase plan that encourages customers to purchase vehicles, and can lead to business negotiations thereafter.
(2) The proposal document is a document in which less information is printed than the quotation document, and it is preferable as a tool to trigger business negotiations. In other words, experienced salespersons have realized that customers usually have an aversion before the presentation of detailed prices and expenses such as a quotation document from the beginning. Therefore, if a proposal document which has a simple quotation as described above is created and a mechanism to trigger business negotiations is used, even an inexperienced salesperson may achieve sales results equivalent to an experienced salesperson.
[0033]
(3) Messages that lead to business task are stored in the database of the management center, and it is possible to print them in the message field of a proposal document only by selection. Therefore, even an inexperienced salesperson can easily utilize the clincher sentences used by experienced salespersons, which can also improve the probability of starting business negotiations.
[0034]
The sales support system of the embodiment described above is an example, and it is not limited to the above configuration as long as it is a system that can easily create a proposal document which is a feature of the present invention. That is, it has been described as a sales support system configured of client computers connected to a server computer and a network. Various modes can be adopted as long as it is a system that the computer determines the vehicle specifications recommended to be purchased (hereinafter referred to as recommended vehicle specifications) based on the customer attribute data, calculates the quoted price of the recommended vehicle specifications, and outputs the proposal document in a list format having the quoted prices together with the recommended vehicle specifications to an external output means. Therefore, it may be realized by a server & client system completed in the sales office without passing through an external network. In some cases, all the above functions may be realized by a portable information terminal.
翻訳 - 英語 [Claims]
[Claim 1]
An antibacterial polyester fiber, which is a polyester fiber containing 0.1 mass% or more of a silver-based inorganic antibacterial agent a mainly composed of SiO2 and 0.3 mass% or more of a silver-based inorganic antibacterial agent b mainly composed of phosphate, and which is characterized by satisfying the following requirements (1)~(3):
(1) the sum of the contents of the antimicrobial agent a and the antimicrobial agent b in the fiber is 10 mass% or less,
(2) the bacteriostatic activity value calculated from the viable cell count after 10 hours of culture is 2.2 or more.
(3) the bacteriostatic activity value after 100 washes is 2.2 or more.
[Claim 2]
The antibacterial polyester fiber according to claim 1, wherein the color difference (ΔE) before and after alkali treatment is 5.0 or less.
[Detailed Description of the Invention]
[0001]
[Technical Field]
The present invention relates to an antibacterial polyester fiber which contains 2 types of silver-based inorganic antibacterial agents and has both immediate action and long-lasting action in terms of antibacterial performance.
[0002]
[Prior Art]
Polyester represented by polyethylene terephthalate is widely used because of its excellent mechanical and chemical properties. In recent years, various antibacterial fibers have been put into use due to consumers’ diversified values and increasing awareness of hygiene.
[0003]
Many methods for imparting antibacterial and deodorizing properties to polyester fibers have been proposed so far. There are the method of fixing an antibacterial agent on the fabric by post processing, the method of using a silicon-based quaternary ammonium salt, and the method of using an aliphatic-based quaternary ammonium salt.
[0004]
However, since they have an antibacterial agent fixed to the fiber surface, they have the disadvantage of reduced antibacterial performance as the agent comes off due to washing, friction and abrasion. Also, as described in the Japanese unexamined patent publication No. S56-148965, a method of bonding silver ions to fibers having ion exchange groups on the surface, and a method of bonding transition metal ions to similar fibers are proposed. However, they require incorporating ion exchange groups into the fiber surface and are unsuitable for polymers with fewer functional groups, such as polyester fibers, although they are effective for acrylic fibers.
[0005]
To solve the above problems, many methods have been proposed so far to obtain antibacterial polyester fibers by incorporating a polyester powder with antibacterial properties. The Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. S59-133235, Japanese Examined Patent Publication No. S63-54103 and Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. S63-175117 disclosed methods for obtaining antibacterial fibers by mixing antibacterial zeolite (silver zeolite) with polyester before melt-dissolving and spinning.
[0006]
Synthetic fibers containing antibacterial zeolite and antibacterial phosphate have good antibacterial properties and excellent durability, but if alkali treatment for weight loss which is a means of improving the texture of polyester is implemented, oxidation of silver antibacterial component occurs, causing discoloration (coloring), and as a result, they have the disadvantage of being limited in the use where whiteness is required. In addition, since zeolite is hygroscopic, it is difficult to keep the water content low.
[0007]
Although it is possible to suppress discoloration at the time of alkali treatment for weight loss by reducing the amount of silver in the fiber, it leads to insufficient antibacterial properties, so there is a drawback of difficulty in operability for applications where alkali treatment for weight loss is implemented.
[0008]
Therefore, the inventors of the present invention have proposed, in the Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. H11-158730, a core-sheath type compound antibacterial polyester with improved post-alkali treatment discoloration performance by containing a silver compound as an antibacterial agent in the core. However, since this fiber needs to be manufactured using a composite type spinning machine, the manufacturing process is complicated, and to deliver its full effects, the core to sheath ratio and the alkali reduction ratio of the fiber are limited and difficult to control.
[0009]
Further, the inventors of the present invention proposed an antibacterial polyester fiber in Japanese Patent Application No. 2000-170037 for improving the post-alkali treatment discoloration by controlling the amount of sodium in the silver-based antibacterial agent whose main component is a metal salt of phosphoric acid. However, when the immediate antibacterial effect is sought, it is necessary to increase the amount of the antibacterial agent added, which is not cost effective.
[0010]
With the diversified needs of consumers, the demand for antibacterial fibers having immediate antibacterial effect, long-lasting antibacterial action and good color tone has been intensified. Yet, nothing has been proposed that can simultaneously satisfy these 3 conditions (immediate action, lasting action, and good color tone).
[0011]
[Problems to be Solved by the invention]
It is an objective of the present invention to solve the problems as described above, and to provide an antibacterial polyester fiber with good operability and a low cost, having both immediate and long-lasting antibacterial actions, excellent color tone, and less discoloration (coloring) even after alkali treatment for weight loss.
[0012]
[Means for Solving the Problems]
As a result of the intensive study to solve the above problems, the inventors achieved the present invention. Specifically, the present invention relates to an antibacterial polyester fiber which is a polyester fiber containing 0.1 mass% or more of a silver-based inorganic antibacterial agent a mainly composed of SiO2 and 0.3 mass% or more of a silver-based inorganic antibacterial agent b mainly composed of phosphate, and which is characterized by satisfying the following requirements (1)~(3).
(1) The sum of the contents of the antimicrobial agent a and the antimicrobial agent b in the fiber is 10 mass% or less.
(2) The bacteriostatic activity value calculated from the viable cell count after 10 hours of culture is 2.2 or more.
(3) The bacteriostatic activity value after 100 washes is 2.2 or more.
/3
[0013]
[Embodiments of the Invention]
The present invention will be described in detail below. The antimicrobial polyester fiber of the present invention contains 2 types of silver-based antibacterial agents in the fiber, and these antibacterial agents may be uniformly distributed throughout the fiber. Also, it may be contained in a part of the cross section of the fiber, for example, in one component of the composite yarn of a core-sheath type, a side-by-side type or other type. Of these structures, the structure in which a part of the antibacterial agent component is exposed on the fiber surface is preferred. In addition, the fiber may have a round cross section or an irregular cross section or other shapes.
[0014]
The polyesters constituting the fiber of the present invention include polyalkylene terephthalate and polyalkylene naphthalate but specifically, polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polytrimethylene terephthalate (PTT) and polybutylene terephthalate (PBT) are preferred.
[0015]
Polyalkylene terephthalate and polyalkylene naphthalate may contain a copolymerization component to the extent that the typical functions of the polyester are not impaired, and the copolymerization component may be an aromatic dicarboxylic acid component, e.g. isophthalic acid, phthalic anhydride, naphthalene dicarponic acid, etc., or an aliphatic dicarboxylic acid components e.g. adipic acid, sebacic acid, etc., or a glycol component e.g. diethylene glycol, propylene glycol, 1,4-cyclohexyl dimethanol, alkylene oxide adduct of bisphenol A, etc., or a hydroxy carboxylic acid component e.g. 4-hydroxy benzoic acid, ε-caprolactone, etc.
[0016]
As a result of the investigation carried out by the inventors into various inorganic antibacterial agents, it is found that antibacterial agents can be roughly divided into those that mainly have early antibacterial power (immediate action) and those that have relatively weak antimicrobial activity initially but will have sufficient effects after various treatments (long lasting action).
[0017]
Antibacterial agents whose main component is SiO2 have relatively high initial antimicrobial activity, and even if added to fibers, they do not damage the operability during fiber production, and it is possible to obtain a fiber having good elasticity and tensile strength. On the other hand, antibacterial agents whose main component is a metal salt of phosphoric acid have sustained antibacterial action rather than the initial antibacterial power, and as in the former, even if added to fibers, they do not impair the operability during fiber production, and it is possible to obtain a fiber having good elasticity and tensile strength.
[0018]
Therefore, it has been found that, by combining the two agents, it is possible to obtain an antimicrobial fiber having both immediate power and long-lasting action without impairing the operability, thereby achieving the objective of the present invention.
[0019]
The antibacterial agent a in the present invention is a silver-based inorganic antibacterial agent, and although there are no particular limitations on it as long as its main component is SiO2, it is preferred that an agent, which retains the silver ions in the water-soluble silicate glass, is used. Since the silicate glass can stably retain the silver ions inside it and elute the silver ions in the presence of a small amount of water, it effectively delivers an immediate action.
[0020]
The antibacterial agent b is a silver-based inorganic antibacterial agent, the main component of which is a metal salt of phosphoric acid, and preferably it has either silver zirconium phosphate or calcium phosphate as its main component. Since metal phosphates appropriately control the elution of silver even in the presence of a large amount of water, they are effective in delivering a sustained action. In addition, a conventional antibacterial agent whose main component is zeolite silver is unfavorable, because zeolite is hygroscopic, it is necessary to strictly manage the water (when water is present, hydrolysis of the polyester occurs in the spun yarn, and it is difficult to obtain a fiber with a good color tone).
[0021]
The contents of the antibacterial agents present in the antibacterial fiber of the present invention are 0.1 mass% or more of the antibacterial agent a contains with respect to the total fiber and 0.3 mass% or more of the antibacterial agent b with respect to the total fiber, and the total content of the antibacterial agents a and b is 10 mass% or less.
[0022]
If the content of the antibacterial agent a is less than 0.1 mass%, the amount of silver contributing to the initial antibacterial power is insufficient such that the desired immediate antibacterial action cannot be obtained. In addition, if the content of the antibacterial agent b is less than 0.3 mass%, the amount of silver contributing to the sustained action is insufficient, such that the desired long-lasting antibacterial action cannot be obtained.
[0023]
Furthermore, if the total content of the two antibacterial agents is more than 10 mass% with respect to the total fiber, then the spinning operability will decrease. Therefore, the content is more preferably 5 mass% or less from the viewpoint of operability.
[0024]
Thus, the antibacterial fiber of the present invention contains the antibacterial agent a, so that the bacteriostatic activity value calculated from the viable bacteria number after 10 hours of culture is 2.2 or more. This index is used for evaluating the immediate antibacterial action, and if the bacteriostatic activity value is less than this value, the objective of immediate antibacterial action cannot be achieved.
[0025]
On the other hand, the antibacterial fiber of the present invention contains the antibacterial agent b, and the bacteriostatic activity value after 100 washes (after washing 100 times by the method according to a uniform test method using a JAFET standard detergent) is 2.2 or more. This index is used for evaluating the long duration of the antibacterial action, and if the bacteriostatic activity value is less than this value, the objective of long-lasing antibacterial action will not be achieved.
[0026]
The bacteriostatic activity value (evaluation of the antibacterial action) referred to in the present invention is as follows. It is conducted according to the Uniform Test Method for Testing Textile Products Sanitation and Care Association (JAFET). Pre-sterilize the specimen (0.4 g test piece of a square with the side of about 18 mm) that has been dried in a sterilized clean bench, and inoculate it with 0.2 ml of the test bacteria suspension adjusted to 1 ± 0.3 105 counts/ml of viable bacteria with an ice-cooled nutrient broth of a 1/20 concentration by uniformly soaking the entire specimen in it, and then tighten the sterilized cap. The specimen is cultured at 37 ± 1C for a predetermined time. The viable
/4
bacteria count is determined after culture. The bacteriostatic activity value, which is an index of antibacterial activity, is calculated by the following method, using Stephylococcus aureus (Stephylococcus aureus ATCC 6538P) as the test bacterium.
Bacteriostatic activity: Log B - Log C
However, the condition satisfying the test is (Log B - Log A) > 1.5.
A: Average number of bacteria collected immediately after inoculation on a standard cloth
B: Average number of bacteria collected after 18 hours of culture on a standard cloth
C: Average number of bacteria collected after 10 hours or 18 hours of culture on a processed cloth.
The bacteriostatic activity value calculated from the viable bacteria count after 10 hours of culture is obtained by culturing for 10 hours on a C processed cloth, and the bacteriostatic activity value after 100 washes is obtained by culturing for 18 hours on a C processed cloth after washing 100 times with the method according to the uniform test method using a JAFET standard detergent. The standard cloth was as specified in the processing effect evaluation test manual of antibacterial deodorant products.
[0027]
Furthermore, the antibacterial fiber of the present invention can prevent discoloration before and after the alkali treatment by containing the above-mentioned antibacterial agents and specifically, the color difference before and after alkali treatment (ΔE) is preferably 5.0 or less, more preferably 2.0 or less.
[0028]
The term "alkali treatment" as used herein means that after measuring the color tone using the knitted tubular antibacterial polyester fiber of the present invention, it is dried at 70C for 30 minutes and treated in a 10% sodium hydroxide solution adjusted to 70C for 100 minutes. If it is PET, the weight loss rate in the treatment is 10~30%.
[0029]
The color difference (ΔE) before and after the alkali treatment is the color tone (L, a, and b values) of the knitted tubular fabric before and after the alkali treatment measured with the color difference meter CR-100 manufactured by Minolta Co., Ltd and calculated by the following formula.
ΔE = [(ΔL*) 2 + (Δa*) 2 + (Δb*) 2] 1/2
ΔL*: difference in L value before and after the alkali treatment
Δa*: difference in a value before and after the alkali treatment
Δb*: difference in b value before and after the alkali treatment
[0030]
When the color difference (ΔE) exceeds 5.0, and a common polyester which is weaved with another material into a mixed fabric is subjected to alkali treatment for weight loss and dyeing, only the antibacterial fiber part becomes poor in coloring an is visibly dull in color. In addition, when discoloration (coloring) during weight loss alkali treatment is severe, the components that are liberated from the antibacterial fiber during weight loss treatment may also discolor (color) the other material, leading to unfavorable color spots and color defects in the subsequent dyeing process.
[0031]
Furthermore, in the antibacterial polyester fiber of the present invention, for example, an ultraviolet absorber, an antistatic agent, pigment, titanium oxide, silicon dioxide and the like may be added in the process of fiber manufacture, or an anti-mite agent, a deodorant and the like may be added to the fiber, provided that the development of the antibacterial property is not inhibited.
[0032]
Further, the antibacterial polyester fiber of the present invention can be manufactured by a conventional method using a melt spinning apparatus, and the contained antibacterial agents a and b may be added during polymerization. Alternatively, they may be added at the time of polymer melting in the yarn manufacture process and then uniformly kneaded and dispersed. Furthermore, they may be contained in the fiber by kneading the master polymer containing high concentrations of the antibacterial agents and the base polymer, or they may be contained in the fiber simply by using the master polymer containing low concentrations of the antibacterial agents.
[0033]
[Function]
The antibacterial polyester fiber of the present invention is free from discoloration (coloring) after the alkali treatment, has a good color tone, and has good antibacterial properties with both immediate action and long-lasting action. Although the mechanism of expression of the antibacterial performance is not clear, the antibacterial agent whose main component is SiO2 is believed to be the antibacterial agent with immediate action because the elution of silver ions, which effectively act to deliver the antibacterial effects, is relatively fast. In addition, since the antibacterial agent whose main component is a metal salt of phosphoric acid has a relatively slow elution of silver ions, it is believed to be a long-lasting antibacterial agent although it has no immediate action. Furthermore, the reason why there is little discoloration after the alkali treatment is that the silver surface is constantly updated with new silver ions by the SiO2-based antibacterial agent that elutes silver ions quickly, and there is no discolored material on the fiber surface because the silver oxide discolored by alkali rapidly comes off from the fiber surface.
[0034]
[Embodiments]
Next, the present invention will be described in detail by embodiments. In addition, the measurement and evaluation of the characteristics value in the embodiments are described below.
(a) Intrinsic viscosity [η]:
It is measured at a temperature of 20C by using a mixture of phenol and ethane tetrachloride in equal weights as the solvent.
(b) Antibacterial activity (bacteriostatic activity value)
It is measured by the method described in the above.
(c) Alkali weight loss rate
The sample before the alkali treatment is dried at 70C for 30 minutes to give a mass [B], and the sample after the alkali treatment is washed with distilled water and dried at 70C for 30 minutes to give a mass of [A], and the weight loss rate by alkali treatment is calculated by the following formula.
Alkali weight loss rate (%) = {(B-A) / B} 100
(d) Color difference (ΔE) before and after the alkali treatment
It is measured by the method mentioned in the above.
(e) Operability
The number of broken yarns per day during yarn production of 24 spindles was used to evaluate operability, and less than 3 was rated as operability O, 3~6 as operability Δ, and more than 6 as operability .
[0035]
Embodiment 1
Melt spinning was carried out on a commonly used single-component melt spinning machine by using PET chips having intrinsic viscosity of 0.69, a glass transition temperature of 77C, a crystallization temperature of 125C, and a melting point of 259C. At the time of melting
/5
the polymer, 0.5 mass%, with respect to the fiber, of an inorganic antibacterial agent (manufactured by Ishizuka Glass Co., Ltd.: "Ionpure") mainly composed of water-soluble silicate glass, and 0.5 mass%, with respect to the fiber, of a silver based antibacterial agent b (made by Sangi Co., Ltd.: “Apcider AK”) mainly composed of calcium phosphate were added, and the partially orientated yarn (POY) of 84 dtex/24 filaments is spun at a spinning speed of 3500 m/min. The partially orientated yarn is drawn at a drawing speed of 650 m/min. and a draw ratio of 1.5 to obtain a drawn yarn of 56 dtex/24 filaments. A fiber having good elasticity and tensile strength could be obtained with good operability. Next, the fiber was made into a 1 g knitted tubular fabric, and after the color tone (b value) was measured, it was dried at 770C for 30 minutes and then received the alkali treatment for 100 minutes in a 10% sodium hydroxide solution adjusted to 70C. Thereafter, alkali was rinsed off with distilled water and it was dried at 70C for 30 minutes. The weight loss rate by the alkali treatment was 21.4%.
[0036]
Embodiments 2~6, Comparative examples 1~5
The same procedures as in Embodiment 1 were carried out except that the contents of the antibacterial agents a and b were changed as shown in Tables 1 and 2.
[0037]
Embodiment 7
The same procedures as in Embodiment 1 were carried out except that an antibacterial agent whose main component was zirconium silver phosphate was used as the antibacterial agent b and the contents of the antibacterial agents a and b were changed as shown in Table 1.
[0038]
Comparative example 6
The same procedures as in Example 1 were carried out except that an antibacterial agent whose main component was zeolite silver was used as the antibacterial agent b and the contents of the antibacterial agents a and b were changed as shown in Table 2.
[0039]
Tables 1 and 2 show evaluation results of the antibacterial properties of color tone (b value), color difference (ΔE) and operability of the fibers obtained in embodiments 1~7 and comparative examples 1~6.
日本語 から 英語: STUDIES ON FLUORESCENCE OF COUMARIN DERIVATIVES (IV) FLUORESCENCE ANALYSIS OF COUMARIN DERIVATIVES General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
翻訳 - 英語 Experiment
Measurement of total fluorescence quantity of coumarins
The instruments used, the fluorescence reference substance (quinine sulfate), the operation procedure, etc., are the same as those used in the 3rd report for fluorocoumarins, and the samples are the same as those used in the 2nd report, so they are not described herein.
Determination of quantified concentration range
Instruments used
Hitachi fluorescent photometer FPL-2; fluorescence receiver: RCA 1928; fluorescence excitation filter: Toshiba UV-D1b; excitation light source: Toshiba SHL-100UV2l; fluorescence selective filter: Hitachi 43, 47, 53; sample cells: Hitachi special test tubes
There are 4 types of fluorescence excitation filters, 365 (UV-D1b) and 405, 436, 546, but an examination of the relationship between the fluorescence emission of the coumarin derivatives and the filters found that 365 was the most suitable one. Further, 365 is a glass filter, and others are interference filters.
There are 4 types of fluorescence selective filters 43, 47, 53 and 61, but 61 is made of glass and transmits light having a wavelength longer than 610 m, and the others are interference filters with a maximum transmittance of 430, 470 and 530 m, respectively, and are combined with a light blocking glass filter. From the measurement results of the fluorescence spectra reported in the 2nd and 3rd reports, it was found that the most suitable ones for the determination of the coumarin derivatives were the 3 types, 43, 47 and 53.
Since the sample cell was a test tube, it had more errors compared to a square cell, and it had an error of about 1~2%. Therefore, it was necessary to measure several times for each measurement value and calculate their average value.
Measurement procedure
The coumarin derivatives generally have increased fluorescence emission when in alkaline solutions.
For each of the coumarin derivatives, the fluorescence intensity at each concentration was measured, and a range where a linear relationship was established between the concentration and the fluorescence intensity was found. Take 7-ethoxycoumarin as an example. 5 mg of sample was weighed with a Mettler direct-reading balance and dissolved in EtOH to 500 cc (100 γ/cc), from which, a portion was taken and diluted by 10 times (10 γ/cc) to prepare solutions with a highest concentration of 7.5, 5.0, 2.5, 1.0, and 0.5 γ/cc, respectively (the pH of each constant was adjusted to a certain level with 0.5 N EtOH ∙ KOH solution) for measuring the relative fluorescence intensity and plotting the graphs. However, in this example, the fluorescence quenching occurred because of the high concentrations, and the relative fluorescence intensity did not increase in proportion to the concentration, and a linear relationship was not established, so the solutions were further diluted 10 times and measurement was taken, and as a result, it was found that a linear relationship was established in the range of 1.0~0.05 γ/cc, so this range was determined to be a concentration range suitable for fluorescence quantification.
In this study, Dr. Tatsuo Kari, Director of the Institute, Dr. Tadao Shimomura, and Dr. Nishimoto Kazuko, who provided guidance and advice from beginning to end of the study, thanked Dr. Nishimoto and Dr. Nishimoto, and gave samples to them. Thank you very much to Dr. Takao, Michio Orita of Nisso Chemical Co., Ltd., Toyo Chemical Co., Ltd.,
My deeply felt thanks go to President Dr. Karigome Tatsuo had been providing detailed directions from the beginning to the end of this study, as well as Dr. Takeshi Shimomura and Engineer Kazuko Nishimoto. Thanks also go to the Faculty of Pharmaceutical Sciences, Kyoto University, and Dr. Takao Matsuno from Kyoto Pharmaceutical University for sharing the samples with me, to Mr. Michio Orita from NISSO Fine Co., Ltd., to Toyo Chemical Industrial Co., Ltd. and to Hitachi, Ltd. for lending me the measuring instruments.
中国語 から 英語: RESEARCH OF STACK INJECTION MOLDS General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 1.2.3 Rectangle gating stack molds with hot runners
In 1995, Grabovskij V. V. [32] from Russia developed a rectangle gating stack mold with a hot runner. Yan, Y. L. and Huang, X. Y. [33] from China also designed such a mold (Fig. 9). The mold moves the position of the inlet gate to the intermediate part, forming a right angle between the inlet angle and the mold opening direction, but a right-angle injection machine is needed. This kind of mold avoids the extension of the hot runner, reduces the melt flow distance from the nozzle of the injection machine to the spreader plate, and thus facilitates the structural design.
1.3 Rotary stack molds
In recent years, Keusgen H. [34] from Germany designed a 16+16-cavity rotary stack mold (Fig. 10) made of 2 kinds of materials. This kind of mold is to change the typical forming mode of a multi-component mold by injecting a material into the mold cavity from a layer of the mold, cooling the material and then rotating to another layer before injecting the 2nd material into the mold. The rotary stack mold comprises a central mold plate rotating on a vertical axis, a moving mold plate and a fixed mold plate. The central mold plate can be designed with 2 or 4 faces, so that the plate can rotate 180 or 90 when the mold is opened. In a cycle, the intermediate part can rotate the mold plate along the horizontal axis to make the mold cavity surface turn.
The rotary stack mold jointly developed by the European Ferromatik Milacron and the German mold manufacturer Foboha contains 1 central mold plate with 4 faces, which rotates 90 every cycle. The rotary stack mold developed by the Denmark Gram Technology is designed with up to 4 small central stack structures in a side by side design, wherein each central stack structure has 4 faces and rotates 90 every cycle [31].
With higher forming requirements for injection molding products in China, many two-color products, which were originally processed two times, have gradually begun to be molded by a rotary stack mold to improve product quality and productivity.
翻訳 - 英語 Claims
1. A magnetically controlled treadmill comprising a body frame, rotatable rollers being respectively installed at two ends of the body frame, a handrail mounted at the front end of the body frame, a treadmill belt wound around the rollers at the two ends of the body frame, and a damping device comprising an adjusting knob, a steel wire rope, a base, a swing arm, a rotation shaft, a fly wheel, a plurality of magnets and a spring, the adjusting knob being installed on the handrail, one end of the steel wire rope being fixed on the adjusting knob, the other end of the steel wire rope being connected with the swing arm after passing a guide hole in the base, the base being fixed on the body frame, an inner end of the swing arm being rotatably fitted onto the rotation shaft, two flat plates extending in parallel from an outer end of the swing arm, the magnets being fixedly installed on opposite surfaces of the two flat plates, the two flat plates with the magnets installed on them respectively extending to the upper surface and the lower surface of an outer ring of the fly wheel, the fly wheel being fixedly fitted onto one end of the roller, a lower end of the rotation shaft being fixed on the base, one end of the spring being hung on the base, and the other end of the spring being hung on the swing arm.
2. The magnetically control treadmill as claimed in claim 1, wherein said spring is a tension spring.
3. The magnetically controlled treadmill as claimed in claim 1, wherein the adjusting knob comprises an adjusting seat, a dial plate and a hinged shaft, the adjusting seat is fixedly installed on the handrail, a lower part of the dial plate is loosely inserted into the adjusting seat and the lower part of the dial plate is fitted onto the hinged shaft, and the hinged shaft transversely passes through the adjusting seat.
Brief description of the drawings
Fig. 1 is an axonometric view of the magnetically controlled treadmill in the embodiment of the present invention.
Fig. 2 is an axonometric view of the damping device in the embodiment of the present invention.
Fig. 3 is an axonometric view of the adjusting knob in the embodiment of the present invention.
Fig. 4 is an axonometric view of the adjusting knob in the high-speed position in the embodiment of the present invention.
Fig. 5 is an axonometric view of the adjusting knob in the low-speed position in the embodiment of the present invention.
日本語 から 英語: STUDIES ON THIAMINE 8-(METHYL 6-ACETYL-DIHYDROTHIOCTATE) DISULFIDE General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
翻訳 - 英語 (1) Measurement of GSSG-reductase activity
The GSSG-reductase activity was measured using a reaction system based on the report of Buzard et al. 2), and to be specific, as the basic system, 1.0 ml of the reaction system contained 100 mol of tris(hydroxymethyl) aminoethane HCL buffer (pH 7.4), 7.5 mol of ethylenediamine tetracetate, an equivalent of 5.4~5.8 mg Hb of erythrocyte hemolysate, 1.0 mol of NADPH *5) (Sigma Co., Type 1), and 1.5 mol of GSSG (Sigma Co., Grade III), and the system of pH 7.4 was allowed to react at 30°C for 30 minutes. If NADP *6) (Sigma Co., Grade II) and G6P *7) (Sigma Co., 2K salt) were added instead of NADPH, they were added in the amount of 0.5 and 1.0 mol respectively, and after completion of the reaction, the generated GSH was quantified by the Beutler method 3).
(2) Reduction of TATD by erythrocyte hemolysate
As the basic system, 1.0 ml of the reaction system contained 80 mol of phosphate buffer (pH 7.4), 1.0 mol of TATD, and an equivalent of 7~20 mg Hb of erythrocyte hemolysate. To examine the effects of adding NADPH, NADP, G6P, and GSH, the results of their various adding amounts were recorded. The reaction was carried out at 37.5°C for 60 minutes, and after completion of the reaction, the supernatant was deproteinized with the final 2% metaphosphoric acid under cooling and adjusted to pH 4.5, and free B1 was separated and quantified according to Matsui's method 4).
(3) Generation of 14CO2 from glucose-14C by erythrocytes
To 2.0 ml of a suspension of cleaned rabbit blood cells prepared according to the previous report 1) in KRP *8) with the same density as the raw blood, were added 0.8 ml of KRP, 0.2 ml of 300 mM glucose-114C or-214C (first chemical) (equivalent to 0.1 c, dissolved in 0.9% NaCl), and 0.8 ml of TATD solution (dissolved in 0.9% NaCl) so the reaction system had a total volume of 2.8 and pH 7.4. If Mb *9) was added, it would be dissolved in 0.9% NaCl and 0.8 ml of its solution would be added instead of TATD, and its final concentration was 0.002%. The reaction was carried out under shaking and at 37.5°C for 2 hours in a flask sealed by a rubber stopper, which was devised by Cuppy et al. 5). At the end of the reaction, 0.3 ml of 1.0 M Hyamin 10-X solution (Packard Co.) was injected with a syringe into a CO2 collecting vial, and the final 0.25 M sulfuric acid was added to the reaction system, and the vial was shaken for another 2 hours and was then taken out, to which 15 ml of toluene containing 0.5% 2,5-diphenyloxazole and 0.03% 1,4-bis-2-(4-methyl-5-phenyloxazoly)-benzene (both from Packard Co.) was fed, and Packard 314 EX-2 Tri-Carb Liquid Scintillation Spectrometer was used to measure the radioactivity of 14C.
Experimental results
(1) GSSG-reductase activity of blood cell hemolysate
The dependence of GSSG-reductase of blood cell hemolysate on substrate GSSG and NADPH was as shown in Fig. 1 – A, B, and Km of each of them was calculated to be 5.1 × 10-4 M and 5.0 × 10-4 M. Activity was not observed at all in the hemolysate which had been heat treated at 100°C for 3 minutes. NADPH could be replaced by NADP + G6P (existence of both was required) (Fig. 1 - C, D) and the presence of G6P-dehydrogenase activity and its conjugation with GSSG-reductase system were confirmed. It is known that in blood cells, the presence of G6P-dehydrogenase activity is more abundant 6).
中国語 から 英語: RESEARCH AND APPLICATION OF PRESENT FLAVOR PEPTIDES General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: 食品&乳製品
翻訳 - 英語 1.2 Comprehensive effects
Each food has its characteristic taste, and the flavor and taste of a food is a comprehensive balanced manifestation of various taste compounds. Due to the amino groups and carboxyl groups in their structures, peptides have a buffer capacity and impart a smooth and subtle flavor to foods. Peptides not only directly contribute to basic tastes, but also interact with other flavoring substances (such as monosodium glutamate, sodium inosinate, sodium guanylate, sodium succinate, sodium acetate, acidulant) to significantly improve or change the original taste. Therefore, the flavoring effects of various peptides are the comprehensive effects related to their acting conditions. For example, dipeptides, such as Glu-Leu, Pro-Glue or Val-Ghu, enhance food flavors through their buffer action. The short peptides released during the fermentation of bread, cocoa, and peanut form various heterocyclic aromatic compounds during baking and these aromatic compounds are generated from the Maillard reaction between polypeptides and sugars and the degradation of the latter [2]. Several alkaline dipeptides exhibit a strong salty taste and impart an umami taste through working synergistically with other flavor compounds, and their tastes are considerably related to the degree of ionization of amino acids and the presence of counterions. Wang et al. [3] compared the sensory properties of BMP at different pH values and found that when the pH was 6.5, 9.5, and 3.5, it elicited an umami taste, a salty and sweet taste, and a sour taste, respectively.
2. Types and flavor-imparting mechanism of flavor peptides
2.1 Sweetening peptides
Major breakthroughs have been made in the study of sweetening peptides and the study in this area is well developed. Dipeptide sweeteners, such as aspartame, alitame (consisting of L-aspartoyl, D-alanine and C-terminal amide), have been industrialized and widely used in food and pharmaceutical industries due to their high sweetness intensity and low calorie. In developed countries, researchers have been developing new oligopeptide sweeteners, such as lysine peptides (N-Ac-Phe-Lys, N-Ac-Gly-Lys), Monellin, Thaumatin, Pentadin, Curculin, Mabinlin, from natural resources.
2.2 Bittering peptides
In 1970, from the tryptic hydrolysate of casein, Matoba et al. [4] isolated and purified a bittering peptide with the following structure: Cy-Pro-Phe-Pro-Val-Ile; various bittering peptides, such as Gly-Leu, Phe-Leu, Leu-Lys, Arg-Leu, and Arg-Leu-Leu, have been isolated and purified from the soy protein hydrolysate; Majarro-Grerra et al. isolated bittering peptides, such as Lys-Pro, Phe-Pro, Val-Pro and Leu-Pro, from cheese; later, Ney (1979) and Adler-Nissen (1986) summarized the formation mechanism of bittering peptides and believed that the bitter taste of bittering peptides was caused by their hydrophobic amino acids and the bitterness intensity was related to the amino acid sequences, for example, a strong bitter taste was perceived when hydrophobic groups, such as leucine and phenylalanine, were located at C-terminus [5].
The hydrolysates of some animal or plant raw materials, such as cheese, soy protein, elicit a bitter taste of varying intensities, which restricts the application of the hydrolysates. The cause of the bitterness has attracted widespread attention around the world. However, the formation mechanism of bittering peptides is not yet well-established, and researchers around the world have been discovering the formation mechanism and the method to remove or minimize the bittering peptides generated in the hydrolysates to expand the application scope of these hydrolysates.
2.3 Sour peptides
In general, sour peptides are often closely related to sourness and umami. In 1969, Kirimura et al. proposed that γ-glutamyl peptides, such as Glu-γ-Gly, Glu-γ-Ala, Glu-γ-Glu, elicited a sharp and sour taste, and later, they found that acidic peptides, such as Gly-Asp, Ala-Glu, Glu-Leu, exhibited a characteristic umami taste [6]. Therefore, sour peptides are usually regarded as a part of umami peptides.
2.4 Salty peptides
In 1991, Seki et al. [7] found in a study of the physico-chemical properties of a salty dipeptide Orn-β-Ala that the saltiness of dipeptides is related to the degree of dissociation of amino groups and the presence of counterions. Salts of several alkaline peptides, such as Orn-Tau∙Hcl, Lys-Tau∙Hcl, Orn-Gly∙Hcl, Lys-Gly-Hcl [sic! In all these instances of “Hcl”, “Hcl” is possibly a typo for “HCl”] elicit both saltiness and umami. The discovery of salty peptides has potential values of use in the development of low-sodium foods for special population groups, e.g., patients with diabetes or hypertension.
2.5 Beefy meaty peptide
Beefy meaty peptide (BMP) is an octopeptide initially isolated by Yamasaki [8] from the papain-digested beef juice, and it was identified to have a primary structure of Lys-Gly-Asp-Glu-Ser-Leu-Leu-Ala, and a molecular weight of 847 Da. Studies have shown that this octopeptide enhances the beef flavor, so it is also called beefy flavor peptide, flavor-enhancing peptide or fortifying peptide. Researchers overseas reported several properties of BMP obtained by the chemical synthesis method, for example, strong umami taste and being able to work synergistically with table salt and MSG. It does not damage other tastes (sourness, sweetness, bitterness and saltiness), but enhances the characteristic flavors of the respective tastes. Therefore, it is highly effective in enhancing the flavors of various vegetables, meats, poultry products, dairy products, aquatic products and alcoholic drinks. BMP enhances the beef flavor and exhibits outstanding thermal stability with only 10% denatured after 20-min sterilization at 121°C, meeting the heat treatment requirements in food processing and production [9].
Due to its outstanding flavor and stability, BMP has the potential of replacing MSG as a new-generation flavor enhancer. In 1988, Tamura et al. [10] found that using a mixture of these three ingredients or replacing
/3
Lys-Gly with a salty peptide Orn-β-Ala or replacing a sour tripeptide Asp-Glu-Glu with Glu-Glu produced a flavor equivalent to that of the original octopeptide [10]. In 1988, Nishimura et al. [11] reviewed the taste characteristics of umami oligopeptides found in fish protein hydrolysate, such as Glu-Glu, Ser-Glu-Glu, Glu-Set, Thr-Glu, Glu-Asp, Asp-Glu-Ser, and summarized the flavor-enhancing effects of buffer peptides, such as Gly-Leu, Pro-Glu, Val-Glu, β-Ala-His; in 1996, Spanier et al. [12] compared the differences between synthetic BMP and MSG in terms of taste and sensory properties, and found that BMP displayed a stronger flavor and mouthfeel than MSG; in 1998, Japan-based Ajinomoto discovered that glutathione had a strong ability to elicit a “thick and penetrating sensation” while enhancing and maintaining the flavors of aromatic and spicy condiments and vegetables; in 2002, Schlichtherle-Cemy and Amadol of the Nestle Company found that wheat gluten protein contained many small peptides with taste-enhancing functions (such as umami, saltiness and sourness) and proposed that peptides had the following effects on the umami taste of foods: peptides themselves may be tasteless or have a week taste and usually contain acidic amino acids Glu or Asp, but at suitable concentrations, these peptides can work synergistically 2 [sic! “2” is possibly added by mistake in the source] with other flavoring ingredients (table salt, MSG, acidulant) of suitable concentrations or can enhance the flavors. In 2009, Zhang, X. M. [14] prepared umami peptides from enzymatic hydrolysate of soy protein, and these umami peptides are important for the development of the seasoning and spices industry in China.
日本語 から 英語: METHOD FOR INSERT BLOW MOLDING OF PANELS General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 [Claim 1]
A method for insert blow molding of panels, characterized in that, a reinforcement pipe is fixed to a plurality of magnets by a magnetic force of the magnets, the magnets being provided by protruding from an internal cavity surface of a mold to the inner side of the internal cavity surface of the mold, and then a parison is clamped, and by blowing air into the parison, the reinforcement pipe is formed by insert molding.
[Claim 2]
The method for insert blow molding of panels according to claim 1, characterized in that the magnets that are provided by protruding from the internal cavity surface of the mold to the inside of the internal cavity surface of the mold are pulled out by an air cylinder, a hydraulic cylinder or the like before the completion of the blowing.
[Detailed description of the invention]
[Technical field]
[0001]
The present invention relates to a method of inserting a reinforcement pipe into a panel and blow molding it.
[Background technology]
[0002]
Conventionally, in order to mount a reinforcement pipe in a panel, a hole is drilled in the body of the molded product of panel after the blow molding, and the reinforcement pipe is press-fitted into the hole.
[Patent document 1] Japanese laid-open patent publication No. H11-156926
[0003]
However, since extra steps of drilling and press-fitting after blow molding are required, there is the drawback of an increased cost.
[Disclosure of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
[0004]
The problem to be solved is the need for extra steps of drilling a hole in the molded product after the blow molding and press-fitting the reinforcement pipe into the hole.
[Means for Solving the Problems]
[0005]
The main characteristic of the present invention is that the reinforcement pipe is fixed by the magnetic force of magnets which protrude inward from an internal cavity surface in the mold, and then the parison is clamped and air is blown into the parison, thereby the reinforcement pipe is formed by insert molding.
[Effect of the invention]
[0006]
According to the molding method of the present invention, since the insert of the reinforcement pipe is completed simultaneously with the completion of the blow molding, the extra steps of drilling a hole in the molded product after blow molding and press-fitting the reinforcement pipe in the hole are saved, which is advantageous.
[Best mode for implementing the invention]
[0007]
By using a mold with magnets for insert blow molding the reinforcement pipe, the objective of manufacturing an inexpensive a panel with a reinforcement pipe is realized, without damaging the strength of the panel.
日本語 から 英語: HIGH-SPEED MEASUREMENT SYSTEM OF BLINKS BY USING INTELLIGENT VISION SENSOR General field: 科学 Detailed field: IT(情報テクノロジー)
翻訳 - 英語 1. Introduction
Recently, the relationship between the information appearing in the eye and the health status has attracted attention, and an approach has been reported which captures the degree of sleepiness of a subject from the result of measurements of eye movements and blinks [1] [2]. Reports about eye blinking measurements so far can be classified by the measurement means and the fineness of the information. The measurement means can be divided into invasive measurement and non-invasive measurement. In the invasive measurement, measurement is performed with a certain kind of sensor attached to the eye of the subject person, and the non-invasive measurement mainly uses a video camera for measurement. In the reports by means of the invasive measurement, Kamakura et al. used EOG to capture the information about changes in the eyelid position with a high time resolution from the changes in the myoelectric potential [1], and Casse et al. attached a light shielding unit to the eyelid so that the near infrared reflected light from the pupil was cut off when the eye blinks and was captured by a video camera set in front of the eye [2]. In the reports by means of the noninvasive measurement using a video camera, it is necessary to obtain the eyelid position from the video image. Adachi et al. calculated the eyelid position from the extraction of the upper and lower eyelids using differential values of the luminance information of the images [3], and Chau et al. extracted the position of the eye by 2narizing [sic! The source uses number “2” in place of “bi”] the image [4]. Unlike the reports of the above 2 cases, Choi et al. arranged the video images of each time point side by side in 1 row to create an eye position change image and 2narized [sic! The source uses number “2” in place of “bi”] this image to obtain smooth eyelid position changes over time [5]. Although the non-invasive measurement can conduct measurements in more natural conditions compared to the invasive measurement, the existing devices are limited by the measurement speed of acquiring images by video cameras at 30 frames per second, so they are difficult to correctly measure eye
/2
blinks of about 100 milliseconds. Therefore, we have built an eye blink measurement device using an intelligent vision sensor (IVS) with a frame rate on the order of kHz to measure feature values of high-speed eye blinks by means of the non-invasive measurement. In the next section, the IVS is described.
2. Intelligent vision sensor (IVS)
Now, imagine a robot that hits back a ball coming at 150 km per hour. When a general video camera is used, a frame rate of 30 frames per second is assumed, but in this system, advancement of 1.4 m is made in 1 frame period, and it can be expected that it is difficult to control the robot to hit back the ball based on the visual information. On the other hand, since 1 frame captured by IVS with a frame rate of kHz order has only a change of 4 cm, by performing a high-speed feedback control of kHz order on the robot, it is possible to have a control that makes full use of the ability of the robot. Through partial readout by the light receiving unit of 512 512 pixels of IVS, acquisition of 2400 frames images per second and image processing can be achieved in the image processing of 128 128 pixels, and processing of 1000 frames per second in the processing of 232 232 pixels, and processing of 248 frames per second in the processing of 512 512 pixels are possible. It is possible to read the information received by a light receiving unit having a high sensitivity to near infrared wavelengths at a maximum of 12 bit [sic! the source uses the singular unit “bit” here]. To achieve real-time execution of the 1-dimensional or 2-dimensional center of gravity calculation, center of gravity calculation of a plurality of points, 3 3 filtering calculation, etc., the parallel calculation unit is a configuration suitable for high-speed sensing and control by using only the images after image processing and the feature values necessary for post-processing, instead of the image information, to output the signal from the camera in the LVDS mode. In addition to being used as a high-speed eye blink measurement device, IVS can be used as a high-speed camera for object tracking through a fixation fine movement measurement instrument [6] or through 3-dimenstional shape measurement and image recognition and for distance measurements by using 2 IVS instruments, and it can also be used as an on-line inspection camera, a measurement sensor, etc.
日本語 から 英語: DESIGN OF NANO-SIZED PARTICLE OF METAL OXIDES BY FLOW-THROUGH SUPERCRITICAL WATER METHOD General field: 科学 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 6. Composite metal oxide synthesis
It is considered that the synthesis of single nanoparticles of complex metal oxides can also be performed basically by the theory described above. However, the biggest problem is to obtain the target product in a single phase. Taking ZnAl2O4 as an example, when Zn(NO3)2, Al(NO3)3 and KOH are used as raw materials for its synthesis, AlOOH or ZnO is generated as a by-product depending on the conditions. Conventionally, it was necessary to conduct carpet bombing experiments with temperature, pressure, and concentration as operation variables to determine the single-phase formation region. To do this, the authors completely dissolved the by-product AlOOH or ZnO according to the solubility calculation of the metal oxides and estimated the single-phase formation region where the solubility of the target substance ZnAl2O4 is extremely low, and, on this basis, conducted experiments. As a result, the experimental results show the same tendency as the calculation results, confirming the effectiveness of this method 37).
7. Shape control
Near the critical point of water, by some temperature and pressure operations, there will be rapid changes in the physical properties of water, and the equilibrium of the ion reaction, that is, the ratio of the dissolved metal ion complex species present in the solution also greatly changes. The crystal growth surface can be controlled by this ratio. In fact, in the synthesis of AlOOH, by operating the experimental conditions near the critical point, it is possible to synthesize rhombus plate-like particles, hexagonal plate-like particles, sword-like particles, and football-like particles 3). Further, also in the synthesis of KTiO3 and ZnO, by setting appropriate reaction conditions, it is possible to synthesize nanowires and nanorods with extremely high aspect ratios 11), 15).
8. Redox reaction control
Supercritical water can be expected to be a highly efficient redox reaction field by forming a homogeneous phase of any composition with oxygen where it is the oxidant or with hydrogen where it is the reducing agent. In systems such as the one for synthesis of Ni microparticles from Ni(II) salts, the one for synthesis of LiCoO2 microparticles from LiOH and Co(II) salts, and the one for synthesis of LiMn2O4 from LiOH and Mn(II) salts, it is possible to obtain the target product in a single phase by supplying hydrogen or oxygen to the reaction field from the thermal decomposition of a formic acid or hydrogen peroxide aqueous solution, and then controlling the oxidation number of the metal 9), 10), 38).
9. Conclusion
The effectiveness of the flow-through supercritical hydrothermal synthesis method was explained from the viewpoint of nanoparticle design. In the application of this method, in addition to the analysis of the mechanism of the hydrothermal synthesis reaction in supercritical water and the accumulation of physical property data, the development of a mixing unit for rapid temperature increase of the raw material solutions is considered to be a key. In the past studies, we have used the method of mixing the raw material solution and the heating water in a T-shaped flow passage (with an inner diameter of 0.3~5 mm). This method can achieve rapid heating and cooling, compared to the conventional palindrome [sic! The word “palindrome” is likely a typo for “batchwise”] method. However, according to recent reports on heat flow analysis of the mixing unit, in the mixing of two fluids, one having a low temperature and high density and the other having a high temperature and low density, a certain distance (time) is required for the generation of vortices and complete mixing even in the reaction tube after the mixing unit to reach the target temperature, and before reaching this point, it is evident that the high-temperature fluid and the low-temperature fluid form a two-layer flow 39)~42). In this method using the supercritical water field where the reaction speed is extremely early [sic! The word “early” is likely a typo for “quick”], in order to precisely control the process of formation and growth of nuclei and to obtain homogeneous monodispersed nanoparticles, we believe the urgent task is to develop a microreactor for rapid heating from the new point of view.
For the material creation technology using the supercritical water reaction field to grow and serve as the next-generation industrial foundation, we believe the important things are to push forward the demonstration of its usefulness, gather the wisdom of the industry, government, and academia, and to establish the technology as the foundation and to systematize it. We will appreciate the understanding and support from the parties concerned.
翻訳 - 英語 1. Title of the invention
Semiconductor device
2. Claims
A semiconductor device, characterized in that, from a main surface of a semiconductor substrate, which has an oxidation resistant film with corners on a pattern being made into a shape of an arc shorter than a quadrantal arc or into a shape of a combination of a plurality of obtuse angles, selective oxidization is conducted below the main surface.
3. Detailed Description of the Invention
The present invention relates to a structure of a semiconductor device.
When an element is formed by selectively oxidizing single crystalline silicon or polycrystalline silicon using a currently used silicon nitride film as an oxidation resistant film, lattice defects may be induced in the substrate, and in a worst case, cracking may occur in the substrate itself. The reason is concentration of stress at discontinuous points due to volume expansion of the oxidized parts by selective oxidation of the substrate. Therefore, reducing the concentration of stress and suppressing the occurrence of defects such as cracking are important in device fabrication.
A semiconductor device that solves the above problems is a feature of the present invention.
Next, the occurrence of defects and cracks in a conventional shape will be described using the drawings and then the features of the invention will be described.
Fig. 2(A) shows an example of the shape of a conventionally used transistor. In this example, the collector contact 1 and the base region 2 are rectangular, and during selective oxidation, concentration of stress due to volume expansion occurs at the intersections. This will be explained in more detail. Fig. 1(A) shows 1 model of the shapes of the elements, and the standard shape of rectangle is used. Here, the inside of the rectangle 7 is a region covered with an oxidation resistant film, which is a region where the surface of the silicon substrate is left without being oxidized, and
/2
the outer region 6 is a region to be oxidized. The point to be noted is the corner 10 of the rectangle. When the region 6 is oxidized, the upper side 8 of the rectangle 7 will receive a pressure, if the vector is considered, in the vertical direction 11 (←) and a pressure in the horizontal direction 12 (←), both directions being relative to 8, and a pressure in a direction perpendicular to the main surface (not shown in the figure). The right side 9 also receives pressures of vectors 11 (←) and 12 (←), similar to the side 8 described above. However, the pressure applied to the two sides can relieve the stress in the oxidized part, but at point 10, since its periphery becomes an oxidized film, the stress cannot be alleviated and stress concentration occurs, causing defects.
In the case of laying the wiring 3 using polycrystalline silicon as shown in Fig. 3(A), stress concentration also occurs at the end 4 of the wiring 3 or the part 5 which is bent at a right angle, as described above. Particularly, when the ratio of the line length b to the line width a, that is, (b/a) increases, that tendency is intensified. As shown in the above 2 examples, when the peripheral line segment of the element has discontinuous points, concentration of stress will occur at those points due to volume expansion of the oxidized region and induce crystal defects and cracks in the silicon substrate. This is also a cause of inferiority of the characteristics of the transistor or defects such as short circuit or disconnection.
A structure which can avoid the above-mentioned stress concentration and disperse the stress is a feature of the present invention. As shown in Fig. 2(B), to disperse stress at the intersections of the 2 sides of the rectangle which intersect at the right angle of Fig. 2(A), arcs shorter than a quadrantal arc are used to connect with a smooth curve and remove the corner of the rectangle, thus inhibiting the induction of defects caused by concentration of stress at 1 intersection point. Alternatively, as shown in Fig. 2(C), instead of the quadrantal arc, a plurality of obtuse angles are used to avoid abrupt changes in shape and to disperse stress from 1 intersection point to a plurality of points. Note that, in the figure, 3 obtuse angles are shown. Here, to add a more specific description, as shown in Fig. 1(B), even if the pressures applied at the point 10 have the same absolute value of the vectors, their directions are different, and they will become smaller if they are broken in the directions of the side 8 and side 9. In addition, alleviation of stress can be also easily performed for the area 7, and concentration at one point 10 can be avoided. Further, as shown in Fig. 1(C), there are 3 discontinuous points 10, so stress at the point 10 of Fig. 1(A) is now greatly alleviated.
Fig. 3(B) shows an example where the example of Fig. 2(B) is applied to the polycrystalline silicon wiring, and arcs shorter than a quadrantal arc are used in the same way as shown in Fig. 2(B). Similarly, Fig. 3(C) shows an example of a combination of a plurality of obtuse angles. In particular, in the case of polycrystalline silicon wiring, the occurrence of cracks in the substrate is suppressed rather than induction of defects when polycrystals are used for the substrate. As a supplementary note on the above description, the radius of the quadrantal arc needs to be about half of the line width.
4. Brief description of the drawings
Fig. 1 (A) to Fig. 1(C) are plan views showing how stress is applied when a selectively oxidized pattern is modeled or the conditions in a particular region, of which, Fig. 1(A) is a plan view of a conventional device, and Fig. 1(B) and Fig. 1(C) are plan views of embodiments of the present invention. Fig. 2(A), Fig. 2(B) and Fig. 2(C) are all plan views showing the basic shapes of the transistor, of which Fig. 2(A) shows a conventional shape, and Fig. 2(B) is a plan view showing the shape of the embodiment of the present invention using quadrantal arcs, and Fig. 2(C) is a plan view showing the shape of the embodiment of the present invention using a combination of obtuse angles. In addition, Fig. 3(A) to Fig. 3(C) are plan views showing one shape of the polycrystalline silicon wiring, of which Fig. 3(A) shows a conventional shape, and Fig. 3(B) and Fig. 3(C) are plan views showing the shapes of the embodiments of the present invention.
中国語 から 英語: RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT OF A ROLLER BIT SEAL TESTING MACHINE General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: 工学(一般)
翻訳 - 英語 2. Effect of Joule Heat
When a roller bit works, the seal ring suffers a cyclic process of being clamped tight, producing frictional heat, shrinking, being clamped tighter and producing more heat. This process accelerates the aging of the seal ring. In addition, clearance bites and rubber aging also easily cause a sealing failure.
3. Action of Dynamic Load
The magnitude and direction of the interaction force between a roller bit and the transitional zone between the well bottom and the well wall are very random. This will cause not only an axial endplay, but also a circumferential swing to the gear wheel on the shaft journal. As a result, the inner and outer clearances of the seal ring vary [1].
The roller bit seal testing machine is used to simulate the above-mentioned working conditions as much as possible to test the sealing property of the seal ring. At the time of the test, assemble the seal ring in the testing machine as required, and then run the testing machine until a leakage from the seal ring occurs, and the running duration until the leakage occurs is the service life of the rubber seal ring or metal seal ring. It should be noted in the design scheme for the testing machine that the main shaft rotates during the test while the outer sleeve of the testing machine and the stationary test piece fixed on the testing machine stay still. This is just opposite to the actual situation that the gear wheel rotates but the shaft journal stays still when the bit works. The design scheme is so determined mainly in view of the following two aspects:
(1) The speed of a roller bit is not high, the centrifugal force resulted from the rotations of the roller bit can be ignored, and changing the installation position of the stationary test piece will not have a significant influence on the test result.
(2) If the scheme where the main shaft is fixed and the sleeve stays still is adopted, at least four slender holes need to axially be opened in the main shaft to inject a drilling fluid, install a cooling/heating coil and install a thermocouple. Currently, it is still difficult to machine slender holes, however [4]. In addition, the installation of the coil joint and thermocouple junction at the axial end is also restricted by the area of the axial end. Therefore, the design scheme where the main shaft rotates but the housing stays still is adopted. Although this scheme does not comply with the actual situation where the gear wheel rotates but the shaft journal does not rotate, the relative motion between the movable and stationary test pieces is the same.
The testing machine system mainly consists of a testing machine, a slurry buffer tank, a motor and torque meter assembly and a computer data acquisition and control subsystem.
Testing machine: Used to test the service life of the seal ring. In the design of a roller bit, it is required that the radial swing of the gear wheel should not exceed 120 m. Therefore, high coaxiality, low surface roughness and low endface circle run-out are required during the design and machining of the testing machine.
Slurry buffer tank: Used to provide slurry and the stipulated test pressure for the testing machine. The buffer tank and the testing machine are connected with a hose. After the slurry tank is filled with slurry, the gas regulator at the outlet of the nitrogen cylinder is regulated until the pressure in the buffer tank reaches the stipulated value, which is actually the operating pressure for the seal test. A relief valve is installed at the top of the slurry tank. The rated pressure of the relief valve is 1 MPa. Once the pressure in the slurry tank exceeds 1 MPa, the relief valve will automatically relieve the pressure, thus guaranteeing the safety of the slurry tank and the testing machine.
Motor and torque meter assembly: Used for installing a motor (a speed governor attached), a torque meter and a small pulley. The above-mentioned devices are first installed on the motor base beyond the experiment workbench, and these devices together with the motor base are installed as an entirety at the lower layer of the experiment workbench. This facilitates not only the installation of the devices, but also the regulation of the coaxiality between the torque meter and the motor. After the installation, the large and small pulleys are aligned and the central distance is regulated to the preset position.
Computer data acquisition and control subsystem: Mainly used to complete the detection of the working condition of the system, obtain accurate test data, and give a scientific evaluation for the sealing property and the service life of the seal ring. The performance of the sensors directly influences the performance of the testing machine system. If the sensors cannot sensitively sense the measured values or cannot precisely convert the measured values into electrical signals, it makes no sense no matter how high the accuracies of other instruments and devices are. Therefore, sensors must be selected carefully and their measurement errors need to be analyzed.
翻訳 - 英語 Specification
1. Name of the utility model
Nuclear reactor structure
2. Registered claims of the utility model
A nuclear reactor structure, which is characterized in that it comprises a nuclear reactor vessel formed by a semicircular shell bottom, a cylindrical body extending upward from the bottom and enclosing a reactor core, and a top opening in which a shielding plug is inserted, and a thin-shelled, protective container enclosing said bottom that has a annular recess loosely fitted to a support boss projecting downward from said bottom, and that it is supported through a flange component formed on the periphery of said opening of said nuclear reactor vessel and a skirt component formed on said protective container.
3. Detailed description of the utility model
The present utility model relates to a nuclear reactor, and more particularly to a support structure of a nuclear reactor having a protective container.
The nuclear reactor vessel is supported by a building by the suspending [sic! A typo is corrected here by changing the original word “car” to “suspending”] installation method in consideration of its nature of a large size and high temperature, and various other conditions, and a structure is provided for horizontal support of its lower part in response to its demand for vibration resistance. In the case of a double-layer structure in which the nuclear reactor vessel is surrounded by another protective container, to install and support
/4
each of the nuclear reactor vessel and the protective container according to the method described above, a very complicated structure will be needed, and as a high-temperature vessel, various problems will occur.
Fig. 1 shows a conventional structure of such a nuclear reactor. In the figure, the reactor vessel 01 is suspended from the upper floor 02 of [sic! The word “of” is added here by means of a correction.] the building via an upper flange, and the protective container 03 is also mounted to the intermediate floor 04 of the building.
Since the intermediate floor 04 is close to the middle to upper part of the reactor vessel 01 where the temperature is high, the support for the protective container 03 has a double-layer structure as shown in the figure to withstand thermal stress and supports the protective container 03 through the flange of the outer cylinder 05.
For this reason, the structure of the protective container 03 becomes complicated and the heat dissipation from the vicinity of the skirt 05 is large even if a heat insulating material is added, so there is also the problem of high temperature rises in the building.
Also, although the support boss 06 of the reactor vessel 01 is horizontally supported by the support cylinder 08 via the annular recess 07 of the protective container 03, the ability to follow the
/5
heat change is poor due to heat conduction, and to reduce the thermal stress in this area, a large gap is required between the components, which will cause great relative horizontal displacements at the time of an earthquake.
The present utility model was made in view of the problems of the conventional structure described above, and it is an objective of the present utility model to provide a simple reactor structure with a small amount of heat dissipation [sic! A typo is corrected here by changing the original word “emitting” to “dissipation”.] and small relative displacements when an earthquake occurs.
Next, the present utility model will be described based on an embodiment shown in the drawings.
In Fig. 2, the nuclear reactor vessel 3 supporting the core structure 1 inside is composed of a semicircular shell-like bottom 5 and a body 6 and has an opening 7 on the top. An annular flange 8 is formed around the opening 7, and the flange 8 is mounted on the upper floor 10 of the building 9. In other words, the reactor vessel 3 is suspended from and supported by the upper floor 10 via the flange 8.
An upper core mechanism 14 including a control rod, etc., (not shown) passes through and is attached to the shield plug 12 inserted
/6
into the opening 7. An inlet nozzle and an outlet nozzle (both not shown) joined to a coolant pipe (not shown) are integrally formed on the reactor vessel 3.
The protective container 16 enclosing the body 6 and the bottom 5 of the reactor vessel 3 is fixed to and supported by the lower floor 19 of the building 9 by an integrally formed skirt 17. The thickness of the space between the reactor vessel 3 and the protective container 16 is set as small as possible, assuming that the coolant leaks from the atsuko [sic! The word “atsuko” is likely a typo for “nuclear”.] reactor vessel 3.
An annular recess 21 is formed in the seat of the protective container 16 surrounded by the skirt 17, and the recess 21 is fitted to a cylindrical support boss 22 which is formed to project downward from the lower surface of the bottom 5. The clearance between the inner peripheral surface of the recess 21 and the outer peripheral surface of the support boss 22 at the time of manufacture and installation is set so that it is suitable for the temperature conditions during normal operation. A heat insulating material 23 is laid around the protective container 16 and the nuclear reactor
/7
vessel 3 as shown with the right half being omitted in the figure.
In this embodiment which has the above-described configuration, the nuclear reactor vessel 3 has a temperature rise and extends toward the lower floor 19 as it transitions to normal operation, and the protective container 16 has a temperature rise as it receives radiation from the nuclear reactor vessel 3 as well as other heat, and its upper part extends toward the upper floor 10.
Due to the nature of the nuclear reactor, the lower part of the core structure 1 has a relatively lower temperature than the upper part, but it has a temperature rise to a certain degree, and the support boss 22 expands in the radial direction. The recess 21 has a temperature rise later than the support boss 22 and radially expands, but the difference in thermal expansion due to the delayed temperature rise is absorbed by the preset clearance. Heat dissipation from the protective container 16 is largely prevented by the heat insulating material 23.
When an earthquake occurs, the nuclear reactor vessel 3 is supported at the bottom 5 by the support boss 22 and the skirt 17 and is supported at the top by the flange 8. The core structure 1 bends in the horizontal direction depending on its own rigidity and the
/8
rigidity of the body 6, the bottom 5, etc.
According to the embodiment described above, since the protective container 16 is supported only by the skirt 17, the structure is simplified, the weight and the thermal stress generated in each part are reduced, and since the skirt 17 is not close to the high temperature part of the nuclear reactor vessel 3, the temperature rise inside the building 9 can be suppressed.
In addition, since the clearance that absorbs the difference in thermal expansion due to the delay of the temperature change is only 1 place between the support boss 22 and the recess 21, the total clearance is smaller compared to that of a conventional device, and the amount of horizontal displacement [sic! A typo is corrected here by changing the original word “position” to “displacement”.] of the body 6 relative to the shield plug 12 at time of an earthquake can be reduced, and the reliability of an emergency insertion of the control rod can be improved.
日本語 から 英語: Application of Synthetic Mica to Cosmetics General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 歯科学
翻訳 - 英語 2.2 Mica synthesis method
As the synthesis methods of micas, there are hydrothermal synthesis method, solid phase reaction method, and melt synthesis method. Hydrothermal method is synthesis under hydrothermal conditions of a high temperature and a high pressure, and it can synthesize muscovite that cannot be synthesized by the melt synthesis method. However, it is not well oriented to mass production of micas due to the need for high-temperature and high-pressure equipment. The solid phase reaction method is a method in which the reaction is carried out at a high temperature of 700oC~1000oC under normal pressure and the synthesis of various micas has been reported 2). With the solid phase reaction method, it is difficult to synthesize micas of large crystals. In the melt synthesis method, the raw materials are melted at a high temperature of several hundreds to a thousand degrees C and then cooled to precipitate crystals, and this method can obtain micas having relatively good crystallinity. Daimon et al. obtained a book-like crystal 15 cm high, 5 cm wide and 1 cm thick by the crucible descending method 3). The melt synthesis method is industrially advantageous in terms of mass productivity and economy. The melt synthesis method is divided by the heating method into the external heating method (crucible method) and the internal heating method, but the internal heating method is more suitable for mass production in terms of energy efficiency and productivity. The authors have synthesized micas with the internal heating melt synthesis method 4). In this method, a carbon or SiC-based heating element is placed between a pair of main electrodes of carbon, and the electrodes are covered with the raw material and energized. At the initial stage of energization, melting starts from the periphery of the heating element, and eventually the melt spreads to the main electrodes, and electric current flows through the melt and melting proceeds. The temperature of the melt is 1400~1600oC. After melting is complete, the melt is cooled to crystallize. The raw materials for synthesizing micas are oxides such as SiO2, Al2O3 and MgO, and fluorides such as K2SiF6 and KF. Natural minerals such as feldspar, peridotite and talc can also be used as sources of Si, Al and Mg. Depending on the type of mica to be synthesized, these raw materials are blended to carry out the synthesis.
2.3 Crystal structure and type
The crystal structure of a synthetic mica is the same as that of a natural mica with an SiO4 tetrahedron as the basic unit, and the tetrahedra are connected into a hexagonal network to form a tetrahedral layer (Fig. 1, Fig. 2) 5). Between the tetrahedral layers is an octahedral ion layer of 6-cooridnation of Mg2+, Li+, etc. This tetrahedron-octahedron-tetrahedron sandwich is called a 2:1 layer, and this layer is stacked layer by layer. Between one 2:1 layer and another 2:1 layer are alkali metal or alkaline earth metal ions called “interlayer ions” which are coordinated by weak ionic bonds. For example, as in the synthetic fluorphlogopite, when the type of interlayer ion is potassium, the synthetic mica will be non-swellable and have the same properties as a natural mica. Also, as in the sodium tetrasilicon mica, when the interlayer ion is sodium, the synthetic mica will be swellable and will swell in a polar solvent such as water. However, in sodium phlogopite, although the interlayer is sodium, aluminum is coordinated to the tetrahedral layer and the mica becomes non-swellable. Swelling is not determined solely by the type of the interlayer ion but also relates to the type of ions in the tetrahedral layer and the octahedral layer. One of the interesting aspects of synthetic micas is that it is possible to synthesize minerals with completely opposing properties by changing the ingredients. For example, in fluorine tetrasilicon mica, when the interlayer ion is K, the mica is non-swellable and is not conductive, but when it is Na, the mica is swellable and conductive.
日本語 から 英語: DIALYSIS AGENT AND METHOD FOR PRODUCING THE SAME General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
翻訳 - 英語 [0010]
The dialysis agent of the present invention comprises a powder (agent A) composed of components other than sodium hydrogencarbonate and a powder (agent B) containing sodium hydrogencarbonate in the electrolytes.
[0011]
The agent A mainly supplies necessary electrolytes to the dialysate, and contains sodium chloride, potassium chloride, calcium chloride, magnesium chloride, sodium acetate, acetic acid. Of these electrolytes, sodium chloride, potassium chloride and sodium acetate can be partially or entirely incorporated in the agent B. Although the agent A generally contains acetic acid as a pH adjuster, the present invention is characterized in that the acetic acid is contained in the form of sodium diacetate combined with sodium acetate.
[0012]
Sodium diacetate is a complex crystal (also called solid acetic acid or powder acetic acid) in which 1 mole of acetic acid is combined with 1 mole of sodium acetate. It is obtained by stirring and mixing the acetic acid and sodium acetate, but since sodium acetate is a solid, an equal molar amount of acetic acid is added to a common sodium acetate powder and mixed by stirring to obtain a sherbet-like product (probably a mixture of sodium diacetate, sodium acetate and acetic acid), and it may not be possible to obtain completely reacted powdery sodium diacetate. Preferably, the sodium acetate is ground in advance to increase the surface area and to react well to obtain powdery sodium diacetate.
[0013]
In a conventional dialysis agent, the formulation is 2~4 moles of sodium acetate per 1 mole of acetic acid, so by using 1 part of the sodium acetate necessary for the dialysis agent, it is possible to made acetic acid into a solid as sodium acetate. When an excessive amount of sodium acetate is used, the amount of free acetic acid decreases, and it is harder for the acetic acid to volatilize; therefore, it is preferable to pre-mix the whole amount of the sodium acetate necessary for the dialysis agent with the acetic acid. In this way, a mixture powder of sodium diacetate and sodium acetate is obtained and is used to produce the agent A.
[0014]
Acetic acid needs to be formulated to have a pH in the range of 7.2~7.4 when it is dissolved. Then it is suitable for use as dialysate after it is dissolved to a concentration of about 2 mEq/liter.
[0015]
Preferably the agent A is produced by mixing the electrolytes in the agent A (sodium complex, potassium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc.) with glucose, if necessary, in advance to prepare a sodium diacetate powder, and then granulating it.
[0016]
There no particular limitations on the granulation method, and various methods can be adopted. Although the dry granulation method is preferred because the effect of the present invention will be reduced if sodium diacetate dissolves during granulation, a small amount of water may be added to improve the granulation performance or the characteristics of the granulates. When the amount of water added is 5 wt% or less, volatilization of acetic acid does not substantially occur in the granulation step. Particularly preferable, the amount of water added is 2~4 wt%, because it enables good granulation and the evaporation of acetic acid is small. However, since the optimum amount of water added depends on the particle size distribution of the electrolytes, etc., it should be determined in consideration of the particle size distribution of the raw materials used.
[0017]
Specifically, extrusion granulation, rolling granulation, compression granulation, fluidized bed granulation, stirring granulation and the like can be used as the preferred granulation methods.
[0018]
At the time of granulation, the particle size of each component of the agent A, as the 90% diameter (d90) in the cumulative distribution curve, is 250 m or less, preferably 180 m or less, particularly preferably 100 m or less. If the particle size exceeds 250 m, the granulates will not have adequate mechanical strength and will easily become powdery, and the dissolution rate is also low, so it is not preferable. When an electrolyte having a large particle size is used as a raw material, it is preferable to grind it into appropriate sizes and then granulate it.
[0019]
The particle size of the agent A granulates is preferably about 0.1~10 mm. If the particle size is less than 0.1 mm, the flowability of the granulates may be impaired, or the granulates may become difficult to handle, for example, it may become powdery and scattered. On the other hand, when the particle size exceeds 10 mm, the granulates will not have sufficient mechanical strength and will easily to become powdery, and the dissolution rate is also slow, so it is not preferable.
[0020]
After the granulation step, the drying operation is performed as necessary. Sodium diacetate is stable at a temperature of 150°C or lower in the absence of water, but when water is present, it will react, and the acetic acid is easily volatile, so preferably it is dried in a temperature range of 30~90°C. Specifically, a band drier, a disk drier, an air drier, a rotary drier or the like may be used to dry it to obtain a granulated product having a high strength and good solubility. An acetic acid atmosphere can also be adopted as the drying atmosphere for the purpose of preventing the decomposition of sodium diacetate.
[0021]
In the present invention, it is also possible to bind sodium diacetate to the surface of the granules by mixing in the sodium diacetate after granulating the agent A components other than sodium diacetate by the method as described above. If so, since acetic acid does not volatilize during granulation of such other components, it is possible to adopt a wet granulation method, and it has the advantage of being able to use a higher temperature for drying, but care should be taken because a layer rich in sodium diacetate will be formed on the surface of the granulates, so some consolidation can occur easily.
/4
[0022]
In the dialysis agent of the present invention, the agent B is a powder containing sodium hydrogen carbonate. Although sodium hydrogen carbonate may be used alone, it may contain a part or all of the electrolyte components (sodium chloride, potassium chloride, sodium acetate) other than a calcium salt or a magnesium salt in the electrolyte components contained in the agent A, and further glucose. It is preferable to make the agent B into granulates because granulates have good fluidity and solubility. When the agent B is mixture granulates of sodium hydrogen carbonate and other electrolytes or glucose, a granulation product having a high dissolution rate is obtained.
[0023]
If the agent B is granulated, its granulation method is not particularly limited, and various methods can be adopted. Similar to the granulation method of the agent A, sodium hydrogencarbonate may be mixed with other electrolytes and / or glucose as needed, and preferably, a small amount of water is added, and then the mixture is granulated. The amount of water added at this time is preferably 1~25 wt%, which is slightly more than that added for the agent A. If the amount of water added is less than 1 wt%, the particle strength will be low, and powdering may easily occur, so it is not preferable. On the other hand, if the amount exceeds 25 wt%, the granulation process will be difficult, so it is not preferable.
[0024]
Like the agent A, the components of the agent B are also preferably fine powders having a particle diameter d90 of 250 m or smaller, preferably 180 m or smaller, particularly preferably 100 m or smaller. If the particle size exceeds 250 m, the mechanical strength of the granulated product is insufficient, powdering tends to occur, and the dissolution rate becomes low, so it is not preferable. When an electrolyte having a large particle size is used as a raw material, it is preferable to appropriately grind it before the granulation process.
[0025]
It is preferable that the particle size of the agent B granulates is about 0.1~10 mm. If the particle size is smaller than 0.1 mm, the flowability of the granulated produce may be impaired, or it may become powdery and scattered, which makes the handling difficult, so it is not preferable. On the other hand, when the particle size exceeds 10 mm, the mechanical strength of the granulated produce is insufficient, powdering is likely to occur, and the dissolution rate may be low, so it is not preferable.
[0026]
After granulating the agent B, drying is performed as necessary. At this time, to prevent decomposition of the sodium hydrogen carbonate, it is preferable to use a carbon dioxide gas atmosphere. Preferably, the carbon dioxide gas concentration is about 5% or higher. A suitable drying temperature range is 30~90°C, and the specific drying means may be, for example, a band dryer, a disc dryer, a through-flow dryer, a rotary dryer, etc. If so, a granulated product which is uniform and has a stable composition, a high strength and good solubility can be obtained.
[0027]
To prepare a dialysate using the sodium bicarbonate dialysis agent of the present invention, the agent A and the agent B may be dissolved to the required concentrations and mixed. Since acetic acid is contained in the agent A, a dialysate having a predetermined pH can be obtained without particularly adjusting the pH, and precipitation of the calcium or magnesium component does not occur.
[0028]
[Examples]
(Example 1)
2.5636 kg of glacial acetic acid was added to 12.608 kg of anhydrous sodium acetate which had been ground with a grinder (ball mill) to have a d90 diameter of 100 m or smaller, and they were uniformly mixed in a mixer to obtain a powder consisting of a mixture of sodium acetate and sodium diacetate. To this powder was added a ground mixture of 119.129 kg of sodium chloride, 2.864 kg of potassium chloride, 4.236 kg of calcium chloride dihydrate, 1.953 kg of magnesium chloride hexahydrate, and 19.21 kg of glucose, and then the mixture was moistened and kneaded, and then extruded and granulated with a granulator. The obtained granulated product was subjected to ventilation drying at 73°C for 10~15 minutes in an acetic acid gas atmosphere to obtain a dry powdery composition (agent A).
[0029]
(Example 2)
2.5636 kg of glacial acetic acid was added to 12.608 kg of anhydrous sodium acetate which had been ground with a grinder (ball mill) to have a d90 diameter of 100 m or smaller, and they were uniformly mixed in a mixer to obtain a powder consisting of a mixture of sodium acetate and sodium diacetate. On the other hand, a ground mixture of 119.129 kg of sodium chloride, 2.864 kg of potassium chloride, 4.236 kg of calcium chloride dihydrate, 1.953 kg of magnesium chloride hexahydrate, and 19.21 kg of glucose was moistened and kneaded, and then extruded and granulated with a granulator. Then, while the obtained granulated product was being heated in the fluid bed at 80°C for 5~10 minutes, the powder consisting of the above-mentioned mixture of sodium acetate and sodium diacetate was added, and the mixture was further granulated to obtain a dry powdery composition (agent A).
[0030]
[Test example]
A part each of the powdery compositions (agent A) obtained in Examples 1 and 2 was dissolved in a predetermined amount of water, and the content of each component in the dry powders was determined. The amounts of the components are shown in Table 1 in wt%. The target value is a value assuming that the components are uniformly blended in the powders and there is no loss. The analysis method used for determining Na+ and K+ was the ion electrode method, that for determining Ca2+, Mg2+ and Cl− was the titration method, and that for determining glucose and acetic acid was the high-performance liquid chromatography.
日本語 から 英語: GROWTH FACTOR NETWORK AND NEW LIVER REGENERATION FACTOR HB-EGF AFTER HEPATECTOMY General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
原書のテキスト - 日本語 V. HB-EGFによるHGFおよびTGF-α遺伝子の発現誘導
部分肝切除後の再生肝内ではHB-EGF遺伝子がクッパー細胞および内皮細胞でまず発現し(ファースト・ウェーブ)，その後クッパー細胞でHGF遺伝子が，肝細胞でTGF-α遺伝子の発現が続く(セカンド・ウェーブ)と考えている．そこでHB-EGFがHGFおよびTGF-α遺伝子の発現を誘導するかについて検討を加えた．肝非実質細胞培養系にHB-EGFを添加すると3時間後にHGF遺伝子の発現を認めた．同様に肝細胞培養系にHB-EGFを添加するとTGF-α遺伝子の発現を見いだした．いまだ初歩的な実験段階であるが，部分肝切除後の再生肝でHB-EGFがファースト・ウェーブとして産生・分泌され，さらにHGFやTGF-α遺伝子を誘導することにより，増殖因子産生のセカンド・ウェーブとしてのHGFやTGF-αが分泌されることが考えられる(図4)．このように肝細胞増殖促進因子のカスケイドが形成されると推測される．
VI. HB-EGF遺伝子発現調節機構
それでは肝切除後にHB-EGF遺伝子が誘導されるシグナルはどのようなものであるのか？肝再生の制御機構における再生開始のシグナルに関しては現在のところほとんど明らかになっていない．肝切除後に肝内の血流量が増加することが知られているが，この血流増加がそのシグナルの一つとして作用する可能性が考えられる(図5)．
肝類洞内の血流が増加すると，内皮細胞にかかるshear stress(いわゆる，ずれ応力)が増加すると予測される．このずれ応力の内皮細胞におけるシグナル伝達機構は十分に明らかになってはいないが，HB-EGF遺伝子はそのプロモーター領域にずれ応力応答エレメントを有していることが既に明らかになっている．また，内皮細胞にずれ応力が負荷されると細胞内で転写因子NF-κBが活性化される．ことが知られているが，HB-EGF遺伝子はそのプロモーター領域にNF-κB応答エレメントを有している．したがって，肝切除後の血流増加による内皮細胞へのずれ応力の負荷によりHB-EGF遺伝子発現が亢進すると考えられる．
翻訳 - 英語 V. Induction of HGF and TGF-α gene expression by HB-EGF
It was believed that, in the regenerating liver after partial hepatectomy, the HB-EGF gene is first expressed in Kupffer cells and endothelial cells (first wave), followed by expression of the HGF gene in Kupffer cells and the expression of the TGF-α gene in hepatocytes (second wave). Therefore, we examined whether HB-EGF induces the expression of the HGF and TGF-α genes. When HB-EGF was added to a hepatic non-parenchymal cell culture system, HGF gene expression was observed 3 hours later. Similarly, the expression of the TGF-α gene was found when HB-EGF was added to a hepatocyte culture system. Although it was still at the rudimentary experimental stage, it was believed that HB-EGF was produced and secreted in the regenerating liver as a first wave after partial hepatectomy, and it further induced the HGF and TGF-α genes, resulting in secretion of HGF and TGF-α as the second wave of growth factor production (Fig. 4). Therefore, it is speculated that a cascade of hepatocyte growth-promoting factors is formed.
VI. HB-EGF gene expression regulation mechanism
Now, what is the signal that induces the HB-EGF gene after hepatectomy? At present, little is known about the regeneration initiating signal in the liver regeneration control mechanism. It is known that blood flow in the liver increases after hepatectomy, and we were thinking that this increase in blood flow might act as one of the signals (Fig. 5).
As blood flow in the liver sinusoids increases, the shear stress (so-called shear stress) acting on the endothelial cells is expected to increase. The signal transduction mechanism of this shear stress in endothelial cells has not been fully understood, but it has already been known that the HB-EGF gene has a shear stress response element in its promoter region. Moreover, it is known that, when shear stress is applied to endothelial cells, the transcription factor NF-κB in the cells is activated, and the HB-EGF gene has an NF-κB response element in its promoter region. Therefore, it is considered that the HB-EGF gene expression is enhanced by the shear stress applied to the endothelial cells due to increased blood flow after hepatectomy.
日本語 から 英語: SUBSTRATE AND METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING THEREOF General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 Claims
[Claim 1]
A substrate, characterized in that a conductive layer is provided on at least one external surface of an insulating layer which has a film made of a fluorine resin laminated respectively on two sides of a film made of a polyimide resin, wherein the thickness of the entire insulating layer is 25~500 m, the thickness of the film made of the polyimide resin is 0.05~1.0 times the total thickness of the films made of the fluorine resin, and the bonding strength between the insulating layers is 5.0 N/cm or more.
[Claim 2]
A method for producing the substrate according to Claim 1, characterized in that the substrate is manufactured by laminating a 1st insulating layer, which has a bonding layer made of the fluorine resin formed on two sides of the film made of the polyimide resin, and a 2nd insulating layers made of the fluorine resin, with the 2nd insulating layer being disposed on two sides of the 1st insulating layer, and further laminating the conductive layer on at least one external surface of the 2nd insulating layer, and bonding them by compression under heating atmosphere.
[Detailed description of the invention]
[Technical field]
[0001]
The present invention relates to a substrate and a manufacturing method thereof, and more particularly to a substrate which, after circuits are formed in it, does not curl, twist, or warp and has excellent thermal resistance, dimensional stability and electrical properties, and a manufacturing method of the substrate. This substrate has a low dielectric constant, so it can be used in a printed circuit board or antenna substrate used for a high frequency band.
[Background art]
[0002]
Conventionally, known substrates used in printed circuit boards or antennas for high frequency bands are composite sheets comprising a fluorine resin and a reinforcement material such as woven fabric/non-woven fabric/paper made of glass fiber or aramid fiber (for example, the one disclosed in Patent Literature 1). Since it is difficult to ensure adequate bonding performance between the reinforcement material and the fluorine resin, these substrates have the problems of easily formation of air bubbles at the interface and unsatisfactory reliability. In addition, as a method to solve these problems, a substrate consisting of a fluorine resin is also known as is disclosed in Patent Literature 2, but this substrate also has the problem of unsatisfactory dimensional stability.
[0003]
Patent Literature 1: Japanese laid-open patent publication No. 2003-171480
Patent Literature 2: Japanese laid-open patent publication No. H7-38215
[Disclosure of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
[0004]
To solve the aforesaid problems, the present invention provides a substrate, which can inhibit curling, twisting and warping during circuit board formation and thermal treatment and exhibits excellent thermal resistance, flame resistance, dimensional stability and electrical properties, and a method for manufacturing such a substrate.
[Means to solve the problem]
[0005]
To solve the aforesaid problems, the inventors of the present invention have conducted extensive researches and found that the aforesaid problems can be solved by forming a conductive layer on at least one external surface of insulating layers which have a fluorine resin film laminated respectively on two sides of a polyimide resin film, and limiting the thickness structure of the polyimide resin film and the fluorine resin films, and further limiting the bonding strength between the insulating layers to a certain range, and achieved the present invention thereby.
[0006]
In one aspect, the present invention relates to a substrate, characterized in that, a conductive layer is provided on at least one external surface of an insulating layer which has a film made of a fluorine resin laminated respectively on two sides of a film made of a polyimide resin, wherein the thickness of the entire insulating layer is 25~500 m, the thickness of the film made of the polyimide resin is 0.05~1.0 times the total thickness of the films made of the fluorine resin, and the bonding strength between the insulating layers is 5.0 N/cm or more.
/3
[0007]
In another aspect, the present invention provides a method for manufacturing the substrate, characterized in that the substrate is manufactured by laminating a 1st insulating layer, which has a bonding layer made of the fluorine resin formed on two sides of the film made of the polyimide resin, and a 2nd insulating layers made of the fluorine resin, with the 2nd insulating layer being disposed on two sides of the 1st insulating layer, and further laminating the conductive layer on at least one external surface of the 2nd insulating layer, and bonding them by compression under heating atmosphere.
[Effects of the invention]
[0008]
According to the present invention, a substrate having excellent thermal resistance, flame resistance, and electrical properties, outstanding dimensional stability and low dielectric constant can be obtained by forming an insulating layer by laminating a film made of a fluorine resin respectively on two sides of a film made of a polyimide resin, forming a conductive layer on an external surface of the insulating layer, and defining the thickness structure of the polyimide resin film and the fluorine resin film that constitute the insulating layer. Further, the excellent bonding between the insulating layers leads to improved mechanical properties, such as dimensional stability, curling property, resistance to repeated bending, which make the substrate of the present invention a superior substrate that is free of curling, twisting or warping even after etching treatment or other thermal treatment for forming circuits.
Further, the substrate of the present invention can be easily obtained according to the method for producing the substrate of the present invention.
[Best mode to implement the invention]
[0009]
The present invention is described in detail below.
As a substrate of the present invention, it is necessary to provide a conductive layer on an external surface of the insulating layer, which has a film made of a fluorine resin laminated respectively on two sides of a film made of a polyimide resin. By directly forming the insulating layer on the conductive layer without a bonding layer between them results in a substrate which has excellent thermal resistance, flame resistance, electrical properties and outstanding dimensional stability even under a high-temperature atmosphere, and inhibits curling, twisting, or warping even during etching or other thermal treatment. In addition, a bonding strength between the insulating layers that is suitable for the substrate can be obtained by integrating the polyimide resin film and the fluorine resin film with a specific bonding layer. Specifically, the bonding strength between the insulating layers is preferably 5.0 N/cm or more, more preferably 10 N/cm or more. When the bonding strength between the insulating layers is less than 5.0 N/cm, the substrate may not be used.
[0010]
Moreover, as the substrate of the present invention, the thickness of the entire insulating layer needs to be in the range of 25~500 m, preferably 50~300 m. When the thickness of the entire insulating layer is less than 25 m, the electrical insulation is inadequate, leading to compromised substrate reliability. Further, when the thickness of the entire insulating layer exceeds 500 m, the mechanical properties including resistance to repeated bending of the substrate are compromised.
[0011]
In addition, the thickness of the film of the polyimide resin that constitutes the insulating layer is preferably 0.05~1.0 times the total thickness of the films made of the fluorine resin. When the thickness of the film made of the polyimide resin is less than 0.05 times the total thickness of the films made of the fluorine resin, the rigidity of the insulating layer is reduced. In addition, the coefficient of thermal expansion (CTE) of the insulating layer tends to increase, leading to reduced rigidity and dimensional stability of the substrate. When the thickness of the film made of the polyimide resin exceeds 1.0 time the total thickness of the films made of the fluorine resin, the rigidity or dimensional stability of the substrate are improved, but its dielectric constant is increased, so such a thickness structure is not preferable.
[0012]
It should be noted that the thickness of each fluorine resin film disposed on two sides of the polyimide resin film is not particularly restricted, as long as the total thickness of them falls within the aforesaid range, but preferably they have the same thickness as this will reduce curling, twisting or warping.
[0013]
/4
In this way, when the thicknesses of the polyimide resin film and the fluorine resin films that constitute the insulating layer have a certain thickness structure, it will improve the electrical properties, and mechanical properties including resistance to repeated bending and excellent dimensional stability. Therefore, curling, twisting or warping are inhibited even if the conductive layer undergoes etching treatment to form circuits, and various thermal treatments subsequent to the formation of the circuits.
[0014]
The film made of the polyimide resin that constitutes the insulating layer is not particularly restricted but is preferably a film made of a non-thermoplastic aromatic polyimide having a glass transition temperature of 300°C or above as determined using a thermo-mechanical analyzer (TMA). Examples of the aromatic polyimide having such thermal properties include the aromatic polyimide represented by the following structural formula (1).
中国語 から 英語: 一种南美白对虾的沉性膨化颗粒饲料及其制备方法 General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 農業
翻訳 - 英語 An Expanded Sinking Pellet Feed for South American White Shrimp and
Method for Preparing Thereof
Technical Field
[0001]
The present invention relates to a feed for South American white shrimp, and specifically relates to an expanded sinking pellet feed for South American white shrimp and method for preparing thereof.
Background Art
[0002]
In China, South American white shrimp is usually cultivated by feeding pelleted feed made by ring die pellet mills. As a sinking, hard pallet of formula feed, the pellet made by ring die pellet mills contains more than 60% ingredients of animal origin and have a cooked degree of only 30-60%. The thermosensitive ingredients are added before pelletizing or can only be added restrictedly, hence a low content of thermosensitive ingredients and a feed coefficient of 1.3 or above. If a bonding agent is used, the hard pellet of formula feed is stable in water for less than 2 hours and the feed pellet prematurely disintegrates, leading to considerable loss of nutritional ingredients, low feed utilization rate, serious waste of feed, and potential water pollution. When shrimps are cultivated at a large scale, the residual feed and excrements cause considerable organic pollution as well as high nitrogen and phosphorus emissions to the water body. The unrestricted discharge and recycling of the water for shrimp farming without treatment, the lack of virus quarantine, and the effect of inferior water quality cause virus cross-infection, such as the outbreak of shrimp white spot syndrome in the same sea area, leading to the death of a large number of shrimps and considerably decreased shrimp yield, leading to the need to use large quantities of antibiotics to prevent the outbreak of such diseases; the production costs per unit shrimp are also high. For the purpose of international trade, several developed countries have set control limits on the contents of hazardous substances (such as antibiotics, heavy metals) in aquatic products, especially shrimp products, have enacted environmental protection legislations and strict, compulsory technical standards that require that imported shrimp products have the “green environment symbol”, that customs authorities implement the “green hygiene quarantine system”, and that the industrial and commercial administration put in place a registration system. The shrimp products exported from China still have some gap to catch up with these technical standards and the shrimp export market is facing stern challenges.
[0003]
With improved standard of living, enhanced quality of life, and rising health awareness and environmental protection awareness among the public, strict demand has been imposed on the quality of aquatic products. More attention is paid to the safety and health of aquatic products in addition to their nutritional value, flavor, edibility, price and size. Currently, there is no expanded sinking feed that is suitable for white shrimp. An expanded sinking feed suitable for the white shrimp with reasonable nutrients, lower density and smaller feed coefficient can be obtained only after conducting creative studies and experiments on the ingredients of the feed, the contents of individual ingredients and a suitable production process.
Summary of the Invention
[0004]
The technical problem to be solved by the present invention is to provide a fully-cooked and expanded sinking pellet feed for South American white shrimp which contains small amounts of ingredients of animal origin, is free from anti-nutritional factors, has a feed coefficient of 1.1 or less, and is stable in water for more than 12 hours.
[0005]
The present invention further provides a method for preparing the aforesaid expanded sinking pellet feed for South American white shrimp. This method can be used to obtain a fully-cooked and expanded sinking pellet feed for South American white shrimp that has a high stability in water and low feed coefficient through a reasonable formula and suitable processing parameters.
[0006]
The technical solution used in the present invention to solve the aforesaid technical problem is as follows: an expanded sinking pellet feed for South American white shrimp having a density greater than 1.03 and a cooked degree of 100% is obtained by preparing a base mix containing the following ingredients expressed in parts by weight: 22.6-32 parts of red fishmeal, 5 parts of squid liver paste, 3 parts of shrimp shell meal, 11-11.5 parts of flour, 5-12 parts of wheat, 20-30 parts of non-genetically modified soybean meal, 5-6 parts of rapeseed meal, 7-8 parts of peanut meal, 0-5 parts of cubed cassava, 2 parts of mineral premix, 0.2-0.3 part of vitamin premix, 1.5 parts of monocalcium phosphate, 1.5 parts of fish oil, 3 parts of calcium propionate, 1.5 parts of phospholipid oil and 2-6 parts of DDGS, conditioning the base mix for 160-200 seconds at a steam pressure of 0.4-0.5 MPa, a humidity of 19-23%, and a temperature of 85-90°C
/4
in a twin-screw, fully-cooking puffing extruder, and cooking the base mix for 90-120 seconds at a temperature of 135°C and a cavity pressure of 3 MPa. The total amount of the ingredients of animal origin including red fishmeal, squid liver paste, and shrimp shell meal shall not exceed 40% of the total weight of the ingredients.
[0007]
The carrier for the mineral premix is zeolite, and each kilogram of the mineral premix contains the following minerals expressed in parts by weight: 135.5632-271.1264 mg of magnesium, 169.604-339.208 mg of sodium, 535.2-1070.4 mg of potassium, 28.48-56.96 mg of iron, 4.9056-9.8112 mg of copper, 20.034-40.068 mg of manganese, 41.6871-83.3742 mg of zinc, 0.1-0.2 mg of selenium, 0.2-0.4 mg of cobalt, and 0.4-0.8 mg of iodine; the ingredients in the mineral premix not only meet the requirements of white shrimp, but also avoid the adverse effect induced by excessive intake.
[0008]
The carrier for the vitamin premix is corn protein powder, and each kilogram of the corn protein powder contains the following vitamins expressed in parts by weight: 5000-7500 IU of vitamin A, 1000-1500 IU of vitamin D3, 190-285 mg of vitamin C, 22.5-33.75 mg of vitamin B1, 50-75 mg of vitamin E, 75-112.5 mg of niacin,19-28.5 mg of vitamin B2, 0.04-0.06 mg of vitamin B12, 20-30 mg of vitamin B6, 11.25-16.875 mg of vitamin K3, 4-6 mg of folic acid, 43-64.5 mg of D-pantothenic acid, 0.75-1.125 mg of D-biotin, and160-240 mg of inositol; the vitamin ingredients in the vitamin premix not only meet the requirements of white shrimp, but also avoid the adverse effect induced by excessive intake.
[0009]
The method for preparing the pellet feed comprises weighing the ingredients according to the respective parts by weight, mixing all the ingredients under stirring, crushing the ingredients two times, sieving the ingredients through a 60-mesh sieve, mixing the ingredients again under stirring, adding water under stirring, thereby obtaining a base mix containing 15-25% water; feeding the aforesaid base mix into a twin-screw, fully-cooking puffing extruder, conditioning the base mix for 160-200 seconds at a steam pressure of 0.4-0.5 MPa, a humidity of 19-23%, and a temperature of 85-90°C, cooking the base mix for 90-120 seconds at a cavity pressure of 3 MPa, a temperature of 135°C, and a screw rotation speed of 450-500 r/min., and extruding the cooked base mix through the die orifice, thereby obtaining the pellet feed; coating, preferably by vacuum coating, the pellet feed with a thermosensitive substance (oil, grease, etc.), thereby obtaining the finished pellet feed product. The ingredient composition of the formula is suitable for preparing a pellet feed with a relatively high density. Due to the high-temperature, high-pressure process, the pellet feed has various advantages, for example, the combined action of the thermal energy of steam, the mechanical friction energy and the pressure enables the sterilization and complete cooking of the feed, the complete destruction of the anti-nutritional factors as well as adequate starch gelatinization and protein denaturation, leading to increased feed digestion rate, increased feed energy, and improved feed stability. Although the pressure is reduced and the base mix is properly expanded in the instant when the base mix is extruded into the atmosphere through the die orifice so that it becomes an expanded feed, the finished pellet feed product obtained has a density greater than 1.03. The twin-screw, fully-cooking puffing extruder was purchased from Wenger, a US company.
[0010]
Compared with the prior art, the present invention has the following advantages: an expanded sinking pellet feed for South American white shrimp has a density greater than 1.03 and a cooked degree of 100%, and is obtained by preparing a base mix containing the following ingredients expressed in parts by weight: 22.6-32 parts of red fishmeal, 5 parts of squid liver paste, 3 parts of shrimp shell meal, 11-11.5 parts of flour, 5-12 parts of wheat, 20-30 parts of non-genetically modified soybean meal, 5-6 parts of rapeseed meal, 7-8 parts of peanut meal, 0-5 parts of cubed cassava, 2 parts of mineral premix, 0.2-0.3 part of vitamin premix, 1.5 parts of monocalcium phosphate, 1.5 parts of fish oil, 3 parts of calcium propionate, 1.5 parts of phospholipid oil and 2-6 parts of DDGS, conditioning the base mix for 160-200 seconds at a steam pressure of 0.4-0.5 MPa, a humidity of 19-23%, and a temperature of 85-90°C in a twin-screw, fully-cooking puffing extruder, and cooking the base mix for 90-120 seconds at a temperature of 135°C and a cavity pressure of 3 MPa; the extruded pellet feed prepared from the aforesaid formula under the aforesaid processing conditions has a density greater than 1.03 making it sinkable during feeding and a cooked degree of 100% and is free from all anti-nutritional factors but has a low feed coefficient of 1.1 or less; the pellet feed is stable in water for more than 12 hours even though it does not use a bonding agent, which is related to the formula and production process of the feed, for the combined action of high temperature and high pressure makes the flour, wheat, cassava, fishmeal, squid liver paste, soybean meal, rapeseed meal, and peanut meal undergo drastic changes in physicochemical properties to achieve adequate starch gelatinization and protein denaturation, leading to improved feed stability and a 21.8% increase in feed efficiency, a 23.1% increase in the survival rate of South American white shrimp and a 10% reduction in the production costs per kilogram of South American white shrimp. Therefore, the feed prepared is
/5
a fully cooked expanded sinking pellet feed for South American white shrimp, which contains small amounts of ingredients of animal origin, is free from all anti-nutritional factors, has a feed coefficient of 1.1 or less and is stable in water for more than 12 hours.
Specific Embodiments
[0011]
The present invention is further described below with reference to Examples.
[0012]
Example 1
[0013]
An expanded sinking pellet feed for South American white shrimp was prepared by the following method: weighing 27 kg of red fishmeal, 5 kg of squid liver paste, 3 kg of shrimp shell meal, 11-11.5 kg of flour, 8.5 kg of wheat, 25 kg of non-genetically modified soybean meal, 5-6 kg of rapeseed meal, 7-8 kg of peanut meal, 2 kg of cubed cassava, 2 kg of mineral premix, 0.2-0.3 kg of vitamin premix, 1.5 kg of monocalcium phosphate, 1.5 kg of fish oil, 3 kg of calcium propionate, 1.5 kg of phospholipid oil and 4 kg of DDGS, wherein the carrier for the mineral premix was zeolite, and each kilogram of the mineral premix contained the following minerals expressed in parts by weight: 203.3448 mg of magnesium, 239.406 mg of sodium, 802.8 mg of potassium, 42.72 mg of iron, 7.356 mg of copper, 30.05 mg of manganese, 62.4 mg of zinc, 0.1-0.2 mg of selenium, 0.2-0.4 mg of cobalt, 0.4-0.8 mg of iodine; the carrier for the vitamin premix was a corn protein powder, and each kilogram of the vitamin premix contained the following vitamins expressed in parts by weight: 6250 IU of vitamin A, 1250 IU of vitamin D3, 238 mg of vitamin C, 28.5 mg of vitamin B1, 63 mg of vitamin E, 94 mg of niacin, 24 mg of vitamin B2, 0.04-0.06 mg of vitamin B12, 25 mg of vitamin B6, 14.05 mg of vitamin K3, 4-6 mg of folic acid, 54 mg of D-pantothenic acid, 0.75-1.125 mg of D-biotin, and 200 mg of inositol; mixing all the ingredients under stirring, crushing two times, sieving through a 60-mesh sieve, loading into a charging barrel to mix well under stirring, and adding a suitable amount of water under stirring, thereby obtaining a base mix containing 15-25% water; feeding the base mix into a twin-screw, fully-cooking puffing extruder, firstly conditioning it for 160-200 seconds at a steam pressure of 0.4-0.5 MPa, a humidity of 19-23%, and a temperature of 85-90°C, then cooking for 90-120 seconds at a temperature of 135°C, a cavity pressure of 3 MPa and a screw rotation speed of 450-500 r/min., and extruding the cooked base mix through the die orifice, thereby obtaining the pellet feed; the finished pellet feed product was determined to have a density of 1.12, and a cooked degree of 100% and was stable for 12.9 hours in seawater.
[0014]
Example 2
[0015]
The same procedure as described in Example 1 was performed, except that 22.6 kg of red fishmeal, 5 kg of wheat, 20 kg of non-genetically modified soybean meal, and 2 kg of DDGS were added and no cubed cassava was added; each kilogram of the mineral premix contained the following minerals: 135.5632 mg of magnesium, 169.604 mg of sodium, 535.2 mg of potassium, 28.48 mg of iron, 4.9056 mg of copper, 20.034 mg of manganese, and 41.6871 mg of zinc; the carrier for the vitamin premix was a corn protein powder, and each kilogram of the vitamin premix contained the following vitamins: 5000 IU of vitamin A, 1000 IU of vitamin D3, 190 mg of vitamin C, 22.5 mg of vitamin B1, 50 mg of vitamin E, 75 mg of niacin, 19 mg of vitamin B2, 20 mg of vitamin B6, 11.25 mg of vitamin K3, 43 mg of D-pantothenic acid, and 160 mg of inositol; the finished pellet feed product was determined to have a density of 1.05 and a cooked degree of 100% and was stable for 13.5 hours in seawater.
翻訳 - 英語 III. HAase Gene Expression and Pathogenesis of Different Genus
HAases can also be produced by some bacteria, such as Staphylococcus, Clostridium, Propionibacterium, Peptostreptococcus, and Streptococcus Lancefield groups A, B, C and G in the Gram-positive cocci as well as Streptococcus pneumoniae, Streptococcus intermedia, Streptococcus mutans, Streptococcus constellation, Streptococcus suis, Streptococcus agalactiae and Streptococcus uberis [8]. These bacteria can cause meningitis and sepsis, with the pathogenesis somewhat related to the extracellularly produced HAase [9]. In addition, HAase can also be produced by bacteria such as Clostridium perfringens and Escherichia coli, and can decompose HA in connective tissues, thereby hydrolyzing connective tissues to make them lose their viscosity and loose, and to increase the cellular gap, which is beneficial to the spread of bacteria in tissues. Proteus vulgaris, Bacteroides thetaiotaomicron and Flavobacillus hepatinum cleave chondroitin sulfate and HA by producing chondroitin sulfatelyase.
(I) Streptococcus pyogenes HAase (hylA): Streptococcus pyogenes Lancefield group A, i.e., group A streptococcus pyogenes (GAS) is widely present in nature as well as in human and animal feces and in the nasopharyngeal part of healthy people. It is the most pathogenic streptococci and can clinically cause acute pharyngitis, erysipelas, impetigo, scarlet fever, iatrogenic wound infection and postpartum infection and so on. After infection, severe allergic diseases, such as acute and chronic rheumatic fever and acute glomerulonephritis can also occur. HAase (hylA) of GAS consists of 868 amino acids with a molecular weight of 99636 u and can be cleaved extracellularly to signal peptides of 95941 u. The hylA is stable under the acidic condition while easily deactivated under the alkaline condition, and its optimum pH is generally 3.5~6.5, indicating acidic. It has great genetic similarity with HAase produced by Streptococcus pneumoniae, Streptococcus agalactiae and Staphylococcus aureus [10]. The hylA mainly hydrolyzes HA, promotes the decomposition of connective tissues, increases the degree of tissue necrosis, and helps in the absorption and spread of toxins, thus leading to further spread and infection of pathogenic bacteria.
In 1995, Hynes et al [11] cloned 2 different phage HAase genes hylP and hylP2 from group A Streptococcus pyogenes producing HAase, and discovered that only 23% of 100 the strains of Group A streptococci with different serotypes produced extracellular HAase. However, detection of hylP and hylP2 by PCR has shown that 97% strains contain 1-2 such genes, indicating that multiple genes are involved in the HAase coding, and further proving the theory that HAase is an isoenzyme [12]. Despite of these progresses, it remains difficult to quantify such bacteria with phage-encoded HAase due to little knowledge about extracellular HAase. It is also difficult to detect to determine whether such enzymes in the cell contain the hylP and hylP2 genes. The possible reason for such difficulty may that these genes are not expressed at the prophage stage. Even if hylP2 is transferred to group A streptococci K56 not producing extracellular HAase or not containing hylP and hylP2 genes, the extracellular HAase cannot be detected. However, intracellular HAase could be detected after disruption of cells. This finding demonstrates that the phage enzyme is not secreted by bacteria after hylP2 gene is fully expressed. Although phage HAase may be encapsulated tightly in one intact phage, infectious strains mainly produce monomeric HAase and are not associated with phage particles [13]. This finding also indicates that the infection process can participate in the GAS lysis by inducing lysogenic phage, and release phage particles and monomeric HAase. It is speculated from the finding that the monomeric HAase released by body is actually a virulence factor of bacteria as it causes the primary infectious lesion to spread. On the other hand, the bacterial HAase is more direct. GAS contains a hyaluronic acid capsule that has a phage receptor. The bacteriophage is linked to HAase, or coated with enzyme to form an intact component that can penetrate the capsule. Once the capsule is penetrated, the phage will bind to the corresponding receptor, thus infecting another Streptococcus cell wall, and further spreading the infection.
They also found that inactivation of hylP2 did not reduce the extracellular HAase level, indicating that such strain contains another HAase gene that is present on chromosome and produces HAase, but it remains unknown whether this gene is present in all of GAS as
/3
most strains do not produce extracellular HAase activity. At present, it is controversial about what group A Streptococcus bacteria can actually produce HAase, whether the product is confined to a few serotypes, and whether all of GAS can produce HAase, but it is certain that the hyaluronidase genes of chromosome-determined GAS play an important role as a diffusion factor in streptococcal infectious diseases.
(II) Streptococcus agalactiae HAase (hylB): Streptococcus agalactiae belongs to Streptococcus Lancefield group A and can cause sepsis and meningitis in newborns and genitourinary infections in women, while the group B Streptococcus III containing intact hyaluronidase genes is identified as the major pathogen in many neonatal invasive diseases [14]. Strongly invasive Streptococcus agalactiae strains produce higher levels of extracellular HAase than those with no clinical signs after infection.
The hylB degrades HA in a unique manner. It degrades HA by moving forward along the hyaluronic acid chain and continuously releasing the disaccharide product rather than randomly decomposing the hyaluronic acid chain into the fragments of oligosaccharide mixture [15]. The hylB is an important virulence factor of Streptococcus agalactiae, but is little understood about its pathogenesis. At present, it is known that it can lead to the spread of infection with the bacteria as the carrier, and can also destroy certain immune functions of body. HA and its bound molecules are closely related to the function of the body immune system [16], for example, neutrophils and macrophages have many HAase receptors (CD44) on their surface, and hylB may strongly interfere with the function of these cells.
(III) Streptococcus pneumoniae HAase (SpnHL): SpnHL is a structural unit composed of 2 interacting interface residues via peptide chain linker, and Akhtar et al. [17] have found that SpnHL has the folded amino terminal, but unfolded and relatively independent carboxyl terminal, suggesting that there be no significant synergic relationship between the two terminals and that this finding should have important guiding significance for development of chemical inhibitors of SpnHL. Double mutants containing SpnHL and Streptococcus pneumoniae lysozyme are significantly more virulence, so SpnHL inhibitors are expected to be used at the early stage of Streptococcus pneumoniae infection to reduce the spread of pathogens and as potential candidate for development of new vaccines.
SpnHL is a "diffusion factor" of Streptococcus pneumoniae, and after colonized at upper respiratory tract, the bacteria act against HA of tissues through HAase, thus promoting the spread of bacteria into the blood stream and causing meningitis, sepsis, etc. Studies have shown that intranasal administration of HAase to mice with meningitis infected by Streptococcus pneumoniae can increase the pathogenic toxicity of bacteria, while the strains of Streptococcus pneumoniae producing more enzymes are significantly more pathogenic than those producing fewer enzymes [18]. HAase is also an important pathogenic factor for lobar pneumonia, but it remains inconclusive whether this enzyme plays an important role in sepsis [19]. It has been found in recent years that HAase is significantly more expressed in non-competent deficient strains of Streptococcus pneumoniae than that in the control group, indicating that its expression is significantly correlated with the competent state, and there are some differences in virulence gene expression between before and after the competent state, as well as between the competent deficient strains and wild strains, suggesting that: the formation of bacterial competent state plays an important role in the process of bacterial conditioned pathogenicity, but the molecular mechanism remains to be further studied [20].
(IV) Streptococcus suis HAase: Streptococcus suis belongs to the Lancefield group D, and it can cause arthritis and many infectious diseases such as meningitis, sepsis and pneumonia in pigs, and occasionally invasive diseases in human, such as meningitis, sepsis and endocarditis. Streptococcus suis has several virulence factors, but has not been found to have factors that can cause disease alone.
King et al [21] have found that HAase is a virulence factor protein of mucosal pathogen. The HAase gene can be detected in all of Streptococcus suis strains, but the expression of active proteins is found in only 29.4% of the strains, indicating that HAase activity is not present in all of the isolated Streptococcus suis pathogenic strains.
In the pneumonia-associated bacteria, HAase activity is highly expressed, indicating that HAase may play an important role in lung diseases, but its pathogenicity is mainly present in the typical invasive diseases such as meningitis and sepsis rather than in the colonized pneumonia.
(V) Enterococcus faecium HAase (hyaluronidase, Hyl): Enterococcus faecium is originally classified into group D Streptococcus and later classified as an independent genus, but it has many characteristics similar to those of Streptococcus. After the identification of HAase gene sequences of bacteria such as GAS and the completion of genome sequencing of Enterococcus faecium, Rice et al [22] have conducted an analogy analysis of the genome of Enterococcus faecium, and found that there is a 1659 bp open reading frame in the chromosomal gene sequence of Enterococcus faecalis and that its DNA sequence and the encoded amino acid sequence (553 amino acids) are 63% and 45% homologous to those of Streptococcus pyogenes HAase gene. They named this gene as the hyaluronidase gene (hyl) for Enterococcus faecium. In order to further demonstrate the function of hyl and understand the relationship between this gene and the pathogenicity of Enterococcus faecium, the scholars in China found in 2006 that the clinically isolated infective Enterococcus faecium strains had a significantly higher positive rate of hyl than in non-clinical infective strains. Although the positive rate of hyl was slightly lower in clinically isolated strains than that in enterococcal surface protein (esp), another virulence gene of Enterococci faecium (59.23%), both of them were negative in non-clinical isolated strains. This result indicates that hyl may be similar to esp and is one of the virulence factors encoding Enterococcus faecium, and the combined effect of these two factors will contribute to an enhanced virulence of Enterococcus faecium [23].
(VI) Staphylococcus aureus HAase (hysA): HAase is a potential virulence factor of Staphylococcus aureus, but it has not received due attention for a long time. As early as in 1969, Choudhuri et al [24] have found that 91.2% of Staphylococcus aureus can produce HAase. In 1990, Devriese et al. [25] made it clear that Staphylococcus suis, one of the animal conditioned pathogens, can also produce HAase and is a pathogenic factor for respiratory infection in pigs. In 1993, Pritchard et al. [26] demonstrated that HAase was a virulence factor of group B Streptococcus agalactiae and believed that it was also a virulence factor of Staphylococcus aureus. In 2004, Makris et al [27] found that the enzyme-producing bacteria have stronger virulence.
日本語 から 英語: POLYLACTIC ACID RESIN SHEET FOR THERMOFORMING General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 Claims
[Claim 1]
A sheet for thermoforming, composed of a polylactic acid resin composition, which contains in the polylactic acid resin, 0.5~3.5 parts by mass of a plasticizer and 0.15~0.45 parts by mass of an organic nucleating agent, relative to 100 parts by mass of the polylactic acid resin.
[Claim 2]
The sheet for thermoforming as claimed in claim 1, wherein the sheet for thermoforming has a glass transition point of 50~60°C.
[Claim 3]
The sheet for thermoforming as claimed in claim 1 or 2, wherein the semi-crystallization time of the sheet for thermoforming is 5~27 seconds, and the thermoformed product has a haze value of 0.1~8.0%.
[Claim 4]
The sheet for thermoforming as claimed in any one of claims 1~3, wherein the organic nucleating agent contains an aliphatic compound which contains, in its molecule, a total of 2 or more groups selected from 1, or 2 or more from the group consisting of an ester group, a hydroxyl group, and an amide group.
[Claim 5]
The sheet for thermoforming as claimed in any one of claims 1~4, wherein the plasticizer contains a compound which contains, in its molecule, 2 or more ester groups.
[Claim 6]
The sheet for thermoforming as claimed in any one of claims 1~5, wherein the polylactic acid resin composition further contains a nonionic surfactant expressed by a formula (1) shown below:
R1-O(A1O)p-R2 (1)
[in the formula, R1 indicates an alkyl group having a carbon number of 8~22, an acyl group having a total carbon number of 8~22, or a hydrogen atom, R2 indicates a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having a carbon number of 1~4, or an acyl group having a total carbon number of 2~4, A1 indicates an alkylene group having a carbon number of 2 or 3, and p indicates the average number of moles of an oxyalkylene group added and is a number meeting 0 < p ≤ 300, p oxyalkylene groups expressed by (A1O) may be the same or different, and if different, a repeating unit may be of either of a block type or a random type].
[Claim 7]
The sheet for thermoforming as claimed in any one of claims 1~6, wherein the sheet for thermoforming is an amorphous or semi-crystalline sheet.
[Claim 8]
A method for manufacturing the sheet for thermoforming, comprising the following steps (A) and (B), wherein
/39
step (A): a step of preparing a formed sheet product by extruding a polylactic acid resin composition with an extruder having a temperature of 170~240°C, wherein the polylactic acid resin composition contains, in the polylactic acid resin, 0.5~3.5 parts by mass of a plasticizer and 0.15~0.45 parts by mass of an organic nucleating agent, relative to 100 parts by mass of the polylactic acid resin
step (B): a step of cooling the formed sheet product obtained in step (A) by bringing it into contact with a cooling roll having a temperature of 40°C or lower.
[Claim 9]
A method for manufacturing a thermoformed product, comprising the following steps (1) and (2):
step (1): a step of heating the sheet for thermoforming as claimed in any one of claims 1~7 within a temperature range of above the glass transition point (Tg) and below the melting point (Tm) of said polylactic acid resin composition
step (2): a step of thermoforming the sheet obtained in step (1) with a mold having a mold temperature of 60~140°C.
[Claim 10]
The manufacturing method as claimed in claim 9, wherein relative crystallinity of the thermoformed product is 80% or above.
[Claim 11]
A formed product, which is manufactured by vacuum molding or pressure molding the sheet for thermoforming as claimed in any one of claims 1~7.
[Claim 12]
A secondary processing method of the sheet for thermoforming as claimed in any one of claims 1~7, characterized by using vacuum molding or pressure molding.
[Claim 13]
A packaging material made of the formed product as claimed in claim 11.
[Claim 14]
A sheet for thermoforming, which has a glass transition point of 50~60°C and a semi-crystallization time of 5~27 seconds, and which can be used to obtain a thermoformed product that has a haze value of 0.1~8.0%.
中国語 から 英語: Preparation of Non-sustained-release Antimicrobial Material Containing Macromolecular Quaternary Ammonium Salt General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療(一般)
原書のテキスト - 中国語 3结论
a. MQAS/SiO2微粒中烷基化PEI长链的分子量对其抗菌效果有显著影响。PEI分子量越大，MQAS/SiO2微粒的抗菌效果越明显。
b. MQAS/SiO2微粒经甲基化修饰后，季铵盐含量由原先的0.96%增加到3.37%，对细菌的抗菌率由65%左右增加到99.9%以上，对酵母菌的抗菌率也由56%增加到96%，抗菌性能明显增强。
c.与未经彻底洗涤的MQAS/SiO2微粒相比，经多次彻底洗涤样品的抗菌性能并没有明显下降，这表明抗菌分子与SiO2载体化学键合稳定，高分子季铵盐不易脱落，MQAS/SiO2微粒的抗菌效果不是通过缓释抗菌分子起作用。
翻訳 - 英語 3 Conclusion
a. The molecular weight of the alkylated PEI long chain in the MQAS/SiO2 particles remarkably affected the antimicrobial effect of the particles. The higher the molecular weight of PEI, the greater the antimicrobial effect of the MQAS/SiO2 particles.
b. The methylated MQAS/SiO2 particles had an increase in the quaternary ammonium salt content from 0.96% to 3.37%, an increase in the antibacterial rate against bacteria from around 65% to 99.9% or more, and an increase in the antibacterial rate against yeast from 56% to 96% as well, indicating remarkably improved antimicrobial performance.
c. Compared with the unwashed MQAS/SiO2 particles, the samples that had undergone several times of thorough washing did not exhibit remarkably declined antimicrobial performance, which indicates the chemical bond between the antimicrobial molecules and the SiO2 carrier was stable, so the quaternary ammonium salt did not easily come off, and that the MQAS/SiO2 particles achieved the antimicrobial effect not through sustained-release antimicrobial molecules.
日本語 から 英語: ESTABLISHMENT OF MAIL MEDICAL EXAMINATION SYSTEM USING IMMEDIATE PLASMA SEPARATING DEVICE BY THE SELF-COLLECTION BLOOD - THE METHOD OF DILUTION RATIO CALCULATION BY USING INTERNAL STANDARD FOR THE SAMPLE WITH DIFFERENT AMOUNT OF COLLECTING BLOOD General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療(一般)
原書のテキスト - 日本語 V. 考察
デメカルデバイス検査システムでの検体希釈緩衝液の内部標準物質としては，以下に示す条件が求められる。①体液中に存在しない物質であること，②生体成分およびその分析系に影響を与えないこと，③内部標準分析糸が生体内成分によって影響を受けないこと，④長期的に安定な物質であること，⑤検体希釈緩衝液に任意な量の溶解が可能であること，⑥簡便な方法で高感度な分析が可能であること，⑦採血容器，ろ過膜等の素材への吸着，溶出がないこと，⑧比較的安価であること，などがある。
以上のことを考慮し，採取量の異なる試料に対して内部標準物質を用いた吸光分析によるDR算定法の開発を行った。
翻訳 - 英語 V. Consideration
The following conditions are required for the internal standard substance of the sample-diluting buffer solution in the DEMECAL device testing system. (1) The substance does not exist in the body fluid, (2) it does not affect the biological component and the analysis system thereof, (3) the internal standard analysis system is not affected by the biological component, (4) it is a long-term stable substance, (5) any amount can be dissolved in the sample-diluting buffer, (6) high-sensitivity analysis can be done with a simple method, (7) it will not adsorb or be eluted to the blood collection container or filtration membrane, etc., and (8) it is relatively inexpensive.
In consideration of the above, we developed a DR calculation
/7
method by spectrophotometry using an internal standard for different amounts of the samples collected.
In this study, it was possible to obtain the predefined results by using G3P, but regarding condition (3) of the internal standard substance, G3P was decomposed 7) by ALP in the sample, so this condition was not satisfied. Therefore, it was necessary to add excessive EDTA-2Na and add KH2PO4, an ALP inhibitor 8), which resulted in decreased AST activity. Therefore, AST activity was stabilized by adding PALP. As a result, the activity level increased by 23%, which is believed to be due to the fact that AST was bound to coenzyme (PALP) to become a holoenzyme. This change was proportional and systematic so it could be corrected. Further, adding phosphoric acid did not affect other biochemical items (Table 4).
As shown in Table 3 and Fig. 3, it was found that reliable measurement values could be obtained by using dilution ratios around 7.0-fold from the viewpoint of accuracy and precision.
The red blood cell membrane has the transport function to keep the intracellular concentration of the necessary components constant relative to the extracellular components, and in the case of water, the concentration gradient inside and outside the cells immediately reaches a balance 8) 9). From the experiment of the osmotic pressure of the sample-diluting buffer solution and the water movement between the buffer solution and the red blood cells, the phenomenon of water moving from the sample-diluting buffer solution to the red blood cells at a low osmotic pressure and water moving from the red blood cells to the sample-diluting buffer solution at a high osmotic pressure was observed.
For example, at 295 mOsm/kg·• H2O and 349 mOsm/kg·• H2O, the DR changed from 6.53-fold to 5.89-fold, which is believed to be due to the migration of approximately 5.2 l of water from the red blood cells to the sample-diluting buffer.
The osmotic pressure of the sample-diluting buffer set in this study was set to a high level (349 mOsm/kg·• H2O) to prevent hemolysis. For this reason, E1 was diluted by the water that had migrated from the blood cells 8) 9) and the effect was manifested as an error in DR. In addition, since the samples were whole blood, it is considered that the low molecular weight mass migration due to the concentration gradient balance inside and outside the erythrocyte membrane had an effect. Although the slope of the regression equation obtained from the correlation of various test items between the raw serum and this method was different for each item, it was a proportional systematic change, so it could be adjusted with a certain coefficient (R coefficient) for each item.
This change derived from erythrocytes was defined as the R coefficient (Table 4), and it was possible to guarantee the same accuracy as cholesterol by setting the R coefficient for each item based on the correlation with the raw serum.
VI. Conclusion
A transport test method using the dilution ratio calculated by measurement of the internal standard absorbance was established for varied amounts of plasma samples resulting from self-blood collection and hematocrit values. This system greatly contributes to the improved consultation rate and health management because of the high level of flexibility in time and place for doing the medical testing.
中国語 から 英語: Application Analysis of Improved DPSO Algorithm in Jamming Resource Assignment General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: テレコミュニケーション
翻訳 - 英語 The specific procedure of the algorithm is as follows:
(1) Initialize the settings: Randomly initialize M number of particles in which the number of dimensions for each particle is N according to the scale of the problem to be solved, calculate the fitness value of each particle according to the established fitness function, initialize the best position pbesti, i = 1, 2, ∙∙∙∙∙∙, M, of the particles themselves, find the particle to which the maximum value corresponds and use it as the initial best position gbest of the particle swarm. Initialize the running velocity vector vi = (vi1, vi2, ∙∙∙∙∙∙, viN), i = 1, 2, ∙∙∙∙∙∙, M, of particles and set the maximum number of iterations or the required precision.
(2) Calculate the current positions of the particles according to the velocity updating formula and the position updating formula of the particles, rearrange the particles, and utilize the given jamming effect matrix to calculate the fitness values of the rearranged particles. Generate a random number k between 1~M for each particle pi, i = 1, 2, ∙∙∙∙∙∙, M, with the corresponding particle being pk, k = 1, 2, ∙∙∙∙∙∙，M, compare the fitness value of particle pi with the fitness value of particle pbestk, and if the fitness value of particle pi is greater, update the current particle value to pbestk.
(3) Randomly generate several pairs of position points according to the scale of a single particle, interchange the values of each pair of position points, and, based on the updated particle positions, again update the best values which the particles themselves correspond to.
(4) Compare the best position pbesti, i = 1, 2, ∙∙∙∙∙∙, M, of each particle pi, i = 1, 2, ∙∙∙∙∙∙, M, with the corresponding fitness value of gbest, and if the fitness value of gbesti is greater, update the gbest to pbesti.
(5) Determine whether the condition for iterations is satisfied, if the condition is satisfied, go back to steps (2), (3) and (4) to continue iterations, or otherwise, end the algorithm and output the global best value. The final gbest is the jamming resource assignment solution.
4 Simulation and Analysis
Configurations of the simulation computer: Intel Pentium (R) processor, 512 M memory, matlab 7.0 software environment.
In the following example, at one point in time, the penetration and jamming system learns that 5 radar installations have great threats and need to be jammed immediately, and 5 jammers are available in the jamming system.
The jamming effects of each jammer on radar installations are listed in the following matrix.
中国語 から 英語: A clinical study of metformin in improving heart function in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus complicated with diastolic heart failure General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 心臓病学
翻訳 - 英語 1 Data and methods
1.1 Subjects
This study enrolled 170 patients with type 2 diabetes complicated with diastolic heart failure who had been treated at the Southwest Hospital of the Third Military Medical University from January to December 2010. The diagnosis of patients with type 2 diabetes complicated with diastolic heart failure meets the diagnostic criteria specified in the 2009 ACC/AHA Guidelines for the Diagnosis and Management of Heart Failure in Adults and the diagnostic criteria specified in the guidelines for the prevention and treatment of type 2 diabetes in China. Patients were given standard treatment in accordance with relevant guidelines, had their heart failure controlled at a stable condition, and had signed the informed consent form.
Inclusion criteria: aged 50~80 years at time of enrollment, having chronic diastolic heart failure with stable symptoms, NYHA grades II~III, having received standard treatment for heart failure for more than 3 months and being in a stable condition, and agreeing to follow-up visits at the outpatient clinic.
Exclusion criteria: Patients with counter-indications for metformin or having received metformin or having the history of allergy to metformin, or having significant valvular heart disease, chronic atrial fibrillation, obstructive hypertrophic cardiomyopathy or restrictive cardiomyopathy and other serious diseases.
1.2 Study methods
This study was designed as a prospective, randomized, double-blind and controlled study. The study drug metformin and the placebo with the same package, shape and strength as the study drug were provided by study staff (all purchased from Chia Tai Tianqing Co., Ltd.). All of the 170 patients discontinued with their previous hypoglycemic drugs and were randomized into metformin group and the control group according to the random number table to receive “metformin 500mg twice daily” and placebo, respectively, as the baseline treatment and were considered meeting the blood glucose requirement when the fasting glucose was ≤ 7.0 mmol/L and the no-fasting glucose ≤ 10.0 mmol/L for 3 consecutive days. If this criterion was not met, a hypoglycemic agent in addition to biguanides was added until the blood glucose reached said required level. Patients with the blood glucose not reaching the required level after 2 weeks of treatment were withdrawn from this study. Patients in the two groups were strictly controlled for the etiology and cause of CHF, and given conventional drugs, including diuretics, angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitor (ACEI), -blockers, and both groups maintained their respective treatment regimens described above. The study was unblinded for the two groups after 12 months of continued drug administration, and the following measurement were taken at 3, 6, 9 and 12 months after inclusion into the study, and a statistical analysis was performed.
1.3 Outcome measures
1.3.1 6 min. walking distance
The subjects were asked to walk back and forth on a 30 m long sidewalk, and the maximum walking distance within the specified 6 min. was recorded, before the study walk, there were 2 orientation walks to orient the subjects to the process of test, and the study walk was performed after at least 1 h and was repeated 2 times to bring the total to 4 walks, and if the difference between the 4 walks was within 10%, then the result of the 4 walks was used as the baseline value, and if the difference was > 10%, 1 more study walk would be performed, and their mean value was taken as the baseline value.
1.3.2 Echocardiography
Echocardiograph was performed using a Philips iE33 echocardiograph and by the same examiner who was kept blinded to patient clinical data and biochemical data. Ultrasonography was performed in accordance with the ultrasound guidelines and specifications of the American College of Cardiology and the American Society of Echocardiography. The parameters by M-mode ultrasound, including left ventricular end-diastolic dimension (LVEDD), left ventricular end-systolic dimension (LVESD), inter-ventricular septal thickness (IVSD) and posterior wall dimension (PWD), were collected. The LVEF was calculated using the Teicholz formula. The left ventricular mass (LVM) was calculated using the formula Devereux: LVM = 1.04 [(LVEDD + IVSD + PWD)3 - LVEDD3] - 14. The left ventricular mass index (LVMI) was defined as: LVMI = LVM / body surface area. Meanwhile, the mitral peak early diastolic filling velocity to peak late diastolic filling velocity (E/A) and diastolic deceleration time (DT) were determined. M-mode and Doppler ultrasound parameters were measured continuously for 5 cardiac cycles, and their mean values were used.
1.3.3 Detection of serum biochemical markers for heart failure
The blood samples were collected and retained for all patients before and after intervention. The enrolled patients were placed still in a supine position for 10 min., and their venous blood was collected from the median veins of the elbow and injected into a non-anticoagulation test tube. After placed still at room temperature for 30 min., it would be centrifuged at 4°C at 3000 r/min. for 10 min., and the separated serum would be cryopreserved at -80°C until tested. The serum levels of growth differentiation factor-15 (GDF-15) and N-terminal pro-brain natriuretic
/3
peptide (NT-proBNP) were measured using commercially available kits (purchased from USCN Life Science & Technology) by enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay. The kits contained an enzyme label coated with a target protein antibody, a target protein standard product, a sample diluent, a diluent, a diluent, a detection reagent, a detection reagent, a rinsing buffer substrate, a stop solution, and an acetate sealing film.
1.4 Statistical methods
SPSS17.0 software was employed for statistical analysis. The measurement data were presented as , the paired t test was used for intragroup comparison in normal distribution, and the independent samples t test was used for intergroup comparison, and the u-test was used for non-normal distribution; the X2 test was used for comparison of count data.
日本語 から 英語: Method for producing alkyl glycoside General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 3. Detailed description of the invention
[Industrial field]
The present invention relates to a method for producing an alkyl glycoside or a synthetic intermediate thereof, which is a useful surfactant, and more particularly to a method for producing an alkyl glycoside having a good hue and odor.
[Prior art and problems to be solved by the invention]
Alkyl glycosides are hypoallergenic saccharide derivative surfactants and, it is known that, despite being nonionic surfactants, they not only produce stable foams by themselves, but can also act as foam stabilizers for other anionic surfactants, so they have been attracting attention in recent years.
However, although alkyl glycosides have remarkable properties as new surfactants as described above, there are many difficulties in actual production of them.
Alkyl glycosides are produced by reacting saccharides with alcohols, but the biggest problem in their production is that the hue can be easily
/2
deteriorated by various operations in the production process. Therefore, methods for preventing hue deterioration in the manufacturing process have been studied, and several solutions have been proposed. For example, proposed methods include a method, in which, at the reaction stage when an alkyl glycoside is firstly generated by the reaction of a higher alcohol with a monosaccharide, the reaction is made to occur in the presence of an acid catalyst composition comprising an acid catalyst and a reducing agent, as described in the Japanese laid-open patent publication No. S59-139397, a method of using the acid form of an anionic activator as a catalyst, as recorded in the specification of the European patent No. EP0132043, and a method of neutralizing with an organic base when the reaction is stopped, as recorded in the specification of the European patent No. EP0132046. In addition, at the stage of separating, by distillation, the produced alkyl glycoside from unreacted alcohol that is recovered, the method of adding a viscosity reducing agent to prevent remarkable deterioration of hue due to the high viscosity and poor thermal stability of the alkyl glycoside (Japanese laid-open patent publication No. S62-192396) has been proposed, but the hue of alkyl glycoside obtained by any of the methods was not satisfactory.
Japanese laid-open patent publication No. S47-16413 proposed that, prior to the separation, the reaction product of alkyl glycoside production be made to contact with a basic anion exchange resin of the hydroxyl group type, thereby obtaining an alkyl glycoside with a good hue, but in this method, there was a concern of odor deterioration due to the generation of amine odor.
Furthermore, Japanese laid-open patent publication No. S61-33193 proposes that the alkyl glycoside finally obtained by the production be bleached by using hydrogen peroxide and a source of sulfur dioxide, but in this method, separate from hue, new problems such as odor deterioration and poor storage stability were generated, and it could not be said to be a radical solution.
In addition, Japanese laid-open patent publications No. S64-71895, No. S64-71896, and No. S64-71897 disclose a method to produce an alkyl glycoside having an improved hue, wherein firstly a lower alkyl glycoside is synthesized, and this alkyl glycoside is treated with an adsorbent, and then acetal exchange between the lower alkyl glycoside and a higher alcohol is conducted, thereby producing an alkyl glycoside, or firstly a lower alkyl glycoside is synthesized and then acetal exchange between the lower alkyl glycoside and a higher alcohol is conducted to obtain an alky glycoside, and then this glycoside is treated with an adsorbent. However, although this method shows an effect of improving the hue of the alkyl glycoside produced, the degree of the improvement is still not fully satisfactory, and there are problems of complicated production process, etc., because of routing through the lower alkyl glycoside.
Japanese laid-open patent publication No. H2-88593 discloses that an alkyl glycoside is extracted from an alkyl glycoside crude product in an organic solvent, and then at least 1 treatment of steam distillation treatment, ion exchange treatment, and activated carbon treatment is performed to produce an alkyl glycoside having improved hue. However, although this purification method shows improvement in the hue of the obtained alkyl glycoside, there are problems including recovery of the organic solvent when the method is used on an industrial scale.
In addition, Japanese laid-open patent publication No. H1-290692 discloses a method for reducing the color of the alkyl glycoside, in which an alkyl glycoside composition containing colored humin which has a conjugated unsaturated bond is made to contact with hydrogen or a hydrogen source under hydrogenation conditions for a length of time that is sufficient for reducing the color of the alkyl glycoside composition, and then the alkyl glycoside composition with its color reduced is recovered. However, although this hue improving method shows a hue improving effect of the produced alkyl glycoside, the degree of improvement is still not good enough, and the production requires a hydrogenation facility and is expensive since an alkali metal hydride is used as the hydrogen source, so there are problems to implement it on an industrial scale.
As described above, various methods have been proposed to produce alkyl glycosides having good hues, but the hues of the obtained alkyl glycosides were not satisfactory, or odor deterioration occurred, or the process was complicated and impractical, so none of the methods was satisfactory.
中国語 から 英語: Improved PSO Algorithm for Deployment Optimization of Radar Net General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: コンピュータ: システム、ネットワーク
翻訳 - 英語 (7) Algorithm Flow
The specific way of applying the improved convergent hybrid PSO algorithm to solve the radar deployment optimization problem is to introduce the weight coefficient w and the convergent factor X into the basic PSO algorithm, classify the particle swarm into different sub-swarms during the optimization process, apply the principle of the genetic algorithm, and introduce the crossover concept so that the particles in sub-swarms can share optimization information of the particles in other sub-swarms. Such a PSO model guarantees a certain global searching ability while improving the convergence speed. The specific procedure of the algorithm is as follows:
Introduce the weighting coefficient w and the convergence factor X into the basic PSO model according to equation (8);
Classify the particle swarm (the total number of particles is L) into two sub-swarms x and y;
Configure the parameters of sub-swarms x and y, for example, M, the number of particles in a sub-swarm, G1, the number of iterations of a particles in a sub-swarm, G2, the number of crossovers of a particle in a sub-swarm, P, the crossover probability, and other constant parameters such as c1, c2, Vmax and Xmax;
Initialize the position and velocity of sub-swarms x and y in the stipulated deployment area T;
Perform the following step for each ith (i = 1, 2, ∙∙∙, M) particle in sub-swarms x and y:
Apply equations (4) and (5) to update the positions and velocities of the particles in their own sub-swarms. In each update, the criteria for pbest and gbest are the fitness values of the corresponding objective functions of the sub-swarms which the particles belong to, and the fitness value is calculated according to equation (1).
After G1, the number of iterations, is satisfied, select particle xi in sub-swarm x and particle yi in sub-swarm y for crossover and generate the velocities and positions of the next-generation particles according to equations (7)~(10).
If G2, the number of crossovers, satisfies the termination condition, stop the iteration and obtain the optimization result, and otherwise go back to (5).
3 Algorithm Example
It is assumed that 6 radar installations need to be deployed in a 100 100 two-dimensional grid area to form a radar network and the side length of each grid is 1 km. The required warning region of radar is Ag = [1, 100, 1, 100], the important detective region is Ac = [51, 100, 51, 100], the radar overlap coefficient is K0 = 4, and the maximum detection range and detection probability of each radar installation are listed in Table 1.
日本語 から 英語: JOINERY AND METHOD OF PURIFYING INDOOR AIR USING THE SAME General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 環境&生態学
翻訳 - 英語 [Claims]
[Claim 1]
A joinery which is characterized in that it comprises,
a frame which is a framework;
a crosspiece arranged inside the frame,
decorative boards (30, 31), which are braced onto a front surface and a back surface of the frame and have air vents (300, 310) formed therein, and that an adsorbent that is capable of adsorbing at least harmful substances is located on the inside.
[Claim 2]
The joinery according to claim 1,
wherein the crosspiece is formed by bonding paper chips or wood chips with an adhesive.
[Claim 3]
The joinery according to claim 1 or 2,
wherein the air vents (300, 310) are formed on an upper part of one decorative board and on a lower part of the other decorative board.
[Claim 4]
The joinery according to claim 1, 2 or 3,
the air vents (300, 310) are provided with an airflow directing means capable of supplying a flow of incoming air when it opens and closes.
[Claim 5]
The joinery according to claim 1, 2, 3 or 4, characterized in that,
a cutout portion is formed in the crosspiece.
[Claim 6]
A method of purifying indoor air using the joinery, characterized in that,
air is circulated in the inside of the joinery by opening and closing the joinery, and the air is purified by adsorption of harmful substances by the adsorbent located inside that is capable of adsorbing at least harmful substances.
[Detailed description of the invention]
[0001]
[Technical field]
The present invention relates to a joinery and a method for purifying indoor air using the same. More specifically, it relates to a joinery and a method of purifying indoor air using the joinery, wherein the joinery can adsorb and remove harmful substances such as volatile organic compounds in a room to prevent chemical hypersensitivity and reduce symptoms and will not easily have deformation such as warpage, etc.
[0002]
[Prior art]
Wooden joinery such as doors generally have a so-called flush structure, in which a rectangular frame is formed by a framework, a crosspiece in the shape of a grid is provided inside the frame, and decorative boards made of thin sheets are attached to the frame.
[0003]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the wooden joinery as described above has the following problems. The wood used as a material in the conventional joinery has been used as is. Therefore, it may expand and contract due to room temperature and humidity, etc. to become warped and deformed. If the joinery is deformed, it will be difficult to open and close it, and an abnormal noise is generated at the time of opening and closing it, which is undesirable.
[0004]
Further, if you enter a house that has just been newly built or renovated, your eyes and throat may hurt, and you may experience symptoms such as headaches, nausea, and dizziness. These symptoms are symptoms of chemical hypersensitivity, the so-called sick house syndrome, and are said to be caused by the adhesives used in the vinyl wallpaper, furniture and floor boards, etc., and volatile organic compounds such as toluene and formaldehyde contained in the paint.
[0005]
Effective treatments for chemical hypersensitivity have not yet been found at present. Therefore, the most effective way to address chemical sensitivity is to use building materials that do not contain volatile organic compounds or have low contents of them to prevent onset of symptoms and to alleviate the symptoms.
[0006]
However, in many cases, it is extremely difficult in terms of costs to build a house with all the building materials that contain no volatile organic compounds or contain low contents of them. It is also necessary to take measures for houses that have already been built.
[0007]
To solve these problems, the inventor of the present invention has been looking at the deodorizing effect, humidity control effect, and harmful substance adsorption effect of wood charcoal and bamboo charcoal. Then, the idea that, if charcoal or bamboo charcoal can remove from indoor air volatile organic compounds that are said to cause chemical sensitivity by adsorbing them, then chemical sensitivity can be prevented and symptoms can be reduced, was reached.
[0008]
Further, the inventor of the present invention also got the idea of making wood charcoal or bamboo charcoal work dynamically instead of simply placing it in a room to increase the amount of air which the wood charcoal or bamboo charcoal comes in contact so that the amount of volatile organic compounds absorbed can be increased to have more remarkable purification effects. Then, the inventor looked at the building materials used in the construction of houses and narrowed it down to joinery which could have a dynamic action, thereby achieving the present invention.
[0009]
(Objective)
The objective of the present invention is to provide a joinery that can adsorb and remove harmful substances such as volatile organic compounds in a room to prevent chemical hypersensitivity and reduce symptoms, and a method for purifying indoor air using the joinery. Further, another objective of the present invention is to provide a joinery that is less likely to have deformation, such as warping, and a method for purifying indoor air using the joinery.
[0010]
[Means for solving the problems]
The means of the present invention taken to achieve the above objectives are as follows. The 1st invention is a joinery, which is characterized in that it comprises a frame which is a framework, a crosspiece disposed inside the frame, and decorative boards which are braced onto the front and back surfaces of the frame and have air vents formed in them, and that it has, on its inside, an adsorbent capable of adsorbing at least harmful substances.
[0011]
The 2nd invention is the joinery according to the 1st invention, which is characterized in that the crosspiece is formed by bonding paper chips or wood chips with an adhesive.
[0012]
The 3rd invention is the joinery according to the 1st or 2nd invention, characterized in that, air vents are formed in an upper part of one
/3
decorative board and in a lower part of the other decorative board.
[0013]
The 4th invention is the joinery according to the 1st, 2nd or the 3rd invention, characterized in that, the air vents are provided with an airflow directing means which can supply a flow of incoming air into the inside when it opens and closes.
[0014]
The 5th invention is the joinery according to the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, or 4th invention, characterized in that, a cutout portion is formed in the crosspiece.
[0015]
The 6th invention is a method for purifying indoor air using the joinery, characterized in that, air is made to circulate inside the joinery through opening and closing the joinery, and the adsorbent capable of adsorbing at least harmful substances contained in the joinery adsorbs harmful substances, thereby the air is purified.
[0016]
"Adsorbent" as used in the present invention includes, for example, materials that contain carbides, zeolites, catechins or polyphenols, and those using other well-known techniques. Examples of carbides include, but are not limited to, wood charcoal, bamboo charcoal, activated carbon, peat, lignite, and those containing them. Examples of those containing catechins or polyphenols include, but are not limited to, tea leaves (may have been dried). In addition, the adsorbent preferably has a deodorizing effect and a humidity control effect, in addition to the action of adsorbing harmful substances.
[0017]
(Function)
The joinery according to the present invention has air vents formed in the decorative boards and contains an adsorbent capable of adsorbing at least harmful substances such that it is possible to circulate air inside the joinery by opening and closing the joinery, thereby the air can be purified through the adsorption and removal of harmful substances by said adsorbent.
[0018]
When the air vents are formed in the upper part of one decorative board and in the lower part of the other decorative board, it is possible to lengthen the time for the incoming air to travel through so that the amount of air that comes in contact with the adsorbent can be increased. As a result, the amount of harmful substances being adsorbed can be increased, and more remarkable purification effect can be achieved.
[0019]
If the air vents are provided with an airflow directing means, when the joinery is opened and closed, the air can be forced to flow into the joinery, and the air flow can be directed to a predetermined direction. As a result, the amount of air flowing through the joinery can be increased, and the purification efficiency can be improved.
[0020]
If a cutout portion is formed in the crosspiece, then the weight for the volume of the cutout portion can be saved.
[0021]
With the method for purifying indoor air using the joinery according to the present invention, air is made to circulate inside the joinery by opening and closing it and the adsorbent capable of adsorbing at least harmful substances provided in the joinery adsorbs harmful substances so that the air can be purified.
[0022]
When the crosspiece is formed by bonding paper chips or wood chips with an adhesive, the fibers do not extend in a specific direction such that even if they expand and contract due to changes in the room temperature or humidity, deformation such as warpage will hardly occur.
[0023]
[Embodiment of the invention]
The present invention will be described in more detail based on embodiment shown in the drawings. Fig. 1 shows a door in an embodiment of the joinery according to the present invention and is a perspective view of a state where a part of a decorative board is cut away so that the internal structure can be seen, Fig. 2 is an enlarged perspective view showing the cross-section of the handle portion and its vicinity, and Fig. 3 is a longitudinal section view of the door in a state where a part in the middle is omitted.
[0024]
Symbol T indicates a door which is a hinged door joinery. The door T has a frame 1 which is a framework. The frame 1 is a rectangular framework composed of four square-section sawn timbers constituting the rails (upper rail and lower rail) and the stiles.
[0025]
A plurality of longitudinal crosspieces 2 are provided inside the frame 1. The longitudinal crosspieces 2 have a prismatic shape, spanning between the upper part (upper rail) and the lower part (lower rail) of the frame 1 and are arranged in parallel with a necessary spacing in the transverse direction of the frame 1.
日本語 から 英語: FacilitatING smooth processing at harvest AND stable production of “Bentenmaru” General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 器具
翻訳 - 英語 One of the best spinach producing areas in western Japan
JA Tokushima City's spinach cultivation began in Fudo, Tokushima City around 1968, and spinach was cultivated during winter in sericulture fields as a countermeasure for the sericulture depression and was shipped to the Kobe market. Later, the cultivation of spinach was expanded throughout the jurisdiction as the second crop to paddy rice and Tokushima became a major spinach production area in western Japan.
Expectation of the production area for "Bentenmaru"
In recent years, the cultivation area and yield of spinach have been declining due to aging of farmers, lack of successors and abnormal weather. In order to stop this, measures against downy mildew and yellowing due to moisture damage, and low-temperature measures are important for stable production of spinach, and introduction of new varieties that are easy to manage is also ongoing. In other words, as it is said, “there is no technology superior to varieties”, producers are expecting new varieties, and every year JA Tokushima City conducts trial cultivation of many promising varieties including new varieties. This is done with the cooperation of the seed producers. In a variety test, we start by selecting a variety suitable for the region and cultivate while observing the characteristics of the variety.
The most important aspects of these variety tests are labor-saving harvest and workability. JA seeks cooperation from the officers from the production department and has been getting help with the investigation of workability. A system is established, wherein those that are judged to be good from the investigation are adopted as recommended varieties of JA Tokushima City.
In the 2011 variety testing, “Bentenmaru” spinach received high evaluation from producers in terms of good quality and workability. Since 2012, it has been adopted as a recommended variety in JA Tokushima City. The cultivation time for “Bentenmaru” spinach is middle of October to middle of December when the crop works best in the area.
Bentenmaru can be grown with peace of mind
“Bentenmaru” spinach has good germination, sprouting vigor and rooting power, and it has no problem of growing at a low temperature. Above all, having resistance to mildew race 10 is a great relief for producers and instructors alike.
Of course, downy mildew is likely to have race differentiation, so even for resistant varieties, it is important to try to control it early, and many producers say that there is little entanglement of leaves at the time of harvest and it is easy to process the spinach after harvest.
中国語 から 英語: INORGANIC PHOSPHORUS (PHOSPHATE RADICAL) DIAGNOSTIC/DETERMINATION KIT AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING INORGANIC PHOSPHORUS (PHOSPHATE RADICAL) CONCENTRATION General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 All reagents were dissolved and dispensed into three vials as a three-reagent liquid kit for direct use.
Before the determination of the inorganic phosphorus (phosphate radical) concentration, the following parameters were set for the automatic biochemistry analyzer: temperature 37C, reaction time 10 min., initial absorbance ≤ 0.1, primary test wavelength 340 nm, secondary test wavelength 405 nm, volume ratio of the inorganic phosphorus (phosphate radical) sample to the reagent 1, the reagent 2 and the reagent 3 is 4/40/5/5, the reaction direction is forward (ascending reaction), the delay time is around 0 min. and the test duration is around 5 min.
The sample and reagents were added, mixed and allowed to react. Finally, the reaction mixture was placed into a biochemistry analyzer to determine its increase in absorbance at the primary wavelength of 340 nm so as to calculate the concentration of the inorganic phosphorus (phosphate radical).
The applicant has verified through experiments that the objective of the present invention could be achieved by using other determination methods described above, and such methods are not enumerated because their testing procedures are similar to those of the aforesaid examples.
In summary, experiments have proven that the determination method of the present invention can be used to obtain the needed determination result using regular biochemistry analysis equipment - the change in absorbance of sample blank (A/min) ≤ 0.0007; the absorbance versus reaction time curve is an ascending curve until the end point; the effective linear range (R ≥ 0.99) of the reagent kit reaches 16 mol/L; the relative deviation as a measure of inaccuracy of the test of the reagent kit does not exceed ± 5%; the coefficient of variation as a measure of test precision (repeatability) of the reagent kit ≤ 3%; the sensitivity of the reagent kit is 0.012 ± 0.006 A/mmol/L; the reagent could remain effective for one year when stored at 2-8C; - the present invention features high sensitivity, high precision, long linear range, and long stability period and is convenient to promote its use.
日本語 から 英語: LIQUID PHASE DIFFUSION BONDING OF A NICKEL-BASE OXIDE DISPERSION STRENGTHENED ALLOY MA 754 General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 4. Conclusion
The Ni-based ODS alloy (MA 754) strengthened by Y2O3 dispersion, which has excellent high-temperature resistance performance and is attracting attention as a prospective gas turbine blade material, was bonded by liquid phase diffusion of ultra-thin amorphous ribbons of insert metals containing 2-3 melting point lowering elements, and the bond structure, component concentration, and mechanical properties were investigated. The result is as follows.
1) Although Y2O3 dispersion particles and compounds of Ti and Al, which seemed to have agglomerated during the isothermal solidification process, aggregated at the grain boundary of the bonded part, a reliable and robust bond was obtained without void defects.
2) The mutual diffusion of the components of the insert metal and the base metal is slower than that of the γ’ phase strengthened Ni-based superalloy IN 738LC, and it is necessary to increase the diffusion time after bonding.
3) When the melting point lowering elements in the insert metal are changed between B, B + Si, B + Ge, the diffusion of the base metal components Al, Ti, Fe to the bonded part is as quick as that of the insert metal containing B and B + Si. In the insert metal containing B + Ge, which showed the lowest melting point, the diffusion of the base metal components Al, Ti, and Fe was slow, and the diffusion of the melting point lowering element Ge into the base metal was also slow.
4) The fractured location in the tensile test shifts from the bonded part to the base metal at high temperatures. This temperature of the transition is about 500°C when the insert metal contains melting point lowering elements B or B + Si. With insert metal containing B + Ge, it shifts to a high temperature of about 800C. The elongation value is improved as the fracture is in the base metal.
5) With respect to the 982°C creep rupture life, in which test, the fracture is in the base metal, a value of about 85% or more of the base metal can be ensured, and the liquid phase diffusion bonding method is expected be suitable for the ODS alloy.
This study was conducted as part of the research and development of high-efficiency gas turbine technology based on the Moonlight project promoted by the Ministry of International Trade and Industry.
英語 から 中国語: clinical study General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
原書のテキスト - 英語 This NON-DISCLOSURE AGREEMENT (this “Agreement”) is entered into as of ___________(the “Effective Date”), and is by and between Penumbra, Inc., a Delaware corporation, having an address at One Penumbra Place, Alameda, CA 94502 and its affiliated entity Penumbra Europe GmbH, having an address at Am Borsigturm 44, 13507 Berlin, Germany (together herein “Penumbra” or “Sponsor”), and ___________________, having an address at _______________________ (“Institution”).
____________ (“Investigator”) is the investigator working with Institution on a clinical study or studies sponsored by Penumbra (Institution and Investigator collectively referred to herein as “Recipient”). Affiliates of a party are included in the definition of a party.
The parties agree as follows:
1. Confidentiality Obligation. Recipient shall: (a) receive, hold and maintain the Penumbra Confidential Information in strict confidence; (b) take the same degree of care that it uses to protect its own confidential and/or proprietary information and materials of similar nature and importance (but in no event less than reasonable care) to protect confidentiality and to avoid unauthorized use, disclosure, publication or dissemination of the Penumbra Confidential Information; (c) use the Penumbra Confidential Information solely for the purposes of performing its obligations under an existing or future business relationship, and shall not use or exploit the Penumbra Confidential Information for its own benefit or the benefit of a third party; (d) not disclose, distribute, reproduce, reverse engineer, transfer or transmit, directly or indirectly, the Penumbra Confidential Information without prior written consent; (e) restrict disclosure by Recipient to persons who are under a duty of confidentiality to Penumbra at least as stringent as the duties set forth herein; and (f) immediately after becoming aware of any unauthorized disclosure of Penumbra Confidential Information, shall notify Penumbra and take reasonable measures to limit and/or prevent such disclosure.
This drug can be administrated via intravenous infusion or deep intramuscular injection.
The dosage and route of administration can vary according to the susceptibility of the pathogenic microorganisms, severity of the infection, renal function and general condition of the patient.
For adults and children above 16 years of age or with a body weight equal to or greater than 40 kg, depending on the severity of the infection, the recommended dose is 1 - 2 g once every 12 hours via intravenous injection for a treatment course of 7 – 10 days. For mild and moderate urinary tract infection is 0.5 - 1 g per dose via intravenous infusion or intramuscular injection for a treatment course of 7 - 10 days. For serious urinary tract infection, 2 g per dose once every 12 hours via intravenous infusion for a treatment course of 10 days. For life-threatening severe infection, 2 g intravenously every 8 hours is recommended. For experiential therapy for febrile neutropenia, the recommended dose is 2 g every 8 hours intravenously for a treatment course of 7 - 10 days or until neutropenia alleviated. However, if the fever is alleviated but the neutrophil count remains at a low level, the patient should be re-evaluated as to whether it is necessary to continue the antibiotic therapy.
For children from 2 months to 12 years of age, the maximum dose should not exceed the adult dose (namely, 2 g per dose). Children with a body weight above 40 kg can use the adult dose, but generally speaking 40 mg per kg body weight via intravenous infusion every 12 hours for a course of 7 - 14 days is recommended. For pediatric patients with bacterial meningitis, the recommended dose is 50 mg per kg body weight intravenous infusion once every 8 hours. For experimental therapy in pediatric febrile neutropenic patients, the commonly recommended dose is 50 mg per kg body weight once every 12 hours (whereas it is at 8 hour intervals in the treatment of febrile neutropenia), with the course of the treatment the same as that for adults.
There is limited experience regarding babies aged 2 months and younger. A dose of 50 mg per kg body weight may be used. However, data from pediatric patients aged 2 months or older indicates that for children between 1 month and 2 months of age, a dose of 30 mg per kg body weight once every 8 or 12 hours is sufficient. Caution should be taken when prescribing this drug to infant patients aged less than 2 months.
Experience of deep intermuscular injection in children is limited.
For patients with hepatic impairment, no adjustment is necessary when prescribing this drug.
For patients with renal impairment, for example with a creatine clearance ≤60 ml/min, the dose of this drug should be adjusted to compensate for the lowered rate of renal elimination in these patients..
中国語 から 英語: Clinical Study Informed Consent _ Back Translation General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療(一般)
翻訳 - 英語 Summary
This is a research study to find out an investigational drug for the treatment of hospitalized patients with COVID19. The study drug targets the virus that causes COVID-19, and with the purpose of reducing the infectivity of this virus. The purpose of this study includes understanding whether this drug will cause serious side effects, whether it will reduce the infectivity of the virus, and whether it can reduce the need for patient hospitalization or to provide respiratory support.
Participation in the study is entirely voluntary. You may refuse to participate or terminate participation the study at any time without penalty or loss of benefits to which you are otherwise entitled. If you agree to participate, you will need to be in the study for approximately 6 months. You will be randomized to receive either a dose of investigational drug or placebo. All study will be administered by intravenous infusion (into your vein). During the study, you will receive several tests, including collecting nasal and saliva samples and drawing blood, etc.
Because this is a research study involving an investigational drug, you may or may not benefit from participation in this study. This study drug has never been used in humans before. Even if patients will be closely observed, the risk of receiving the drug is unknown. Some of these risks can be serious or even life-threatening. Its potential risks include injection site reactions, infusion-related reactions, allergic reactions, and unexpected immunogenic reactions. Finally, please remember that even if you choose not to participate in this study, you may have other treatment options.
In the next sections of this consent form, we will provide more information to help you decide whether to participate in the study.
What is the Purpose of this Consent Form?
You will be asked to participate in a research study (also called a clinical trial). This consent form will explain the purpose of this study, the potential risks and benefits, and what you need to do if you participate. Participation in this study is entirely voluntary, you do not have to participate in this study, and you can not participate if you do not want to participate. If you decide to participate, you will be asked to sign and date this consent form, stating that you understand what is explained and agree to participate in this study. This is known as informed consent.
This informed consent form may be delivered and signed in paper, or electronically (electronic consent form) if this is allowed by local laws, regulations and study site policies.
Please read this consent form carefully. Ask the study doctor or study staff if you have questions about this study. You can take an unsigned copy home to review it with your private doctor, family or friends. If you agree to participate, you will also be given a signed and dated copy of the consent form. No tests will be performed before this consent form is signed.
If you decide not to participate or withdraw from the study at any time, you will not be penalized or lose any benefits to which you are otherwise entitled.
Who is Sponsoring this Study?
Regeneron Pharmaceuticals, Inc. (hereinafter "Regeneron") is the sponsor of this study. This means that Regeneron will pay for cost of this study, and pay for the study doctor.
Regeneron, its partners or study drug developer; and its affiliates, representatives, agents and contractors will participate in this study. Some or all of these organizations may use the information collected in this study to conduct the trial described in this consent form.
This study will be reviewed by an independent organization, the Institutional Review Board (IRB) or Ethics Committee (EC). This organization, not part of Regeneron, is a group that aims to protect the safety, welfare and rights of research study participants. Currently, this study has been approved by IRB or EC that reviewed the study.
Why is this Study Being Done?
This study will investigate the single combination of investigational drugs REGN10933 and REGN10987 for treatment of patients with COVID-19 (Coronavirus Disease 2019). This study mainly targets at hospitalized patients infected with COVID-19. The treatment drug is referred to as “study drug” in this informed consent form.
This study will try to answer several specific study questions. These include:
• Whether the study drug will result in any serious side effects
• Whether the study drug can reduce the level of infection by the virus
• Whether the study drug can reduce the need for hospitalization or to provide respiratory support
• What are the concentrations of the study drug in your blood at different time points
• Whether human body itself will produce the anti-drug antibodies
What are REGN10933 and REGN10987?
Both REGN10933 and REGN10987 are "monoclonal antibodies". Antibodies are proteins made by immune cells in body, and will fight against infections as the blood flows. Monoclonal antibody is a special antibody cultured in laboratories. Researchers can design these antibodies to fight against specific types of infections, such as virus.
COVID-19 is caused by an infection of coronavirus called SARS-CoV-2. Although we have many things unknown about this novel virus, the coronavirus generally attaches onto the cells to be infected by using the "spike" protein on its surface. The spike protein is believed to help virus infect cells in the nose, pharynx, lungs and other tissues, causing COVID-19 symptoms and disease.
In laboratory tests, the antibodies tested in this study can prevent the spike proteins from binding to the host cell. After the spike proteins are blocked, the virus may not be able to infect the cells. REGN10933 and REGN10987 can act on spike proteins at different positions, and work together to block spike proteins. By reducing the infectivity of the virus, the study drug may help prevent COVID-19 condition from worsening.
This study drug combination is experimental because it has not been approved by any health authorities (for example, the US Food and Drug Administration [FDA]) for treatment of COVID-19.
This study may eventually test other study drugs containing antibodies that act in a similar manner. Currently, however, only REGN10933 and REGN10987 will be tested in this study.
How about the Size of this Study?
There will be 100 people participating in this study across the United States. Studies may also be conducted for Regeneron in other regions.
How Do I Know If I Can be in this Study?
You must meet certain criteria in order to participate in this study. The study doctor will introduce the relevant eligibility requirements before you can participate. You may not be eligible for participation or cannot participate in this study.
How will I Receive the Study Drug?
The drug will be administered through a needle inserted into your vein. This is also called an intravenous (IV) administration. You will receive one intravenous infusion only on day 1 of the study.
The potential risks associated with drug administration will be described later in this consent form.
What Activities will be Involved in this Study? What Will I Need to Do if I Participate?
After you give consent, the study doctor will check if you are eligible for the study. This may involve some tests. This period is also called the screening period, which may occur the day before or the same day you receive the intravenous infusion. The day you receive the intravenous infusion is the day 1 of this study.
After the study doctor confirms that you are eligible, you will be randomized to one of three possible intravenous infusion groups: low-dose REGN10933 + REGN10987 (1.2 g per antibody), high-dose REGN10933 + REGN10987 (4g per antibody), or placebo. The placebo is a drug that looks very like a real drug but does not contain any active drug ingredients. You have the equal chance to receive these three treatments.
This study is a double-blind study. This means that neither you nor your study doctor or the study staff who give you infusions will know which drug you are receiving (study drug or placebo). You will have one-third chance to receive low-dose REGN10933 and REGN10987 in combination, one-third chance to receive high-dose REGN10933 and REGN10987 in combination, and one-third chance to receive placebo.
Blood will be drawn from you before and after infusions. During hospitalization, a nasal swab and saliva sample will be collected from you every other day for two weeks, and then once a week until day 29. Nasopharyngeal (NP) swabs will be collected every other day for one week, and then once a week until day 29 of this study. In addition to this, you will receive several blood draws and other tests that will be explained in detail later in this document.
If you are discharged home before day 29, you will continue to be in the study and be collected nasopharyngeal swabs, nasal swabs, and saliva and blood samples at the same frequency as when you were in hospital. The ways to collect these samples include, patients going to the study clinic (a designated medical center), the study staff going to your home, or by some other methods that will be explained to you. During this period, you will be followed up by phone or telemedicine every week to monitor your health.
After day 29, we will make a visit to you every month for 5 months to collect your blood and/or ask your health. If there is no need to collect blood samples, some of these visits will be done by telephone or telemedicine. The last visit (end of study) will occur at approximately 6 months after you receive the intravenous infusion.
Study Tests and Procedures and What You Need to Do
There are certain rules in this study about the visits you will receive, the tests you need to perform, and some other things you will need to do. Some of these may involve risks, as described below. Because this study involves a research study, there may be some other risks that we cannot predict in advance.
You will receive standard care from the hospital that you are being treated. The following may not list all the tests and procedures related to this care, but the study doctor or study staff will explain them in detail to you.
Since some studies will be performed after you are discharged from hospital, you must be willing and able to provide the information and samples described below as requested by the study doctor or study staff. This will ensure that we can answer study questions of this study. The study doctor or study staff will provide you with more information to help with this.
Nasopharyngeal (NP) Swabs
To measure the infection by the virus, some samples will be collected from the back of your throat. This will be done by a nasopharyngeal swab. A swab will be gently inserted into the nose about 3 inches until it reaches the back of the throat. It will be rotated a few times before it is taken out. These samples will be collected by the study doctor or study staff.
Possible risks: Collecting nasopharyngeal swab samples may cause discomfort, but there will no pain. While collecting samples, you may feel sick or want to sneeze or cough. After the sample is taken, you may also have slight nasal bleeding.
Nasal Swabs
To measure the infection by the virus, some samples will be collected from your nasal cavity. This is done by gently inserting the swab into your nose about 1 inch and rotating it several times before taking it out.
Possible risks: You may feel a little uncomfortable.
Saliva Samples
To measure the infection by the virus, your saliva samples will be collected. This is done by spitting your saliva into a specially-designed cup for several times until enough saliva has been collected.
Blood Draw
Your blood samples will be collected to check your health and perform the study described in this consent form. An amount ranging from approximately 6 ml (a half tablespoon) to 40 ml (3 tablespoons) of blood will be taken during the visit.
Possible risks: Drawing blood may cause discomfort, congestion, or infection at the blood draw site. Some people may become dizzy or fainting when blood is donated.
Returning to Clinic for Assessments
In some situations, you may need to come to study clinic (one or more times) to complete testing or sampling.
Possible risks: After returning to the clinic, you may expose to patients who may have COVID-19 or other diseases. It currently remains unclear whether previous infection with COVID-19 make people become immune and therefore will not suffer from this disease again, so even if you have had COVID-19 and have recovered, you may be infected again by exposure to patients who are sick.
Medical Visits Received at Home
In some situations, you may need to receive study visits at home rather than at study site or elsewhere. These home visits may be conducted by third-party companies that are not related to the study site or Regeneron. The study doctor or study staff will discuss with you to see if you are eligible for home visits. You may also decide by yourself whether to receive such visits.
Medical Visits Made Electronically
Your authorization of consenting to participate in this study and some of your medical visits may be made by phone or electronically (on a smartphone, tablet or computer). Such visits are also called telemedicine. Telemedicine visits are not only convenient for study doctor or study staff to check your health, but also can reduce the number of visits you will make in person during the study. The study doctor or study staff will tell you more information about such visits.
Vital Signs
On day 1 of the study, your vital signs, such as your body temperature, blood pressure and blood oxygen level (oxygen content in the blood) will be measured at different time points. A thermometer will be used to measure your temperature in your mouth, ears, armpit, rectum or forehead; an inflatable blood pressure cuff will be used around your arm to check your blood pressure; and a small device clipped to your index finger will be used to measure your blood oxygen level. Your respiratory rate (how fast your breath is) and heart rhythms will be also measured.
Pregnancy Testing
If you are a woman who can become pregnant, you will need to receive a pregnancy test before receiving the study drug and after end of the study. Either a blood or urine sample will be used for this test. The risks associated with the study drug and pregnancy will be described later in this consent form.
Providing Information about Your Health to Study Doctor and Study Staff
At the beginning of the study, the study doctor or study staff will ask some questions about you, your health, and medical history; and will measure your weight and height.
The study doctor or study staff will collect information about side effects that develop and other health changes related to COVID-19 disease throughout the study. In addition to this, they may also ask about which medicines or supplements (prescription and over-the-counter drugs) you are taking.
中国語 から 英語: Device User Manual General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
翻訳 - 英語 [DeviceName] User Manual
The device is intended for clinical study use only
1. Intended Use
[DeviceName] system is an investigational medical device intended for the treatment of adult patients with advanced NSCLC who are aged 22 years or older.
[DeviceName] is intended for home treatment for at least 18 hours a day in combination with standard chemotherapy.
[DeviceName] treatment should start more than 4 weeks from the end of last surgery, radiotherapy or chemotherapy.
10. Placement of the Electric Field Patches
Once every 3 to 4 days, follow these steps to place the electric field patches:
Note: skip the first step (remove the electric field patches) if the electric field patches are used for the first time
Pull to remove the medical tape from the skin and remove the electric field patches that have been placed on the skin.
Please note that the black and white connectors should be connected to the corresponding electric field patches - each pair of electric field patches of the same color should be placed opposite to each other.
Remove the surface liner from the first electric field patch.
Place the electric field patch at the same position as before on the chest but move it 2 cm away to avoid placing it on the skin area with redness.
Place the other three electric field patches in the same way with the help of your friends, family or other caregiver as needed.
Press the entire outer edge of the electric field patch tape to secure it on the skin.
Appendix A – Information for Doctors
Before treating the patient:
Consider asking the patient to start prophylactic use of topical or oral corticosteroids to minimize irritation of the skin beneath the ILE electric field patches.
Assess the size of patient’s chest and check if a large size or small size ILE electric field patch (sterile) should be used on the side of trunk.
英語 から 中国語: RESPONSE TO CRIMINAL DEFENSE BRIEF III General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 法: 特許、商標、著作権
原書のテキスト - 英語 RESPONSE TO CRIMINAL DEFENSE BRIEF III
1. The specific characteristics of each particular design parameter set forth in Micron’s DR25nmS Design Rules document are carefully selected to integrate with all the other design parameters in this Design Rules document as well as other Design Rules documents and together are selected to ensure particular manufacturing tolerances of a complete product. It is misleading to isolate individual parameters from different products or processes, as was done in Defense Brief III, and use this as evidence that the DR25nmS design rules as a whole were available in a public forum. Defense Brief III cites select information from three entirely different technologies and arbitrarily selected three process parameters, out of hundreds of process parameters, at issue in those technologies. Then, they point out the fact that the value for one of these parameters happens to be the same value as used in Micron’s DR25nmS design rules. This approach is obviously incorrect. For each of the manufacturers, the parameter values identified in Defense Brief III are part of much larger processes, and those processes are very different from the process for developing Micron’s DRAM technology. The fact that Micron’s DR25nmS design rule happens to have one parameter in common with one of these other processes is completely irrelevant and does not mean that Micron’s process technology is publicly available. There are many process technologies available from various custom semiconductor manufacturers and the mere fact that, as a matter of pure coincidence, one parameter may happen to have the same value as a parameter in the DR25nmS Design rule does not indicate that Micron’s process technology was widely available or publicly known.
翻訳 - 中国語 刑事辨護狀 III 答辨
1. Micron 的 DR25nmS 設計規則檔案中所述每項特定設計參數的具體特性均經過仔細甄選，使其與本設計規則檔案以及其他設計規則檔案中的所有其他設計參數相結合，一起進行選擇，確保成品的製造公差達到特定要求。將各參數從不同的產品或工藝中隔離出來，正如辨護狀 III 中所述的做法，並以此作為證據證明 DR25nmS 設計規則已整體上可在公共論壇上獲得具有誤導性。辨護狀 III 從三種完全不同的技術中引用精心選擇的資訊，從這三種技術的幾百個工藝參數中主觀臆斷地選出三項有爭議的工藝參數。然後，他們指出一個事實，即這些參數中有一個參數的值剛好與 Micron DR25nmS 設計規則中所用的值相同。此方法顯然不正確。對於每個製造商，辨護狀 III 中認定的參數值相對於那些工藝而言，是很小的一部分，並且這些工藝與用於開發 Micron 的 DRAM 技術的工藝有極大不同。Micron 的 DR25nmS 設計規則碰巧有一個參數與這些其他工藝中的一個參數相同這一事實完全無關緊要，也並不意味著 Micron 的工藝技術已可公開獲得。有許多工藝技術可從各種定制半導體製造商處獲得，僅僅因為純屬巧合，有一個參數碰巧與 DR25nmS 設計規則中的一個參數有相同的值這一事實，是不能表明 Micron 的工藝技術可廣泛獲得或為公眾所知。
翻訳 - 英語 Centralized blood and urine samples collected, packaged as required and shipped
Study drug "415122" was recovered. It should be taken for 41 days and was actually taken for 40.5 days. One morning dose was missed, so medication compliance was 98.8%. The patient was educated to take the study drug at the required time and dose.
The patient diary was returned, and the fasting blood glucose fluctuated between 5.5 and 6.5 mmoL/L.
Logged into the IWRS system and dispensed the study drug "411209". The first dose was taken at 09:08 a.m. at our site.
Patient diary dispensed
Instructions on diet and exercises provided to the patient
An appointment for the next visit on 02 Jan 2014 made
The patient was instructed to come for the next visit on an empty stomach and to bring back all the study drug and the diary as well and to promptly contact us in case of any discomforts.
英語 から 中国語: CERTIFICATE OF FORMATION OF XXX LLC General field: ビジネス/金融 Detailed field: 法(一般)
原書のテキスト - 英語 This Certificate of Formation of Sequential Avia Holdings LLC (the "LLC"), dated as of the 15th day of September, 2021, is being duly executed and filed by Daheuin Ju, as an authorized person, to form a limited liability company under the Delaware Limited Liability Company Act (6 DeLC. § 18-101, et seq.).
FIRST. The name of the limited liability company formed hereby is "Sequential Avia Holdings LLC". “ ”
SECOND. The address of the registered office of the LLC in the State of Delaware is c/o The Corporation Trust Company, Corporation Trust Center, 1209 Orange Street, Wilmington, Delaware 19801, in the county ofNew Castle.
THIRD. The name and address of the registered agent of the LLC for service of process on the LLC in the State of Delaware is The Corporation Trust Company, Corporation Trust Center, 1209 Orange Street, Wilmington, DE 19801, in the county of New Castle.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned has executed this Certificate of Formation of Sequential Avia Holdings LLC as of the date first written above.
翻訳 - 中国語 日期为 2021 年 9 月 15日的本 Sequential Avia Holdings LLC（“LLC”）成立证书，是由 Daheuin Ju 作为授权人正式签署和备案，根据特拉华州有限责任公司法（6 DeL.C. § 18-101, et seq.）成立的一个有限责任公司。
第一。根据此证书成立的有限责任公司名称为“Sequential Avia Holdings LLC”。
第二。该有限责任公司在特拉华州内的注册办公室地址是 The Corporation Trust Company, Corporation Trust Center, 1209 Orange Street, Wilmington, Delaware 19801, in the County of New Castle 转交。
第三。该有限责任公司在特拉华州内用于诉讼文书送达的注册代理人名称和地址是 The Corporation Trust Company, Corporation Trust Center, 1209 Orange Street, Wilmington, DE 19801, in the County of New Castle。
以兹为证，以下签署人已于上述最初载明的日期签署了本 Sequential Avia Holdings LLC 成立证书。
翻訳 - 英語 In-kind Contribution Agreement
Dai-ichi Life Holdings, Inc. (hereinafter referred to as "DLHD") and Dai-ichi Life International Holdings LLC (hereinafter referred to as "DLIHD") are hereby concluding an in-kind contribution agreement on the following terms and conditions (hereinafter referred to as "this Agreement") for the purpose of DLHD making an in-kind contribution to DLIHD as defined in Article 1 herein. Hereinafter, DLHD and DLIHD are individually referred to as "a party" and are collectively referred to as the "two parties".
Article 1 (in-kind contribution)
The two parties agree that effective January 1, 2023, DLHD will provide to DLIHD the asset described in the attached exhibit (hereinafter referred to as "the Asset") as an in-kind contribution (the in-kind contribution set forth under this article is hereinafter referred to as the "In-kind Contribution") in exchange for an interest in DLIHD. However, this Agreement is subject to the conditions of obtaining the approval from the DLHD shareholders' meeting under Paragraph 2(2) of Item 1, Article 467 of the Companies Act and the permission from the U.S. authorities, and if the approval and permission cannot be obtained by January 1, 2023, the effective date shall be the first day of the month following the month in which said conditions are met.
Article 2 (Value of the Asset)
The value of the Asset shall be as indicated in the attached exhibit.
Article 3 (Cooperation between the two parties on the In-kind Contribution)
The two parties shall cooperate in all the necessary procedures as required under the applicable law for the purpose of completing the In-kind Contribution that will take effect on January 1, 2023 (including preparation and execution of necessary documents and implementation of necessary measures).
Article 4 (Change or cancellation of the conditions for the In-kind Contribution)
If there is a significant change in the asset status or business status of DLHD or DLIHD in the period between the concluding date and the effective date of this Agreement as set forth in Article 1 herein, or if any situation arises or becomes apparent that will be a serious obstacle to execution of the In-kind Contribution or otherwise makes it very difficult to achieve the purpose of this Agreement and it is necessary to change the contents of this Agreement or cancel this Agreement, DLHD and DLJHD shall consult with each other and may amend the conditions of the In-kind Contribution and other contents of this Agreement or cancel this Agreement.
Article 5 (Governing law, language, and jurisdiction)
1. This Agreement shall be construed in accordance with Japanese law which is the governing law.
2. The Tokyo District Court shall be the exclusive jurisdiction court of the first instance for disputes arising between the two parties in connection with this Agreement.
Article 6 (Other matters)
In addition to those set forth in the preceding articles, other matters in connection with this Agreement shall be separately agreed upon through sincere consultations between the two parties.
More
Less
Standards / Certification(s)
Notary Approved
This company
Offers job opportunities for employees Offers job opportunities for freelancers
I am a full-time professional translator working in the languages of Chinese, Japanese & Korean < > English. My strengths are multilingualism, strong background in law & patent, and ability to deliver high volumes within a short turnaround. My focus is litigation, patent, law, antitrust & eDiscovery, certified translation for use in courts, contract/agreement, finance and business. With a full-time freelance career spanning 20 years, I have translated over 50 million words covering a wide range of industrial fields and subject matters. A seasoned and experienced translator, I can provide high volumes of quality translation quickly and efficiently.
キーワード： ATA Certified from Chinese into English, ATA Certified from English into Chinese, Chinese Patent translator, ATA certified English into Chinese translator, Japanese patent translator, ATA Certified Chinese Translation, Chinese legal translator, Chinese patent translator, Korean patent translator
入会時期 Apr '06
